Mechanical Standards 2012

THE UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO AT
BOULDER
MECHANICAL STANDARDS
JULY 2012
NOTICE
This manual encompasses the University of Colorado Building and Construction
Standards and is intended to assist architects, engineers, and other design professionals in
developing programs, plans, specifications, and construction documents for construction
of projects within the University of Colorado, Boulder Campus.
**********
THIS MANUAL IS NOT INTENDED AND SHOULD NOT BE USED AS A
GUIDE SPECIFICATION. While it is expected that the materials in this manual will
be of assistance to design professionals in programming and developing plans,
specifications, and construction documents on particular projects NO PORTION OF
THIS MANUAL MAY BE PRODUCED BY PHOTOGRAPHIC OR OTHER
MEANS IN ANY SPECIFICATION INTENDED TO BECOME A PART OF
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN
PERMISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT OF FACILITIES MANAGEMENT OF
THE UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO, WITH SPECIFIC REFERENCE TO THIS
REQUIREMENT.
**********
What This Manual Includes. This manual includes minimum performance
criteria for specific materials and equipment. Where specific manufacturers have been
designated by the University of Colorado, names of manufacturers and identifying
product information have been included. This manual also includes installation and
testing procedures. This manual is not exhaustive in its coverage of any of the matters
which it addresses. It is not an attempt to address all issues which might be relevant to a
particular project or structure.
Updating for Regulatory Compliance. This manual was originally developed in
the Spring of 1987 and has been updated as noted on particular pages. Since the
requirements of applicable ordinances, codes, statutes, and regulations are subject to
change, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL TO
DETERMINE INDEPENDENTLY THAT ANY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
DEVELOPED USING THIS MANUAL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE
ORDINANCES, CODES, STATUTES, AND REGULATIONS. The University of
Colorado is a public entity, and its procurement and construction activities are subject to
statutes and regulations which do not necessarily apply to private citizens. Where
standards which are set forth in this manual are also covered by an applicable ordinance,
code, statute or regulation, the most stringent requirement shall be included in
construction documents. If in the opinion of a design professional working on a specific
matter, a requirement of this manual is so inconsistent with a requirement of an
applicable ordinance, code, statute, or regulation that compliance with this manual would
violate the applicable provision, the design professional should comply with the
applicable ordinance, code, statute, or regulation and should also advise the University of
Colorado in writing of the apparent inconsistency and the reasons that this manual may
not be followed.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
NOTICE-1
Updating Product Requirements. The products enumerated in various portions

of this manual represent the minimum requirements of the University of Colorado as of
the appropriate date. Since changes in materials, specifications, or design, the design
professional is cautioned to verify the availability and suitability of particular products
listed in this manual prior to specifying these products. Base data with respect to the
products specified in this manual are on file with the Department of Facilities
Management of the University of Colorado.
Site and Project-Specific Matters. Nothing in this manual contemplates
particular conditions that may be present with respect to a specific site or project. Each
design professional must assume full responsibility and liability to determine whether
specific site and project requirements have been included within the overall design. The
inclusion of minimum criteria in this manual does not constitute an endorsement of those
criteria for any specific site or project. EACH DESIGN PROFESSIONAL REMAINS
LIABLE TO THE EXTENT PROVIDED BY LAW FOR ALL DESIGN
DECISIONS MADE WITH RESPECT TO AN INDIVIDUAL SITE OR
PROJECT, AND NEITHER THE EXISTENCE OF THIS MANUAL, THE
REVIEW OF WORK PRODUCT BY REPRESENTATIVES OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO, OR THE APPROVAL OF WORK PRODUCT
BY THE UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO SHALL CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OR
DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY OF THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL FOR
DESIGN NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE. NO PERSON SHALL BASE ANY
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE CLAIM AGAINST
THE UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO, OR ANY OF ITS OFFICERS, AGENTS,
EMPLOYEES, OR CONTRACTORS, ON THE EXISTENCE, USE, OR
RELIANCE ON THIS MANUAL.
Deviations. Except as noted above, where minimum standards are addressed in
this manual, they must be included in applicable contract documents unless otherwise
authorized in writing by the University of Colorado.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
NOTICE-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Notice
Table of Contents
Foreword.....Responsibilities of Consultants and Contractors
Preface.....Building Automation Systems (BAS) Control Guide Specifications
15010 .................. Basic Mechanical Requirements
15050 .................. Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods
15190 .................. Mechanical Identification
15240 .................. Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control
15250 .................. Mechanical Insulation
15300 .................. Fire Protection
15410 .................. Plumbing Piping
15430 .................. Plumbing Specialties
15440 .................. Plumbing Fixtures
15450 .................. Plumbing Equipment
15460 .................. Special Plumbing Equipment Systems
15485 .................. Natural Gas Systems
15511 .................. Hydronic Piping and Specialties
15521 .................. Steam and Condensate Piping & Specialties
15531 .................. Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
15540 .................. Pumps
15548 .................. Water Treatment
15555 .................. Boilers
15575 .................. Breechings, Chimneys, Stacks and Flues
15620 .................. Fuel-Fired Heaters
15631 .................. Solar Energy Systems
15650 .................. Refrigeration
15651 .................. Computer Room Air Conditioning
15755 .................. Heat Exchangers
15790 .................. Air Coils
15810 .................. Humidifiers
15830 .................. Heating Terminal Units
15835 .................. Electric Heat
15850 .................. Air Handling
15852 .................. Special Exhaust Systems
15855 .................. Air Handling Units with Coils
15856 .................. Packaged Roof-Top Heating/Cooling Units
15885 .................. Air Cleaning
15900 .................. Ductwork and Accessories
15930 .................. Air Terminal Units
15936 .................. Air Inlets and Outlets
15950 .................. BAS (Building Automation Systems) General
15951 .................. BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and Sensors
15952 .................. BAS Operator Interfaces
15953 .................. BAS Field Panels
15954 .................. BAS Communications Devices
15955 .................. BAS Software and Programming
15958 .................. BAS Sequence of Operation
15959 .................. BAS System Commissioning
15985 .................. Control Sequence of Operation
15990 .................. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
TOC-1
FOREWORD
Responsibilities of Consultants and Contractors
These Standards are the property of the University of Colorado at Boulder (UCB), and
shall not be reproduced without permission.
The UCB Standards are our "contract design document" with the Consultant(s), who are
expected to adhere to them, as noted below, and revise their specifications and design
strategies accordingly. They shall be used by Standing-Order Contractors (Contractor) in
the absence of other construction documents.
The Standards include design criteria, guidelines and acceptable products. The
University assumes tacit agreement with them by the Consultant/Contractor, and will not
accept liability for their use, since the Consultant/Contractor has a right to disagree with
them or request a waiver, which shall be done in writing. The University will then take
any of three actions:
1. Issue a waiver.
2. Issue a waiver and change the Standards.
3. Request that the Consultant/Contractor abide by them. This rarely happens. The
Consultant/Contractor may submit a letter wishing to be released from responsibility
on the matter for which a waiver was requested and denied.
If the Consulting/Contracting firm disregards the Standards, it will be held accountable
for the cost to achieve compliance, and may be grounds for not performing any more
work at the Boulder Campus.
Before proceeding with design, the Consultant is strongly encouraged to review any
questions, doubts, optional designs, etc. with UCB staff in order to avoid duplication of
work. The University project engineer will gladly set up a meeting for this purpose.
END OF SECTION
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
FOREWORD-1
University of Colorado at Boulder

Control Guide Specifications
Preface and Implementation Guidance to the Design Engineer
These Guide Specifications set forth guidelines to assist the designers of building mechanical
systems in specifying and procuring the controls for those building systems. The intent of this
document is not to require a one-size-fits-all solution because that is simply not in the best
interest of UCB (University of Colorado at Boulder), nor is it a practical approach for
procuring controls.
This document provides tools for the designer to specify the appropriate level of control system
quality for reliable control.
Decision-making guidance to the design A/E is provided throughout these documents in the
form of Editors Notes so that the A/E may make prudent decisions and specify the most
effective requirements for the system being installed and for those that have to use them. It is
ultimately the designers job to assess the systems to be controlled and the environments in
which they will be installed, commissioned, and operated and utilize the appropriate elements
of this specification.
Edits to each specification section shall be performed in Microsoft Word (2007) software. All
editing shall be performed using the Track Changes options with all changes not accepted.
This allows the Owner to review all changes proposed to the Master Documents.
These Guide Specifications apply the following principles to the control systems at UCB in the
order they are presented:
Principle 1 The control system must first and foremost provide effective and
reliable control, commensurate with the systems it is controlling. Obviously the
types, complexities and the criticalities of the systems being controlled will dictate the
quality/power of the control system that should be applied to them. The ultimate
quality of the control system is primarily dictated by the components that sense,
execute logic for, actuate, and document the systems they are controlling. These
components are generally specified in Master Sections 15951 (BAS Basic Materials,
Interface Devices, And Sensors), and 15953 (BAS Field Panels). This specification
applies the concept of an Application Category for controllers whereby the
performance requirements of the controllers are grouped into categories allowing UCB
to apply these specifications to any vendors product line.
Principle 2 The manufacturer and installer must be highly qualified with

extensive experience and must be committed and bound to thorough
Commissioning (Cx). While the control system power/quality is very important,
equally or more important is the expertise and commitment of the installing contractor
and their collaboration with the overall commissioning team. Qualifications should
insure that a quality contractor with an extensive proven track record is specified; and
that effective, thorough commissioning of the control systems by that contractor
whether or not a formal Commissioning process is employed - is essential. Given this,
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
PREFACE-1
there lies a challenge to the designer to fairly restrict installers to those that can deliver
effectively within the context of both the construction and the service/support arenas.
To deal with this, Section 15950 (BAS General) provides for qualifications of both
the installer and manufacturers of the systems. Section 15959 (BAS Commissioning)
dictates a high standard for the Commissioning of the system by the installer.
Principle 3 The control installation must be fully documented as consistently as

practical with nothing required to fully operate and maintain the system withheld
from UCB. The system must always be put in the context of how it will integrate with
existing University systems and implemented and documented using standard
approaches wherever possible. Programming logic, network configuration
requirements, security information, etc. must be strictly adhered to and wholly
documented. No element for the continued operation and maintenance of the control
system may be withheld in any way. No part of the installation may be considered
confidential or proprietary information. This specification requires applicable
documentation throughout. These requirements are not optional; however, certain
documents are only applicable for certain approaches.
Principal 4: Energy Management

Where these specifications are flexible in the selection of equipment and devices within
the bounds of these documents, cost should not always be the primary decision maker.
UCB is striving to provide more green solutions through their building automation
systems. Existing pneumatic systems should not simply be repaired and maintained as
part of a project when upgrading may yield a payback in energy savings. All aspects of
this design should strive to incorporate USGBC (LEED) and ASHRAE (Advanced
Energy Design Guide) principals where practical.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
PREFACE-2
Conclusion:
Application of these Principles to a given project requires the designer to research/consider the
project-specific environment and requirements and to edit this specification appropriately. The
specific decision depends on a number of other important variables, including the specific
HVAC control applications being served, the critical nature of the area or facility being served,
the quality and capabilities of the local installer, and operator capabilities. Only those items
listed in Blue Text are to be modified, all other items in the specification are to remain
unchanged unless prior, explicit permission has been obtained by UCB. The designer is
cautioned to apply or find the appropriate level of expertise to complete this specification otherwise, the result could be a specification with inadequate and contradictory requirements
that cannot be enforced.
These specification sections are copyrighted by Facility Dynamics Engineering and licensed
for use by UCB.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
PREFACE-3
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.02
1.
Basic Mechanical Design requirements common to all Sections of

Division 15.
2.
University of Colorado, Boulder, Department of Facilities Management's

Basic Mechanical Design Policies and Standards.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 1 - General Requirements.
2.
Division 15 - All Sections.
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
Section Includes:
General:
1.
For products or workmanship specified by Association, Trade, or Federal

Standards, comply with requirements of the Standard, except when more
rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable Codes.
2.
The Date of the Standard is that in effect as the Date of the Contract
Documents, except when a specific Date is specified. The Contract
Documents shall state the year of Standards and Codes that were used for
design.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. University Philosophy:
JULY 2012
1.
This University, since its inception, has been intimately involved in fairly
large construction projects and has had to live with these projects long
after the original designers passed on. In living with and maintaining
these projects, certain facts have evolved which have become elemental
bases in the design of any new project. Some of these are as listed in this
Section, and others will be covered in appropriate subject Sections in these
Design Guidelines.
2.
A building designed for a specific department may not always be used by

that department. Our former library is now a fine arts and theater
building; our former law building is now a geography building; our former
memorial center is now occupied by the school of economics; and so on.
UCB STANDARDS
15010-1
3.
While there are no hard and fast criteria set forth on how to design a
building so that it can later be used by a completely unknown department,
there are certain basic facts which make this later transition somewhat
easier. Such things as uniform window placement of reasonable sized
windows, reasonable ceiling heights, adequate electrical facilities, easily
adapted heating and cooling systems, adequate mechanical rooms, ample
stairways, and other related items shall be made early in the design stage,
and the University Project Manager will be closely associated with
securing these factors.
4.
Buildings must sometimes be enlarged. Whenever this likelihood exists,

provisions should be made to accomplish interconnections, upgrading and
installation of mechanical systems.
5.
It is basic policy to study the possibility of future needs (expansion, new

equipment) at the time the basic design is being formulated. At least one
layout shall be made showing expansion possibilities.
6.
The University is extremely conscious of maintenance costs. We

therefore look with concern on new and "untried" materials. We are
opposed to experimentation on our projects. However, we look forward to
considering innovative designs.
7.
Exterior mechanical installations must not only be designed for proper

functions, but must be considered in the aesthetics of building design.
Large and unsightly installations shall be located so as to be hidden from
public view or shall be appropriately enclosed.
All major air handling equipment shall be installed in a mechanical room
accessible from the inside of the building. Roof-top air-handling units are
not acceptable on the main campus.
JULY 2012
8.
Drawings of elevations of structures must show mechanical installations,

including installations projecting above parapet walls. If due
consideration of aesthetics are not observed, the University Construction
Manager will require complete re-design of HVAC systems and of
structure elevations until a pleasing, well integrated design is achieved.
9.
Basic design phase services shall allow the Architect to provide sufficient
room for an orderly arrangement of equipment, piping, and conduit and
the University shall continually monitor the work of Consultants to see
that pleasing arrangements are achieved. Special consideration shall be
given to heights of floor to ceiling spaces to allow for maintenance and
concealment of systems, as much as practicable.
10.
Special attention shall be given early in the design process to provide for
sufficient and safe access space for maintenance of mechanical systems.
Sufficient space implies the capability to replace major components with
minor impact to the Building. Equipment shall be designed to be
UCB STANDARDS
15010-2
accessible and maintainable from floor level whenever possible. When

not possible, permanent structures will be designed to minimize the
necessity of such tools as ladders, hoists and portable lighting (i.e.:
platforms and permanent ladders for overhead work, rail systems for
removal of pumps in pits, adequate permanent lighting, etc.). The
University shall not accept designs unless the drawings clearly indicate
locations of ceiling and wall access panels and other necessary access
space. This needs to be emphasized to the contractors as well.
B.
C.
11.
When renovating or retro-fitting mechanical systems or spaces, review the

need to remove asbestos insulation. Include the cost for removal and
replacement with non-asbestos insulation.
12.
Space is a precious commodity on campus. When equipment, wiring,

piping, telecommunications cable, etc. is disconnected or "abandoned," it
must be physically removed and disposed of as part of the project.
Utilities:
1.
In general, utilities will be included in Division 2 and work in this

Division 15 will only extend to 5 feet outside of Building or Structure
excavation perimeter.
2.
Specify the following where exceptions do occur and Building Services

extensions and connections are made to Public Utilities:
b.
Tap fees as they are known to the trade and are the charges for
actual materials and labor for tapping, inspection and recording of
the tap shall be arranged and paid for by the Division 15 Contractor.
c.
In the event that the serving Utility Company installs their own
taps, service, meters, etc., all costs imposed by this action shall be
paid for by the University. Extensions from termination points to
connection with building services and systems will be the
responsibility of the Division 15 Contractor.
Unless otherwise instructed all buildings will be metered for all utilities
including electricity, gas, water, steam, or steam condensate as required,
chilled water from central chiller, etc.
Energy Conservation Standards:

1.
JULY 2012
Connection charges, membership fees, system development charges

and the like, that in principle allow the right to obtain the services
from the Utility will be arranged and paid for by the University.
Meters:
1.
D.
a.
General Requirements:
UCB STANDARDS
15010-3
a.
The University is dedicated to the principle of conserving energy

and will scrutinize proposed construction for means of reducing
not only initial cost, but also long-range operating costs. The
Architect must work in close cooperation with his Engineers to
design new buildings and remodel existing buildings making the
most efficient use of building materials and energy sources
available. The International Energy Code shall be implemented,
as a minimum.
LEED:
Guidelines shall be followed with the goal of achieving LEED
Silver as a minimum. This includes the implementation of the
appropriate ASHRAE standards (55, 62, 90, 129, etc.) and
validation with accepted simulation programs, such as DOE2. If it
is determined that the energy load will exceed the stated standards,
a conference with the University representative will be required to
determine the course of action. Re-design of problematic portions
of the building will be required.
2.
JULY 2012
b.
In the design of the HVAC and electrical systems, consideration

must be given to building utilization by planning for conservation
of energy during summer and winter vacations and for other
periods of minimum occupancy. Research laboratories, spaces for
animals, and other spaces which might require 24 hours/day
operation must be serviced by systems separate from
classroom/office systems which may require only 8 hours/day
operation.
c.
The capability of using alternate sources of energy is of great

importance.
d.
The Design Consultants shall provide an updated energy analysis

to the University. It shall show the estimated use of energy for the
structure.
Building Construction Requirements:

a.
The exterior envelope shall be given careful consideration.

University maintenance, security, and utility costs indicate the
need for restraint in the use of large areas of glass. If large areas of
glass are required for aesthetics, careful orientation of these areas
for reduction of heat loss and heat gain must be made. Low
emissivity glazing shall be used, with double glazing set 3/4 inch
apart, as a minimum.
b.
Windows, insofar as practicable, shall be provided with operable

vent sections of minimum size in non-public areas only.
c.
Walls shall have R-19 or greater thermal resistance factor.
UCB STANDARDS
15010-4
E.
d.
Roof and ceiling combinations shall have R-30 or greater thermal

resistance.
e.
Infiltration should not exceed ASHRAE Guidelines.
f.
Daylighting is encouraged, but with minimal glare and solar heat

gain.
Design Calculation Procedures:

1.
Calculations shall be based on methods and data from the most recent
issues of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
LEED: Other requirements may apply.
2.
F.
System Design Requirements:

1.
Air conditioning systems shall be designed to conserve energy. The use of

evaporative cooling systems is encouraged where feasible. Systems shall
automatically adjust to the actual space load conditions to reduce energy
consumption at partial space loads rather than falsely load and waste
energy. [Variable-air-volume dual-duct HVAC systems should be
considered where substantial outdoor make-up air and close
temperature control are required, to avoid using re-heat coils.]
2.
Design temperatures for heating and air conditioning systems shall be as

follows:
3.
JULY 2012
Computer analysis, using only programs that meet LEED guidelines, will
be acceptable.
a.
Winter: 90 degrees F temperature difference between inside and

outside conditions (-20 degrees F outside air temperature). Makeup air winter design temperature is 20 degrees F, assuming no
energy recovery.
b.
Summer: ASHRAE Summer 1%. but 100 degrees F db and 59

degrees F wb outside conditions if air-intake is above a roof, and
95/59 for systems with high make-up air intake. 73 degrees F
db, 63 degrees F wb inside conditions.
c.
Special areas, such as computer rooms, animal areas, etc., will

have temperature and humidity requirements transmitted to the
Consultant by the University representative or Laboratory
Consultant.
The University utilizes central Monitoring and Control Systems (MCS) for
central control of certain HVAC functions. Coordinate the tie-in of new
HVAC systems with the MCS.
UCB STANDARDS
15010-5
JULY 2012
4.
Occupied-unoccupied programming of systems should be initiated to shutoff ventilation air, exhaust air, fan system, pumps, etc., wherever possible.
Where shut-down of systems cannot be accomplished during unoccupied
hours, energy recovery systems should be considered. Each application
should be examined independently to determine any special sources for
obtaining recovery of usable energy. An economic analysis by the
Consulting Engineer will be required to determine the feasibility of energy
recovery systems before the University will render a decision on their
acceptability. Four copies of this analysis shall be furnished by the
Consultant to the University representative.
5.
Fan coil units and radiation will be required in specific areas to facilitate
shut-down of major fan units. Where necessary, the control of these units
shall be coordinated with the controls on the air handling units.
6.
All air conditioning systems shall have air-economizer cycles where

feasible. All systems which have economizer cycles, shall be capable of
running the cooling equipment independent of the economizer cycle
controls. Furthermore, the economizer control shall not revert to the
minimum outside air damper position for cooling season unless
mechanical cooling is available.
7.
In order to take advantage of economizer cooling to the highest

temperature possible, return air (RA) should be minimized. Therefore,
RA dampers should be specified to be of outdoor sealing quality for all
units handling less than 10,000 CFM.
8.
All air conditioning, heating, ventilating and exhaust systems shall be

matched to the maximum required performance. The use of variable
volume supply and exhaust air systems is encouraged to compensate for
diversities in loads and to reduce equipment sizes. Space supply air
outlets should be aspirating-type to prevent "dumping" of air into occupied
spaces. Displacement cooling may be considered.
9.
Interior spaces requiring cooling the year around should be handled

independently from perimeter areas requiring heating during the winter
and cooling during summer. Interior areas should be supplied from a
variable volume cooling system utilizing an air economizer cycle. The
perimeter systems should utilize economizer cycles when cooling is
required and minimum ventilation rates when heating is required. VAV
terminal units shall be allowed full shut-off.
10.
Buildings having a substantial amount of exhaust for research purposes

have a propensity to overcool during the cooling season due to minimum
settings on air supply. In order to avoid hot-water reheat, dual duct
systems should be considered. Appropriate make-up air shall be provided.
Air-handling system requiring substantial make-up air shall have steam
face-and-bypass pre-heating coils..
UCB STANDARDS
15010-6
11.
Provide for two-stage filtration (30% / MERV 7 and 60% / MERV 11)
upstream of all air handling coils. Heat-recovery coils shall have 60%
(MERV 11) filters.
LEED: Filtration shall be 30% (MERV 7) and 85% (MERV 13).
12.
All coils shall have access for cleaning, including re-heat coils in, for
example, VAV terminals.
13.
Chilled-water coils shall be sized for 16F delta-T on design day.

Designer shall consider both the design-sensible and design-enthalpy day.
14.
Elevator shaft venting: In order to minimize drafts, heat loss and elevator
door "whistling", it is necessary to install a motorized damper for elevator
shaft venting, interlocked to the fire-alarm and control system.
The damper shall be operated as indicated in "Control Sequence of
Operation" of the control section
G.
15.
Outside air ventilation shall be per latest approved version of ASHRAE

Standard 62, during the time the spaces are occupied. Judicious use of
CO2 sensors is encouraged.
16.
Pressure gages are required across all AHU coils and filters banks (filter
and pre-filter combined).
17.
See Section 1.05, Submittals, for fan requirements
Criteria for Selection of Equipment:

1.
JULY 2012
The following criteria shall be employed in the selection of equipment:

a.
Indirect-direct evaporative cooling is preferred. Stainless steel

sumps, hardware and housings are required for the directevaporation sections. Indirect evaporative cooling with
"mechanical air-chilling coil" to complement the indirect
evaporative cooling coil should be considered. Direct-evaporation
sumps shall be supplied potable water. An air gap above the edge
of the sump is the preferred backflow protection.
b.
Fans selected for operation above 6" total static pressure must be
approved by the responsible University Engineer.
c.
Compressors for electrically-driven chillers and refrigeration units,

of over 100 ton capacity, shall have electrical power consumption
not to exceed (discuss with UCB) kW/ton between 30 percent and
90 percent of chiller capacity.
d.
Refer to ASHRAE 90 for minimum Energy Efficiency Ratios

(EER) allowable for all other compressors.
UCB STANDARDS
15010-7
H.
The Power Plant houses several large absorption units. Chilled

water from these units will be used in air conditioning some
specific buildings. The Consultants will be advised if the building
under discussion is to be on this system. Construction budget will
be required to carry full cost of air conditioning regardless of
whether the unit is located in the building or chilled water is used
from the Power Plant.
f.
Water-cooled or evaporative condensers are acceptable depending

upon job requirements and necessities. Water-type cooling towers
are preferred, to conserve energy, and shall generally be
considered on systems 80 tons and larger. On units below 80 tons,
an economic evaluation, including cost of maintenance should be
made to determine if the condensing unit will be air cooled or
water cooled. Cooling tower fan motor loads shall not exceed 0.06
H.P./ton of chiller capacity. Reduced condenser water
temperatures should be utilized when possible to reduce the chiller
electrical consumption.
g.
Air-cooled condensers shall be capable of operating at 95F

ambient temperature with 30F temperature difference between air
entering and leaving the condenser. Air-cooled condensers on
roofs shall be capable of operating at 105F ambient temperature.
h.
Small water-cooled DX Units or research equipment which utilize

tap water for condensing, after which the water is disposed of in
the drain, will not be permitted. In every instance, review by
UCB/FM engineering staff is required.
i.
Variable-speed controllers (VSC) are acceptable. Electrical bypass switches are not required. See section 15050 for VSC
minimum requirements.
Design Documents:
1.
JULY 2012
e.
Drawings
a.
All drawings shall be on mylar or equivalent material. Computeraided drawing is required. Final CAD drawings shall be updated
with as-built conditions and equipment data before delivery to
University. CAD disks shall be provided as well.
b.
They shall include date of issue, University job number and

indication on each sheet of number of sheets issued (e.g., Sheet
___ of ___ ). Drawings shall follow UCB CAD Office
requirements.
c.
All equipment designations, schedules and descriptions shall be

indicated on the Drawings. The Specifications may be used to
clarify and complement or to describe minimum performance
UCB STANDARDS
15010-8
standards and operating instructions. We have had consistent

problems and waste of time cross-referencing Drawings and
Specifications when equipment parameters are listed in the
Specifications. Therefore, we require that all the equipment
parameters be listed on the Drawings, in table form (schedule),
whenever possible. Single, distinct equipment may be described in
non-table form. Include two columns indicating what the
equipment is used for (e.g. Exhaust Hood, Room 258, Supply Air,
First Floor) and room number where located.
2.
3.
d.
Plumbing isometrics shall be included.
e.
Components shall be labeled per the list in Appendix 1 of this

section.
Specifications:
a.
We require the standard long-form of specification. Our

experience with the short form has been unsatisfactory.
b.
We require the Specifications be set up in specific CSI Sections,

with each Section having the pages numbered for that section only.
Consultant Submittal Requirements

a.
b.
JULY 2012
Schematic Design
i.
Narrative
a)
Narrative description of the proposed mechanical
systems
ii.
Plumbing & Piping

a)
Restroom locations and fixtures (quantity and type)
b)
Risers: gases, compressed air, vacuum, plumbing
and piping
c)
Location of water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer and
sprinkler services to the building
d)
Tentative fixture schedule
e)
Location, sizes and types of water heaters, heat
exchangers, and flues if required
f)
Provide a fixture-count calculation sheet
iii.
HVAC
a)
HVAC load calculations
b)
Equipment schedules with tentative sizes,
capacities, features, etc.
c)
Mechanical-room drawings, showing locations and
sizes of fans, and if possible, pumps, compressors,
heat-exchangers, etc.
d)
Shaft locations and sizes.
Design Development
UCB STANDARDS
15010-9
c.
i.
Narrative
a)
Updated narrative from the one included in the
Schematic Design documents
ii.
Plumbing & Piping

a)
Plans of each floor, noting fixture locations and
types. Indicate routing of main distribution lines
with tentative sizes.
b)
General arrangement of all piping systems (piping,
heating and cooling, and FP).
c)
Location of water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer,
natural gas, compressed air, chilled water, steam
and sprinkler services to the building.
d)
Tentative fixture schedule.
e)
Location, sizes and types of water heaters, heat
exchangers, and flues if required.
f)
Provide a fixture-count calculation sheet.
iii.
HVAC
a)
Plans of each floor, showing single-line duct layouts
(as a minimum), equipment location, and typical
heating and cooling devices (e.g., a VAV-box and
branches with diffusers, BBR, CUHs and UHs).
b)
Equipment schedules with tentative sizes,
capacities, features, etc.
c)
Mechanical-room drawings, showing locations and
sizes of fans, pumps, compressors, heat exchangers,
etc.. Show elevations or cross-sections to ascertain
that equipment fits vertically.
d)
HVAC load calculations.
iv.
Specifications
a)
Outline specifications are not required. It is
expected that the mechanical consultant will
provide an informal review set of drawings and
specifications at the 70% level of mechanical
design.
Partial CDs (~70%)

i.
Provide drawings for informal review at 70& of mechanical

design.
ii.
d.
Full CDs
i.
JULY 2012
Outline specifications are not required. Provide best

effort full specifications.
If not totally completed, provide documents with a list of

lacking or pending items (i.e., 100% with exceptions).
UCB STANDARDS
15010-10
ii.
e.
Drawings
i.
f.
Include appropriate commissioning checklists in the

specifications (See UCB Standards Section 01740).
Codes:
1.
J.
Drawings at all stages of design shall have room numbers

corresponding to those in architectural drawings.
Commissioning
i.
I.
Control schematics shall be included, as well as points list

and control sequences.
The International Code Council (ICC) codes, State of Colorado CrossConnection Manual, and the Fire codes shall all apply to the project
design, except where university standards are more stringent. The latest
Code or Standard edition approved by the State of Colorado at the time the
design of the project is begun shall be used.
Coordinate with the Architect to provide a curbed floor area for storage of on-site
water-treatment chemicals, following water-treatment consultants
recommendations.
K. Vibration Engineering Criteria:

1.
1.04
1.05
Refer to Section 03740 of the Architectural Standards
PROOF OF PERFORMANCE
A.
Require that all pressurized piping be pressure tested.
B.
Require that all new ductwork in new systems be pressure-tested per SMACNA,
from AHUs to upstream of terminal control devices (e.g., VAV boxes).
C.
Include commissioning as described in Section 01740.
SUBMITTALS
A.
JULY 2012
Specify Contractor to:

1.
Submit Samples, Shop Drawings and Product Data as required by various

Sections of Division 15 in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.
2.
"Submit detailed shop drawings for all fan systems having structural frame
supports for the fan housing. These must include solid rotor shaft
dimensions, wheel weight, bearing center-to-center distances, bearings,
bearing support pedestals and structure, etc. None of the above-cited
items are to be considered as being "unavailable" or "proprietary".
UCB STANDARDS
15010-11
Relevant sketches giving pertinent details are acceptable. The design

resonant speed of the fan system shall be a minimum of 25% above the fan
operating speed, considering both wheel mass and inertia. Appropriate
engineering calculations must be available to support the design resonant
speed value and to insure that the bearing support structure has adequate
stiffness in all three directions (lateral, axial, and vertical). The installed,
operating fan bearing motions (inboard and outboard) shall not exceed 1.5
mils peak-to-peak in any direction when measured in the "filter out"
measurement mode at any operating speed; "filter in" mode measurements
are not acceptable. The instrument system used must have a flat response
down to 120 RPM. Fan speed shall not exceed 1200 RPM.
Design Resonant Speed is that speed which corresponds to the natural
frequency of the spring-mass system consisting of the rotating
components, bearing lubrication and housing, and supporting pedestal
(supporting floor, foundation, etc., considered to be infinitely rigid)."
1.06
3.
Prepare and submit two (three for Non-General Fund Buildings) copies of
Operation and Maintenance Data for Division 15 in accordance with
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout and "Operation and Maintenance
Manuals" paragraph in this Section 15010. (Also, see 1.06 below). Also,
provide one each of the building monitoring and control systems and the
life-safety systems.
4.
"Mechanical contractor shall obtain approval in writing from Balancing

contractor for type and size of balancing devices."
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

A.
JULY 2012
The manuals of Operation and Maintenances shall include:

1.
Warranties.
2.
Alphabetical list of all system components including the name, address,

and 24-hour phone number of the company responsible for servicing each
item during the first year's operation.
3.
Maintenance Instructions, including valves, valve tag and other identified

equipment lists, proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each
piece of equipment and necessary cleaning/replacing/adjusting schedules.
4.
Manufacturer's Data on each piece of equipment, including:

a.
Installation Instructions.
b.
Drawings and Specifications (reviewed and accepted Shop

Drawings).
c.
Parts Lists.
UCB STANDARDS
15010-12
B.
5.
Complete Wiring and Temperature Control Diagrams (reviewed and

accepted Shop Drawings).
6.
Testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) report.
7.
Signed-off commissioning checklists.
8.
Appropriate start-up information by factory representative.
9.
On-site dynamic balancing report by independent balancing firms, as

required.
In addition to the "Operation and Maintenance Manual", and keyed to it, the
equipment shall be identified and tagged as specified in Section 15190 Mechanical Identification including the following:
1.
C.
Identify all starters, disconnect switches, and manually operated controls,

except integral equipment switches with permanently applied, legible
markers corresponding to operating instructions in the "Operation and
Maintenance Manual". Coordinate with University Preventive
Maintenance personnel.
Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling instructional meetings

for maintenance personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of all
mechanical systems, using the "Operation and Maintenance Manual" as a guide.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WATER TAPS WITHIN THE BUILDING
All taps shall be performed by draining the system back to the nearest isolation valve.
The new tap shall have an isolation valve.
3.02
MOUNTING OF EQUIPMENT
Specify that equipment shall be anchored with anchors extending through the
housekeeping pad or curb into the floor. This is illustrated in the schematic associated
with section 03200 of the UCB standards.
3.03
JOURNEYMAN-TO-APPRENTICE RATIO
Specify that "The University requires that all plumbing, piping and steamfitting work be
performed under the direct supervision of licensed journeymen (4-year), with a ratio of
not more than two apprentices per journeyman.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15010-13
3.04
3.05
WELDER QUALIFICATIONS AND PROCEDURES FOR STEAM AND

CONDENSATE PIPING
1.
UCB may ask for welding certifications at any time.
2.
Welder must be certified in SMAW-E6010, E7018, which falls under Section IX

of the ASME code, Boiler and pressure vessel (welding and brazing), ASME B31
and Appendix B31.1 2007, power piping, welding procedures.
WELD INSPECTION
Weld will be visually inspected by UCB personnel. If weld does not meet UCB
standards (visually), then Contractor may be required to X-ray, weld or cut out weld for
further inspection. Contractor will be responsible for costs associated with X-raying or
removal and re-welding.
3.06
CERTIFICATIONS & LICENSES

1.
Plumbing: State of Colorado Journeyman Plumber License.
2.
Hydronics: City and County of Denver Journeyman Steam Fitter Certification.
3.
Steam: City and County of Denver Journeyman Steam Fitter Certification.
4.
Refrigeration: City and County of Denver Journeyman Refrigeration

Certification.
END OF SECTION 15010
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15010-14
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Motors.
2. Starters.
3. Variable Speed Drives.
4. Manual Valves.
5. Gages and Thermometers.
6. Temperature and Pressure Test Plugs.
7. Pipe Hangers, Supports and Guides.
8. Dielectric Pipe Fittings and Isolators.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
3. Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
4. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching.
5. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
6. Section 08305 - Access Doors.
7. Section 15950 - Temperature Controls
8. Section 09900 - Painting
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-1
C. National Electric Code (NEC).

D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
E. ASHRAE
F. ASTM
G. NFPA
H. UL
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Motors:
a. General:
1. Size for the operating conditions of each specific item of equipment.
2. Motors 1/2 hp and smaller single phase.
3. For 1 HP and higher, specify that motors are to be Premium Efficient, complying
with Xcel Energy requirements.
b. Altitude Deration:
1. Motors must be selected to operate within name plate horsepower at 5400 feet
elevation and shall not operate on the service factor.
c. Starting Capability:
1. Select motors capable of making starts as frequently as indicated by the automatic
control system requirements for energy conservation or other multiple starts.
d. Energy Efficiency:
1. All motors rated greater than 1000 watts shall have a Power Factor of not less than
85 percent under rated load conditions.
e. Bearings:
1. Ball or roller bearings.
2. Regreasable except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for
regular maintenance.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-2
3. Sleeve-type acceptable for fractional horsepower light-duty motorized equipment.

f. Acoustical:
1. Motors shall not exceed 80 db rating when running their full speed and power range.
g. Specify that all belt-drive motors over 5 HP shall have dual push-pull adjustment screws
for the motor mounts. For retrofits, require that the motor mounts be replaced if not of
this type.
h. VFD Use:
1. Motors have insulation rated 1600 volts or greater.
i. Insulation:
1. Motors shall be NEMA Design B with Class F insulation.
j. Sealant:
1. Pipes penetrating through exterior walls are to be sealed and supported by Link Seal
or approved equal. Size and type of Link Seal to be selected based on type of pipe
and application.
2. Starters:
a. General:
1. Specify starters necessary to operate Division 15 Motors.
2. Consult with Electrical Engineer and determine which motors, if any, require
reduced-voltage or reduced inrush starters. Conditions of starting must be
considered. For example, large vane axial fans have low starting torque requirements
because they are controlled to start with fan blades unloaded which usually allow
across-the-line starting to be accomplished within University requirements, with
advantages of shorter manufacturer's delivery schedules, lowest cost, least complex
and requiring the least maintenance.
3. Specify starters for chillers and packaged equipment in their respective Sections.
b. Motor Control Centers:
1. Where a large group of starters can be centrally located, it will be beneficial to have
these assembled in a motor control center (MCC) and specified in Division 16.
2. Where starters are to be specified in a MCC in Division 16, close coordination is
required with the Electrical Consultant to make sure starters match specific motor
requirements for part winding start, auto transformer type starting, wye/star-delta
closed transition type or where two speed motors have been specified.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-3
3. Provide adequate space in design for installation of field panels to contain relays and
point cards for remote start-stop and status indication in conjunction with EMCS
requirements.
c. Starter Configuration:
1. Comply with full NEMA Standards and NEC. Refer to 16480.
2. Specify Type 1 general purpose enclosures with/ padlock ears.
d. Manual Control:
1. Specify maintained-contact push buttons with pilot lights for single-speed or multispeed operation.
e. Automatic Control:
1. Specify magnetic starters for motors 1/2 horsepower and larger and for smaller
motors where interlock or automatic operation is required.
2. Specify auxiliary contacts if needed. Specify space for future.
3. "Hand-Off-Automatic" switches in starter cover.
4. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with
the control requirements specified in Section 15950 - Controls and Section 15985Control Sequence of Operation.
5. Built-in 120 volt control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service
exceeds 240 volts.
6. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase.
7. Externally operated manual reset.
3. Variable-Speed Controllers (VSC)
a. General:
The characteristics listed below are the minimum requirements for UCB applications.
1. The VSC shall be of sufficient capacity and provide a quality of output wave form so
as to achieve full rated output of the motors. The VSC shall be capable of operating
any standard NEMA Design B squirrel cage induction motor (3 phase, 60 Hz), with
full-load amp rating between 10 percent and 110 percent of the drive full load current
capability, without requiring any modifications to the motor or drive.
2. Three (3) year warranty.
b. Construction:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-4
1. Each VSC shall be of the pulse width modulation (PWM) design.

c. Basic Features
1. Control:
a. With the "H-O-A" switch in the 'HAND' position, the drive shall be controlled by
the manual mode on the drive door.
b. With the "H-O-A" switch in 'AUTOMATIC', the drive shall start, and its speed
shall be controlled by a 4 to 20 MA input speed signal.
c. With the "H-O-A" switch in the "OFF" position, the run circuit will be open and
the VSC will not operate.
d. The VSC shall be arranged to provide automatic restart after a trip condition
resulting from over-voltage or under-voltage. For safety, the drive shall shut
down and require manual reset and restart if the automatic reset/restart function is
not successful within a maximum of five attempts.
2. Field Adjustments:
a. Independent acceleration/deceleration rates: 0.5 - 120 seconds. Regeneration or
dynamic braking will not be required for deceleration.
3. Line Noise Protection:
a. VSCs shall be equipped with factory installed reactors or separate isolating
transformer as called for on the plans to minimize the effects of harmonics and
"line notching" on the building distribution system. Manufacturer shall optimize
the impedance of reactors or transformer and provide calculations to the owner
certifying that the installed system is within IEEE-519 standards. Care should be
taken in specifying transformer impedance so the transformer can support acrossthe-line starting of the driven motor in a standby mode.
4. Factory Tests:
a. The VSC shall be tested with the system logic and given complete factory tests
including simulated operation
4. Valves:
a. Specify valves which meet these standards as a minimum. They shall be pressure-rated
type valves.
b. Specify that all valves shall comply with the applicable MSS (Manufacturer
Standardization Society) standards, and shall state so in submittals.
c. Locate valves in accessible locations with adequate clearance around hand wheels or
levers for easy operation.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-5
d. Specify and clearly indicate service valves for all equipment, risers, branches and zones
on Drawings.
e. Isolation valves shall be installed within 5 feet of the unit served. If the branch line
serving the unit is greater than 10 feet long, an isolation valve shall be installed at the
branch connection.
f. For domestic water systems:
2 and smaller, ball valve with stainless-steel ball and stem.

2 to 4, three-piece ball valve with stainless-steel ball and stem.
Above 4 gate valves with resilient seat.
5. Gages and Thermometers:

a. Review with University during design development where stationary gages and
thermometers will be required, in addition to sensors and instrumentation specified in
Section 15950-Controls, to avoid unnecessary redundancy. Gages with dual units
(Standard and S.I.) are required.
b. Stationary locations to confirm, and clearly indicate, on primary pieces of equipment
specified in other Sections of these Design Standards include the following:
PRV Stations
Heat Exchangers
Domestic Water Heaters
Condensate Coolers
HVAC Pumps
Chillers
Condensers
Boilers
6. Temperature and Pressure Test Plugs:
a. Specify for all other locations of equipment or piping where periodic temperature and/or
pressure indication is required to test performance of equipment or systems include the
following:
Water Coils
Zone Loops
Booster Pumps
b. Determine and specify minimum number of portable thermometers and gages that will be
required for test plugs to monitor any one set of conditions.
7. Pipe Hangers, Supports and Guides:
a. Hangers in contact with steel, iron, cast or ductile iron shall be plated.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-6
b. Hangers in contact with copper piping shall be copper clad or have a suitable lining to
prevent electrolysis.
c. Hangers for cold insulated pipe shall be around the outside of the insulation supply 180
degree cal-sil with metal shield or wood blocks with 180 degree metal shield.
d. Specify galvanized metal shields and heavy density insulation inserts at these hangers
and roller support points to prevent insulation damage.
e. Plastic piping shall be supported on continuous galvanized steel trough with clevis
hanger spacing as indicated for metallic piping, or as recommended by manufacturer.
f. Pipes that run parallel and have similar grade or pitch may be supported on trapeze
hangers with spacing determined by the smallest pipe.
g. Special pipe hanger and support provisions required for control of pipe expansion,
vibration, and sound transmission shall be in accordance with Section 15240-Mechanical
Sound and Vibration Control and good sound attenuation practice.
h. Pipe guides and anchors shall be detailed and locations shown on drawings.
i. Pipes on roofs shall be supported by roller supports of adjustable height. Wood blocks
and straps are not acceptable for lengths greater than six feet.
j. Within walls, every vertical 6 feet where pipes supply fixtures.
k. Within 6 inches of both sides of a control valve.
8. Dielectric Pipe Fittings and Isolators:
a. Dielectric Waterways are no longer wanted. Provide brass couplings or valves at all
connections between dissimilar metals in water systems to control corrosion potential
caused by galvanic or electrolytic action. Dielectric unions are not acceptable.
b. Typical locations are:
1. Water heaters.
2. Storage and pressure tanks.
3. Water conditioning equipment.
4. Changes in service piping materials.
5. Make-up connections to boilers.
6. Make-up connections to chilled water systems.
7. And the like where materials of different electrode potential are joined.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-7
9. Unions:
a. Unions and isolation valves are required wherever major components need to be
removed for repair or replacement.
10. Venturis:
a. Venturis or other flow-measuring devices are required wherever water balancing is
required.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by ASME Certified Welders with current
certificate in accordance with ANSI B31.1 for shop and project site welding of piping work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MOTORS
A. Manufacturers:
ABB
AO Smith
Baldor
General Electric
Gould
Lincoln
Louis Allis
Reliance
Toshiba
Westinghouse
B. Motor performance and ratings certified in accordance with latest NEMA standards.
2.02
STARTERS
A. Manufacturers:
Allen Bradley
General Electric
Siemens
Sprecher & Schuh (NEMA approved only)
Westinghouse
SQ B, Cutler-Hammer
B. Starters certified in conformance with latest NEMA Standards and NEC requirements.
2.03
VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-8
ABB
Motor Drive International, Inc. (Mitsubishi)
Reliance
Robicon
Toshiba
Cutler-Hammer
2.04
VALVES (For any value used in steam service, refer to Section 15521)
A. Manufacturers:
1. General: Valves, manufacturers and catalog numbers are shown only to establish type and
quality of valves required. Other equal valves may be selected from the following lists of
acceptable manufacturers. All valves shall be pressure-rated type.
a. Ball Valves (Bronze body, tunnel balls), (Comply with MSS-SP-110):
Apollo
Dynaquip
Hammond
Jamesbury
Jomar
Milwaukee
Nibco (industrial duty)
Watts
Worcester
b. Butterfly Valves (Comply with MSS-SP-67):
Crane
DeZurik
Fisher
Hammond
Jamesbury
Keystone
Milwaukee
Posi-Seal
Victaulic
c. Non-Lubricated Eccentric Plug Valves:
DeZurik
Keystone
Milliken
d. Lubricated Plug Valves:
Nordstrom
Powell
Walworth
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-9
e. Gas Valves (AGA, CGA, UL):

Crane
Hammond
Peter Healy
Alternate: Milwaukee "Butterball" valves
Jomar Ball values
f. U.L., F.M. Approved or Listed Valves:
Demco
GEM
Grinnell
Jomar
Kennedy
Keystone
Mission
Mueller
Pratt
Victaulic
g. Bronze Pressure-rated Valves (Comply with MSS-SP-80):
Crane
Hammond
Milwaukee
Powell
Stockham
h. Iron Body Pressure-rated Valves (Comply with MSS-SP-70):
Crane
Kennedy
Lunkenheimer
Milwaukee
Mueller
Powell
Stockham
Walworth
i. Gate Valves (Steam only. See Section 15521.)

j. Balancing Valves:
See Section 15511 (Hydronic Piping).
B. Valve Schedule:
1. Ball Valves:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-10
a. Pressure-rated
b. Blowout-proof stem with packing nut
c. Full ball port with Teflon seals and seat, as specified.
d. Solid, bored-hole, stainless-steel ball and trim.
NOTE: For all bronze valves, specify the following:
Body = ASTM B61, B62 or B584 Bronze
e. Example Schedule:
Plan Code:
Service:
Pressure:
Sizes/Inches:
Make:
Actuator:
Port:
B.V.
Balancing
150 SWP/600 WOG
1/4 through 4"
Apollo 77-200
Lever
Full
f. Three-piece ball valve if 2-1/2 or greater.

2. Butterfly Valves:
a. Example Schedule: standard 150 psig with 150 psig ANSI companion flanges for use
where system pressures cannot exceed 200 psig shut off (static) pressure.
Plan Code:
Style:
Pressure Rating:
ANSI Class:
Body:
Disc:
Stem:
Seat:
Actuator:
Make:
Size:
Model:
JULY 2012
BFV
Fully-lugged body. Shall be capable of dead-end shut-off and fullrated pressure without the need for downstream blind flange.
125/150 minimum
Cast Iron or Ductile Iron
Aluminum Bronze
416 stainless steel
EPDM (-40 deg. F to 250 deg. F)
2" through 5" Infinite position lever with memory stop. 6" through
20" Self locking worm gear with adjustable limit stops, and
position indicator. Provide chain wheel and chain where indicated
by contract documents.
Keystone
2"-12"
14"-24"
222
129
UCB STANDARDS
15050-11
3. Balancing Cock
a. Example Schedule:
Plan Code:
Pressure:
Size/Inches:
Make:
Model:
Actuator:
Ends:
Flow Indicating
175 lb. WOG
1/2 through 2 1/2
T&A
Bal. Valve
w/Memory Stop
Threaded or sweat
Ecc. Plug Valve

175 lb. WOG
3 through 12
DeZurik
100 w/gage tap
159 w/Memory Stop
Flanged
4. Gas Valves:
a. Gas Valve and lubricated plug or AGA-approved Ball or Butterball TM valves.
b. Example Schedule:
Plan Code:
Pressure:
Size/Inches:
Make:
Model:
Actuator:
Ends:
G.C.
100 PSIG Air
1/2 through 1
Peter Healy
1500-F
None Required
Threaded
L.P.V.
L.P.V.
200 lb. WOG
200 lb. WOG
1/2 through 3
4 through 12
Walworth
Walworth
1700
1707-F
E-2
Wrench
Threaded
Flanged
5. UL and FM Approved Valves:

a. Gate, check and butterfly.
b. Sizes all.
c. Example Schedule:
Plan Code:
Valve Type:
Make:
Straight Threaded:
Straight Flanged:
Wafer:
JULY 2012
OS&Y
Gate
Kennedy
67
68
------
C.V.
Swing
GEM
-----F-250
------
UCB STANDARDS
W.C.V.
Wafer
GEM
--------F-512
BF.V
BTFY
Demco
--------NE-H
D.V.
Drain
Milwaukee
Butterball
---------
15050-12
6. Specialty Valves:
a. Petcock, drain, needle.
b. Example Schedule:
Plan Code:
Type:
Pressure:
Size/Inches:
Make:
Model:
Ends:
PTK
Petcock
250 SWP Water
1/8
Powell
922
Threaded
S&D.V.
Ball
150 LB.
1/2 and 3/4
Apollo
Full-port
Threaded or
Solder,
and Hose
End Adapter,
Hose cap &
chain
D.V.
Gate
Water 125 LB.
3/4
Milwaukee
148
Threaded
N.V.
Needle
200 SWP/
1/8 through 3/4
Hammond
1B415
Threaded
7. Standard Bronze Valves - 150 SWP/300 WOG.

a. Gate, globe and check.
b. Sizes 1/8 through 2 inches.
Plan Code:
Valve Type:
Make:
Straight Threaded:
Angle Threaded:
G.V
GL.V.
Gate
Globe
Hammond Hammond
1B629
1B413T
----1B454T
C.V.
Swing
Hammond
1B446
------
L.C.V.
Lift
Crane
366-1/2
------
B.C.V.
BTFY
----------
8. Standard Iron Body Valves - 250 SWP/500 WOG

a. Gate, globe and check.
b. Sizes 2 through 12 inches.
Plan Code:
Valve Type:
Make:
Straight Threaded:
Straight Flanged:
JULY 2012
G.V.
Gate
Milwaukee
T-2897
F-2897
OS&Y.
Gate
Milwaukee
T-2894
F-2894
GL.VC.
C.V.
Globe
Swing
Milwaukee Mueller
--------F-2983
F-2600-6
UCB STANDARDS
N.S.C.V.
Non Slam
Crane (Chapman)
--------223
15050-13
2.05
STATIONARY PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers:
Crosby
Dwyer
Trerice
U.S. Gauge
Weksler
B. Example Schedule:
2.06
Dial Service
Water
Dia.
4"
Air
Vacuum
4"
4"
Range
Appropriate for
Application
0 to 300 psig
30"Hg to 30 psig
Make
Trerice
Model
600C
Accessories
#870-1-865-1
Trerice
Trerice
600C
600C
#870-1-865-1
#870-1-735-2
STATIONARY THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
Weiss, Miljoco or pre-approved equal
B. Vari-angle Digital Thermometer with light-sensitive electric cells.
2.07
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers:
Fairfax
Peterson Equipment (Pete's Plug)
Trerice
B. Plugs suitable for vacuum to 600 psig and temperatures of -20 F to 300 F with cap and extension
for insulated pipe where required.
C. Pressure gages and thermometers in individual shock-proof cases.
D. Schedule:
Item
Test Plug
Pressure Gage & Adapter
Make
Fairfax
Trerice
Thermometer
Trerice
JULY 2012
Model
N-78-02
0-300 psig #600-3-1/2" Gage
80-02
B-81105 0-220 F
UCB STANDARDS
15050-14
2.08
PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND GUIDES
A. Manufacturers:
B-Line
Grinnell
Michigan
P.H.D.
Tolco
2.09
DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS AND ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturer:
Provide brass couplings or valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
A. Variable Speed Controllers

1. Field Tests
The VSC shall be tested and started under actual conditions by factory trained personnel.
One day of technician's time shall be included in the base bid for checkout/startup.
2. Once operational, the unit being controlled by the VSC shall be operated through its full
range to determine resonant speeds, and the VSC shall be programmed to skip those speeds.
3. Provide one complete spare set of all fuses used in each VSC supplied.
B. Quiet Operation and Vibration:
1. Specify that all work shall operate in accordance with Section 15240-Mechanical Sound and
Vibration Control under all conditions of load.
2. Sound or vibration conditions not in accordance with Section 15240 and considered
objectionable by the University shall be corrected in a manner approved by the Project
Architect under the Work of Division 15.
C. Access Doors:
1. Coordinate location, installation, furnishing and specification for both standard and fire rated
access doors with the Architect.
2. Specify 20" by 20" minimum size or larger as required for service use on mechanical
equipment.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-15
3. Locate where required for access to valves, shock absorbers, dampers, controls, mechanical
equipment or appurtenances.
D. Sleeves, Plates and Closures:
1. Protection for Insulated Pipes:
a. When insulated pipes penetrate floors which will be covered with finish flooring, specify
that a sheet metal protective covering be installed around the insulation jacket.
b. Sheet metal shall extend above the pipe sleeve far enough to protect the insulation from
bumping by polishing machines and vacuum sweepers.
c. Space between the pipe sleeve and the sheet metal must be sealed.
2. Floor Sleeve Heights:
a. Rooms (e.g., kitchens, mechanical, bath, labs) with floor drains: extend 2" above floor
(and floor penetration within walls surrounding the rooms).
b. Breakrooms.
c. All existing floors that are core drilled need to comply with a, b and c of this spec
section.
3. Seals:
a. Where fire rated separations are penetrated by pipes or ductwork, the annular space
around the pipe or ductwork shall be installed to an approved fire rated assembly with
appropriate fire rated materials.
E. Excavating and Backfilling:
1. Specify excavation and backfilling for mechanical equipment requirements to be in
accordance with Section 02200-Earthwork of these Design Guidelines.
F. Cutting and Patching:
1. Specify cutting and patching requirements for mechanical equipment to be in accordance
with Section 01045-Cutting and Patching of these Design Guidelines.
G. Other Installation Requirements:
1. In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" in Part 1, paragraph
1.03, sub-paragraph A, and expand here on specific requirements of installation for motors,
starters, valves, gages, thermometers, test plugs and any other products specified in Part 2 or
required for Division 15 work in general.
H. Construction and pre-occupancy Indoor-Air-Quality (IAQ) Management
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-16
1. Include in the specifications the items listed. Also require that all on-site equipment and
components shall be protected from dust.
a. During Construction, meet or exceed the recommended design Approaches of the
SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3.
b. Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
c. If AHUs must be used during construction, filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency
Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 must be used at each return air grille, as determined by
ASHRAE 52.2-1999.
LEED EQc3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan:
Replace all filtration media immediately prior to occupancy. Filtration media shall have a
MERV of 13, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999 for media installed at the end of
construction.
LEED EQc3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan:
Include in the specifications the items listed below regarding to pre-occupancy IAQ.
a. After construction and prior to occupancy, conduct a minimum 2-week flush-out with
new MERV 13 filtration media at 100% outside air. After the flush-out, replace the
filtration media with new MERV 13 filters, except for the filters solely processing outside
air.
-ORb. Conduct a baseline indoor air quality testing procedure consistent with the U.S. EPA's
current Protocol for Environmental Requirements, Baseline IAQ and Materials for the
Research Triangle Park campus, Section 01445.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15050-17
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.02
Section 09900 - Painting.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
1.03
Identification of mechanical products installed under Division 15.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

1.
ANSI A13.1 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems".
2.
ANSI Z53.1 "Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards".
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE).
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Assignment of unit identification numbers to operating units of equipment within

a class or subclass will be made during the design phase of new buildings,
additions, or remodeling of existing structures.
1.
A class, subclass list will be provided to the designer by the Facilities

Management Preventive Maintenance coordinator, indicating codes to use
for the assignment of unit identification numbers.
B.
In new structures, the numbering system will start in the basement with O1,
within a class or subclass, and continue on in ascending order up to and including
the equipment that may, be located on a roof.
C.
When new operating equipment is to be added to an existing structure, the

numbering of any new units of equipment will be fit in with the existing
numbering scheme. The designer should contact the UCB Preventive
Maintenance Office for information and/or instructions and details.
D.
Specify that all equipment, including motors, shall be stenciled with the proper
class-subclass code and correct unit identification as indicated in the contract
documents, using a contrasting color.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15190-1
1.04
E.
Specify labels to identify location of valves, terminal units and Fire and F/S
dampers above ceilings, as noted below in this section.
F.
Drawings shall indicate unique numbers for all terminal units (e.g. VAV boxes).
Specify that Contractor shall label the units accordingly, including the space
being served.
G.
Install engraved plates on split systems; indicating the other unit(s) a device
serves, for example condensing-unit and fan-coil unit, chiller and cooling tower,
etc
DEFINITIONS (Excerpts from ANSI A13.1-1981)

A.
B.
Materials Inherently Hazardous:

1.
Flammable or Explosive:
a.
Materials which are easily ignited, including materials known as
fire producers or those creating an explosive atmosphere.
2.
Chemically Active or Toxic:

a.
Materials which are corrosive, or are in themselves toxic or
productive of poisonous gases.
3.
At Temperatures or Pressures:
a.
Materials which, when released from the piping, would have a
potential for inflicting injury, or property damage by burns,
impingement, or flashing to vapor state.
4.
Radioactive:
a.
Materials which emit ionizing radiation.
Materials of Inherently Low Hazard:

1.
C.
All materials which are not hazardous by nature, and are near enough to
ambient pressure and temperature that people working on systems
carrying these materials run little risk through their release.
Fire Quenching Materials:

1.
This classification includes sprinkler systems, and other piped fire fighting
or fire protection equipment. This includes water, chemical foam, CO2,
Halon, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A.
Metal Tags:
1.
JULY 2012
Round brass discs, minimum 1-1/2" diameter with edges ground smooth.
UCB STANDARDS
15190-2
2.
B.
Engraved Nameplates:
1.
C.
Each tag punched and provided with brass chain for installation.
Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light

contrasting background color.
Paint Stencils:
1.
Of size and color per ANSI/ASME A13.1 using clean cut letters and oil
base semi-gloss enamel paint.
2.
Paint material shall comply with Section 09900-Painting.
3.
Size of Legend and Letters for Stencils:

Insulation or
Pipe Diameter
3/4" to 1-1/4"
1-1/2" to 2"
2-1/2" to 6"
8" to 10"
over 10"
Ductwork and Equipment
Length of
Color Field
8"
8"
12"
24"
32"
N/A
Size of
Letters
1/2"
3/4"
1-1/4"
2-1/2"
3-1/2"
2-1/2"
D.
Pressure Sensitive Markers: Brady Type 350 flexible vinyl film identification
markers and tape, with legend, size and color coding per ANSI A13.1.
E.
Semi-rigid Plastic Identification Pipe Markers: Seton Setmark with legend, size
and color coding per ANSI A13.1 Direction of flow arrows are to be included on
each marker, unless otherwise specified.
1.
Setmark Type SNA markers to be used on diameters 3/4" thru 5".
2.
Setmark Type STR markers to be used on diameters 6" or larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A.
General:
1.
B.
JULY 2012
Provide pipe identification, stencils, or engraved name plates to clearly

identify the mechanical equipment, piping and controls of the various
mechanical systems and direction of flow in piping. Valve tags are not
required. See requirement for floorplans with valve locations, elsewhere.
Methods for identification as follows:

UCB STANDARDS
15190-3
C.
1.
Metal Tags:
a.
Stamp tags with letter prefixes to indicate service, followed by a
number for location in system.
2.
Engraved Nameplates:
a.
Attach nameplates with brass screws.
b.
Pressure-sensitive embossed labels are not acceptable.
c.
Nameplates shall bear the same identifying legend used on the
Contract Documents.
3.
Painted Stencils:
a.
Pipes and equipment to be stenciled shall first be wiped clean of
dirt, dust, rust, grease and moisture
b.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900-Painting for
stencils.
c.
Pipes and equipment shall be painted with required color code to a
smooth hard surface in the area the stencil is to be applied.
d.
Stenciled markings shall be neatly performed with no overspray,
drips, or other imperfections.
e.
Legend Letters and Color Field size as specified for Paint Stencils
in Part 2 of this Section.
f.
Paint application shall comply with Section 09900-Painting.
4.
Pressure Sensitive Markers: Apply pressure sensitive markers in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with complete wrap
around. Marker adhesion will be tested for permanence. Any markers
showing dog ears, bubbles, or other failings shall be replaced.
5.
Semi-Rigid Plastic Identification Markers: Seton Setmark pre-molded

(not pressure sensitive) identification markers may be used at Contractor's
option on service piping which is accessible for maintenance operations
(but not on piping in finished spaces). This type marker shall not be
installed on bare pipe when surface temperature exceeds 180 deg. F unless
a 1" thick insulation band is first provided under marker for protection
from the hot pipe.
Classification of Hazards of Materials, Designation of Colors and Legend:

1.
D.
Provide per ANSI Standard 13.1 and ANSI Z53.1
Piping:
1.
Identify all piping accessible for maintenance in crawl spaces, tunnels,

above ceilings, and access spaces as well as exposed to view utilizing
stenciled markings according to the following procedures:
a.
JULY 2012
Use an arrow marker for each pipe-content legend. The arrow

shall always point away from the pipe legend and in the direction
UCB STANDARDS
15190-4
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
E.
F.
G.
JULY 2012
of flow: color and height of arrow to be same as content legend

lettering.
If flow can be in both directions, use a double-headed arrow
indication.
Apply pipe legend and arrow indication at every point of pipe
entry or exit where line goes through wall or ceiling cut.
Apply pipe legend and arrow indication within 3" of each valve to
show proper identification of pipe contents and direction of flow.
The legend shall be applied to the pipe so that lettering is in the
most legible position. For overhead piping, apply legend on the
lower half of the pipe where view is unobstructed, so that legend
can be read at a glance from floor level.
For pipes under 3/4" O.D., fasten brass tags securely at specified
legend locations.
Legend on steam piping, condensate return, compressed air, gas,
and vacuum systems shall include working pressure or vacuum.
Markers shall be spaced every 20 feet and at least once in every
room.
Controls:
1.
Magnetic starters and relays, shall have nameplates or be stenciled to

identify connecting or controlled equipment.
2.
Manual operating switches, fused disconnect switches and thermal overload switches which have not been specified as furnished with indexed
faceplates shall also have nameplates or be stenciled as to "connected" or
"controlled" equipment.
3.
Automatic controls, control panels, zone valves, pressure electric, electric

pressure switches, relays, and starters shall be clearly identified.
4.
Identify locations of control transformers in the as-built control drawings,

and install labels on the ceiling grid with the designation CTRL XFMR.
Add tag at transformer indicating the devices it serves.
Pumps:
1.
Pumps shall be identified as to service and zones served.
2.
Base mounted pumps shall be stenciled or have system served nameplates.
3.
Brass tags secured by tie wires may be used on small in-line pumps.
Storage Tanks, Water Treatment Equipment and Heaters:

1.
Tanks and heaters shall be stenciled as to service.
2.
The connecting pipes to each shall be identified and the service

temperature entering and leaving the tank or heater shall be indicated.
UCB STANDARDS
15190-5
H.
Fans:
1.
I.
J.
Air Conditioning Equipment:

1.
Equipment such as chillers, pumps, condensers, or roof-top equipment

shall be identified by stencils, or system nameplates. Labels of remote
equipment shall also indicate the space(s) being served and the location of
their electrical breaker (Panel ID, Room No. and Circuit).
2.
Refrigeration equipment shall be labeled with the type and approximate

quantity of refrigerant.
Lift-Out Ceilings & Access Doors:

1.
2.
K.
i.
Fire-protection devices, including dampers:

a)
3/8" red letters on white background.
ii.
Air-handling terminal devices:

a)
3/8" black letters on white background.
iii.
Isolation, balancing and control valves:

a)
3/8" black letters on white background
iv.
Isolation valves for plumbing:

a)
3/8 blue letters on white background.
Label shall be installed oriented to read towards the ceiling tile that needs
to be removed for access.
Identify all units with unique numbers corresponding to the drawings.
Shut-off Valve Schematics

1.
JULY 2012
Provide Kroy type adhesive labels on ceiling tee or access door to identify
concealed valves, air terminal units, fire/smoke and fire dampers, or
similar concealed mechanical equipment which is directly above
nameplate in ceiling space.
a.
Use the following colors for specified labels:
Terminal Units
1.
L.
Supply and exhaust fans and air handling units and connecting ductwork
supplying one or more areas from an equipment room or isolated crawl or
furred space shall have nameplate or be stenciled as to plan code number,
service and areas of zones served.
Provide one schematic per floor indicating the location of shut-off valves
for plumbing-water supplies and hot-water recirculation piping, and for
hydronic systems.
UCB STANDARDS
15190-6
2.
The schematics shall be computer generated on vinyl with adhesive

backing and applied to 0.08-inch thick aluminum sheets.
3.
They shall be installed on the wall or a stand near the water-entry station
for plumbing-water supply and near the pumping stations for hydronics.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15190-7
SECTION 15240
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Piping and Equipment Isolation.
2. Duct Sound Attenuators.
3. Return Air Silencer Transfer Ducts.
4. Acoustical Louvers.
5. Sound Linings.
6. Adhesive and Sealer.
7. Non-Hardening Caulking.
8. Vibration Dampening Compound.
9. External Sound Barrier Insulation.
2. Section 15900 - Ductwork and Accessories: Flexible ductwork connections.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. Piping and Equipment Isolation:
a. Engineer may specify mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators to
prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the
building structure.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15240-1
New buildings may have equipment directly anchored to floors only if approved
by vibration consultant. Building structure and equipment shall be approved by
UCB vibration consultant.
Inertia bases are not required or desired unless proof is submitted that they are
needed.
b. Pump bases for split-case pumps to include support for suction and discharge base
ells.
c. Specify flexible connectors for all rotating and reciprocating equipment unless
approved otherwise. Not required for fan-coil units with internal isolation of fans.
d. Specify flexible hoses and spheres to:
1. Compensate for misalignment.
2. Relieve pump flanges of strain.
3. Provide comparative freedom for floating equipment.
4. If installed horizontally, relieve the equipment of piping weight.
5. If needed, specify travel limiters for interconnected equipment.
e. Non-Metallic Flexible hoses are preferable in general because they are more
effective vibration isolators but should be limited to equipment rooms, and careful
attention paid to the pressure and temperature limitations.
f. Specify flexible stainless steel braided hoses for heating and ventilating unit
connections that may be located away from the equipment room area.
g. Specify hoses installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves and
horizontally whenever possible.
h. Consider acoustical pipe riser anchors where interruptible water flows may cause
vibrations in piping such as variable condenser water flows to remote cooling
tower sumps or cycled pumping.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Criteria:
1. Noise levels due to equipment and ductwork to permit attaining sound pressure levels
in all 8 octave bands in occupied spaces conforming to NC Curves:
a. All spaces NC-35.
2. Exceptions:
a. Spaces within 15 foot radius from supply
and return ducts from shafts NC-40.
b. Lobbies, Toilets, Commercial Areas NC-40.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15240-2
c. Kitchens NC-45-50.
d. Mechanical Rooms NC-50-60.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
A. Manufacturers:
Amber/Booth Co.
Korfund
Mason Industries, Inc.
Metraflex
Vibration Mountings and Control Co.
Vibrex
B. +Double Deflection Neoprene Mountings.
C. +Spring Isolator Mountings.
D. +Restrained Spring Isolator Mountings.
E. +Vibration Hangers.
F. +Integral Structural Steel Bases.
G. +Steel Cradle Bases.
H. +Concrete Inertia Bases.
I. Flexible Butyl Hose Pipe Connectors.
J. Flexible Neoprene Sphere Pipe Connectors.
K. Braided Flexible Pipe Connectors.
L. Acoustical Pipe Riser Anchors.
+These are not required when equipment is solid-mounted.
2.02
DUCT SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Manufacturers:
No preference
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15240-3
B. Tested and certified by an independent laboratory, such as ETL.

2.03
RETURN AIR SILENCER TRANSFER DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
No preference
2.04
ACOUSTICAL LOUVERS
A. Manufacturers:
No preference
B. Acoustical ratings and pressure drop ratings verified by copies of tests performed at an
independent laboratory.
2.05
SOUND LININGS
A. Manufacturers:
Certain-teed "Ultralite"
Manville
Owens Corning
B. Product: Fibrous glass, neoprene coated, stenciled NFPA.
C. Minimum thickness:
1. In ductwork: 1/2 inch.
2. In plenums: 2 inch.
D. Minimum density:
1. In ductwork: 1-1/2 lb. per cu. ft.
2. In plenums: 3 lb. per cu. ft.
E. Suitable for duct velocity of 6000 fpm. Lining shall meet erosion test method described
in UL Publication No. 181.
2.06
SOUND LININGS Elastomeric, Non-Fibrous

A. Manufacturers:
Armacell
Aeroflex USA
K-Flex USA
B. Product: Fibrous glass, neoprene coated, stenciled NFPA.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15240-4
C. Minimum thickness:
1. In ductwork: 1/2 inch.
2. In plenums: 2 inch.
D. Minimum density:
1. In ductwork: 1-1/2 lb. per cu. ft.
2. In plenums: 3 lb. per cu. ft.
E. Suitable for duct velocity of 6000 fpm. Lining shall meet erosion test method described
in UL Publication No. 181.
LEED EQc4: Low-Emitting Materials:
All interior adhesives and sealant must meet or exceed the VOC and chemical component
limit requirements of South coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168 and sealants
used as fillers must meet the requirements of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District
Regulation 8, Rule 51. (Low VOC is considered acceptable by UCB.)
2.07
NON-HARDENING CAULKING
A. Manufacturers:
No preference.
B. Guaranteed to be permanently elastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" in Part 1, subparagraph A, paragraph 1.03 "Systems Description" of this Design Guide and use list to
expand on specific requirements of installation for each product specified.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15240-5
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Mechanical insulation for piping, ductwork, and equipment.
1. Section 15900 - Ductwork and Accessories: Duct lining.
2. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Insulation protection
saddles and shields.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. Insulation thickness in agreement with the minimum thickness suggested in ASHRAE
Standard 90A.
2. If more than one type of insulation material is available for satisfying technical
requirements, then price-performance should be evaluated and maximized in actual
selection.
3. Weigh need to insulate unions, flanges, valves, control devices and similar items
where maintenance access is needed. Give consideration to:
a. Energy conservation.
b. Where heat gain to space or ductwork is objectionable.
c. Where condensation must be prevented.
d. Equipment maintainability.
4. Review conclusions with University's Department of Facilities Management project
representative for final design approval.
5. Specify removable insulation for chilled water pumps.
6. Specify teflon-coated, Velcro closure, removable insulation jackets for steam and
condensate equipment applications including high-pressure valves, expansion joints,
high-pressure strainers, condensate pumps, and regulators.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15250-1
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Three years minimum successful installation experience on

projects with mechanical insulation similar in scope and nature to that required for the
project.
B. Requirements for energy conservation: All insulation shall be in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 90A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Armacell
B. Certain-Teed
C. Knauf
D. NOMACO
E. Owens-Corning
F. Schuller (Johns-Manville)
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Insulation:
1. Fiberglass.
2. Calcium Silicate.
3. Flexible Closed-Cell.
B. Adhesives, Sealants, and Vapor Barrier Coatings:
1. Specify that materials must be paintable where painting is required.
LEED EQc4.1: Low-Emitting Materials:
All interior adhesives and sealants must meet or exceed VOC limit requirements of South
Coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168 and sealants used as fillers must meet
requirements of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.
LEED EQ.4.2: Low-Emitting Materials
All interior paints and coatings must meet or exceed VOC limit requirements of Green
Seal GS-11 and GS-03
a. Vapor Barrier Coatingsused in conjunction with reinforcing mesh to coat
insulation on below ambient services temperatures. Permeance shall be no
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15250-2
greater than 0.08 perms at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM E96/ASTM F1249.
Foster 30-65; Childers CP-34; Vimasco 749
b. Reinforcing Meshused in conjunction with coatings/mastics to reinforce.
10x10 polyester or fiberglass mesh. Foster Mast A Fab; Childers Chil Glas #10;
Vimasco Elastafab 894
c. Lagging Adhesivesused in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to
protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1
Chil Seal; Vimasco 714.
d. Weather Barrier Masticused outdoors to protect above ambient insulation
from weather. Foster 46-50 Weatherite; Childers CP-10 Vi Cryl; Vimasco 714
e. Fiberglass Adhesiveused bond low density fibrous insulation to metal
surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C 916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127;
Vimasco 795
f. Elastomeric Insulation Adhesiveused to bond elastomeric insulation. Foster
85-75; Childers CP-82; K Flex 373
g. Elastomeric Insulation Coatingwater based coating used to protect outside of
elastomeric insulation. Foster 30-64; K Flex 374; Armacell WB finish
h. Metal Jacketing Sealantused as a sealant on metal jacketing seams to prevent
water entry. Foster 95-44; Childers CP-76; Pittsburgh Corning PC 727
2.03
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Insulation and accessory materials to meet the following criteria:

1. Insulation Materials: Non-combustible as defined in National Fire Protection
Association Pamphlet 220 and Underwriters' Laboratory Listed or Labeled.
2. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets,
coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) flame-spread rating 25 or less, smokedeveloped rating 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E-84 (NFPA 255) method.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Clean and neat appearance. Use full lengths, not cut pieces.
B. Do not insulate cleanouts, access openings or identification plates. Neatly bevel
insulation and finishes up to edges of such openings and seal edges as required.
3.02
SPECIFIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15250-3
1. Prepare from following list (expand per job requirements) a schedule of mechanical
insulation showing systems insulated, types, thickness for various sizes, temperatures
and special conditions and schedule on Drawings or include in Specifications.
2. Detail on Drawings special removable insulation covers for equipment. For example,
enclose chilled water pump bodies in insulated sheet metal split case housings to
provide easy maintenance of pumps without damage to insulation.
3. Where pipe insulation has the hanger on the outside of the insulation jacket, supply
180 degree calcium-silicate insert with metal shield for 1-inch and larger pipe; metal
shield only for -inch and smaller.
4. For all below ambient piping systems, coat elbows, fittings, valves and flanges with
vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh to prevent moisture ingress. Coat all ASJ
(all service jacket) vapor retarder and duct wrap seams with vapor barrier coating.
B. Plumbing System:
1. Domestic cold water.
2. Roof and overflow drains (horizontal only but including drain bowls and initial
vertical drop to horizontal). All roof drain lines are considered cold pipe. Refer to
spec 15050-5 7c.
3. Domestic hot and tempered supply and circulating water.
4. Domestic water heaters, storage tanks and Accumulators (not factory insulated).
5. Under lavatories: pre-molded insulation to meet ADA requirements.
6. Chilled Drinking Water.
7. Fittings.
C. Heating System:
1. Heating Water Supply and Return
2. Heat Exchangers, Converters, Air Separators, Storage Tanks and Receivers.
3. Low Pressure Steam Piping.
4. Medium Pressure Steam Piping.
5. High Pressure Steam Piping.
6. Steam Condensate and Boiler Feed Water.
7. Fittings.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15250-4
8. Valves.
9. Steam valves, strainers, expansion joints, and bucket traps: Specify factory-made
removable
D. Chilling Systems:
1. Chilled, Dual Temperature and Heat Recovery Water Supply and Return.
2. Heat Reclaim Coil Header.
3. Fittings.
4. Valves.
5. Cold Condensate Drain Piping (first 10 feet).
6. Chiller Water Boxes.
7. Refrigerant and Brine Piping below 40 degree F.
8. Refrigerant Hot Gas Piping (Only within buildings or where exposure is likely to
cause accidental burn injury).
9. Cold Water Thermal Storage Tanks.
10. Pumps (removable Armaflex covers).
E. Air Distribution Systems:
1. Exterior surfaces of Outside Air, Combustion Air, Mixed Air, and Recovery Coil
Discharge.
2. Exterior surfaces of Supply and Return Air Plenums not indicated to be lined.
3. Exterior surfaces of exposed Supply Ductwork not lined.
4. Concealed Supply Ductwork not lined.
5. Rigid Spiral Supply Air Ductwork.
6. Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork or Chase, whichever is more viable.
F. Other Systems:
1. Engine Exhaust and Muffler inside building.
2. Piping with heat tracer exposed to freezing.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15250-5
G. Protective jacket
1. Piping Insulation exposed to weather and where abrasion is likely. Review type of
jacket with University.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15250-6
SECTION 15300
STANDPIPE AND FIRE SPRINKLER STANDARDS
PART I - GENERAL
1.00
1.1
NOTES:
A.
UCB Standards are not intended and shall not be used as guide specifications.
While it is expected that this information will be of assistance to architect and
engineer, in developing plans, specifications, and contract documents on
particular projects, no portion of this standard may be produced by photographic
or other means in any specification intended to become a part of contract
documents without explicit written prior approval of the University of Colorado.
Architects and engineers shall refer to Page 1 of Notice to UCB Standards for
additional information.
B.
The design professional is responsible for complying with all of the requirements
of applicable codes unless specifically waived, in writing, by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
C.
The design professional shall review shop drawings for compliance with Contract
Documents and conduct necessary inspections including rough-in inspections and
punch list preparation. The design professional shall provide written Field Report
of all inspections and punch lists to the AHJ and the project manager.
D.
For projects that do not retain the services of a consultant, the design may be
completed by the standing-order contractor. In such cases, contractor shall
implement UCB Standards in place of specifications. For such projects, the term
"engineer" in this section of UCB Standards shall also mean "contractor".
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes provision of materials and installation of water based fire

extinguishing systems:
1.
Materials and the installation of the above-ground portion of the fire

protection systems.
NOTE: Engineer to determine the need and provide specifications for
underground piping, under the appropriate Division of specifications,
where applicable for the project. Engineer shall identify and specify
design requirements.
JULY 2012
2.
Furnishing equipment.
3.
Designing/installing piping and appurtenances.
4.
System testing and documentation.
5.
System calculations.
UCB STANDARDS
15300-1
B.
6.
Installation of valves and switches.
7.
Pipe joining techniques.
8.
System tests and certifications.
Related Sections
1.
Division-1.
2.
Section 02200, "Earthwork"
3.
Section 07270, "Firestopping"
4.
Section 10520, "Fire Protection Specialties"
5.
Section 16720, "Fire Detection and Alarm Systems"

NOTE: Engineer to refer to section specifying underground piping, e.g.,
Section 02665, for underground FP piping including FDC piping.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
JULY 2012
The installation, certification and documentation shall conform to applicable

portions of the following codes, standards, and regulations:
1.
IBC, International Building Code
2.
IFC, International Fire Code
3.
IMC, International Mechanical Code
4.
IPC, International Plumbing Code
5.
UL (Underwriters Laboratories) Fire Resistance Directory
6.
UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory
7.
Colorado Primary Drinking water Regulations
8.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Pamphlet No. 13
9.
NFPA-14
NFPA-20
NFPA-24
NFPA-25
NFPA-72
NFPA-214
NFPA-231
NFPA-231C
10.
Other NFPA Standards as applicable.

UCB STANDARDS
15300-2
11.
ANSI A-17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
12.
Colorado Dept. of Public Safety, Division of Fire Safety 8CCR 1507-11
13.
Colorado Revised Statutes Section 24-33.5-1202 through 1208 (Senate

Bill 90-4)
14.
Colorado Cross-Connection Control Manual
15.
AWWA
16.
UCB Standards
17.
City of Boulder Construction Standards
NOTE: Engineer to add and delete as required for the specific project.
1.3
B.
The effective date of the codes shall be that of the execution of the contract
between the University and architects/engineers, unless the project is postponed,
in which case the codes at the time of reactivation of the project shall be complied
with. All appendices of referenced NFPA Standards shall be considered part of
the applicable standards for design and interpretation purposes under this
standard.
C.
Nothing in this standard shall be construed to relieve the Engineer of record or the
Contractor of their responsibility with respect to applicable codes, laws or
ordinances.
D.
If there is overlap in or conflicts between the requirements of the codes, laws and
ordinances and this standard then that requirement, which provides the highest
level of safety, as determined by the Engineer, shall take precedence unless
directed in writing to the contrary by AHJ.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The Fire and Life-Safety Group
(FLS) at the department of Facilities Management at University of Colorado,
Boulder is the AHJ on fire protection and life safety concerns.
B.
CDH - Colorado Department of Health.
C.
Engineer - The Engineer of record who represents the Design or

Architect/Engineer firm. Engineer shall stamp record set of drawings and
specifications.
D.
Contractor - When used in terms of Fire Protection system installations, Section

15300, "contractor" shall mean the firm responsible for preparation of shop
drawings and installation of the fire protection system.
E.
FACP- Fire Alarm Control Panel
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15300-3
1.4
F.
FM: Factory Mutual
G.
F.M.: Department of Facilities Management
H.
Owner - University of Colorado at Boulder.
I.
NICET - National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
J.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.
All areas of each facility shall be protected by the automatic sprinkler

system, unless specifically waived by NFPA-13 or otherwise approved, in
writing, by the AHJ.
2.
All sprinkler and standpipe systems shall be hydraulically calculated to

verify proper pipe sizes in strict accordance with NFPA #13.
NOTE: Where deemed appropriate by the Engineer and approved, in writing, by

the AHJ, pipe schedule system may be specified.
3.
Each fire protection system shall be monitored by the building fire alarm
system and the University central station (where available). All buildings
equipped with fire sprinkler systems shall be equipped with an exterior
local alarm (bell and strobe) initiated by the systems main flow detection
device. Coordinate with Division 16.
4.
The 100% design drawings prepared by the Engineer shall indicate pipe
layouts, including risers and cross-mains. They need not show every
required offset, dimension, fitting, or similar details unless so recognized
by the Engineer. Contract Document design drawings may not be used as
shop drawings.
5.
Existing system equipment and components which may be reused shall be

within the scope of each project and shall comply with current codes and
these standards. See section 1.04-B.2.
6.
A safety factor of 10 psi shall be included in hydraulic calculations; see

3.01-B.3.
NOTE: The Engineer shall obtain available water supply from the University and
include in specifications. The specifications shall require a water flow test
by Contractor for installations that incorporate more than 15 sprinklers.
The Contractor shall use the more conservative water supply test results in
hydraulic calculations.
B.
MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
1.
JULY 2012
System Sub-section Zoning

UCB STANDARDS
15300-4
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Sub-section zoning shall be accomplished by providing individual

zone water flow detection, zone control valve, zone drain, gauge,
and inspectors test connection.
Sub-section zoning shall be provided for the following areas:
i.
Elevator Machine Rooms and Shafts. Flow switches may
be specified only where deemed appropriate by the
engineer.
When a building exceeds three (3) floor levels (including
basement) the sprinkler system on each floor shall be a separate
zone.
When a floor area exceeds 10,000 square feet, it shall be on a
separate zone.
As required by NFPA-13 under protection area limitations.
Other areas as determined by the Architect/Engineer depending on
specific project requirements.
NOTE: Engineer to minimize the number of sprinkler zones while

meeting the above requirements and providing adequate zones to
facilitate identification of the zone/area of the fire origin.
2.
Existing Equipment (Also see section 3.01-D)

a.
The use of existing features and equipment may be considered.
NOTE: A building survey shall be conducted by the Engineer to
determine the continued use, or the removal of, existing systems.
These measures shall be clearly indicated in contract documents.
b.
Before considering existing equipment or piping systems, for use
in a new project, all such equipment or systems shall be
tested/inspected to assure their operational integrity and
compliance with current codes.
C.
SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

1.
Wet Pipe Systems

a.
Wet pipe systems shall be used in the majority of system
applications.
b.
Flow detection for wet pipe systems shall be by electronic vane
type water flow detectors, with the following exception:
i.
Alarm check valve assemblies may be used for systems
installed in buildings if there is no approved fire alarm
control panel installed and the system protects only one
zone.
c.
2.
JULY 2012
Only the main water flow switch shall activate the exterior
bell/strobe.
Antifreeze Systems
a.
Antifreeze systems shall not be installed unless specifically
approved, in writing, by the AHJ.
b.
If these systems are proposed, they shall only be used for
incidental areas susceptible to freezing.
NOTE: Engineer to determine the feasibility and advantages of using
UCB STANDARDS
15300-5
other approved methods for protection of piping against freezing,

e.g., listed heat tapes for sprinkler systems.
3.
Dry Pipe Systems

a.
System shall be monitored for low gas pressure.
b.
System pressure shall be maintained by a nitrogen system
determined by the Engineer.
4.
Preaction Systems
NOTE: Engineer to determine the appropriate type of preaction system,
e.g., single- or double-interlock, and specify accordingly. Doubleinterlock shall be specified where accidental water damage is hazardous or
highly undesirable.
a.
b.
Coordinate work with Division 16.

All preaction system piping shall be supervised by an approved
method.
c.
For combined dry and preaction systems, the nitrogen supply shall
meet the requirements for dry pipe systems.
d.
Activation shall be by means of automatic fire detection with
manual release capability. These devices shall be coordinated with
Division 16 work.
e.
Automatic fire detection devices shall be spaced according to
NFPA #72. Engineer shall determine whether additional devices
are necessary in order to meet the client's objective.
NOTE: Engineer to determine the division under which automatic
detection system for the preaction system shall be provided, i.e.,
Division 15 or 16. The responsibilities of Contractors of Divisions
15 and 16 shall be clearly identified and included in the
specifications. See section 2.02-B.5 for types.
f.
System activation method/sequencing, coordinate with Division-16
i.
Detection method shall be by one or more of the following,
as determined by the Engineer based on specific project
requirements:
a)
Smoke Detectors
b)
Heat Detectors
c)
Loss of Air Pressure
d)
Manual pull stations
e)
Means of manual release at the PA valve
ii.
g.
JULY 2012
Sequence of operation for valve actuation shall follow one

or a combination of the following, as determined by the
Engineer:
a)
Automatic Detector Signal
b)
Cross-zoned or verified Automatic Detector Signals
c)
Automatic Detector Signal(s) and Loss of Ai
d)
Manual
Type(s)
i.
Single interlocked preaction systems that admit water to
sprinkler piping upon operation of detection devices.
ii.
Non-interlock preaction systems that admit water to
UCB STANDARDS
15300-6
iii.
iv.
5.
JULY 2012
sprinkler piping upon operation of detection devices or

automatic sprinklers if approved by the AHJ.
Double interlocked preaction systems that admit water to
sprinkler piping upon operation of both detection devices
and automatic sprinklers.
Specific to systems protecting elevator mechanical rooms
and shafts: See 1.04-C-8.
Requirements for Mitigation of Microbiologically Induced Corrosion (MIC)

a.
The following requirements, intended for MIC mitigation, shall
supercede all similar requirements in the UCB Standards section
15300.
b.
Pipes and Tubes
i.
All piping shall be USA manufactured steel Schedule 10 or
40 and shall have an Antibacterial Formula II (ABF
II ) coating or approved equal.
ii.
For wet pipe systems, all piping shall be steel Schedule 10
for 2 and larger and schedule 40 for all pipe 2 and
smaller. For 2 and smaller pipe, threadable thinwall pipe
may be used only if the Threaded Corrosion Resistance
Ratio is greater than or equal to 1.0
iii.
For dry and preaction systems, all piping shall be steel
Schedule 40. For 2 and larger, cut-groove the pipe for
grooved fittings. Roll grooved pipe shall not be accepted.
Small pipes shall have threaded joints.
iv.
For drain pipes, all piping shall be galvanized steel
Schedule 10 or 40 for 2 and larger and schedule 40 for
all pipe 2 and smaller. For 2 and smaller pipe, threadable
thinwall pipe may be used only if the threaded Corrosion
Resistance Ratio is greater than or equal to 1.0.
c.
Pipe and Tube Fittings
i.
All pipe 2 and smaller shall have threaded fittings. The
only exception to this requirement is at locations where
unions would be required, grooved fittings may be used in
place of unions. The number of grooved fittings for 2 and
smaller pipe shall not exceed 1% of the total number of
fittings installed on the system. Threaded fitting shall be
either malleable or cast iron.
ii.
For 2 and larger pipe, all fittings shall be ductile iron
grooved fittings. For the preaction systems, provide
grooved fittings and gaskets that are listed for dry-pipe
systems. Grooved fittings shall be of a type that does not
require field lubrication; Victaulic Vic-Plus or approved
equal.
iii.
Additionally, flush seal gaskets shall be used on all dry and
pre-action systems.
d.
Nitrogen Pressure System
i.
In order to reduce the likelihood of microbiologically
induced corrosion (MIC), nitrogen is to be used in place of
air for all preaction and dry systems.
ii.
Provide a minimum of two nitrogen tanks of adequate size,
e.g., size Q or larger, to supply supervisory pressure to
UCB STANDARDS
15300-7
preaction systems. A larger number of tanks may be

necessary depending on the system volume.
iii.
e.
f.
JULY 2012
Nitrogen tanks shall be positioned to discourage accidental

damage to the tanks, valves, and regulators. Secure tanks
to walls or provide freestanding rake to securely restrain
tanks. Coordinate tank location with Engineer and Owner.
iv.
Provide Nitrogen Regulating Device (Reliable or approved
equal) to reduce the pressure from 2200 psi to
approximately 50 psi. Nitrogen Regulating Device shall be
located as close to tanks as possible to minimize highpressure piping. Provide rigid pipe from the Nitrogen
Regulating Device to each preaction system.
v.
Provide a low pressure supervisory switch to monitor the
pressure within the pipe between the Nitrogen Regulating
Device and each Pressure Maintenance Device for each
preaction system. This low pressure supervisory switch
shall be set to provide a supervisory signal if the pipe
pressure is less than 20 psi below the normal operating
pressure.
vi.
For each preaction system, provide an approved pressure
maintenance device, e.g., Reliable Model C Pressure
Maintenance Device, or approved equal, to reduce the
pressure from 50 psi to approximately 30 oz/in2. Pressure
Maintenance Devices shall be adequately supported.
Contractor is to construct rack or similar system to support
these and other devices as necessary. Configure Pressure
Maintenance Device as required by manufacturers data
sheets.
vii.
Provide a low-pressure switch, Reliable or approved equal,
which is factory set to 11 oz/in2 to supervise pressure
within the preaction system.
viii. Provide gauge on each preaction system that is listed to
monitor oz/in2. Provide second gauge on each preaction
system for water pressure.
ix.
For each preaction and dry system zone, provide one
cylinder and a back-up cylinder. For very small systems
and zones, and upon written approval by the campus AHJ,
multiple zones/systems can be served by the same cylinder
plus back-up.
Installation
i.
In the preaction systems, all piping shall be sloped to
facilitate drainage toward the point of the supply. Slope
shall be provided as required for dry systems per NFPA 13.
All trapped sections of piping shall be provided with
auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13. Drum drips shall
not be required. However, all drains shall be a minimum of
1 valves with plug at all low points. This requirement
exceeds the provisions of NFPA 13.
Sprinklers
i.
For the preaction system, use upright sprinklers. Pendent
sprinklers shall not be used with the preaction system.
UCB STANDARDS
15300-8
Where pendent sprinklers are required due to suspended

ceilings, Contractor shall provide dry pendent sprinklers
installed in manner that no trapped water will result.
Sidewall sprinklers may be used on the preaction system as
long as they are installed so that no trapped water will
occur.
6.
Deluge Systems
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
The deluge valve assembly, including the valve, trim packages and
actuation system, shall be UL listed or approved by Factory
Mutual, as a complete assembly.
Fire detection devices or systems shall be automatically supervised
in all areas.
Detection systems can be pilot line or electronic as determined by
the Engineer for the specific project.
If pneumatic detection is incorporated into the design, a dedicated
air supply system meeting the requirements for dry pipe systems
shall be provided.
Hydraulic or pneumatic heat detectors shall be spaced according to
NFPA #13 and manufacturers requirements.
Fire detection spacing shall be in accordance with NFPA #72
including its Appendix-C. These items shall be coordinated with
the fire alarm Contractor.
NOTE: Engineer to specify the responsibilities of sub-Contractors
under each Division of specifications.
Deluge valve actuation by electronic means shall be through an
approved agent releasing panel. This shall be coordinated with the
Division 16 work.
NOTE: Engineer to determine the division under which automatic
detection system for the deluge system shall be provided,
i.e., Division 15 or 16. The responsibilities of Contractors
of Divisions 15 and 16 shall be identified and clearly
included in the specifications.
JULY 2012
7.
Exposure Protection Systems

a.
The exposure sprinkler system shall have an independent supply
from the vertical or main riser, prior to any other sectional
controls, with a supervised control valve and distinctive flow
detection.
b.
Where needed, systems incorporating open sprinklers shall be
controlled by the operation of detection devices designed for the
specific application.
c.
If the systems incorporate dry pipe, deluge or preaction valves, the
requirements for each type of system in applicable codes and these
standards shall apply.
8.
Standpipe Systems
a.
The system shall be designed as required by NFPA-14 and IBC.
b.
Hose valves shall be located within the building stairway
enclosures per NFPA-14, with additional corridor locations as
UCB STANDARDS
15300-9
c.
d.
9.
Elevator and Electrical Equipment

a.
The installation of sprinkler systems in elevator machine rooms
and shafts shall be in compliance with the requirements of ANSI
A-17.1 and NFPA-13.
b.
In existing buildings where the elevator equipment is not provided
with shunt trip, sprinkler protection shall not be provided in the
elevator shaft or machine room. A dedicated feed main shall be
provided to facilitate a future sprinkler system, terminating at a
location outside elevator machine room and hoistway and
acceptable to the AHJ. An isolation control valve sized for the
maximum number of sprinkler heads shall be provided.
c.
On existing and new buildings where sprinkler protection is
provided in the elevator shaft and elevator machine room, sprinkler
protection serving these areas shall be a preaction system or the
system described below. In either case, the system shall actuate
the shunt trip prior to application of water:
i.
Provide 286o F sprinklers, with head guards, in elevator
machine rooms and hoistways. Sprinklers are not required
at top of hoistways for new elevators. Sprinklers are not
required at the bottom of non-combustible hoistways for
elevators that do not use hydraulic fluid.
ii.
Provide a control valve with tamper switch outside elevator
machine rooms and shafts.
iii.
Provide smoke detectors for elevator recall. This work, and
the elevator recall functions are normally under Division 16. Coordinate between Divisions 15 and 16 for proper
detector and sprinkler locations.
iv.
Provide one 190F fixed temperature non-resetting heat
detector adjacent to each sprinkler. After the elevator is
recalled and prior to application of water, heat detectors
shall automatically disconnect power to the elevator
machinery and the elevator controller. Provision of
detectors and power disconnect is normally under
Division16. Coordinate between Divisions 15 and 16 for
proper detector and sprinkler locations.
v.
Supervision and zoning of detectors shall be under
Division-16.
d.
10.
Each bank of elevators and associated equipment rooms shall be

protected by an independent system unless determined otherwise
by the Engineer and approved by AHJ.
Protection for Mechanical Shafts

a.
JULY 2012
required, unless alternative locations are approved by the AHJ in

writing.
Approved roof manifolds shall be provided where required by the
IBC, NFPA-14 or by the AHJ.
Standpipe systems shall be hydraulically calculated for the project
specific requirements.
Sprinklers shall be required in all shafts where the shaft

UCB STANDARDS
15300-10
construction or contents are combustible or where the shaft is

accessible by personnel.
EXCEPTION: For shafts housing a single duct which occupies the entire
area of the shaft, sprinklers are not required.
b.
c.
d.
1.5
Where sprinklers are provided in shafts, they shall be accessible

for inspection, maintenance or repair and replacement.
Sprinkler heads shall be placed at the top of all shafts requiring
protection. If the shafts have offsets, additional protection may be
required as determined by the Engineer based on project and code
requirements.
The coverage and spacing limitations from NFPA #13 shall be
complied with.
SUBMITTALS (Supplemental to Section 01300)

A.
JULY 2012
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
The Owner reserves the right to charge the Fire Protection Contractor for
multiple reviews by the AHJ or engineer if more than two (2) submittals
(either for shop drawings or as-built drawings) are made by the Fire
Protection Contractor.
2.
Partial submittals shall not be acceptable.
3.
Equipment submittals shall contain annotated descriptive data to show the

specific model, type and size of each item the Contractor proposes to
furnish. Catalog cut sheets shall be submitted in a suitable folder or binder
and indexed referencing the applicable specification sections. Unclear or
partial reproductions of manufacturer's original catalog cuts or descriptive
data shall not be accepted. Each item supplied shall be clearly identified
on each sheet. Where the submittal material describes items, in addition to
the items being submitted, the additional items shall be crossed out and
the submittal item shall be identified.
a.
Submit proof of compatibility for equipment components required
to be approved as a system.
4.
The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring any general arrangement

drawings depicting the building layouts, overall site plan and the detailed
building drawings, as necessary to develop complete submittals.
Reference drawings may be obtained from the owner if available;
Contractor to verify such availability prior to bidding.
5.
Submittals processed by the Engineer shall not be considered Change

Orders. The purpose of submittals shall demonstrate to the Engineer that
the Contractor understands the design concept, and that such
understanding is demonstrated by indicating and detailing the fabrication
and installation methods intended to be used.
6.
Review by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from full
compliance with requirements of the contract documents, codes, and
UCB STANDARDS
15300-11
standards.
B.
JULY 2012
SHOP DRAWINGS
1.
Refer to Division-1 for general submittal requirements.
2.
Submit detailed shop drawings including a riser diagram, hydraulic

calculations, equipment data sheet submittals and employee certification
in accordance with NFPA #13. Shop drawings shall be first reviewed by
the Engineer for conformance with contract documents and, subsequently
reviewed and accepted by the AHJ.
3.
Submit anchoring details and calculations.
4.
When a fire protection system employs electronic fire detection devices to

activate a system, e.g., in preaction and deluge systems, detailed fire
detection and alarm shop drawings, shall accompany the fire protection
shop drawing submittal under appropriate division, Division-15 or 16, as
determined by the Engineer.
5.
Unless otherwise approved by the AHJ, drawings shall be minimum size

of 24"x 36", with a minimum scale of 1/8" = 1'-0". Shop drawings,
hydraulic calculations and equipment data sheets shall be submitted for
review within a maximum of thirty (30) working days after award of
contract. Written approval of the Engineer and the AHJ shall be obtained
prior to starting the installation.
6.
Unless otherwise approved by the AHJ, drawings shall include a site plan,
floor plan/layout drawings, riser diagram(s) and hydraulic calculations
based upon the general arrangement drawings provided and other
drawings that may be available from the Owner. Drawings shall include
column line designations where provided on the contract documents. The
site plan drawing shall clearly indicate the required water supply
information from NFPA #13.
7.
Include details and sections as required to clearly define and clarify the
design.
8.
Drawings shall be in strict compliance with NFPA #13 and drawn on

computer to a commercial or architectural/engineering drawing standard
and the University CAD standards unless waived in writing by the AHJ.
Computer drawings shall be full scale and be plotted to a noted scale. For
additional details see UCB CAD Standards.
9.
An up-dated set of shop drawings approved by the AHJ that incorporates

all field changes shall be maintained at the job site, in good condition from
the start of construction until all inspections are completed.
10.
The drawings shall show the location and ratings of all fire rated floors
and walls. Each pipe penetration of these rated assemblies shall be
detailed on the drawings showing pipe sleeve and a fire rated penetration
seal.
UCB STANDARDS
15300-12
C.
11.
The Contractor shall not proceed with purchase, fabrication, or installation

of submittal related work until notified in writing. Re-submit as required
until so marked by the Engineer. Work which is executed without required
prior acceptance by the Engineer/AHJ shall be subject to rejection.
Removal and reconstruction of rejected work shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
12.
Completed State of Colorado Plan Registration Form shall accompany the

shop drawing submittal.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
1.
D.
TEST CERTIFICATES
1.
E.
1.6
Submit as-built drawings to the Engineer and AHJ for review and
approval. After review and approval, submit the final drawings on
computer disk to the University, in University standard CAD format. The
as-built drawings shall include all of the information required under shop
drawings and the following:
a.
The drawings shall show the system as installed, including all
deviations from the approved shop drawings.
b.
When a fire protection system employs electronic fire detection
and alarm devices to activate a system, detailed fire protection and
alarm as-built drawings, complying with Standard 16720 shall
accompany the fire protection as-built drawing submittal by the
appropriate contractor.
c.
Dependent upon the extent of field changes required to the original
approved shop drawings submitted to the AHJ, the AHJ reserves
the right to require a supplemental set of hydraulic calculations, at
no additional cost to the Owner to verify the adequacy of the
system in the as-built condition.
d.
Submittal of as-built drawings shall follow the job schedule and
shall be submitted within thirty (30) days upon completion of the
sprinkler work in the respective building.
Test certificate(s) showing that pneumatic, hydrostatic and final tests were
conducted in accordance with the applicable NFPA standards, shall be
submitted to the AHJ.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1.
Manual shall be approved by the Engineer prior to conducting training

session.
2.
Manual shall contain a complete training session outline (agenda).
3.
Manual shall include all system test certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15300-13
1.
2.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
All necessary system acceptance and variances shall be granted by the

AHJ after review and approval by the Engineer. This includes shop
drawings, as-built drawings and inspections. All variance requests and
AHJ responses shall be in writing.
The system design and installation shall conform to these standards. When
variances are granted by the AHJ, they will be documented in writing by
the AHJ and a copy shall be maintained in all project files and at the job
site.
3.
If a condition arises that is not clearly identified in the Contract

Documents, design direction shall be provided in writing by the Engineer.
This includes, but is not limited to, walls relocated or not shown on the
plans, potential freezing points, ducts and other obstructions, or
interferences as they relate to system coverage or hydraulic performance
parameters.
4.
The Contractor shall be ultimately responsible to guarantee the system

against freezing for reasons other than that of the building Owner's
negligence.
5.
Systems shall be designed in strict accordance with applicable codes and

standards, the manufacturer's recommended practice and the requirements
from the AHJ.
CONTRACTOR'S PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS

1.
The design of the fire protection systems shall be performed by or under

the direction and control of a Colorado registered P.E. or a NICET level
IV, unless otherwise advised by the AHJ during the Design Document
phase in which case, an individual with NICET, level III or higher may be
accepted. Said professionals shall be experienced in fire protection,
thoroughly familiar with and experienced in this type of installation.
Colorado registered professional engineers or the NICET level III (or
higher) professionals who are "Members" in the national organization of
the Society of Fire Protection Engineers (SFPE) or meet the qualifications
for the grade of "Member" in the national organization of the SFPE are
preferred.
2.
The owner's representative, Engineer, and AHJ reserve the right to request
proof of qualifications.
3.
No design related work shall be subcontracted or performed by persons

other than bona fide employees working solely for the contractor. Any
exception shall be pre-approved by the owner, in writing.
4.
Persons who work on fire suppression systems and making an

appropriation therefore are to be registered as required by Colorado House
Bill 10-1241 as soon as the bill is signed into law and thereafter.
INSTALLER/CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
UCB STANDARDS
15300-14
1.
Shall be pre-qualified to work on any major projects. Major projects shall

be identified by Facilities Management project manager and AHJ on a
case by case basis. As a rule of thumb, projects involving more than
50,000 square feet of sprinkler protection should be considered major.
2.
The entire fire protection system project including design, calculation,

installation and testing, excluding prefabrication, shall be bid by a single
firm which has the capabilities to perform all of the work required under
this standard. No installation work shall be sub-contracted without prior
permission in writing from the AHJ.
3.
Fire Protection Contractor, individually shall be able to prove bonding

capacity equal to the total amount of the fire protection portion of the
contract, for the specific project.
NOTE: Engineer to make reference to front portion of contract documents
for general bonding requirements.
D.
1.7
4.
Shall be registered for the design and installation for fire protection
systems in the State of Colorado.
5.
Shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in the design and
installation of similar projects of comparable size and value.
6.
Shall have the capability of providing a full service maintenance, testing

and inspection program in accordance with NFPA standards and where
applicable, be certified to perform these services .
7.
Shall have an emergency service capability for response to emergency

conditions.
8.
Shall have an established office within one hundred (100) miles of the
campus, which maintains a full complement of spare parts, tools and
equipment for the specific project and type of system.
INSTALLATION QUALIFICATIONS
1.
Welders shall comply with the requirements identified in NFPA-13.
2.
Job foremen shall be trained for the installation and operation of each type
of system and possess documentation of qualifications and training.
Foremen shall have a minimum of three (3) years of successful installation
experience on projects with fire protection systems similar in scope and
nature to that required for the project.
WARRANTY
A.
All material and workmanship shall be warranted for a minimum period of one
(1) year beginning with the date of final acceptance by the University.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and
guarantee periods for any damage caused by contractors or by defective work,
UCB STANDARDS
15300-15
JULY 2012
materials or equipment.
1.8
EMERGENCY SERVICES
A.
During the installation and warranty period, the Contractor shall provide
emergency repair service for the sprinkler system within four (4) hours of a
request by the University.
B.
Service shall be available twenty-four (24) hours per day, seven (7) days per
week.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Equipment used shall bear the UL listing or FM approval for the use intended and
be permitted by applicable referenced standards. See the following list of
preferred manufacturers from Facilities Management maintenance personnel.
B.
Equipment used shall be new and compatible.

1.
Gate Valves:
a.
Nibco Inc.
b.
Kennedy Valve
c.
Mueller
d.
Stockham
e.
Milwaukee
2.
Butterfly and Ball Valves:

a.
Victaulic
b.
Milwaukee
c.
Nibco Inc.
d.
Kennedy Valve
3.
Grooved Mechanical Couplings shall be greaseless type:

a.
Victaulic Company of America
b.
Grinnell
c.
Central
4.
Sprinklers:
a.
Viking Corp.
b.
Globe
c.
Reliable
d.
Other manufacturers, if approved by the University as equal.
Note: Sprinklers that contain a synthetic, non-metallic o-ring are not acceptable.
JULY 2012
5.
Fire Protection Specialities:

a.
Croker
b.
Potter Roemer, Inc.
c.
Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
6.
Backflow Preventers:
UCB STANDARDS
15300-16
a.
C.
2.2
Febco (see other parts of Division 15 for Model#)
7.
Check Valves:
a.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
b.
Mueller
c.
Kennedy Valve
d.
Viking Corp.
e.
Victaulic Company of America
f.
Globe Firm Sprinkler Corp.
8.
Fire Protection Speciality Valves (Dry and Preaction):

a.
Viking Corp.
b.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
c.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.
9.
Air Compressors:
Note: This section applies to existing compressors and not to the new
Nitrogen systems.
a.
Emglo Products Corp.
b.
Gast
c.
Viking Corp.
d.
General Blower Company, Inc.
10.
Alarm, Flow and Tamper Switches:

a.
Potter Electric Signal Corp.
b.
System Sensor
c.
Victaulic
11.
Fire Department Connection:

a.
Croker
b.
Potter Roemer
c.
Elkhart
Incidental items, which are essential, but which may not be described by this
specification, shall also be provided and installed in the commercial/industry
standard or better method and quality.
MATERIALS
A.
PIPING AND TUBING

NOTE: Engineer shall determine and specify the material, products, and
manufacturer(s) that the Contractor is authorized to use.
JULY 2012
1.
See section 15300-1.4.C.5.a for general piping requirements and for specific
dry system and preaction system requirements for additional MIC prevention
measures.
2.
Copper tubing may be used if identified desirable by the engineer. Full

compliance with NFPA#13 requirements and recommendations is
required.
UCB STANDARDS
15300-17
B.
JULY 2012
3.
Pipe joining: Fittings shall comply with NFPA #13 requirements. Grooved
couplings, fittings and gaskets used throughout a system, shall be supplied
from the same manufacturer and be designed for the specific installation.
4.
Threaded fittings are preferred in architecturally exposed or sensitive

areas.
5.
Design, hydraulic data and fabrication documentation shall be submitted

on the use of segmentally welded fittings.
6.
Threaded and cut-grooved pipes are subject to the limitations of

NFPA#13.
7.
Face bushings and hexagonal bushings shall not be permitted.
VALVES (Refer also to Section 15050)

1.
General Requirements
a.
Suitable for a minimum of one-hundred seventy five (175) psi
working pressure unless the project requirements demand higher
pressures, i.e., 50 psi above the anticipated system pressure.
b.
Riser and sectional control valves: Indicating types, sized to match
the supply pipe and approved for use in automatic sprinkler and
standpipe systems.
c.
Control valves: Provide with adequate means for mounting an
electrical supervisory contact switch, which shall be specified in
this section.
2.
Check Valves
a.
1-1/2" and smaller: All bronze with screwed ends.
b.
2" and larger: Iron or brass body.
3.
Miscellaneous Valves
a.
Ball drip valves: Brass with 1/2" NPT rated for one-hundred
seventy-five (175) psi or higher where necessary.
b.
Inspector's test valves: 1" brass ball valves.
c.
Main and sectional drain valves: All bronze gate valves.
d.
Approved combination test/drain valves may be installed.
e.
The valves used for the gauge assemblies shall be 1/4" globe or
angle 3-way valves, with a working pressure of not less than one
hundred seventy-five (175) psi. They shall have a screwed bonnet
and renewable composition disc.
4.
Dry Pipe Valves

a.
Valves shall be sized per hydraulic calculations and be supplied by
pipe of an equal or greater size.
b.
Shall have a positive latching clapper.
c.
Shall be of the differential or latching differential type.
d.
For low differential valves, a high water level signaling device or
automatic drain shall be provided.
e.
All trim parts, accelerators and exhausters shall be of the same
UCB STANDARDS
15300-18
manufacturer as the dry pipe valve.
C.
5.
Preaction and Deluge Valves

a.
The valve assembly including the valve, trim packages, and
actuation system shall be FM approved as a complete assembly.
b.
The preaction valve shall be actuated and sequenced as noted in
Section 1.04-C.4.
c.
The size of the preaction valve shall be established via the
hydraulic calculations and be supplied by a pipe of an equal or
larger size. The valve shall be rated for a one-hundred seventy-five
(175) psi working pressure. The basic valve trim shall include
manual control/activation capability, drain and test provision with
trim for automatic operation via a 24 volt solenoid (to be provided
under this section). Valve shall be wired normally closed or as
otherwise specified by the manufacturer. The manual release
switches, whether mechanical or electrical, shall be located at the
exits from the protected area. Coordinate work with Division 16
when necessary.
6.
Solenoid Release Valves

a.
Shall be specifically listed/approved for use in fire protection
systems.
b.
Shall be FM approved as compatible with the preaction valve and
fire alarm control panel.
GAUGES
1.
2.
D.
Air Pressure
a.
Brass bourdon tube with 3-1/2" diameter case rated for twohundred fifty (250) psi air pressure.
b.
Gauge dial: From 0-100 psi in 1 psi increments.
c.
Equipped gauges with a 1/4" stem with a 1/4" shut-off valve.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

1.
New fire department connections: Double 2-1/2" Siamese connection with

(NH) threads, compatible with Boulder Fire Department threads.
2.
Single 2-1/2", with NH threads, fire department connections may be used

or reused if the riser is less than 3".
Labels and signs shall be provided per NFPA 13 and 14. See section 3.03H.
3.
4.
JULY 2012
Water Pressure
a.
Brass bourdon tube with 3-1/2" diameter case rated for threehundred (300) psi water pressure.
b.
Gauge dial: From 0-300 psi in 5 # increments.
c.
Equip gauges with a 1/4" stem with a 1/4" shut-off valve.
Provide drain facilities, piped to the outside of the building for fire
department connection piping.
UCB STANDARDS
15300-19
NOTE: Engineer shall determine and specify if drain shall discharge in an

acceptable location inside the building.
5.
Where more than one fire department connection is used for the sprinkler
system in a building, they shall be interconnected so that the entire
sprinkler system is fed by each of the fire department connections.
6. Where more than one fire department connection is used for the standpipe
system or combination standpipe/sprinkler system in a building, they shall be
interconnected so that the entire system is fed by each of the fire department
connections.
7. Where a Fire Department Connection is to be routed underground, the pipe
shall be cement lined ductile iron per AWWA specs and installed per NFPA
24.
E.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
NOTE: Engineer shall conduct code review and specify cross-connection devices
that meet the requirements of Colorado Cross-Connection Control
Manual.
F.
JULY 2012
1.
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer

a.
Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be used for fire
suppression systems only when chemical additives such as
antifreeze are present or when untreated water may be pumped into
the system. Use Febco models acceptable to Facilities
Management Department.
2.
Double Check Valve Assembly

a.
Provide an approved double check valve backflow prevention
assembly on each new automatic sprinkler and standpipe system,
at the base of the system riser downstream of the domestic water
supply tap. Approved manufacturers are Febco and other
manufacturers determined by the Engineer and approved by the
University. The model required by Facilities Management is
Febco 850.
3.
Assemblies shall be complete including manufacturer's installed control

valves.
FIRE DEPARTMENT HOSE VALVES FOR STANDPIPES

1.
Hose valves for Class I and III service: 2-1/2" size (with a 2-1/2" x 1-1/2"
reducing fitting, except for Class I systems), with American National
Standard Hose male thread with cap and chain (brass or chrome consistent
with building decor).
2.
Hose valves for Class II service: shall meet these standards, with the
exception of the valves being of 1-1/2" in size, with a cap and chain.
Threads shall meet NFPA #1963 (i.e. NH threads).
UCB STANDARDS
15300-20
G.
H.
JULY 2012
3.
Engineer shall not specify or require fire hoses for standpipe hose valves
unless specifically required by the code and approved by AHJ.
4.
Locate hose valves per NFPA #14, unless otherwise approved by the AHJ.
5.
Concealed hose valves within a building shall be accessible by the use of a

single key. This keying shall match keying which is used to access system
control valves.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1.
Provide pipe hangers of the design required for the specific installation
and location.
2.
Install retaining clips/clamps in locations where vibration may be a

concern.
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
1.
Orifice size: 1/2" diameter. The same model, manufacturer and orifice size
shall be used throughout the project. Other orifice sizes are acceptable
when so determined and specified by the Engineer or contractors
hydraulic calculations.
2.
Finished Ceilings
a.
Temperature rating classification: Ordinary, unless required
otherwise determined based on ambient conditions.
NOTE: Use of quick response sprinklers is strongly encouraged.
Engineer to specify quick response sprinklers where allowed by
NFPA-13 and suitable for the specific project.
b.
Style and finish shall be specified.
NOTE: The University departments of Facilities Management
maintenance personnel discourage the use of concealed sprinklers
with certain exceptions such as cleanrooms.
3.
Corrosive atmospheres: coated to prevent deterioration.
4.
Other areas (non-finished): brass finish Ordinary temperature rating.
5.
Mechanical rooms/attics: brass finish, intermediate temperature rating.
6.
Localized areas with potential for freezing: dry pendant or dry sidewall
sprinklers.
7.
Metal Cabinet and spare sprinklers. Spare sprinklers and wrenches

located where the temperature will not exceed 100F. The number of spare
sprinklers shall be based on the requirements of NFPA-13, all
interpretations will be by the AHJ. Location to be approved by the
University.
8.
Sprinklers subject to damage and/or located within 7'-0" of the floor and
UCB STANDARDS
15300-21
those protecting electrical or mechanical rooms shall be provided with

approved guards.
9.
I.
DRAIN AND TEST LINES

1.
J.
Concealed sprinklers are not permitted to be used on campus.
The two (2) inch main drain, sub-system drains and inspector's test
connection drains shall be provided with the appropriate size valve per
applicable NFPA standards or manufacturer's recommendation.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (MUST BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE FIRE

ALARM SYSTEM)
1.
Supervisory Switches
a.
Compatible with the type of valve used, activated by turning the
valve actuator.
b.
Shall have automatic reset capabilities.
c.
Capable of being wired in normally open/closed position
d.
Cover shall have tamper resistant screws.
e.
Minimum contact ratings:
i.
0.25 A @ 24 VDC
2.
Automatic Water Flow Detectors

a.
Electronic vane type or pressure activated.
b.
Compatible with the type of pipe and equipment used.
c.
Built-in retard device, field adjustable from 0-70 seconds. Set for a
time delay of thirty (30) seconds. Exception: pressure switches.
d.
Automatic self reset capabilities.
e.
Capable of being wired in normally open position.
f.
Tamper proof.
g.
Minimum contact ratings:
i.
0.235 A Q 24 VDC
h.
All parts in contact with water shall be corrosion resistant.
i.
Shall initiate a distinct water flow alarm signal at the Fire Alarm
Control Panel (FACP) by zone.
NOTE: Engineer to coordinate with Electrical Engineer and determine the
need for addressable modules and specify under appropriate
Division of specifications.
3.
JULY 2012
Low Pressure Supervisory Switches

a.
A low pressure alarm switch shall be provided for dry pipe
sprinkler systems and supervised preaction sprinkler systems. The
switches shall meet the following requirements:
i.
Compatible with the equipment used.
ii.
1/2" NPT enclosure.
iii.
NEMA I enclosure.
iv.
Capable of detecting a ten (10) psi decrease in normal
pressure and be adjustable.
v.
Tamper proof.
UCB STANDARDS
15300-22
vi.
4.
K.
Capable of operating at 24 VDC or as specified by the

manufacturer.
Exterior Alarm Signals

a.
Shall mount above the fire department connection at a height of ten
(10) to fifteen (15) feet above adjacent grade.
b.
Where a FACP is available, an exterior electric bell with flashing
strobe, as specified in Section 16720, minimum six (6) inch
diameter powered by the FACP having a minimum audible level of
85 dBA at ten (10) feet. This work shall be coordinated with
Division - 16.
c.
When approved by AHJ, a water motor gong with a minimum six
(6) inch diameter shall be provided for sprinkler systems which are
installed where there are no fire alarm panels capable of
monitoring the required signals. The water motor gong shall be
used in conjunction with an alarm check valve.
AIR COMPRESSOR
Note: Air compressor related issues apply to existing compressors and not to the
new Nitrogen systems.
1.
The air compressor shall be UL listed and sized to be capable of
replenishing the system within thirty (30) minutes.
2.
Air line piping shall be galvanized or copper.
3.
System piping components such as check and shut-off valves shall be

brass.
4.
Power shall be obtained from a dedicated circuit wired to the building's

emergency power system.
5.
Air Maintenance Device shall be:

a.
Listed/approved for fire protection service. If used with tankless
compressors, shall be specifically listed for such use.
b.
Automatic and field adjustable with an integral unloading valve.
c.
For shop air or cylinders with single stage pressure regulators, the
device shall also be of the pressure reducing type.
6.
Nitrogen Maintenance Device

a.
Listed/approved for the service intended.
b.
Automatic and field adjustable.
c.
Shall be of the high pressure reducing type.
PART III - EXECUTION

3.1
SPECIFIC DESIGN AND TEST PARAMETERS

A.
GENERAL
1.
JULY 2012
The "Room Design Method" and "Small Room Rule" shall not be used in
the design of systems unless otherwise deemed necessary by engineer and
UCB STANDARDS
15300-23
accepted by AHJ.
B.
JULY 2012
2.
Architect/Engineer shall determine which hydrants to test in consultation

with the AHJ. If the flow and/or test hydrant locations identified by the
engineer cannot be used, the contractor is to obtain the written approval of
the campus AHJ for new test and/or flow hydrant locations.
3.
Water supply flow test(s) shall be conducted by the contractor and

witnessed by the campus AHJ, i.e., FLS or FSG. Test(s) shall be
conducted in strict accordance with NFPA #13 and NFPA #291. The City
of Boulder Fire Department shall be invited to witness the test(s). Notify
the City of Boulder Water Department of the time and location of the
test(s) prior to operating hydrants. Procedures specific to each project
including location, date and time shall be submitted to the AHJ for
approval two weeks prior to conducting tests. Such tests may discolor
water supply to buildings during the test. As such, if the test date or time
coincides with uninterruptible Campus functions, such as research, the
owner reserves the right to delay or otherwise reschedule the test.
4.
Sprinkler systems protecting buildings classified as Ordinary Hazard shall

not be connected to a 6" dead-end type supply main if the main also
supplies a fire hydrant. The minimum size supply main shall be 8" for this
situation (from the looped main to the hydrant.)
5.
Hydrant flow test can discolor water supply to buildings, as such the
standard outage notification procedure shall be followed; see Section
15300-3.4-C in UCB Standards.
6.
The test must be conducted in a manner that no erosion will occur and
there will be no damage to street, fish, animals, plants or other property. If
questions arise, contact the campus AHJ.
HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS
1.
Flow velocity in underground water mains shall not exceed sixteen (16)
feet per second. Velocity in above ground sprinkler system piping shall
not exceed twenty (20) feet per second.
2.
When the domestic and fire protection system water supplies are
interconnected, the domestic demand (gpm) shall be added to the fire
protection system demand at the point of connection. The domestic
demand shall be calculated by the engineer in accordance with the
Uniform Plumbing Code based on fixture units and specified accordingly.
3.
Pipe sizes shall be calculated so that the combined sprinkler and standpipe
system (plus domestic demand) leave a safety factor of 10 psi; see 1.04A.6.
4.
The hydraulic calculations shall be calculated back to the effective point

of the water supply flow test.
5.
The hydraulic calculations shall prove the hydraulically most remote and
UCB STANDARDS
15300-24
demanding areas of not less than 1,500 sq. ft., to allow for flexibility in
building use, i.e., Room Design Method of NFPA 13 may not be used.
Velocity pressure may be neglected in the hydraulic calculations. This
may involve submitting auxiliary hydraulic calculations to prove that the
most remote and demanding area was calculated. See item 3.01-A.1,
above.
Note: Allowable reductions of the system's area of operation for the
Area/Design Method from NFPA 13 are acceptable.
6.
Hydraulic calculation submittals shall clearly define and annotate all

devices which will cause friction loss with equivalent lengths of pipe. This
includes vane type electric water flow switches (assume 10 feet of
equivalent length of pipe).
7.
For hydraulic calculation purposes, the friction loss coefficient for existing
piping over ten (10) years in age, the Hazen-Williams design C values
given in NFPA-13 shall be reduced by a factor of 10 for pipes 10 years or
more in service, e.g. C reduced from 120 to 110. More restrictive
requirements of NFPA-13 shall be implemented as applicable. This
includes non-circulating water mains and above ground piping.
8.
Open sprinkler type exposure protection system demand shall be added to

the automatic sprinkler demand.
a.
For systems (closed or open head type), incorporated as part of a
rated construction or glazing assembly, the specific design criteria
shall be proven through hydraulic calculations.
9.
Inside Hose Streams

NOTE: Engineer to update the hose demands, given below, based on the
most recent versions of NFPA-13, NFPA-14, and UBC.
a.
b.
c.
C.
For Class II standpipe systems supplied from a sprinkler system,

provide 50 gpm at the two most remote outlets or 100 gpm if one
hose outlet exists. Flows shall be added at the point of connection
to the sprinkler system for hydraulic calculation purposes.
For combined standpipe/sprinkler systems, standpipe demands are
added to the sprinkler system demand at the point(s) of connection.
For Class I, II or III standpipe systems not supplied through a
sprinkler system, the minimum demand shall comply with NFPA
#14.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM(S) DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Note: This section includes specific requirements for the system(s) as they pertain
to an individual project. Engineer shall complete the density and area data
for each system or each hazard classification within the project. Contract
documents shall identify the hazard classification of each area within
project boundary. In addition, minimum density (gpm/ft2), minimum
operation area (ft2), inside hose stream (gpm), outside hose stream (gpm)
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15300-25
shall be included per NFPA-13. Domestic demand (gpm) shall be per

actual site conditions.
1.
Exposure protection system as calculated.
2.
Piping C-factors for new, existing, above ground, and underground shall
be included in contract documents.
NOTE: For existing piping older than 5 years, the C factor is not to exceed
100. The C factor for shall be 120 for new steel piping.
3.
Maximum Sprinkler Head Spacing for Light Hazard, Ordinary Hazard,

and Extra Hazard occupancies shall be per NFPA-13.
4.
Special System Considerations

a.
b.
c.
D.
JULY 2012
System Zoning: zoning and subzoning shall be identified and

indicated in contract documents.
Existing Equipment: When an existing system is being expanded,
enough of the existing system shall be indicated on plans to make
all conditions clear.
i.
Sprinklers (make/model/etc.)
ii.
Piping
iii.
Valves (make/model/etc.)
iv.
Mechanical Fittings (make/model/etc.)
v.
Electrical Devices (make/model/etc.)
Antifreeze solution and ratio:
5.
Municipal fire apparatus pumping capacity.
6.
Standpipe demands.
EXISTING EQUIPMENT
1.
The use of existing features and equipment may be considered. Engineer

shall conduct survey, prior to 95% documents, and determine and specify
the extent to which the existing systems and devices shall be used. Clear
directions shall be given to the Contractor in the contract documents.
2.
Before considering existing equipment or piping systems for use in a new

project, all such equipment or system shall be tested/inspected to assure
their operational integrity and current code compliance.
3.
New equipment shall be of the same manufacturer, make and model, as

the existing, where specified in this section.
a.
This shall include, as a minimum:
i.
Sprinkler Heads
ii.
Pipe Schedules
iii.
Electrical Devices
iv.
Specialty Valves
4.
If the existing equipment is not compatible with the new equipment, the
UCB STANDARDS
15300-26
existing equipment shall be replaced unless deemed unnecessary by the

engineer.
5.
3.2
If existing equipment or piping is deemed unusable, same shall be

removed, i.e., abandoned pipe shall not be left in the building without
written approval by the AHJ.
PREPARATION
A.
Any system piping or components which are installed, purchased or fabricated

prior to the Contractor receiving a set of approved shop drawings, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
B.
System installation shall not commence until the Contractor has obtained required
approval of shop drawings.
C.
Contract drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate

every required offset, valve, fitting, etc.
D.
Contract drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for

in either is binding as though called for in both. The most restrictive requirements
shall be applied.
E.
Contract drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop
drawings. Where drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made
from field measurements, contractor shall take necessary measurements and
prepare the drawings.
F.
Before any work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space;
that required piping grades can be maintained without interferences between
systems, with structural elements or with the work of other trades.
G.
Coordinate the installation of fire protection materials and equipment above and
below ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other building
components.
1.
Coordinate ceiling space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict,
install fire protection and electric systems within the cavity space
allocation in the following order:
a.
Fire sprinkler mains and cross mains.
b.
Electrical conduit.
c.
Fire sprinkler branch line piping.
H.
Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
I.
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for
fire protection installations.
J.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of fire protection materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the work.
K.
JULY 2012
Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the

UCB STANDARDS
15300-27
installation of fire protection equipment and materials.

L.
Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install overhead fire
protection services and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
Notify Engineer and Owner of any conditions where headroom of less than 7'-4"
will result.
M.
Install fire protection equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or

replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of
disconnecting and to allow minimum interference with other installations.
N.
3.3
Coordinate connection of fire protection systems with exterior underground

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required
connection for each service.
INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS
A.
B.
JULY 2012
GENERAL
1.
Any damages resulting from the failure of any new system components
shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.
2.
System shall be installed in a workmanlike manner.
PIPING REQUIREMENTS
1.
In dry pipe systems and preaction systems, all piping shall be sloped to
facilitate drainage toward the point of the supply. All trapped sections of
piping in both dry and wet systems shall be equipped with auxiliary drains
per NFPA-13.
2.
Piping shall be cleaned and kept clean and free of foreign matter before
and during erection, including careful removal of dirt, scale, welding
icicle or beads, cutting, burrs and similar items.
3.
Install unions in pipe two (2) inch or smaller, adjacent to each valve.
a.
Unions are not necessary on flanged devices or in piping
installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
4.
Pipelines with screwed fittings shall be made up with as few joints as

possible.
a.
Screwed joints shall have clean machine-cut threads and shall be
made up with a piping compound or Teflon pipe thread tape. The
threads for opened joints shall be cleaned and new piping
compound or Teflon pipe thread tape applied before remaking the
joint.
5.
Flange bolts shall be evenly tightened with wrenches only.

a.
Flanged joints that have been made up and broken shall be made
with new, unused gaskets supplied with no cost added to the
contract amount.
UCB STANDARDS
15300-28
6.
The end of each cross main shall be equipped with a minimum of 1-1/4"
threaded/capped connections in order to facilitate flushing. See NFPA-13
for complete requirements.
7.
In cases where pipe sections are cut and removed on the job site for the
installation of sprinklers, branch lines, cross mains, etc., the circular pipe
sections shall be removed from the pipe, and available for inspection at the
time of hydrostatic testing.
8.
Pipe outlets shall be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges as required
in NFPA#13 and UPC, i.e., remove burrs to the full interior diameter of
the pipe.
9.
The system riser shall not be attached to the supply connection until the
underground piping is flushed, tested and accepted by the AHJ. The two
week notice requirements and rescheduling conditions, as stated under
section 3.01-A.3 is applicable.
10.
Attachment of hangers and supports:

a.
Hangers shall be attached to the supporting structure by means of
approved beam clamps, mounting plates, brackets, clips, bolts or
concrete anchors.
b.
Drilling, cutting or burning of, or welding to, structural members
for attachment of hangers and supports shall be subject to prior
approval by the AHJ.
c.
Powder driven fasteners shall not be used unless prior approval by
the AHJ is received.
d.
Hanger components shall be installed straight and true.
e.
Wall assemblies shall not be considered as an acceptable
replacement for hangers.
11.
Piping shall be concealed to the maximum extent practical.
NOTE: Engineer to discuss with the Owner's representative and determine the
locations where the piping may be exposed. Contract documents shall
give clear directions to the Contractor. Approval by the campus architect
is required in architecturally sensitive areas.
12.
C.
VALVE REQUIREMENTS
1.
JULY 2012
Field changes in the piping layout or pipe sizes shall not be made without
the prior approval of the Engineer and the AHJ.
Riser Control Valve

a.
Rooms or enclosures housing sprinkler system control valves shall
be equipped with adequate heating, lighting and adequate
clearance.
b.
System control valves shall be made accessible and operable from
the floor, unless otherwise determined by the Engineer and agreed
upon by the AHJ in writing.
UCB STANDARDS
15300-29
2.
Fire Hose Valves

a.
Fire department hose valves shall be installed no lower than 3'-6"
above the finished floor or no higher than 5'-0" above the finished
floor level. Contractor shall verify and implement up-to-date code
requirements.
b.
Fire hose valves located in cabinets shall be arranged so that the

outlet points outward perpendicular (90 degrees) from the wall, the
outlet projecting from the midpoint of the total height of the
cabinet and a minimum of six (6) inches shall be maintained
between the cabinet walls and the outlets. Hose valves shall be
installed so that the handle is no closer than 1-1/2" to a wall or
cabinet wall.
c.
The location of standpipe hose valve and fire extinguisher cabinets

shall be identified as follows:
i.
The inner panel of the cabinet shall be painted with red
reflective paint.
ii.
Red and white reflective tape shall be installed on the
exterior of the cabinets on the sides or side molding.
d.
Concealed locations of all hose valves shall be identified by signs

on all doors which shall be passed through to gain access to valve
locations from the nearest common area corridor. For signs see
section 3.03-H.4.
NOTE: Engineer to determine the need for hose cabinets, based
on building aesthetics and Owner's and Architect's
requirements, and specify accordingly.
3.
Drain And Test Valves

NOTE: All main drains shall discharge to the building exterior through a
properly sized drain riser. Engineer to determine and specify
means and routing of drain discharge. If the drain discharge shall
be in a proper location inside the building, Engineer will identify
the location of drain discharge and indicate on drawings.
a.
b.
c.
d.
JULY 2012
If the fire protection piping is located at a lower elevation than the

adjoining building grade, an outside drain installed to conduct
main drain tests and a system auxiliary drain piped to a floor drain
is desirable. An extra valve installed on the system drain piping
maybe necessary in order to isolate the system drain during tests of
the two (2) inch main drain.
NOTE: Engineer to determine.
Auxiliary drains and valves shall be provided as required by
NFPA-13.
Sight glasses shall be provided on all inspector's test connections
where discharge cannot be seen while valves are operated.
The inspector's test connection, where required, shall terminate at a
forty-five (45) degree elbow with a sprinkler which has the frame
UCB STANDARDS
15300-30
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
Dry Pipe Valves

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
Adequate clearance shall be provided to facilitate maintenance.

Valve shall be adequately supported.
Engineer shall indicate valve location on drawings to allow for
adequate draining of the system.
Valve shall be located within an artificially lighted and heated
enclosure.
Valve shall be installed in the vertical position at twenty-four (24)
inches to forty eight (48) inches above the finished floor.
If required by NFPA-13 or otherwise determined by the engineer, a
means to accelerate air depletion shall be provided. This includes
supplying accelerators and/or exhausters.
NOTE: Where feasible, it is desirable to provide a small hose
valve, e.g. from the domestic line, in the vicinity of each
dry valve in order to facilitate valve reset during
maintenance.
Preaction Valves
a.
b.
c.
JULY 2012
and strut assembly removed; other restricted orifices listed for the
same purpose are acceptable. These shall be piped to the building
exterior at grade level. If installed on the building interior, it shall
include a restricting orifice and discharge to an acceptable drain
with adequate capacity. The orifice size shall be the same as the
smallest sprinkler installed on the system.
All drains located inside the building, shall be piped to the outside
of the building at a point free from causing water damage,
terminating with a forty-five (45) degree elbow. This includes the
drain for the fire department connection piping. (Exception:
Auxiliary drains).
Contractor shall supply and install a concrete splash block with a
minimum length of four (4) feet to direct the drain or test discharge
water so as not to disturb adjacent landscape.
All shut-off, drain, and test valves which are placed in concealed
spaces shall have the standard sign affixed in a visible location; see
section 3.03-H. For example, if a valve is located above a ceiling,
a sign indicating the location and type of valve shall be located on
the wall, immediately below the ceiling.
Drain valves shall be made accessible and operable from floor
unless otherwise proposed by the engineer and accepted by AHJ in
writing.
Adequate clearance shall be provided to facilitate maintenance.

Valve shall be adequately supported.
Engineer shall indicate valve location on drawings to allow for
adequate draining of the system.
d.
Valve shall be located within an artificially lighted and heated
enclosure.
e.
Valve shall be installed in the vertical position at twenty-four (24)
to forty-eight (48) inches above the finished floor.
NOTE: Efforts shall be made to provide floor drains near dry and
UCB STANDARDS
15300-31
preaction valves.
D.
GAUGES
1.
E.
F.
G.
Minimum of two (2) water pressure gauges shall be installed on the

system riser; one (1) on the supply side and one (1) on the system side of
the main control and backflow check valves.
SPRINKLERS
1.
Installations shall be in accordance with sprinkler listing and

manufacturers recommended practices.
2.
Coordinate sprinkler piping and head installations with mechanical,

electrical fixtures, other components, and building structural elements.
3.
Maintain the maximum height possible.
4.
Replace sprinklers that are damaged or coated during the construction

process by paint, sprayed fire proofing, or similar material.
5.
If sprinklers are not specified to be quarter point, they shall be installed in

a manner to allow easy removal of ceiling tiles
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

1.
Siamese connections serving the same building shall be interconnected so

that each one charges all systems.
2.
Fire department connections shall be located as required per NFPA-13 and

UFC.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
NOTE: Engineer to coordinate with work in Division-16.
JULY 2012
1.
Tamper switch signals shall initiate a unique supervisory alarm signal at

the building FACP.
2.
Other system supervisory signals shall provide unique indications of

system supervisory status.
3.
An exterior electric bell with flashing strobe assembly shall be installed

for each system at a minimum height of ten (10) feet or maximum fifteen
(15) feet above adjacent grade, above the fire department connection
serving the sprinkler system; coordinate with Division 16.
4.
If an existing exterior warning signal exists, re-use of the device will

depend on the Owners approval as to its condition and location. If reused,
contractor shall be responsible for its proper operation.
NOTE: Electrical engineer shall conduct building survey and specify
UCB STANDARDS
15300-32
what portion of the existing devices may be used.

H.
IDENTIFICATION SIGNS (SUPPLEMENTAL TO SECTION 15190)

1.
Signs shall be permanently marked and constructed of weather-proof

metal or rigid plastic.
2.
Signs shall be secured to a device or the building wall with substantial and
corrosion-resistant chains or fasteners.
3.
Where sprinkler or standpipe control valves, test locations, or dry-pipe

auxiliary drains are located in a room, above the ceiling, or in a concealed
space, the location of the valve shall be indicated by a 2"x6" sign. Signs
shall be located as follows:
a.
If a valve is located inside a room, a sign shall be placed above the
door tight to the door jam directly above the door handle. Similar
signs are required on all intermediate doors within rooms.
b.
If a valve is located above the ceiling, a sign shall be placed
directly under the access panel or proper ceiling tile to access
valve. Sign shall be tight to ceiling.
c.
In other locations, AHJ shall be contacted for specific direction of
sign placement.
4.
Signs used to identify the location of fire hose valves, in a closet, shall be
a minimum of 1'x 2' and have letters with a two (2) inch height and 1/4"
stroke.
5.
Where a water supply fire pump is provided, a sign shall be located near
the pump indicating the minimum pressure and flow required at the pump
discharge flange to meet the system demands.
Valves
a.
All control, drain, and test connection valves shall be identified in
accordance with NFPA 13.
b.
All main and sectional system control valves, including water
supply control valves, shall have a sign indicating the portion of
the system controlled by the valve.
6.
JULY 2012
7.
Where sprinkler piping is supplied by a system with more than one system
riser, a sign shall be located at each dual or multiple feed connection to the
combination system riser to identify that to isolate the sprinkler system
served by the control valve, an additional control valve or valves at other
locations shall be shut off. The sign shall identify the location of the
additional control valves.
8.
Fire Department Connections

a.
Each fire department connection shall be designated by a sign
having raised letters at least 1 inch in height cast on a plate or
fitting indicating service design, e.g., "AUTOSPKR.", "AUTO
SPKR. AND STANDPIPE".
b.
For manual/dry standpipe a sign shall be provided stating
"MANUAL/DRY STANDPIPE FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT USE
ONLY". A sign is also to indicate the pressure required at the
UCB STANDARDS
15300-33
c.
inlets to deliver the system demand.

Where a fire department connection services only a portion of a
system or building, a sign shall be attached indicating portions of
the building served.
9.
The installing contractor shall provide a sign identifying the design basis
of a system as hydraulic calculations or pipe schedule. The sign shall be
located at the water supply control valve for sprinkler or standpipe
systems.
10.
For buildings without central station reporting, an approved identification

sign should be provided for outside alarm devices in accordance with
NFPA 13: A-4-6.1.1, which will state:
"SPRINKLER FIRE ALARM - WHEN BELL RINGS CALL 911."
I.
3.4
PROJECT COORDINATION
1.
Core Drilling
a.
Provide necessary equipment for core drilling or other equipment
to penetrate walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Provide pipe sleeves
and patching to maintain the structural assemblies fire resistant
rating where required. All cutting, notching, etc., of structural
elements shall be approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer.
2.
Interferences
a.
Layout the system to minimize interferences between the fire
protection piping and equipment designed and installed by others.
b.
Fire protection system zoning shall be consistent with the fire
alarm layout.
3.
Welding, Cutting, and other Hot Work

a.
Cutting or of pipes using heat/ignition generating devices shall not
be conducted inside any portion of existing buildings without
written approval from the University. Follow the University
Central Station and Hot Work Permit Procedures. Welding of
pipes on-site is prohibited by NFPA-13 and only shop welding
shall be allowed. Brazing and soldering of copper tubes shall not
be conducted within the buildings prior to application and
acceptance of hot work permits.
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.
JULY 2012
Engineer and the AHJ shall witness all acceptance tests and inspections.
a.
A minimum of three (3) working days notice is required.
b.
For cancellation of a test, at least 48 hours notice is required, or it
shall be considered as a re-inspection. The Contractor shall be
responsible for costs of re-inspections incurred by the AHJ.
c.
Prior to the time of inspection, the Contractor shall verify that all
equipment involved in the test are functioning and are placed as
UCB STANDARDS
15300-34
d.
B.
2.
Re-inspections
a.
If a system fails any of the above tests, the same scheduling
procedure shall be followed.
b.
If more than two tests are necessary, contractor shall be
responsible for any added costs incurred by the Owner.
3.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment, such as ladders and
special tools.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
1.
The Contractor shall conduct the following tests for acceptance of the
system installation. This includes all existing equipment which was reused
in the system. Record the inspections on a copy of Material and Test
Certificate shown in NFPA #13 or similar approved forms. Test report
information shall be completed, by the Contractor, prior to each
inspection.
a.
The Contractor shall perform all tests and inspections with the
AHJ present. A fire alarm representative shall be present when
necessary to test fire alarm devices connected to the sprinkler
system.
b.
c.
C.
required by contract documents and shop drawings.

Perform final system testing in conjunction with the fire alarm and
detection system specified in Section 16720.
Prior to any tests on sprinkler/standpipe systems, the piping shall

be flushed, as required by NFPA-13, to remove any foreign matter
which could have entered the system during installation.
Functional tests shall be performed on all valves and manual
operating devices.
SPECIFIC SYSTEM TESTS (WET PIPE)

NOTE: For hydrant flow, water supply tests, see section 3.1-A.3. Note that two
weeks of notification is required for such tests.
JULY 2012
1.
Only DowFrost (Propylene Glycol with inhibitor) antifreeze agent or other

campus approved products shall be used in antifreeze sprinkler systems.
2.
Antifreeze systems shall be hydrostatically tested prior to introducing

antifreeze solution into the system.
3.
For retrofit installations, a pneumatic test with a maximum pressure of

forty (40) psi shall be conducted prior to a hydrostatic test to avoid any
water damage due to leaks. This test does not replace the hydrostatic test.
4.
Hydrostatic Test
a.
All piping, including all supply pipe to the fire department
connection, shall be hydrostatically tested at fifty (50) psi in excess
of the maximum pressure, or 200 psi, whichever is greater. The
minimum test duration shall be two (2) hours with no visible leaks
UCB STANDARDS
15300-35
or drop in pressure. This test shall be conducted prior to concealing

any piping. A complete installation inspection shall be conducted
in conjunction with the hydrostatic test while all piping is exposed.
b.
5.
6.
D.
If visible signs of leakage occur or the system looses pressure

within the 2-hour test period, the test shall be considered as failed
and shall require re-testing after correction of the cause of leakage.
Final System Inspection

a.
A final inspection shall be performed when the system installation
is complete, which includes: a complete functional test of all
system components and of all alarms via the inspectors test
correction (manual tripping of alarm devices is not acceptable.)
b.
A complete installation inspection shall be conducted by the

Engineer and the AHJ at the time of the final inspection which will
be coordinated with the work under Section 16720.
c.
A main drain test shall be conducted with the control valve wide
open. The main drain valve shall be opened and remain open until
the system pressure stabilizes.
For antifreeze systems, test results shall be recorded for the solution ratio.
SPECIFIC SYSTEM TESTS (DRY AND PREACTION)

1.
All testing requirements for wet pipe systems in this section shall be
conducted.
2.
An air test shall be performed as follows:

a.
Air pressure of forty (40) psi shall be maintained for twenty-four
(24) hours without losing more than 1-1/2 psi during the test
period when the system is required to maintain air pressure.
3.
A functional test shall be conducted on all detection devices, valves and

drainage facilities for preaction and dry systems.
a.
Maximum dry valve trip time shall be fifteen (15) seconds from
the time the inspectors test valve is completely open.
b.
Maximum water delivery time to the inspectors test for dry
systems shall be sixty (60) seconds from when the inspectors test
valve is completely open.
4.
Dry standpipe system piping shall be hydrostatically tested at fifty (50) psi
above the maximum street pressure.
5.
After a functional test of a dry or preaction valve, if required by valve

type, the valve assembly cover plate shall be removed to verify proper
valve operation.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15300-36
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.02
Section Includes:
1.
Pipe, tube, fittings, joint materials.
2.
Plumbing systems
a.
Water: Domestic, de-ionized, distilled.
b.
Waste: Storm, sanitary and acid.
c.
Laboratory: Compressed air, vacuum.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2.
Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods:

a.
Valves.
b.
Pipe hangers.
c.
Supports and accessories.
d.
Identification of piping.
e.
Freeze protection systems.
f.
Dielectric pipe fittings and isolators.
g.
Welding.
h.
Sleeves.
i.
Plates and closures.
3.
Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control:

a.
Piping isolation hangers and supports.
b.
Flexible piping connectors.
4.
Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties.
5.
Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.
6.
Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment.
7.
Section 15460 - Special Plumbing Equipment Systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
JULY 2012
Point of Connection: Normally inside foundation of the building.

Maintenance: Isolate areas by sectional valving with easy maintenance
access.
Piping runs prohibited over or in the following locations:
UCB STANDARDS
15410-1
a.
b.
c.
d.
JULY 2012
Elevator machine rooms.

Telephone equipment rooms.
Sensitive instrument and equipment rooms.
Electrical switch gear, busways and equipment rooms.
4.
Domestic Water Supply (from flanged connection within building):

a.
Service supply pressure can reach 130 psi. Regulate down to 70
psi.
b.
Select water distribution velocities for minimal noise levels while
maintaining adequate flow. Velocities shall not exceed 7 ft/sec for
piping greater than 1 , and shall not exceed 15 ft/100ft head loss
for piping 1 and smaller. During peak demand and through
operation of flushometers, system pressure must maintain 30 psi
minimum or fixture manufacturers minimum requirement at the
highest or furthest location of a flushometer (whichever is most
stringent).
c.
Specify flange connections to valves and equipment for PRV
station at each end of the legs, to allow for component
replacement.
d.
All branch isolation valves to be within 2 ft. of main.
e.
No dead legs on domestic water lines more than 4 ft.
f.
All lab faucets need to have a vacuum breaker.
g.
No butterfly valves on domestic water systems.
5.
Liquid Waste Removal:

a.
The University Sanitary Sewerage System is connected to the City
of Boulder Waste Treatment System and must conform with the
requirements of the City of Boulder.
b.
Design sanitary waste systems to allow for future addition of
laterals to accommodate 20 percent building revisions in research
and laboratory buildings.
c.
Design acid waste systems to allow for future addition of laterals
to accommodate 20 percent expansion of system capacity.
d.
Per IPC, "vent pipe shall rise at least 6 inches in height above
flood level of fixture (including floor drains) before offsetting
horizontally. If this is not possible, combination waste and vents
are required (University approval required).
e.
Special Note: Crosses in lieu of double-wye drainage fittings for
common drain between lavatories are prohibited. Staggered tees
are preferred. If this is not possible, double-wye drains should be
specified with each "dirt leg" vented and a clean-out above the
double-wye, above lavatory height.
f.
The use of sewage ejectors is strongly discouraged. However, if
needed, specify duplex submersible ejector pumps. Sewage
ejectors need a gas-tight lid, and deeper than 5 feet, need stainlesssteel rail system.
6.
Whenever remodeling, the plumbing systems in those areas need to be

brought up to code and UCB standards, unless authorized by UCB
personnel.
7.
Water Supply for Maintenance:

UCB STANDARDS
15410-2
a.
b.
Provide a service sink with hot and cold water in the main
mechanical room(s) of the building. If a water-treatment station is
located in the mechanical room, locate the sink within 3 feet, and
include a combination emergency eye and body washing device.
Provide a hose-bibb close to cooling towers and condensers, unless
a wall hydrant is available within 20 feet of furthest point of tower.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Domestic Hot and Cold Water:

1.
Copper tube Type K soldered to wrought copper fittings or to cast bronze

tensile strength fittings. For tubing less than 2, use low-liquidus/solidus
solder, which does not contain lead or antimony, with a shear strength
equal or greater than 10,000 psi. For tubing 2 and above, use 15% silver
solder to braze the fittings. Brazer shall have brazing or medical gas
certification. Braze mains in hallways 2 and larger.
Manufacturer: All-State "Aquasafe," Bridgit or approved equal.
2.
B.
Provide plastic isolators at all clamps.
Interior Storm Drain, Sanitary Sewer, Waste and Vent:

1.
Buried Pipe:
a.
Centrifugally-cast iron soil pipe with cast iron drainage fittings.
b.
Joint materials and systems may be bell and spigot with neoprene
gaskets and lubricant (preferred), or University-approved no-hub"
with stainless steel bands, Only roof drains and underground
sewer piping shall have super duty no-hub couplings.
2.
Suspended Pipe:
Note: Systems exceeding band ratings shall be substituted with Schedule
40 galvanized threaded steel pipe or galvanized Victaulic pipe.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
JULY 2012
Service weight (SV) cast iron pipe "No Hub System" using hubless
cast iron soil pipe couplings certified to withstand a minimum of
13 psig internal pressure.
No-Hub couplings shall be of "super-duty" type, such as Husky
Series 4000 or equivalent, for all roof drains.
Where stack pressure may theoretically exceed the pressure rating
of the coupling, restrain as per standard ASTM C1540.
For drain leaders exceeding 30 feet below plumbing fixtures, roof
drains or gutter drains, use schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with
threaded cast-iron drainage fittings. Use teflon tape or compound.
Clamp-type (e.g., Victaulic) connectors may be used as alternates.
PVC shall not be used for any application within buildings, unless
approved by the University.
DWV copper pipe is not allowed. Use type L copper instead.
UCB STANDARDS
15410-3
C.
D.
E.
Acid Resistant Drain, Waste and Vent:

1.
Polypropylene:
a.
Manufacturers:
i.
Enfield
ii.
Orion
b.
Mechanical joints are required throughout the piping system.
2.
CPVC
a.
Manufacturers:
i.
Spears Labwaste
b.
Only manufacturer-approved solvent cement may be used for
assembling.
Compressed Air:
1.
Shop and Industrial Use (less than 250 psi and less than 200F):
a.
Type L copper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered
joints same as domestic water.
2.
Laboratory:
a.
Use tubing material as required by laboratory needs. Follow
appropriate methods for soldering to avoid contamination.
Laboratory Vacuum: (Classroom and Industrial Use)

1.
F.
Type L copper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints
same as domestic water.
Distilled and De-ionized Water:

1.
Schedule 80 Polypropylene, having no pigments or plasticizers, with

compatible valves.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Specify that all underground plumbing shall be surrounded by a minimum of 6" of

"squeegee."
B.
Specify that "all plumbing piping and fixtures shall be installed under the direct,
on-site supervision of a journeyman plumber licensed by the State of Colorado.
The ratio of plumbing apprentice-helpers shall not exceed two apprentice-helpers
for each journeyman."
PIPING CLEANING (STERILIZATION)

A.
JULY 2012
10% bleach will be used to perform the sterilization. Bleach will be fed by
injecting it into the main water supply header feeding the facility. Below is the
sterilization procedure.
UCB STANDARDS
15410-4
B.
1.
Run all domestic water supply faucets at 1/2-1/4 gallon per minute.
2.
Begin pumping bleach and adjust bleach injection rate such that a 1.0-2.0
ppm free Cl2 residual is attained at all faucets.
3.
Maintain above flow rates and free chlorine residuals for a 4-6 hour
period.
4.
Cease bleach injection. Monitor free Cl2 residuals at faucets and observe
when free Cl2 residual drops below 02. ppm. Run all faucets for an
additional two hours at a 1/2-1/4 gallon per minute rate.
A bacteriological test report from an independent contractor/laboratory shall be

submitted to the Owner. A sample from each floor of each wing shall be tested.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.01
TESTING
A.
Roof drains shall be tested with water from discharge of the building up to the
nearest roof drain. If there are roof drains higher than the nearest drain, the
section from between these drains shall be tested separately.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15410-5
SECTION 15430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Plumbing specialty items or components associated with domestic

water and drainage systems.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3.
Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
4.
Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.
5.
Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment.
REFERENCE
A.
Latest American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE) Data Book, Volume 1,

Fundamentals of Plumbing Design.
B.
For water-hammer arrestors: Plumbing Drainage Institute (PDI) Standard WH-201.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
JULY 2012
1.
Roof Drains:
a.
Carefully coordinate location and depth of drains to assure adequate
pitch of the drainage area to drain.
b.
Size drains in accordance with ASPE Data Book, Volume 1,
Fundamentals of Plumbing Design, Chapter 2, Storm Drainage
Systems.
c.
All roof drains connected to storm sewers shall have test-tee cleanouts, at the base on the exterior wall of the building or in the ground
immediately outside the building.
d.
Roof and overflow drains shall share the same pan.
e.
Strainer/dome shall be made of cast iron.
f.
Roof drain pans shall be secured to the structure.
2.
Floor Drains:
a.
Provide floor drains in shower, toilet rooms, mechanical rooms and
other areas as required by building design, such as near reducedpressure backflow preventers. Non-public toilet rooms with one or
two fixtures may not have a floor drain.
STANDARDS
15430-1
b.
JULY 2012
Floor sinks are required for indirect drains, and are preferred in
mechanical rooms.
3.
Downspouts:
a.
Minimum downspout size to be 4".
b.
Terminate with downspout nozzle.
c.
Coordinate required location of splash blocks under every downspout.
4.
Cleanouts:
a.
Select cleanout locations and access for minimum disturbance of
occupant functions and building systems operation during cleanout
servicing. Ascertain that Architect and University agree with location
and appearance.
b.
Specify cleanouts above each urinal (56" AFF on single-stack risers)
and multiple lavatories (42" AFF or at least above flood level of lav.)
If wall is partially covered with tile, the cleanouts shall be within the
tile field or above it, not partially in each.
c.
Specify cleanouts 6" above highest trap on that floor on the main vent
of each group of fixtures and in vent stacks for isolated fixtures on
each floor.
d.
Design cleanouts full size at base of each stack and at end of each
horizontal run. Do not exceed 100 ft. on horizontal runs.
e.
Specify cleanout plugs line-size up to 3", and 4" for line sizes 4"
through 6".
f.
Specify wall cleanouts where piping is concealed in walls or nonaccessible chases, 42" AFF. Main line shall be 18 AFF.
g.
Where cast iron pipe is used, specify cleanouts with cast iron bodies
and threaded "ABS" or "Delrin" plugs. Use Never-Seize on threads.
h.
Design locations for cleanouts where they will be easily accessible for
rodding. Provide sheet note that cleanouts shall be 2 from finished
surface of wall.
5.
Hose Bibbs:
a.
Provide hose bibbs with vacuum breakers as required by code and in
the following locations:
i. Each mechanical equipment room.
ii. Kitchen areas equipped with floor drainage systems.
iii. Within 20 feet of furthest point of cooling towers and
condensers.
b.
External hose bibbs shall be installed as required by code or to meet
landscaping or maintenance needs.
c.
Mounting height to be 42" above floor in equipment rooms.
d.
An isolation valve shall be provided near all hose bibs to minimize
system draining.
6.
Shock Arresters for Water:

a.
Give careful attention to the prevention of water hammer in the design
of water distribution systems.
b.
Provide shock arresters in accordance with Plumbing Drainage
Institute (PDI) Standard WH-201.
STANDARDS
15430-2
c.
d.
e.
JULY 2012
Specify mounting as close to the line or quick-closing valve as

possible. Remote mounting or excessive (over 6") nipple mounting
will not be acceptable.
Specify or show on Drawings threaded ball valve between pipe and
shock arrester.
Specify 20 x 20 minimum access panels centered on each shock
arrester that is otherwise inaccessible.
7.
Reduced-Pressure Backflow Preventer (RPBFP):

a.
Note: Water entry to building shall be located at or above grade so
that testing and emergency outflow of water from RPBFP can be
drained to grade.
b.
Provide reduced-pressure type backflow preventers on all connections
between the domestic water system and make-up supplies to any nonpotable system, (e.g. Water Heating, Boilers, Cooling Towers, Chiller,
Solar, Etc.).
c.
Specify to anchor backflow preventer in place.
d.
Specify air gap drain assembly for drips and hang and anchor drain
tubing rigid and stable to drain receptor.
e.
Specify test and approval by certified tester.
f.
Specify strainer upstream of all backflow preventers.
g.
Specify that height AFF not to exceed 5 feet, and not be above
ceilings.
h.
Strainer is required before RPBFP device.
i.
Specify 2 RPBFP device as bypass around all new RPBFP devices on
service to buildings. (Sizing is dependent on building use: A larger
size may be required. Consult University for approval.)
j.
RPBFP low level alarm shall be above drain in containment tank.
k.
Reduced-pressure backflow-prevention devices on mains need to be
installed before PRV station.
l.
Reduced-pressure backflow-prevention devices shall have isolation
valves before and after device. Device valves are considered part of
device, not isolation valves. Unions shall be used for 1-1/2" and under.
Flanges shall be used for 2" and over. All flanges shall have stainlesssteel trim.
8.
Water Pressure Regulation:

a.
Use self-contained pressure regulating valves with stainless steel seat
ring.
b.
Valves to have bronze bodies for 200 psi working pressure.
c.
Average main pressure can be assumed 100 psi and to be reduced to
about 70 psi.
d.
Use at least three valves, such that the sum of cross-section areas of
PRVs shall match cross-section area of pipe that supplies station.
e.
Reduced pressure for 20 percent valve shall be 70 psi, one of the 40
percent valves set at 68psi, and the other at 66psi. Install full size "Y"
pattern epoxy-coated or brass strainer on inlet side of valve assembly.
Depending on the size of the service, we prefer 2 inch valves. Multiple
2 inch valves make it easier to replace a bad valve and are less likely
to affect the building water supply.
f.
Install pressure gages, complete with ball valves.
g.
Gage range 0 psi to 200 psi.
STANDARDS
15430-3
h.
i.
j.
9.
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves:

a.
Provide relief valves on all water heaters and pressure vessels per
ASME Standard.
10.
Trap Primers:
a.
When near a toilet room, provide Sloan trap primers where traps in
floor drains may dry out and allow sewer gas to escape into building
spaces; for example, toilet rooms and mechanical rooms or plenums.
When not near a toilet room, provide Proset Trap Guard.
11.
Under-lavatory scald protection:

a.
Specify pre-molded insulation covers for drains and water supplies to
ADA accessible lavatories.
12.
Stop-valves:
a.
Standard brass-stem -turn stops with handle-(no plastic).
13.
Emergency showers
a.
Specify that installation shall meet American National Standard
Z358.1.
14.
Main Water Meters:

a.
General
i.
Project Engineer of Record shall submit building annual
consumption projections.
ii.
Units
a)
Water shall be in kgal for consumption
b.
JULY 2012
Gages to be house side and on service side of each reducing valve

inside of each shut-off valve for each P.R.V.
Provide 2 emergency fire-hose hook-up with valve between isolation
and reduce pressure.
Unions shall be used for 1-1/2" and under. Flanges shall be used for 2"
and over. All flanges shall have stainless-steel trim
Utility Services Meter Panel (UMP)

i.
All meter panels shall be in accordance with the University of
Colorado Boulder Utility Standard No. EO-100-A latest
revision for integration into the Utility Control System (UCS).
Coordinate UMP with all other utility main meters (ie steam,
chilled water, and electric).
ii.
Meter Panel shall house flow computers (totalizers) and
Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) Gateways devices.
iii.
The UCS gateway (Master) device shall reside in the meter
panel.
a)
Gateway device shall be industrial grade with internal
firewall.
b)
Acceptable manufacturers:
a.
MOXA Mgate Model #3170 (or approved equal)
c)
All meters (chilled water, electrical, steam, domestic
water) shall communicate via a dedicated RS-485
network utilizing ModBus RTU Protocol.
STANDARDS
15430-4
iv.
v.
c.
Flow Computer/Totalizer:
i.
Specify Kessler-Ellis Products (KEP) ST-1 panel mounted
flow computer to be installed and connected to all main water
meters. The KEP flow computer will receive the analog flow
signal (or pulse output) as an input from the meter and send
consumption (gallons) output via Modbus RTU Protocol to the
ModBus Gateway over RS485 communication trunk. All
wiring and terminations are to be completed by Temperature
Controls contractor or electrical contractor (pre-approval
required) including installation of KEP, wiring of meter to
KEP, wiring of KEP to ModBus Gateway, setup and KEP
programming. Commissioning shall be performed by Utility
Services. Refer to Division 15 section 950, 951, and 955 for
further information on BAS requirements
d.
Electromagnetic type meter:

i.
Specifiy in-line, full diameter, flanged, electromagnetic type
meter for all service larger than 2. Meter to be manufactured
by Onicon, Inc, model 3100, or UCB approved equivalent,
with internally generated 4 20 mA analog output. Meter
sizing and installation shall be approved by UCB Utility
Services.
ii.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a)
Onicon model F-3100 series
b)
Rosemount
c)
Yokogawa
d)
ABB
e.
Bronze Disc Meter:

i.
Specify bronze disc meter with RTR register on service 2 and
below. The RTR shall pulse to the KEP ST1. When it is
determined a compound meter is required for 2 service a mag
meter shall be specified. Disc meter to be manufactured by
Badger or UCB approved equal. Meter sizing and installation
shall be accepted by UCB Utility Services.
f.
Small Domestic Water Meters

i.
These meters are used for makeup lines for cooling towers and
evaporative coolers, and other similar applications where UCB
can obtain sewer credit from the city
ii.
Hersey Measurement Co., Niagara Meter Line, MTX Series,
Model 433, 1% accuracy, standard totalizer and calibrated
contacts for remote monitoring.
iii.
JULY 2012
One dedicated IP connection shall be installed for the UMP

A dedicated 115V circuit shall be supplied for the UMP.
Remote Monitoring
a)
Unless exempted by the University, the meter shall be
connected to the Andover Controls system for remote
monitoring of water usage. A two-wire, non-powered,
STANDARDS
15430-5
connection is required. The signal to the Andover will

be a pulsed (counter) input. Each pulse corresponds to
a fixed number of gallons and the Temperature
Controls Contractor shall program the system to
calculate and display the total number of gallons
passing through the meter.
LEED: Required for certification.
15.
Backflow Prevention
a.
Humidifiers and Evaporative coolers shall have a potable water supply
and have an air gap or an ASSE 1012 or an ASSE 1022-listed device.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
Floor drains, floor sinks, planter drains, deck drains, garage drains, trench drains, roof
drains, downspout nozzles, storm drain expansion joints, cleanout fittings, sanitary
vent terminal, and air gap fittings:
1.
Josam
2.
J.R. Smith
3.
Wade
4.
Zurn
Trench Drains-Heavy Duty C.I. Grate and Frame:

1.
J-Mark Foundry
2.
Maclear Manufacturing Co.
3.
Neenah Foundry
Sillcocks:
1.
D.
E.
JULY 2012
Woodford Model 67 Series, B67 Series
Hose Bibbs:
1.
Finished Rooms: Chicago Faucet.
2.
Unfinished & Equipment Rooms: Woodford.
Shock Arresters:
1.
Precision Plumbing Products Co. ("P.P.P.").
2.
Zurn
STANDARDS
15430-6
F.
G.
3.
JR Smith
4.
Josam
5.
Wade
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer (Main):

1.
Febco 860 for 2-1/2 and larger for containment within buildings.
2.
Febco 825Y for 2 and smaller
3.
Specify strainer before RPBFP device, brass or epoxy-coated iron
4.
Specify 2 RPBFP device as bypass around all new RPBFP devices on service
to buildings. (Sizing is dependant on building use: A larger size may be
required. Consult University for approval.)
5.
Carbonated-beverage dispensers to have an ASSE 1013-listed device installed

when the building does not have building backflow containment device, with
no copper or brass installed downstream of the device, as per the City of
Boulder. If the building does have a building backflow containment device,
install ASSE 1022-listed device.
Double Check Assemblies (For Fire Systems):

1.
H.
Pressure Vacuum Breakers (For Irrigation):

1.
I.
K.
L.
Breaker Watts 008 QT, Watts 008 QTS
Water Pressure Regulation Valve (Only):

1.
Mueller
2.
Watts
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves (Bronze or Brass):

1.
Kunkle
2.
Watts
Trap Primers:
1.
JULY 2012
Febco 765
Spill-Resistant Vacuum (For evap. coolers, cooling towers and fume hood clusters):
1.
J.
Febco 850, 870/870V
Near and within restrooms: Sloan F-72-A1

STANDARDS
15430-7
2.
M.
N.
Elsewhere: Use trap-primer alternative (Proset Trap Guard )
Water Meters:
1.
Badger bronze disc meter for 2 and below.
2.
Badger bronze recordall compound meter for 2 to 6.
3.
Above this, request University approval.
4.
Note: All meters must have pulse output for remote read-out, and be
compatible with Andover DDC.
Under-lavatory scald protectors:

1.
Shall comply with ADA Accessible Design
2.
Plumberex Pro Extreme, Truebro Lav Guard or acceptable equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements in Part 1, Subparagraph A, Paragraph 1.03 "System Description" of this Design Guide and use list
to expand on specific requirements of installation for each product specified.
JULY 2012
STANDARDS
15430-8
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Plumbing fixtures and trim associated with plumbing systems.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 12349 Laboratory Service Fixtures
2.
Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements
3.
Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
4.
Section 15410 Plumbing Piping
5.
Section 15430 Plumbing Specialties
6.
Section 15450 Plumbing Equipment
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
JULY 2012
1.
Specify stop valves at all fixtures and equipment and at rough-in locations.
2.
Specify all-white fixtures with acid resisting finish.
3.
Specify rigid anchors behind walls for all supplies and stops to eliminate push or
pull movement.
4.
Specify carriers for all wall mounted fixtures. Do not allow wood or metal
mounting plates anchored to the wall framing or studs.
5.
Laboratory faucets and cocks shall have vacuum breakers, as well as all devices to
which hoses can be connected.
6.
Specify stainless steel edge protectors for janitor sinks. Provide fiber-glass
reinforced polyester (FRP) wall panels.
7.
Tub and tile caulk shall be applied under all self-rimming sinks.
UCB STANDARDS
15440 - 1
1.03
8.
Specify anchor bolts on all WC carriers, and as specified by manufacturers of

lavatories, urinals, and water coolers.
9.
All 17 gauge P-traps shall have brass slip nuts. All tubular brass products shall be
12 gauge.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Specify all installations in accordance with jurisdictional code and health authorities
standards, restrictions and recommendations.
B.
Specify contractor to provide all fixtures and trim using a single manufacturer where
possible. Allow deviation only where specifications indicate otherwise.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
General: Fixtures, manufacturers and catalog numbers specified are shown only to
establish type and quality of fixtures required. Other equal products may be selected from
the following lists of acceptable manufacturers.
B.
Cast iron, and vitreous china (except as noted):

American Standard
Crane (flushometer water closets not allowed)
Eljer
Kohler
Universal-Rundle
Zurn
Housing: Toto for water closets and urinals
LEED WEc3: Water Use Reduction and
LEED WEc2: Innovative Wastewater Technologies
Urinals using not more than 1/8 Gallon per flush (Zurn or pre-approved equal)
C.
Stainless steel type (302) (304) and (316) 18 gage minimum:

Bradley
Elkay
Just
D.
Molded Stone:
Fiat
Florestone
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15440 - 2
E.
Terrazzo:
Bradley
Fiat
Florestone
F.
Water Fountains:
One of each pair of water fountains shall have a water-bottle filler spout.
1.
Drinking Fountains:
Shall have trap outside wall.
Haws Model 1109 or approved equal.
2.
Electric Water Coolers:

(Infrared-sensing actuation is not acceptable.)
Elkay Model EBFSA-8 desired (specify)
Cordley
Halsey Taylor
Haws
Oasis
G.
Emergency Showers and Eye/Face Wash Equipment (Must Meet ANSI Z35.8.1):
Desert Assembly, Inc.
Haws
Sloan
Water-Saver Co.
Additional Manufacturers listed in UCB Standard Section 12349, 2.1 (A) Manufacturers.
H.
Laboratory Faucets and Cocks:

Chicago Faucet Mod. No. 786-GN2BVB-E3-2-369
Zurn (equal to Chicago)
I.
Water Mixing Valves, Thermostatic or Pressure Balanced, with integral checks:

Powers (Preferred)
Simmons
LEED WEc3: Water Use Reduction:
Chicago Faucet Mod. No. 119-NF (Infrared applications.)
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15440 - 3
J.
Faucets, Two Handle, 4-inch center spacing, with ceramic cartridge:

Chicago 802-CP (802-317CP for ADA) with ceramic cartridge
Zurn (equal to Chicago)
Housing:
Delta model 501 WF 4 cc
Delta model 100 WF 8 cc
Chicago Faucet Mod. No. 650-4CP (infrared, 110V transformer required)
K.
Flush Valves: 1.6 gallons per flush for water closets.

Sloan Regal
Zurn Aqua Vantage
Automatic flushing device: Zurn E-Z Flush CFM
Housing: Toto
LEED WEc3: Water Use Reduction and WEc2: Innovative Wastewater Technologies:
If the project is pursuing LEED, use lower flow fixtures.
L.
Automatic Flush Valves for Urinals: Shall not exceed 1/8-gallon per flush. Shall be
battery-operated.
Zurn
Sloan
M.
Shower Equipment: (Shall not exceed 2.5 gallons per minute). Single handle, pressurecompensating:
Delta (Preferred)
Kohler
Leonard
N.
Shower Equipment: (Shall not exceed 1.25 gallons per minute at 60-80 PSI). Single
handle, pressure-compensating:
Bricor (Preferred) Request UCB price
Delta*
Kohler*
Leonard*
Housing Bricor
*Once tested and approved
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15440 - 4

If project is pursuing LEED, use a tamper-proof 2.0 gpm flow restrictor where feasible.)
O.
Garbage Disposers:
Insinkerator Evolution Pro Essential
Waste King
P.
Traps, Stops (all metal), Supplies, Airgaps, Drains:

American Standard
Brasscraft
Eljer
Kohler
Housing Stops to be Aquaflo V-101-A an LPS Company
Q.
Chair Carriers (4-Bolt):

Josam
J. R. Smith
Wade
Zurn
R.
Faucets, Two-Handle, lever style:

Chicago
Zurn
Housing Delta model 501 WF 4cc
Delta model 100 WF 8cc
S.
Kitchen Faucet and Trim:

Kitchen: Chicago single-handle faucet
Housing: Delta, with Single Handle (long) Mod. 100-WFELHHDF
T.
Mop Sink Faucets:

Chicago, with integral checks
2.02
WATER CLOSETS
A.
JULY 2012
Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, Valve Operated, Water Saver, 5" rough with open front seat and no
lid. Shall be certified by an approved agency for operation not exceeding 1.6 gallons per
flush.
UCB STANDARDS
15440 - 5
Plane Code:
Make:
WC-2 (Handicapped)
Kohler/Crane
Color:
Set Floor To Rim:
Flush Valve Make:
Style:
Model:
WC-1
Kohler/Cran
e
K-4330/3446E
White
15"
Sloan
Regal
110-YB
White
18"
Sloan
Regal
110-YB
Chair Carrier:
Make:
Series:
Nipple:
Josam
12000
Cast Iron
Josam
12000
Cast Iron
-6
-6
-4
-4
Model:
Supply Pipe
Support:
Vandal Proof Trim:
K-4330/3-446E
For projects pursuing LEED, use reduced gpf flush valves where feasible. Discuss this
option with University Facilities Maintenance.
2.03
B.
Equals by American Standard, Universal-Rundle
C.
For Housing: Toto
URINALS
A.
White, vitreous china blow-out urinal with flushing rim, trap and 1 " top spud inlet, 2"
outlet and wall hangers. Shall be certified by an approved agency for operation not
exceeding 1/8-gallon per flush.
Zurn or pre-approved equal.
For projects pursuing LEED, use reduced gpf flush valves.
B.
Equals by American Standard, Crane, Universal-Rundle
C.
For housing: Toto
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15440 - 6
2.04
LAVATORIES
A.
White, cast iron, self rimming countertop, 19" round lavatory. C.P. all brass 1-1/4" trap,
supply and waste fitting, vandal resistant aerator to limit flow to 0.5 GPM. Provide closedcell pipe insulation on the waste pipes and hot water pipes below each lavatory for the
handicapped.
Plane Code: L-1
Make: American Standard Model 3301-025
Style: Self Rimming
Size: 19" Dia.
Trap: 1-1/4"
Faucets:
See 2.01J
LEED WEc3: Water Use reduction:
For projects Pursuing LEED certification, use infrared faucets as listed in 2.01J.
Set the run-time to 5 seconds.
Design Note: Where tempered water is used, tempered water must flow within 5 cycles of
lavatory use.
B.
2.05
MOP SERVICE BASIN

A.
2.06
Pre-cast terrazzo, stainless-steel drain, stainless-steel caps on all curbs.
WATER-MIXING VALVE FOR EYE WASHERS AND EMERGENCY SHOWERS

A.
2.07
Equals by Kohler, Crane, Universal-Rundle
Shall meet ASSE 1071
COFFEE-BAR SINKS
A.
Stainless-steel sink with drainboard (Elkay ILRG-4322 or equal). Single-handle faucet

with goose-neck spout (Delta 711HDF).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" in Part 1, Paragraph

A, Paragraph 1.02, "System Description" of this Design Guide and use list to expand on
specific requirements of installation for each fixture specified.
B.
Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers: 36" max. installation height to spout.
C.
Urinals - To meet ADA requirements, set one urinal per restroom with a rim height of 17
and the flushometer handle to 44.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15440 - 7
D.
Water closets and urinals: Caulk wall-mounted fixtures along the top only.
E.
Emergency Showers and Eye/Face Wash Equipment

1.
F.
Installation shall meet ANSI Z358.1 and UCB Standard Section 12349.
Mid-height supports within walls are to be installed for all pipes supplying plumbing
fixtures.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15440 - 8
SECTION 15450
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Water Heaters.
2. Circulating pumps.
3. Sump pumps.
4. Sewage ejectors.
5. General use air compressors.
2. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
4. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
5. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties.
6. Section 15460 - Special Plumbing Equipment Systems.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Energy conservation is an essential design consideration for all systems.
b. Design parameters for equipment selection shall conform with ASHRAE, ASPE,
ASME and IPC.
c. Hot water generators shall have two mixing valves; one shall be set at 140
degrees, and the second shall be set at 120 degrees.
d. There shall be a BAS-compliant alarm installed after the first mixing valve, set at
150 degrees, and a BAS-compliant alarm installed after the second valve, set at
130 degrees. Both alarms shall be connected to the BAS alarm system.
e. Hot water supplied to any fixtures (commercial or residential) used for washing
shall be limited to 120 degrees.
2. Domestic Hot Water Heat Exchanger:
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-1
a. Design domestic hot water systems using "instantaneous" or "semi-instantaneous"

steam to water heaters wherever possible.
b. Where continuous water supply is necessary, design system with two or more hot
water generators to provide stand-by operation. Design stand-by to maintain full
capacity with one unit down.
c. Specify inlet and outlet pressure gages on water, compound gages on inlet and
outlet of steam valve, and linear thermometers on hot water outlet and hot water
recirculating inlet.
d. In steam supply to generator, provide in line an isolation valve, strainer, union,
temperature regulating valve, union, and gate valve with a globe valve by-pass
around assembly.
e. In condensate return, provide an isolation valve, strainer, union, trap, union, test
tee with test valve, check valve, and gate valve.
f. Design generator piping with isolation valves and unions at all unit connections
for removal of entire unit or tube-pull without dismantling connecting piping.
g. Gas-fired water heaters shall have power-burners as a minimum and shall have
forced draft if sharing a flue with a forced-draft boiler, in which case the water
heater's positive pressure at the collar shall be specified.
h. Include an expansion tank if system has a backflow preventer.
3. Domestic Hot Water Circulating Pumps:
a. Specify all-bronze construction.
b. Specify aquastat control in return line near each pump if building is expected to
have extended operating hours; otherwise, specify a timer.
c. Provide one pump (isolation valves before and after with union or flanged
connections).
4. Sump Pumps and Sewage Ejectors, specify:
a. Duplex, submersible.
b. Mechanical float switches.
c. Remote-mounted pump panels with H.O.A. switch for each pump.
d. Alternator.
e. High-water audible and visual alarms, and dry contacts if connected to remote
alarm (DDC or other).
f. Two-pump run control.
g. Three phase protection for three phase motors.
h. NEMA 12 enclosure.
i. Gas-tight gasketed cover with grommeted openings for piping and wiring.
j. Gas tight manhole.
k. Vent through dedicated vent stack. Label as such throughout.
l. Quick-removal system for pumps.
m. For any pit deeper than 5 feet, require a stainless steel guide rail system.
5. General Use Air Compressor, specify:
a. Duplex.
b. Energy efficient motors.
c. ASME Code and Labeled reviewer.
d. Automatic float type receiver condensate drain with isolation valve.
e. Refrigerated air dryer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Instantaneous or semi-instantaneous anticipating type steam-source water heater (with 10year warranty) with feed-forward control, admiralty tubing and provided with insulation
condensate cooler and supporting frame.
Ace-Boiler with feed-forward control
Armstrong "Flo-Rite-Temp"
Patterson-Kelley
Thermalflo
Housing Armstrong Flo-Rite-Temp
B. Copper-tube water heaters, fuel-fired semi-instantaneous, power burner.
Ace Boiler
Aerco
Ajax
A.O. Smith
Rite
Weil-McLain
C. Domestic hot water circulating pumps (connected to 24-hour timer), (Cartridge pumps
wherever possible):
Armstrong
Bell and Gossett
Grundfos
Laing (available with built-in timer)
Taco
Housing Grundfos
D. Sump pumps:
Storm sump pumps inside buildings shall have water-tight lids
Weil
Zoeller
E. Sewage ejectors:
Weil Pump Company
Federal Pump Corporation
F. General-Use Air Compressor:
Ingersoll Rand
Quincy
Atlas Copco
Gardner-Denver
Worthington
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" in Part 1, subparagraph A, paragraph 1.02, "System Description" of this Design Guide and use list to
expand on specific requirements of installation for each product specified.
B. Vacuum pumps and air compressors need to be installed with limit switches and
alternating switches.
END OF SECTION
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-4
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-5
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-6
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-7
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-8
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-9
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-1 0
SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-1 1

SEPTEMBER 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15450-1 2
SECTION 15455
WATER CONSERVATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY:
A.
B.
1.2
1.
Dishwashers and other water-using kitchen appliances, including prerinse

spray valves
2.
Bathroom faucets, urinals, toilets and shower heads
3.
Laboratory faucets
4.
Water based cooling systems
Related Sections:
1.
Section 02665 Water Systems
2.
Section 11452 Residential Appliances
3.
Section 15430 Plumbing Specialties
4.
Section 15440 Plumbing Fixtures
5.
Section 15450 Plumbing Equipment
6.
Section 15460 Special Plumbing Equipment Systems
7.
Section 15650 Refrigeration
INTENT:
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
The water conservation standards establish minimum standards for water saving
apparatuses and outlines LEED certification required for new construction at the
University.
CODES & STANDARDS:

A.
JULY 2012
The most recent City of Boulder Design & Construction Standards are
incorporated by reference into the Universitys Standards. When there is a
conflict between standards, the more stringent requirement shall apply. The
UCB STANDARDS
15455 - 1
Universitys Civil Engineer must approve in writing any deviation from these
standards prior to construction.
1.3
B.
The most recent International Plumbing Code
C.
The most recent International Building Code
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Specify all installations in accordance with jurisdictional code and health

authoritys standards, restrictions and recommendations.
B.
Specify contractor to provide all fixtures using a single manufacturer where

possible. Allow deviation only where specifications indicate otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1.
KITCHEN APPLIANCES:
A.
Prerinse spray valves

1.
2.
2.2.
All prerinse spray valves shall have a flow rate of less than or equal to 1.6
gpm.
No pressure specifications are required for prerinse spray valves
BATHROOM FIXTURES:
A.
Faucets:
1.
B.
Water closets:
1.
B.
New urinals shall not exceed gpf
Showers
1.
JULY 2012
New toilets shall not exceed 1.28 gpf and shall be equipped with dual
flush handles and signage.
Urinals:
1.
C.
All new faucets shall have a maximum flow rate of 0.5 gpm @ 60 psi
Showerheads shall not exceed 1.25 GPM @ 60-80 PSI.
UCB STANDARDS
15455 - 2
2.3.
LABORATORY FIXTURES:
A.
Faucets:
1.
B.
Laboratory faucets shall not exceed 1.5 gpm, unless special circumstances
require greater flow.
Equipment cooling
1.
Once through cooling shall not be allowed unless approved by the UCB
Resource Conservation Officer.
PART 2 EXECUTION
3.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A.
Not used
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15455 - 3
SECTION 15460
SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Grease Interceptor.
2. Sand, Oil and Gas Trap.
3. Acid Neutralization Basin.
4. Kitchen Equipment.
5. Laboratory Equipment
6. Casework Equipment.
7.
HVAC Equipment
8. Automatic Water Softener

9. Deionizer and Accessories
10. Filter Equipment and Accessories
11. Reverse Osmosis Equipment and Accessories.
B.
Related Sections:
2.
Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
3. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping

4.
Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties
5. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment.

1.02
REFERENCES
A. International Plumbing Code (IPC).
B. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO).
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15460-1
C. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
E. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE).
F. Colorado Cross-Connection Control Manual
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.
JULY 2012
Grease Interceptors:
a. In accordance with jurisdictional authorities requirements,
IPC/IAPMO, and NSF for traps.
b. Bolts for interceptor lid access stainless steel type 316 only. Cast
iron, steel, or brass not acceptable.
2.
Sand-Oil-Gas Interceptor:
a. In accordance with jurisdictional authorities requirements, EPA and
IPC/IAPMO.
3.
Acid Neutralization Basin (Not required):

a. The UCB department of Environmental Health and Safety has
requested that chemical neutralization systems not be installed as
part of construction projects or renovations (memo of July 25, 1995).
4.
Kitchen Equipment:
a. In general, most items of kitchen furnishings will be provided under
Division 11.
b. Verify items of trim and fixtures not furnished by these suppliers and
specify all items necessary to complete the installation.
5.
Laboratory Equipment:
a. In general, most items of laboratory furnishings will be provided
under Division 11.
c. Make sure that Orion cleanout above sink fits within ceiling-tobench chase.
6.
Casework Equipment:
a. In general, casework will be provided under Division 12.
7.
HVAC Equipment:
a. See Part 3 - Execution portion of this Guideline Section for design
requirements.
8.
Automatic Water Softener:

UCB STANDARDS
15460-2
a.
Determine water softener requirements, if any, from University

Department user survey.
9.
Deionizer and Accessories:

a. Determine de-ionized water requirements, if any, from University
10.
Filter Equipment and Accessories:

a. Determine special water filter requirements, if any, from University
11.
Reverse Osmosis Equipment and Accessories:

a. Determine if sophisticated filtration techniques will be required, if
any, from University Department user survey.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
Acid Neutralization Basins:

1.
Town and Country Plastics Inc.
2.
Enfield Industrial Corporation.
3.
R & G Sloan.
Automatic Water Softener:

1.
C.
Deionizer:
1.
D.
E.
2.02
Culligan
Culligan-Continental.
Filter Equipment:
1.
AMF CUNO
2.
Culligan
Reverse Osmosis Equipment:

1.
Culligan
2.
Osmonics, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Kitchen Equipment:
1.
JULY 2012
When required, specify the following:

UCB STANDARDS
15460-3
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
B.
Traps: Chrome plated cast brass 17 gauge with brass slip-ons.

Tailpieces: Chrome plated 17 gage copper.
Arms: Chrome plated 17 gage copper.
Escutcheons: Chrome plated, cast brass.
Stops: -Turn, chrome plated brass with wheel handle operators.
Housing Stops to be Aquqflo V-101-A an LPS Company
Supplies: Chrome plated type L copper tube or braided SS
flexible.
Indirect Wastes: "L" copper tube.
Water Piping: Type K copper.
Waste & Vent Piping: No-Hub Cast Iron System.
Gas: Schedule 40 A-53 black steel T&C with malleable fittings up
to 1-1/2". 2" and larger, schedule 40 A-53 with butt weld steel
fittings and couplers.
Gas Connectors: When specifically required provide Thermo Tech
Co. braided flexible connectors with armor shield, approved for
gas, and of lengths required for fixed or movable equipment.
Joints: Where joints of piping systems are welded, soldered or
brazed and are exposed to view or cleaning - buff joints to smooth
cleanable surface in accordance with NSF.
1.
When required, specify the following:

a.
Traps: Polypropylene, Cast brass, or Duriron, complete with
tailpiece and arm.
b.
Escutcheons: Nickel plated brass.
c.
Stops & Supplies: -Turn, nickel plated brass wheel handle
operated stops and nickel plated copper supplies or braided SS
flexible.
d.
Water Piping: Type chrome or nickel plated finish where exposed
with wrought copper fittings of same finish.
e.
Waste & Vent Piping: Acid-resistant to be of same material as rest
of building. Non-acid resistant piping to be of same material as
balance of building waste system: cast iron with no-hub joints.
f.
Gas: Schedule 40 A-53 black steel T&C with malleable fittings up
to 1-1/2". 2" and larger schedule 40 A-53 with butt weld steel
fittings and couplers.
g.
Solenoid Valves: Provide "ASCO" gas air or water rated (115 psi)
2-way valves with actuation and control as required. Refer to
Section 15485 - Natural Gas System. Gas solenoid valves shall
not be located in plenums.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
JULY 2012
In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" in Part 1,

sub-paragraph A paragraph 1.03 "System Description" of this Design Guide and
use list to expand on specific requirements of installation for each product
specified.
UCB STANDARDS
15460-4
3.02
SCHEDULES
A.
Kitchen Equipment:
1.
Provide schedule of responsibilities of the University, Division 11 and

Division 15 as determined in design meetings similar to the following
schedule.
2.
Schedule:
New or Reused Equipment and Appliances

Provided by:
Uncrated by:
Set in place by:
Rough-in by:
Connected by:
UCB
11
15
Existing Equipment and Appliances

Existing Equipment disconnected by:
Existing Equipment removed by:
Existing Equipment relocated by:
Existing Equipment rough-in by:
Existing Equipment connected by:
UCB
11
15
UCB = University of Colorado at Boulder

11 = Division 11
15 = Division 15
B.
JULY 2012
3.
Furnish and install all equipment and trim as scheduled above and under
Division 15 as hereinafter specified.
a.
Provide traps with clean-outs, tubing waste to wall including
escutcheons, of sizes as required.
b.
Chrome-plated water supplies and branches complete with
individual and branch -turn shut-off chrome-plated valves, and
chrome-plated brass escutcheons as required.
c.
Gas supplies, complete with isolation valves at point of entry
through walls or floors, flexible hose with armor shield from
branch to appliance, and connections to the appliance made with
"Hanson Gas-Mate" quick coupler type valves only.
d.
All extensions of chrome-plated brass indirect waste piping from
unit connection to air gaped connections to floor drains or waste
receptacles at termination point.
e.
All necessary solenoid or motorized valves not furnished as parts
of kitchen equipment.
f.
All necessary specialties not specifically mentioned, but necessary
for proper and complete operation of the unit, or for good
appearance and a clean finished contract.
4.
All trim and specialties, including valves and piping, shall be chrome
plated brass or chrome plated copper where components are not concealed
from view. Trim and specialties within cabinets will not be considered
concealed.
UCB STANDARDS
15460-5
1.

Division 15 as determined in design meetings similar to the following
schedule.
2.
Schedule:
Existing Furniture or Equipment
Disconnected by:
Removed by:
Relocated by:
New Furniture or Equipment
Provide by
Uncrated by:
Set in place by:
Rough-in by:
Connected by:
Faucets by:
Service Cocks by:
Trap and Waste by:
UCB
UCB
11
11
15
15

11 = Division 11
15 = Division 15
3.
a.
All traps and wastes shall conform to materials as specified under
soil waste and vent, acid resistant drain, waste and vent in Section
15410.
b.
All supplies, stops, and valves nickel-plated brass where installed
in areas subject to acid fumes.
c.
Provide -turn shut-off valves at each piece of laboratory
equipment and each piece of laboratory furniture for all services in
accordance with the following schedule and as specified in
"Valves" in Section 15050.
d.
Schedule:
Service
Valve Type
Water
Ball
Air
Ball
Vacuum
Ball
Gas
Plug or Ball certified for gas service.
Special
As noted on Drawings or as
specified
herein.
JULY 2012
4.
All plumbing through walls or floors shall be provided with nickel-plated

brass escutcheons, set screw type or screw-on type. Loose or split type
escutcheons will be accepted only in concealed or enclosed locations.
5.
All potable water supplies to water faucets provided with means for hose
or tubing connections shall be installed with branch vacuum breaker,
UCB STANDARDS
15460-6
atmospheric or pressure type, with the ASSE Seal affixed to each vacuum
breaker
C.
Casework Equipment:
1.

Division 15 as determined in design meetings and similar to the following
schedule.
2.
Schedule:
Existing Casework
Disconnected by:
Removed by:
Relocated by:
New Casework
Provided by:
Uncrated by:
Set in place by:
Rough-in by:
Connected by:
Faucets by:
Service Cocks by:
Trap and Waste by:
UCB
UCB
12
12
15
15

12 = Division 12
15 = Division 15
3.
JULY 2012
a.
Traps with cleanouts, tubing waste to wall including escutcheons,
of sizes as required.
b.
Chrome-plated water supplies and branches complete with
individual -turn shut-off chrome-plated valves, and chromeplated brass escutcheons as required.
c.
Gas supplies, complete with isolation valve, flexible hose with
armor shield from branch to appliance, and connections to the
appliance made with "Hanson Gas-Mate" quick coupler type
valves only.
d.
All extensions of chrome-plated brass indirect waste piping from
unit connection to air-gapped connections to floor drains or waste
receptacles at termination point.
e.
All necessary solenoid or motorized valves not furnished as parts
of casework equipment.
f.
All necessary specialties not specifically mentioned but necessary
for proper and complete operation of the unit, or for good
appearance and a clean finished contract.
g.
Provide a minimum of one set of watersupply branch lines per
laboratory, each with shut-off ball valves.
UCB STANDARDS
15460-7
4.
All trim and specialties, including valves and piping, shall be chrome
plated brass or chrome plated copper where components are not concealed
from view. Trim and specialties within cabinets will not be considered
concealed.
a.
Schedule:
Service
Water
Air
Vacuum
Gas
Special
Valve Type
1/4-turn ball valve
Ball or globe.
Ball.
Plug or ball certified for gas service.
As noted on Drawings or as specified
herein.
b. All plumbing through walls for floors shall be provided with chromeplated brass escutcheons, set-screw type or screw-on type. Loose or split
type escutcheons will not be accepted in concealed or enclosed spaces.
c. All potable water supplies to water faucets provided with means for hose
or tubing connections shall be installed with branch vacuum breaker
atmospheric or pressure type with the ASSE Seal affixed to each spillresistant vacuum breaker.
D.
HVAC Equipment:
1.
List here all domestic water hook-ups to items such as Boilers, Chilled
and Hot Water Systems, Solar Fluid Systems, Glycol Systems,
Evaporative Coolers, Condensers, Cooling Towers, Computer Room
Units, Humidifiers, etc.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15460-8
SECTION 15485
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.02
1.03
Section Includes:
1.
Natural gas piping.
2.
Gas solenoid safety valves.
3.
Gas safety valve cabinets.
4.
Gas valve control panel.
5.
Flexible connectors and quick couplers.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Valves, pipe

hangers, supports and accessories.
3.
Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment: Gas supply and run-out with drip
leg and gas cock or valve to water heater connection points.
4.
Section 15460 - Special Plumbing Equipment Systems: Gas supply and

run-out with drip leg and gas valve to connection points on all kitchen and
laboratory equipment, headers or modules.
REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
B.
C.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.
Natural Gas Piping:

a.
b.
JULY 2012
Utility Company will run gas service up to and including the

meter.
All gas piping on house side of meter will be furnished and
installed under Division 15.
UCB STANDARDS
15485-1
c.
Design system in accordance with the following code and

standards:
1)
International Fuel Gas Code (ICC-IFGC).
2)
NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) - National Fuel Gas Code.
3)
ANSI Z 223.1a - Supplement to National Fuel Gas Code
4)
NSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping
5)
Ensure compliance with International Fuel Gas Code
(IFGC), National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA-54) and the
Federal Gas and Pipe Line Regulations for underground
piping.
d.
Use tapered couplings. Do not use thread protectors provided with

piping.
Engineer shall review all existing and new gas requirements to
verify adequacy of gas supply (pressure, pipe size and meter size).
Engineer shall indicate them on drawings.
e.
2.
Gas Solenoid Safety Valves:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Flexible Hose Gas Connectors and Quick Couplers:

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Provide in kitchens.
Kitchen valve de-energized when fire suppression system is
activated.
Reset of kitchen valve only possible after fire suppression system
has been reset, re-charged and in "ready" mode.
Not in plenums.
Provide flexible stainless steel connectors with full size quick

coupler for all kitchen and heavy movable gas appliance
equipment.
Connectors of lengths required to displace equipment for complete
cleaning under and around gas appliance.
Provide valve at service connection on equipment branch and
quick coupler at service end of flexible hose connector.
Provide union connection on appliance or manifold end of hose
connection.
Gas isolation valves:

a.
Provide isolation valves at all floors and branches.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Interior Exposed or Accessible:

1.
JULY 2012
Size 1/2" thru 1-1/2":

Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM A120.
Fittings: Threaded malleable iron.
Joint Seal: Rector seal or teflon paste.
UCB STANDARDS
15485-2
Unions: Black malleable iron ground joint, bronze to iron seat, 150 lb.
class, ANSI B2.1 and ASTM A197.
2.
B.
2.02
Interior concealed non accessible and air plenums:

1.
All pipe and fittings shall be welded.
2.
No gas piping may be installed in air plenums per the IFGC.
GAS SOLENOID SAFETY VALVES

A.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.03
Automatic Switch Company (ASCO).
GAS SAFETY VALVE CABINETS

A.
Manufacturer:
1.
B.
2.04
Size 2" and over:

Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM A53, Type S Grade B.
Fitting: Butt weld ASTM A234.
Unions: 150 lb. forged steel weld neck flange, ANSI/B16.5 and ASTM
A105.
Croker Model 9100 modified for valve depth.
Cabinet:
1.
#4 stainless steel finish fully recessed, Series S construction, Style K

stainless steel door with cylinder lock, four keys each cabinet, all cabinets
keyed alike.
2.
Modify cabinets for 6" maximum depth for valve sizes 1/2" thru 1-1/2",
and 8" maximum depth for valve size 2" thru 3".
FLEXIBLE HOSE GAS CONNECTORS AND QUICK COUPLERS

A.
Manufacturers:
Flexible Connector: Thermo-Tech Products Co.
Quick Coupler: Hansen Manufacturing Co. "Gas Mate".
B.
Description:
Flexible Connector: Corrugated type 304 stainless steel flexible pipe with
stainless steel braid and heavy flexible armor shield.
C.
JULY 2012
Quick Coupler: One way quick coupler with gas rating in cubic feet per hour
equal to equivalent gas appliance rating.
UCB STANDARDS
15485-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" subparagraph A in Part 1, paragraph 1.03 "System Description" of this Design Guide
and use list to expand on specific requirements of installation for each product
specified.
B.
All branches from mains shall have isolation valves.
3.02
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Welder certification is required, and welder shall pass approval by local inspector
for visual quality.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15485-4
SECTION 15511
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.02
Section Includes:
1.
Pipe Materials
2.
Fittings
3.
Specialty Items
4.
Glycol Antifreeze Protection
5.
Process Cooling
Related Sections:
1.
2.
Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Valve, pipe hangers,
supports and accessories, identification of piping, freeze protection systems,
welding, sleeves, plates and closures.
3.
Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control: Piping isolation

hangers, supports, flexible piping connectors.
4.
Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation: Piping insulation.
5.
Section 15540 - HVAC Pumps.
6.
Section 15548 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pre-start up cleaning of HVAC piping

systems, manifolds, solenoid water valves with strainers, pot feeders.
7.
Section 15950 - Controls: Automatic control valves, aquastats, temperature

sensing wells, flow switches.
8.
Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: Balancing of hydronic

systems.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15511-1
1.03
C.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
D.
American Welding Society (AWS).
E.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, (ASHRAE)

Fundamentals Handbook.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
JULY 2012
1.
Specify Type K hard drawn copper tube for open-loops and Schedule 40 black
steel pipe or Type L for closed loops.
2.
Obtain approval from UCB to allow Contractor's option to use mechanical

grooved pipe in accessible locations only for chilled and condenser water piping
and mechanical equipment piping connections.
3.
Design piping systems with drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of
piping, bases of vertical risers and at equipment.
4.
We strongly encourage the installation of isolation valves. Specify and indicate

location of isolation valves for all zones, risers, branches and equipment.
5.
Specify unions or flanges downstream of valves and at equipment and apparatus

connections. Unions are not required for reheat coils and terminal units, BBRs,
convectors, CUHs and UHs or 2-way valves associated with them.
6.
Specify manual air vents at all changes in elevation downward in direction of

flow with full size air chamber and pipe down to accessible location with 1/4 inch
copper tubing to a petcock.
7.
Specify diaphragm-type compression tanks, and where glycol is to be used in the

system, specify a diaphragm which is compatible with glycol.
8.
Plain steel expansion tanks are unacceptable.
9.
Specify flow measuring and balancing device combinations of orifices, venturis,

throttling valves and temperature and pressure taps to provide accurate flow
measurement for manual balancing of hydronic systems. Test ports shall be on
one side of the valve or be provided with a shut-off valve on the pressure side of
the balancing valve. Balancing valves shall have full shut-off capability and
memory stop. Valves shall be installed upstream of balancing ports to allow
cleaning of ports.
10.
For BBR, in order to achieve adequate heat transfer, turbulent flow is necessary.
Therefore, do not specify a flow rate below that which is necessary for turbulence
in the specified BBR pipe size. Specify flow (GPM) at all locations of balancing
devices.
UCB STANDARDS
15511-2
JULY 2012
11.
Automatic pressure-compensating variable-orifice type regulating valves to

balance flow are unacceptable as substitutes for manual balancing of hydronic
systems.
12.
In hydronic systems subject to freezing, the University requires pumped coils.

Inhibited ethylene glycol antifreeze solution (See 2.10 below) may be used only
when approved by the University.
13.
Glycol system expansion tanks should be sized per ASHRAE recommendations.
14.
For initial fill of glycol systems, specify and require metering of volume to
determine correct mix for specified concentration.
15.
For glycol-filled systems, specify that all components exposed to glycol shall be
compatible with the specified glycol (especially the seals and gaskets).
16.
Provide the following system glycol concentrations:

Chilled Water System 35 percent
Hot Water System 40 percent
Reclaim Water System 40 percent
Solar Water System 40 percent
17.
Automatic glycol/water feeder systems are typically not required in University

applications where antifreeze systems are used. Provide pressure sensor to alarm
through central DDC.
18.
System fill shall be performed by means of a temporary fill tank totally isolated
from domestic water system. Fill connection shall be a female hose-end ballvalve. Supply shall be with a removable hose which can be connected to a male
hose-end valve connected to a backflow prevention device.
19.
All pressure relief valves in glycol systems shall drain into feeder tank (if present)
or relief reservoir.
20.
Temperature gauges across coils and pressure gauges across pumps are required.
P&T taps are not sufficient. Use brass piping. Black iron is not acceptable
because it rusts and plugs up. Specify shut-off valves at gages.
21.
Specify that test and balance ports in chilled-water systems be long enough to
extend beyond insulation. Cutting-back the insulation or covering the ports is not
acceptable.
22.
Process cooling systems are required in order to avoid water-wasting cooling.
23.
For process-cooling systems, specify hose-end drain cock between equipment

connector and return shut-off valve. (This is to purge air after connecting
equipment).
24.
When multiple/stacked chilled-water coils are required, specify reverse-return

manifolds. This has proven to be necessary at low-flow conditions where using
UCB STANDARDS
15511-3
balancing valves has allowed freezing conditions because the valves are not linear
for all flow conditions.
25.
For outdoor underground chilled-water installations, it is acceptable to use uninsulated plastic piping, either C900 PVC with ductile-ion joints, or equivalent
polyethylene at least 4 feet deep.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.02
Pipe:
1.
Black steel, Schedule 40, standard fittings.
2.
Exterior uninsulated underground chilled-water: 2900 PVC with ductile-ion

fittings. High density polyethylene (HDPE)
3.
For exterior insulated underground chilled-water: HDPE manufactured by

PermaPipe or Thermacore Process, Inc.
Tube:
1.
Type K, hard copper for open loops, Type L for closed loops. Solder fittings with
antimony-free and lead-free solder with shear strength not less than 7250 PSI.
Allstate, "Aquasafe" or equal. Pipe diameters of 2 and above shall be brazed
with filler material of no less than 15% silver.
2.
Hot-water copper tubing shall have copper-clad clamps or plastic isolators at

clamps.
3.
Chilled-water piping shall have full insulation where clamped.
Mechanical Grooved Pipe (only where pre-authorized by the University):

1.
Manufacturers:
a.
GRUVLOCK.
b.
Victaulic
c.
Central
2.
Grooved Pipe:
a.
Black steel, Schedule 40, standard square cut or roll grooved to coupling
manufacturer's specification and recommendations for the specified
application.
RELIEF VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
JULY 2012
Kunkle
UCB STANDARDS
15511-4
B.
2.03
Lonegren
3.
Lunkenheimer
4.
McDonnell and Miller
5.
Watts
Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure
actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled.
DIAPHRAGM - TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS

A.
B.
2.04
2.
Manufacturers:
1.
Amtrol
2.
American Tube and Controls
3.
Bell and Gossett
4.
John Wood Co.
5.
Taco
Tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ ASME Code.
AIR SEPARATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.05
Spirovent only.
a.
Note: Contractor shall make arrangements through TM Sales to get air
separators with a 0.60 cost multiplier of list price when buying them from
local distributors for UCB Projects.
STRAINERS
A.
JULY 2012
Manufacturers:
1.
Armstrong
2.
AW Cash
3.
Boylston
4.
Hoffman
5.
ITT
6.
Keckley
UCB STANDARDS
15511-5
B.
2.06
7.
Mueller
8.
Plenty
Basket Strainers: Duplex, quick-opening covers, stainless-steel baskets, single-handle or

hand-wheel operation of valve.
PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers:
B.
2.07
2.
Armstrong
3.
Aurora
4.
Bell and Gossett
5.
Peerless
6.
Taco
7.
Weinman
Fitting to match specified pump.
Manufacturers:
1.
Armstrong
2.
Bell and Gossett
FLOW INDICATOR SWITCHES

A.
2.09
Allis Chalmers
COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES

A.
2.08
1.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Mueller
FLOW MEASURING AND BALANCING DEVICES

A. Manufacturers:
1.
JULY 2012
Manual Balancing
a.
Not acceptable: Bell and Gossett Circuit Setters and other variableorifice ball-valve balancing valves
UCB STANDARDS
15511-6
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Flow Design Flowset

Flowpac
Gerand
Griswold Quickset
Nibco globe-style with isolation valve
Tour & Andersson
Design notes:
1. Mechanical Consultant shall add to specifications. "Mechanical contractor shall
obtain approval in writing from Balancing contractor for all balancing devices."
2. All specified balancing valves shall have test ports on one side of the valve.
2.10
2.11
INHIBITED GLYCOL
A.
Manufacturer: The Dow Chemical Company
B.
Product: Dowtherm 4000 Heat Transfer Fluid (Ethylene Glycol) for hot water systems;
Dowtherm SR-1 for chilled-water systems. Dowfrost HD (Propylene Glycol) may be
used if authorized or required due to concerns about cross-contamination or toxicity.
VALVES
A.
2.12
The University requires ball valves with stainless steel ball and trim, Teflon seats, seals
and gland nuts, or high-quality butterfly valves, instead of gate valves.
CHILLED WATER BTU METER

A.
Project Engineer of Record shall submit to Utility Services the projected Maximum,
Minimum, and Normal operating conditions of each service.
B.
Project Engineer of Record shall submit building annual consumption projections.
C.
Units
D.
1.
Steam shall be in Klbs/h for and Klbs for consumption projection
2.
Chilled water shall be in ton-h for peak and tons for consumption
3.
Water shall be in kgal for consumption
Utility Services Meter Panel (UMP)

1.
JULY 2012
All meter panels shall be in accordance with the University of Colorado Boulder
Utility Standard No. EO-100-A latest revision for integration into the Utility
Control System (UCS). Coordinate UMP with all other utility main meters (ie
steam, domestic work, and electric).
UCB STANDARDS
15511-7
E.
F.
JULY 2012
2.
Meter Panel shall house flow computers (totalizers) and Advanced Metering
Infrastructure (AMI) Gateways devices.
3.
The UCS gateway (Master) device shall reside in the meter panel.
4.
Gateway device shall be industrial grade with internal firewall.
5.
a.
MOXA Mgate Model #3170 (or approved equal).
6.
All meters (chilled water, electrical, steam, domestic water) shall communicate
via a dedicated RS-485 network utilizing ModBus RTU Protocol.
7.
8.
A dedicated 115V circuit shall be supplied for the UMP
Flow Computer / Totalizer

1.
Specify Kessler-Ellis Products (KEP) ES-749 flow computer to be connected to

all CHW meters. The KEP shall be panel mount type and installed in UMP. The
KEP flow computer will receive the analog flow signal as an input from the
chilled water meter and the supply and return temperature signals from a set of
matched pair (precision) 3-wire 100 ohm platinum RTDs.
2.
Outputs:
a.
KEP shall send consumption (ton-hr), supply and return temperatures (F),
differential temperature, and peak (tons) output via Modbus RTU Protocol
to the Utility Control System (UCS) Gateway device located in the UMP
over a dedicated RS485 communication trunk. All wiring and
terminations are to be completed by Temperature Control or Electrical
Contractor (approval required), including installation of KEP, wiring of
meter components to KEP, wiring of KEP to UCS, setup, and KEP
programming.
b.
All KEP installations shall be in accordance with the University of
Colorado Boulder Utility Standard No. EO-100-A latest revision
Meters
1.
Full Bore (In-line) Electromagnetic Flow Meter:

a.
Specify full bore electromagnetic meter for new installations or existing
installations 3 or larger. Meter shall be installed with temperature
differential (delta T) transmitters to calculate total BTUs. Meter size and
installation shall be approved by UCB Utility Services. Meter to have
ANSI class 150 flanges.
2.
a.
Onicon model F-3100 series
b.
Rosemount
c.
Yokogawa
d.
ABB
UCB STANDARDS
15511-8
3.
Insertion Type Electromagnetic:

a.
Insertion type electromagnetic meters are acceptable for existing
installations of 3 and larger service line size. Meter to be installed with
3-wire matched pair 100 ohm platinum RTDs for calculating chilled water
temperature differential. Meter size and installation shall be approved by
UCB Utility Services. Meter to be supplied with hot tap installation
hardware from manufacturer.
b.
i.
Onicon model F-3500
ii.
UCB Utility Services approved equal
4.
All CHW meter installations shall be in accordance with the University of

Colorado Boulder Utility Standard No. EO-101-A latest revision
5.
Meter Submittal
a.
All main (primary) service Chilled Water meters shall be approved by
Utility Services prior to purchase and installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" sub-paragraph A in

Part 1, paragraph 1.03 "System Description" of this Design Guide and use list to expand
on specific requirements of installation for each product specified.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15511-9
SECTION 15511
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.02
Pipe Materials.
Fittings.
Specialty Items.
Glycol Antifreeze Protection.
Process Cooling

systems.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

SEPTEMBDR 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15511-1
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
SEPTEMBDR 2010
cleaning of ports.
devices.
systems.
UCB STANDARDS
15511-2
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.

acceptable.
equipment).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe:
1.
2.
3.
B.

Tube:
1.
SEPTEMBDR 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15511-3
2.

clamps.
3.
C.

1.
Manufacturers:
GRUVLOCK.
Victaulic
Central
2.
Grooved Pipe:
a.
2.02
application.
RELIEF VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
Kunkle
Lonegren
Lunkenheimer
Watts
B.
2.03

A.
Manufacturers:
Amtrol
American Tube and Controls.
Bell and Gossett
John Wood Co.
Taco
B.
SEPTEMBDR 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15511-4
2.04
AIR SEPARATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
Spirovent only.
Note: Contractor shall make arrangements through TM Sales to get air separators with a
0.60 cost multiplier of list price when buying them from local distributors for UCB
Projects.
2.05
STRAINERS
A.
Manufacturers:
Armstrong
AW Cash
Boylston
Hoffman
ITT
Keckley
Mueller
Plenty
B.
2.06


A.
Manufacturers:
Allis Chalmers
Armstrong
Aurora
Bell and Gossett
Peerless
Taco
Weinman
B.
2.07

A.
Manufacturers:
Armstrong
Bell and Gossett
SEPTEMBDR 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15511-5
2.08

A.
Manufacturer:
Mueller
2.09

A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Manual Balancing
No longer acceptable: Bell and Gossett Circuit Setters
Flow Design Flowset
Gerand
Griswold Quickset
Nexus
Presco
B.
Design notes:
1.
2.
2.10
2.11
INHIBITED GLYCOL
A.
B.
VALVES
A.
2.12
Mechanical Consultant shall add to specifications. "Mechanical contractor shall

All specified balancing valves shall have test ports on one side of the valve.
CHILLED WATER BTU METER
A. Flow Computer/Totalizer:
Specify Kessler-Ellis Products (KEP) ES-762 ST2 flow computer to be installed and connected
to all steam meters. The KEP flow computer will receive the analog flow signal as an input from
the steam meter and send compensated flow (#s/hr) and total (#s) output via Modbus to the
Building Automation System (BAS) over RS485 communication trunk. All wiring and
terminations are to be completed by Temperature Controls contractor, including installation of
KEP, wiring of meter to KEP, wiring of KEP to BAS, setup and commissioning of meter, KEP,
SEPTEMBDR 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15511-6
and BAS programming. Refer to Division 15 section 950, 951, and 955 for further information
on BAS requirements.
B. Inline Electromagnetic Flow Meter:
Specify Onicon model F-3100 series in-line electromagnetic meter for new installations or
existing installations below 3. Meter to be installed with temperature differential (delta T)
transmitters to calculate total BTUs. Meter size and installation shall be approved by UCB
Utility Services. Meter to have ANSI class 150 flanges.
C. Insertion Type Electromagnetic:
Chilled water meters shall be insertion type electromagnetic for 3 and larger existing
installations. Specify Onicon model F-3500. Meter to be installed with temperature differential
transmitters to calculate total BTUs.Meter size and installation shall be approved by UCB
Utility Services. Meter to be supplied with hot tap installation hardware.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.

SEPTEMBDR 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15511-7
SECTION 15511
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.02
1.03
Pipe Materials.
Fittings.
Specialty Items.
Glycol Antifreeze Protection.
Process Cooling

systems.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
AUGUST 2009
UCB STANDARDS
15511-1
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
AUGUST 2009
cleaning of ports.
devices.
systems.
UCB STANDARDS
15511-2
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
acceptable.
equipment).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe:
1.
2.
3.
B.

Tube:
1.
AUGUST 2009
UCB STANDARDS
15511-3
2.
3.
C.

clamps.

1.
Manufacturers:
GRUVLOCK.
Victaulic
Central
2.
Grooved Pipe:
a.
2.02
application.
RELIEF VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
Kunkle
Lonegren
Lunkenheimer
Watts
B.
2.03

A.
Manufacturers:
Amtrol
American Tube and Controls.
Bell and Gossett
John Wood Co.
Taco
B.
AUGUST 2009
UCB STANDARDS
15511-4
2.04
AIR SEPARATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
Spirovent (Preferred) *
Amtrol
Armstrong
Bell and Gossett
Taco
*Housing wants only this manufacturer.
2.05
STRAINERS
A.
Manufacturers:
Armstrong
AW Cash
Boylston
Hoffman
ITT
Keckley
Mueller
Plenty
B.
2.06


A.
Manufacturers:
Allis Chalmers
Armstrong
Aurora
Bell and Gossett
Peerless
Taco
Weinman
B.
2.07

A.
Manufacturers:
Armstrong
Bell and Gossett
AUGUST 2009
UCB STANDARDS
15511-5
2.08

A.
2.09
Manufacturer:

Mueller
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Manual Balancing
No longer acceptable: Bell and Gossett Circuit Setters
Flow Design Flowset
Gerand
Griswold Quickset
Nexus
Presco
B.
Design notes:
1.
2.
2.10
2.11
INHIBITED GLYCOL
A.
B.
VALVES
A.
2.12
Mechanical Consultant shall add to specifications. "Mechanical contractor shall

All specified balancing valves shall have test ports on one side of the valve.
WATER METERS - CHILLED WATER

A.
Manufacturers (Vortex - shedding flowmeter):

EMCO Vortex PhD
Controlotron
PART 3 - EXECUTION
AUGUST 2009
UCB STANDARDS
15511-6
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.

AUGUST 2009
UCB STANDARDS
15511-7
SECTION 15521
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.02
Section Includes:
1.
Part One - System Description.
2.
Part Two Design Requirements.
3.
Part Three - Steam Specialties, Related Equipment, and Acceptable

Manufacturers
4.
Part Four - Installation Requirements.
5.
Part Five Installer (Contractor) Qualification Requirements
Related Sections:
1.
Section 02300 - Utility Tunnels.
2.
Section 02695 - Steam Distribution Systems.
3.
4.

hangers, supports and accessories, identification of piping, welding,
sleeves, plates, and closures.
5.
6.
Section 15540 - HVAC Pumps: Condensate return pumps.
7.
Section 15755 - Heat Exchangers: Condensate coolers.
8.
Section 15790 - Air Coils.
9.
Section 15950 - Controls: Automatic control valves.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
JULY 2012
The University of Colorado Central Power Plant supplies high-pressure, saturated

steam to the campus community through a system of inter-connected tunnels and
direct-bury piping. The steam pressure in the mains runs at approximately 140
psig and may potentially be raised as future need arises. For this reason, before
UCB STANDARDS
15521-1
pressure is reduced for consumer use, we use valves, fittings, pipe, and flanges
that are designed to safely carry pressures of at least 250 psig steam at 406F.
B.
Steam pressure is generally regulated in each individual building and may include
multiple pressure reductions, depending on the equipment being serviced. Typical
reduced pressures vary from 65 to 5 psig. Steam uses in buildings include direct
radiant heating, forced air heating using steam fan coils, heating hot water
generation, domestic hot water generation, autoclaving and sterilization, chilled
water generation, humidification, food service preparation and clean-up, laundry
processes, filter cleaning, drying, and other miscellaneous processes. In addition,
the Central Power Plant uses high-pressure steam to generate all campus electrical
needs.
C.
Condensate generated by the various steam uses on campus is returned to the

Central Power Plant by both gravity return systems and pumped systems.
D.
Space in tunnels and mechanical rooms has become extremely limited and it is a
University requirement that pipe routing and equipment location be reviewed by a
Utility Services representative, ideally during the design phase but definitely
before installation begins. This is not limited to only steam piping and equipment,
but all mechanical installations that impact accessibility to, and maintainability of,
steam equipment. It is also critical that mechanical work performed on any system
[plumbing, electrical, telecommunication, etc.] that involves the abandonment
of any equipment, wiring, cabling, piping, etc. include the removal of these items
to allow for the future use of the space.
E.
The campus steam system and all steam sub-systems are under the direct control
of the Facilities Management Utility Services Group. Steam and condensate
valves are to be operated by Facilities Operations Steam personnel only. This is a
serious rule and is regarded as such by the University. Any work that either
directly or indirectly impacts the system must be approved by, and coordinated
with, a Utility Services representative. Meetings scheduled with Facilities
Management personnel for site visits, inspections, spec/print reviews, etc. must be
made 72 hours in advance and attended in a timely manner. Failure to show for an
appointment may result in lost time being charged to the job. The 72-hour
notification requirement may be waived as urgency dictates and time permits.
PART 2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

2.01
AIR VENTS
A.
2.02
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
2.03
Specify air vent for high point in any system controlled by a modulating control
valve (i.e. fan coils, heat exchangers).
Specify anti-seize for flange bolts only.
CONDENSATE COOLERS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-2
A.
2.04
Due to the use of pressure-powered condensate pumps and the desire to return
condensate to the Central Power Plant at as high a temperature as possible,
condensate coolers are no longer approved for use on the CU Boulder campus.
CONDENSATE PUMPS
A.
JULY 2012
The pump package shall be provided to the University of Colorado according to

the schedule and based on the following specifications:
1.
The condensate pump package shall have a capacity of

____________lbs/hr, with fully redundant capabilities. That is, each
pump package shall be capable of pumping ____________ lbs/hr, with the
ability to fully isolate each pump and/or package from the system.
2.
The pump package shall have the above stated capacity

of___________lbs/hr, with a motive pressure (air or steam) of _______
PSIG, and a system back pressure of _________PSIG.
3.
Each pump and receiver in the package shall be an ASME 150#rated

vessel.
4.
The package must be a low-profile with a maximum of a __________trip

point from the floor.
5.
The pumps shall sense level and activate via an electrode probe-style
mechanism (no mechanical float mechanism), utilizing a pin-style Warrick
relay.
6.
The probe mechanism shall have a third probe for high level alarm,
utilizing a two position switch.
7.
Each pump package shall have its own control panel.
8.
Each panel shall incorporate a electronic cycle counter and a high level
alarm contact. Signal for cycle count and high level alarm shall be sent to
a Andover control system.
10.
Each pump shall utilize a 3-way pneumatic actuated ball valve for the
motive force. Ball valve shall be carbon steel body x stainless steel trim.
11.
Each pump shall have an isolation valve on the condensate inlet and
outlet.
a.
3 and above 150# lugged style high performance gear operated
steam rated butterfly valve.
b.
2 and below full port forged steel ball valve with stainless steel
ball and stem, rated for 250 psig WSP.
12.
Each pump shall have a check valve on the condensate inlet and outlet.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-3
a.
b.
JULY 2012
3 and above Durabla model WLC CI/BR wafer body check.

2 and below Durabla model WLC wafer style, stainless steel
construction. Check valves shall be Durabla wafer style (no
substitutes).
13.
Each pump shall have a rising-stem, class 800, forged steel gate valve with
a steel strainer and steam regulator for the steam supply. The strainer must
also have a forged steel ball valve for blowdown, all ball valves, if
utilized, shall be full port carbon steel body x stainless steel ball and stem.
14.
Pump tanks shall be Armstrong 300 or 400 series tanks ASME rated at
150#.
15.
Each tank (pumps and receivers) must be individually drainable, utilizing

forged steel ball valves.
16.
Each pump trap must have high pressure gauge glass assembly and
pressure gauge assembly (gauge, siphon and carbon steel isolation ball
valve.
17.
All pipe 2 and smaller shall be threaded ASTM type A106 seamless
black steel schedule 80.
18.
All steam pipe 2 and larger shall be welded ASTM type A106
seamless black steel schedule 40.
19.
All condensate pipe 2 and larger be welded ASTM type A106

20.
250 lb malleable iron unions with brass seats and 2000 psig forged steel
fittings shall be used in all threaded applications.
21.
150 psig raised face, steel weld neck flanged and steel butt weld fittings
shall be used in all welded applications.
22.
All flange gaskets shall be spiral-wound where the windings are

manufactured with type304SS with non-asbestos filler and the outer ring
(gauge ring) is manufactured with carbon steel.
23.
All threaded fittings will be assembled with 100% virgin Teflon tape. No
pipe joint compound will be permitted.
24.
Pump packages shall be pre-fabricated on a stand with leveling pads and

all interconnecting piping.
25.
All components, pieces and parts, whether or not the are specifically
shown or indicated on the submittal, shall be in accordance with all
University of Colorado Boulder standard mechanical specifications.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-4
Acceptable Manufactures:
a.
Armstrong
b.
or prior approval equivalent
2.05
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
B.
JULY 2012
Design
1.
The expansion joint shall be designed for ANSI 300 rating for steam
(250 psig at 406F) and ANSI 150 for condensate.
2.
Expansion joint shall be (single/double) slip design and furnished with an

anchor base. Welded ends unless otherwise approved by Utility Services.
3.
The stuffing box shall have integral and external guide surfaces. The
guide shall have low friction, non-metallic inserts.
4.
The expansion joint shall have 2 minimum diameter packing cylinders

welded in place to allow packing to be injected under full line pressure.
The packing cylinder tip shall incorporate a check valve effect tip
design to prevent the blow back of packing while adding packing to he
expansion joint at full line pressure.
5.
The packing friction force of the expansion joint shall not exceed 1,000
Lbs. Per inch of expansion joint nominal diameter.
6.
All circumferential body welds shall be of the butt weld type.
7.
Externally pressured bellows joints shall be reviewed on a case by case

basis with approval of Utility Services only.
8.
Internally pressured bellows are not acceptable for steam applications.
Materials
1.
The stuffing box and body shall be machined form A106 or equivalent
heavy wall mechanical tubing, of seamless pipe.
2.
The slip shall be machined from ASME A106 schedule 80 seamless pipe.
All slips are to be machined and ground to achieve a 16RMS finish before
plating. Plating shall consist of 1 mil minimum of industrial hard chrome
over 1 mil minimum of crack free hard chrome.
3.
Expansion joint shall be factory packed for the intended service with Flake
Graphite Injectable Packing. The stuffing box packing area in contact
with the slip shall be at least 15 times the nominal diameter of the
expansion joint. Spare packing plugs are to be furnished with each
expansion order.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-5
C.
Insulation Blankets
1.
A two piece removable reusable insulation blanket is to be provided with

the expansion joint to cover the expansion joint body and slip, and is to
incorporate access to the packing cylinders without removal of the body
portion of the blanket.
2.
The inner and outer covers are to be made from Silicone Impregnated
Nomex Cloth. An Inconel wire mesh liner is to be attached to the inner
cover.
Approved Manufacturers
a.
Advanced Thermal Systems
b.
Or approved equal
D.
Guides
1.
All pipe guides shall be fabricated by a supplier regularly engaged in the

manufacture of these items.
2.
Pipe guides shall utilize thick low friction graphite on both the upper
and lower backing plates of each assembly. The guides shall have
sufficient contact surface between the upper and lower assemblies to
ensure the loading does not exceed 300 psi.
3.
Steel components shall be fabricated from ASTM A36 steel or equivalent.
4.
Pipe guides shall accommodate as a minimum the insulation thickness

specified for the mating pipe.
5.
The upper assembly shall be attached to the pipeline by field welding.

The lower assembly shall be attached to the structural support by field
welding or bolting as shown on the plans.
6.
All guides shall be constructed to allow a minimum 8 of axial movement

and maximum + or- 1/16 of lateral and 1/8 vertical up movement.
7.
The graphite shall be epoxy bonded to the backing plate for all
applications. If service conditions exceed 350 degree F the graphite shall
be both epoxy bonded and mechanically attached.
Approved Manufactures:
a.
b.
Or approved equal
2.06
FITTINGS
A.
JULY 2012
Elbows, tees, reducers, couplings, crosses:
UCB STANDARDS
15521-6
B.
C.
2.07
2.
Only Teflon tape allowed.
Unions:
1.
Specify 300 lb malleable iron with brass seats, ground-joint, unions for all
pipe sizes 2 and below. Specify flanges for pipe sizes 2 1/2 and above.
2.
Unions need to be installed with correct flow, correct side of isolation

valve, and be accessible.
3.
Pipe lengths need to be cut correctly, so that pipe-fittings are not in a bind.
Flanges:
1.
Specify raised-face, welding neck flanges conforming to ASTM A181

standard. Specify 150 lb. flange for pressures of 100 psig or less and 300
lb. flange for pressures exceeding 100 psig. Flange bolts shall be hexhead,
Grade 8, no substitutions. Sized such that no more than 1/2 of bolt
protrudes beyond the end of the nut when fully torqued. Stud bolts will not
be permitted.
2.
Flanges must match in ratings and when assembled, they must be aligned
correctly.
Specify spiral-wound gaskets where the windings are manufactured with Type
304 stainless steel with non-asbestos filler and the outer ring [gauge ring] is
manufactured with carbon steel. No other gaskets will be permitted.
GAUGES, PRESSURE
A.
2.09
Specify forged steel threaded for 2 and below. All 2 1/2 and above shall
be schedule 40 seamless, butt-welded steel conforming to ASTM A234
standard, rated for 2000 psig.
GASKETS
A.
2.08
1.
Specify a 4 dry gage with 1/4 MPT connection. Use 0-15 gage for operating
pressures of 7 psig or less, 0-30 gage for pressures of 8-15 psig, 0-60 gage for
pressures of 16-30 psig, 0-100 gage for pressures of 31-50 psig, and 0-200 gage
for pressures greater than 50 psig. Gage must be supplied with an anti-siphon tube
[pigtail] and an approved ball valve for isolation. Isolation valve must go before
anti-siphon tube.
HOT WATER CONVERTERS / HEAT EXCHANGER

A.
JULY 2012
Instantaneous Water Heater
UCB STANDARDS
15521-7
JULY 2012
1.
The instantaneous water heater shall operate on water differential using

the feed forward principle. A temperature control device with capillary
system shall not be acceptable.
2.
The water controlling valve of the unit shall be mounted integral to the
heat exchanger without the use of connecting piping.
3.
The instantaneous water heater shall be pre-piped with only steam, water,
and condensate hookups necessary.
4.
The controlling valve of the instantaneous water heater shall fail in the
closed position, to prevent overheating and scalding.
5.
The instantaneous water heater shall have easy access to the individual
tubes without moving the heater from its installed position.
6.
The shell of the heat exchanger shall be carbon steel, and designed for a
maximum allowable pressure of 150 psig.
7.
The tubes shall be admiralty brass.
8.
The water controlling valve body shall be bronze with stainless steel
internals.
9.
The maximum water pressure drop shall not exceed 10 psi.
10.
Outlet water temperature shall be controlled to within plus or minus 5 f.
11.
A mixing valve shall be installed for over-temperature protection on the

hot water side. A bypass shall be installed along with isolation valves and
unions for maintenance on mix valve without shutting down the unit.
12.
Operational steam pressure shall be 2-15 psig.
13.
Operational water pressure shall be 20-125 psig.
14.
The instantaneous water heater package shall have a capacity of

_____________ gpm.
15.
All pipe 2 and smaller, shall be threaded ASTM A106 seamless black
steel, schedule 80.
16.
All steam pipe 2 and larger, shall be welded ASTM A106 seamless
black steel, schedule 40.
17.
All condensate pipe 2 and larger, shall be welded ASTM A106 Grade B
seamless black steel, schedule 80.
18.
All copper to be type K.

UCB STANDARDS
15521-8
19.
250 lb malleable iron unions with brass seats, and 2000 lb. forged steel
20.
150 psig. raised face, steel weld neck flanged, and steel butt weld fittings
21.
All flanged gaskets shall be spiral-wound where the windows are

manufactured with type 304SS, with non-asbestos filler, and the outer ring
22.
23.
All gate valves shall be class 800 Forged steel with rising stem.
24.
All ball valves shall be Apollo full port, with stainless steel trim.
25.
Steam traps shall be Armstrong inverted bucket traps.
26.
Package to be assembled with unions and valves, so equipment can be

worked on without shutting system down.
27.
Instantaneous water heater packages shall be pre-fabricated on a stand,

with leveling pads, and all interconnecting piping.
28.
All components, pieces, and parts, whether or not they are specifically
University of Colorado, Boulder, standard mechanical specifications.
29.
The instantaneous water heater shall have a one year guarantee against
defective material, or faulty workmanship.
Acceptable Manufacturers
a.
Armstrong Flo-rite
b.
Leslie Constantemp
B.
Heating Hot Water Converters:

1.
2.10
Specify tube and shell design where water circulates in the tubes and
steam in the jacket. The design need not require double-wall tubes for
heating hot water.
INSULATION JACKETS, REMOVABLE / REUSEABLE

A.
JULY 2012
Removable insulation jackets are to be specified for use on the following: all
pressure-powered condensate pumps, all pressure regulators, traps 1 and larger,
gate/globe/butterfly valves 2 and larger, and strainers 2 and larger.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-9
2.11
MAIN STEAM METERS
2.12
GENERAL
A.
Project Engineer of Record shall submit to Utility Services the projected

Maximum, Minimum, and Normal operating conditions of each service.
B.
All main (primary) meter applications shall be on the high pressure side (before
the PRV station of the building).
C.
D.
Units
1.
2.13
UTILITY SERVICES METER PANEL (UMP)

A.
chilled water, domestic work, and electric).
B.
C.
1.

a.
2.
All meters (chilled water, electrical, steam, domestic water) shall

communicate via a dedicated RS-485 network utilizing ModBus RTU
Protocol.
D.
E.
2.14 FLOW COMPUTER/TOTALIZER:

A.
JULY 2012
Kessler-Ellis Products (KEP) ES-749 flow computer shall be connected to all

steam meters. The KEP shall be panel mount type and installed in UMP. The KEP
UCB STANDARDS
15521-10
ES-769 is an acceptable alternate when auxiliary inputs are required for the
application (such as net metering or trap monitoring).
B.
C.
D.
2.15
The KEP flow computer will receive the analog flow signal as an input from the
steam meter
Outputs: The KEP will send a temperature or pressure compensated steam peak
demand (klbs/hr) and total consumption (klbs) output via Modbus RTU Protocol
to the UCS Gateway device (Master) located in the UMP over a dedicated RS485
communication trunk. All wiring and terminations are to be completed by
Temperature Control or Electrical Contractor (approval required), including
installation of KEP, wiring of meter components to KEP, wiring of KEP to UCS,
setup, and KEP programming.
No substitutions
METERS
A.
B.
JULY 2012
Differential Pressure Meter:

1.
Meter shall be sized to meet EOR minimum, maximum, and normal

operating parameter. Turndown ration shall be no less than 30:1.
2.
All steam meters shall be pressure compensated unless approved

otherwise by Utility Services.
3.
Meter flow rate range and size shall be verified by UCB Facilities
Operations, Utility Services. Meter shall have 300 psi rated flanges.
4.
All steam meter installations shall be in accordance with the University of

Colorado Boulder Utility Standard No. EO-102-A latest revision.
5.
Approved Manufacturers:
a.
Veris, Inc. Accelabar
b.
McCrometer Vcone
c.
UCB Utility Services Approved Equal
Differential Pressure Transmitters (DP) for Steam Meters:

1.
Pressure transmitters shall be in accordance with Utility Services Meter

Standard Detail Drawing ##-###. Specify remote mount heads for low
clearance installations.
2.
All transmitters shall be Hart capable, no exceptions:
UCB STANDARDS
15521-11
C.
3.
General: Two-wire smart DP cell type transmitter, 4-20 mA or 1-5 Vdc

user-selectable linear or square root output, adjustable span and zero,
stainless steel wetted parts.
4.
All transmitters for meter installations shall be in accordance with the

University of Colorado Boulder Utility Standard No. EO-103-A latest
revision
5.
Manufacturers
a.
Rosemount or approved equal.
Vortex Meter:
1.
D.
E.
JULY 2012
Specify inline vortex meter for constant flow steam services (Approval
required by Utility Services). Meter flow rate range and size shall be
verified by UCB Facilities Operations, Utility Services. Meter shall have
300 psi rated flanges. Vortex meters are not acceptable for main steam
service without Utility Services pre-approval.
Condensate Meter:
1.
When primary flow measurement cannot be achieved, than an

electromagnetic flow meter shall be used. All condensate meters require
approval of Utility Services.
2.
Meter shall consist of a full-bore body with encapsulated and rigidly

retained set of coils.
3.
Meter electronics shall be capable of remote mounting.
4.
Meter shall be supplied with pulse and analog (4-20 mA) outputs.
5.
Meter shall be capable of measuring fluids with conductivity greater than

or equal to 5.0 uS/cm2.
6.
Electronic cycle counters are not an acceptable measurement device for

primary billing.
7.
The piping and flow tube of the meter must be full at all times. The meter
shall be mounted in such a way to provide a wet leg as required.
Meter Submittals
UCB STANDARDS
15521-12
1.
2.12
NUTS AND BOLTS

A.
2.13
2.17
1.
HPS no greater than 10,000 FPM.
2.
LPS no greater than 8,000 FPM.
3.
Humidification no greater than 6,000 FPM.
When winter seasonal steam load exceeds summer seasonal steam load by 10
times, specify a 25%-100% automatic switchover system. See Appendix A for
details.
SEALS, MECHANICAL
A.
2.16
Pipe size: Size to allow not greater than 8.000 FPM (feet/minute) based on
maximum load.
REGULATORS / PRVs
A.
2.15
Nuts and bolts to be no less than grade 8. No substitutions.
PIPING
A.
2.14
All main (primary) steam service meters shall be approved by Utility

Services prior to purchase and installation.
Any piping penetrations through tunnel walls or lids, or through building

foundations, must be sealed with a mechanical seal that is both expandable and
water-tight. In addition, the penetration must be sealed on the exterior with a
water-tight, non-shrink grout.
STRAINERS
A.
Specify a cast iron #250 Y-type strainer with stainless steel mesh or screen basket
for all screwed applications [2 and below]. Strainer must have a threaded fitting
for use as a blowdown. All strainer blowdowns shall be ball valves with a short
pipe nipple-sch 80 on the outlet side.
B.
Specify a cast steel Y-type strainer with stainless steel mesh or screen basket for
all flanged applications. Strainer must have a threaded fitting for use as a
blowdown. All strainer blowdowns shall be ball valves with a short pipe nipplesch 80 on the outlet side.
1.
Cast Steel
HPS
15 psi + Above
2.
Cast Iron
LPS
15 psi + Below
TRAPS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-13
A.
Inverted Bucket: All Applications that are fed by a modulating control valve
must use the LV (large vent) model. Sizing shall be as follows:
2 to l @ .5 psi for 0-15 psi
2 to l @ 2 psi for 16-30 psi
3 to l @ 1/2 of maximum pressure drop above 30 psi
3 to 1 at operating pressure differential on constant pressure
B.
Thermostatic traps used only for air vents and direct steam radiation.
PART 3 STEAM SPECIALTIES, RELATED EQUIPMENT, AND ACCEPTABLE

PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS
*Please note: the term approved equal refers to approval by the University of Colorado
at Boulder, Facilities Management Steam Shop for low pressure steam and hydronic
systems and Utility Services for metering, high pressure steam, and condensate systems
only, no exceptions.
3.01
3.02
3.03
AIR VENTS
A.
Use balanced-pressure type with stainless steel bellows, valve, and seat.
B.
1.
Spirax/Sarco
2.
Armstrong
3.
Hoffman ITT
4.
Approved equal
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
Use only 100% virgin teflon tape for all threaded pipe fittings. No thread sealing
compound or pipe dope will be permitted.
B.
Use a metal-based [typically nickel] anti-seize with a 2000-degree rating for all
flange bolts.
C.
Acceptable Manufacturers, metal-based anti-seize:

1.
Permatex
2.
Approved equal
CONDENSATE COOLERS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-14
A.
3.04
3.05
3.06
Acceptable Manufacturers: none
CONDENSATE PUMPS
A.
Use probe style, pressure-powered pump with compressed air as the motive
medium.
B.
1.
Johnson Liqui-Mover
2.
Armstrong
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Use bellows style expansion joints where the bellows are designed in accordance
with sections C1-C8 of the Standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers
Association.
B.
1.
Pathway CTU
2.
Approved equal
FITTINGS
A.
B.

1.
Use forged steel for threaded fittings. 2000 Lb.
2.
Use schedule 40 seamless, butt-welded steel conforming to ASTM A234

standard for welded fittings.
Unions:
1.
C.
JULY 2012
250 lb malleable iron with brass seats.
Flanges:
1.
Use raised-face, welding neck flanges conforming to ASTM A181

standard or slip-on, raised face with approval.
2.
a.
Ladish
b.
Grinnel
c.
Bonney Forge
d.
Approved equal
UCB STANDARDS
15521-15
3.07
3.08
3.09
GASKETS
A.
Use spiral-wound gaskets where the windings are manufactured with Type 304
stainless steel with non-asbestos filler and the outer ring [gauge ring] is
B.
1.
Flexitallic
2.
Garlock
3.
Lamons
4.
Approved equal
GAUGES, PRESSURE
A.
Use 4 dry gage with 1/4 MPT connection. Rated for steam with stainless steel
intervals.
B.
1.
U.S. Gauge
2.
Winters LF
3.
Trerice 700 Series
4.
WIKA 23 X .59 Series
HOT WATER CONVERTERS / HEAT EXCHANGERS

A.
Domestic Hot Water Converters:
B.
Instantaneous Hot Water Converter: Use a feed-forward design that utilizes

pressure for control rather than temperature. Tube design can be either be straightthrough or helical but helical design must have Hastelloy seats.
1.
C.

1.
JULY 2012
Tube and Shell style [with storage] Hot Water Converters:

a.
Use type with single-wall tube construction where steam is in the
tube bundle and water in the jacket.
Use tube and shell style with single-wall tube construction where steam is
in the tube bundle and water in the jacket.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-16
3.10
3.11
Acceptable Manufacturers, Instantaneous Hot Water Converters:

a.
Armstrong Flo-Rite
b.
Leslie Constantemp
3.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Tube and Shell Hot Water Converters:

a.
Bell & Gossett
b.
Armstrong Pump
c.
Approved equal

A.
Use jacket with teflon-coated fiberglass cloth, #6 density fiberglass, stainless steel
hardware, Velcro tabs, and Nomex drawcords.
B.
1.
Insultech by Shannon Enterprises
2.
Approved equal
METERS
A.
B.
3.12
2.
Steam Meters:
1.
Acceptable Manufacturer, differential pressure Steam Meter:

Veris Accelabar, McCrometer V-Cone, or approved equivalent.
2.
Acceptable Manufacturer, Inline Vortex Steam Meters:

Emco, Onicon, Yokogawa, Sierra Instruments, or approved equivalent.
Condensate Meters:
1.
Use a cycle counter for pressure-powered condensate pumps.
2.
Cadillac CMAG Flanged ends
PIPING
A.
Steam Piping:
1.
B.
JULY 2012
Use only ASTM type A106 seamless black steel pipe. All welded
applications shall be schedule 40 and all threaded applications must be
schedule 80.
Condensate Piping:
1.
Use only ASTM type A106 seamless black steel pipe. All condensate
piping must be schedule 80.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-17
2.
C.
Direct-Bury Underground Piping:

1.
3.13
3.15
3.16
Acceptable Manufacturers, Direct-Bury Piping:

a.
Ricwil / Perma-Pipe
b.
Approved equal
REGULATORS / PRVs
A.
3.14
Stainless steel pipe may be substituted with prior approval by the USB,
Facilities Management, Steam Shop only, no exceptions.
Use Leslie Model GPK air-loaded steam regulator with Leslie Airmate Model
AG-2 air pressure reducing valve with filter and gauge for actuation. Due to the
critical nature of regulators and the goal of reducing spare parts inventory, this is
the only allowable manufacturer and model. Use screwed connections for 1
and below, flanged connections for 1 and above.
SEALS, MECHANICAL
A.
Use a mechanical seal that is heat-rated, expandable, and water-tight.
B.
1.
Link-Seal Model T [silicone] by Thunderline
2.
Approved equal
STRAINERS
A.
Use cast steam rated steel, 250 lb. Y-type strainer with stainless steel mesh or
screen basket for all screwed applications. Strainer must have a threaded fitting
for use as a blowdown.
B.
Use a cast steel Y-type strainer with stainless steel mesh or screen basket for all
flanged applications. Strainer must have a threaded fitting for use as a blowdown.
C.
1.
Spirax/Sarco
2.
Leslie
3.
Armstrong
4.
Approved equal
TRAPS
A.
JULY 2012
Float and Thermostatic Traps:

UCB STANDARDS
15521-18
1.
B.
C.
3.17
Trap must be fully modulating type suitable for continuous operation with
a cast iron body and cover. Internal parts must be fully accessible without
disturbing piping. Float, air vent, head, seat, and valve mechanism shall be
manufactured of stainless steel. An integral vacuum breaker is required.
Inverted Bucket Traps:

1.
For design loads exceeding 600 lbs./hr. of condensate, use a trap with a
cast iron body and cover where internal parts are fully accessible without
disturbing piping.
2.
The bucket and lever mechanism shall be stainless steel and the valve and
seat must be chromed steel that has been hardened, ground, and lapped.
3.
For design loads of 600 lbs./hr. or less of condensate, use a trap with a
stainless steel body and separate inline swivel connector. All other
components shall be made of stainless steel as well.
Thermostatic Radiator Traps:

1.
Due to the goal of reducing spare parts inventory, only three thermostatic
radiator trap models are utilized on campus.
2.
Acceptable Manufacturer, Float and Thermostatic Trap:

a.
Armstrong only
3.
Acceptable Manufacturer, Inverted Bucket Trap with Cast Iron Body:

a.
Armstrong only
4.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Inverted Bucket Trap with Stainless Steel

Body:
a.
Spirax/Sarco Model UIB30
b.
Armstrong Model 2011 p.c.
5.
Acceptable Manufacturer, Thermostatic Radiator Trap:

a.
Tunstall Model TA
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
Use hardened ball check valve design with all working parts manufactured from
stainless steel.
B.
JULY 2012
1.
Spirax/Sarco Model VB21
2.
Armstrong
UCB STANDARDS
15521-19
3.18
3.
Johnson
4.
Approved equal
VALVES
A.
Butterfly Valves:
1.
Use only highperformance, steam-rated, lug-style wafer [between

flanges] body with gear-driven actuator.
2.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Butterfly Valves:

a.
Keystone
b.
DeZurik
c.
Jamesbury
d.
Vanessa
3.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Gate Valves / Class 800: [no Nibco, RedWhite, or Toyo]
a.
Vogt
b.
Bonney Forge
c.
Anvil
d.
Approved equal
4.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Globe Valves / Class 800: [no Nibco, Red-White, or

Toyo]
a.
b.
c.
d.
JULY 2012
Vogt
Bonney Forge
Anvil
Approved equal
5.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Ball Valves:

a.
Apollo Model 73A-Size-64
b.
Spirax/Sarco Model M10S
c.
Approved equal
6.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Swing Check Valves:

a.
Crane
b.
Stockham
c.
Mueller
d.
Milwaukee
e.
Approved equal
7.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Spring Check Valves:

a.
Durabla Model SCV 750 CWP / 500 WSP
b.
Armstrong
c.
Approved equal
8.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Wafer Check Valve:

UCB STANDARDS
15521-20
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
9.
10.
B.
F.
JULY 2012
Specifications are the same as for gate valves.
Use only a valve with forged steel body, full-port construction, MTFE
seats and packing, stainless steel ball and, stainless steel blowout-proof
stem. The valve must be rated to 150 psig saturated steam.
Check Valves:
1.
Swing check valves must be bronze-bodied, Class 300 [300 psi WSP]
with bronze disc and stainless steel hinge pin.
2.
Spring check valves must be stainless steel construction and rated at 300
psi WSP or better.
3.
Wafer check valves are designed to fit between two flanges. They must
be
manufactured stainless construction [body, disc, spring, and spring
retainer] and have an opening rate of 1/2 psi or less.
Radiator Control Valves:

1.
G.
Use rising-stem Class 800 forged steel [A105] valve with spiral-wound
top gasket.
Ball Valves:
1.
E.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Safety Relief Valves:

a.
Leslie
b.
Spence
Globe Valves:
1.
D.
Acceptable Manufacturers, Radiator Control Valves:

a.
Ammark
b.
American Steam
Gate Valves:
1.
C.
Durabla
Spirax/Sarco Model DCV 4
Mueller
Marlin
Approved equal
Use a chrome-plated, bronze-bodied, steam-rated valve with a

thermostatically actuated controller where the thermostat is integral to the
controller.
Safety Relief Valves:

UCB STANDARDS
15521-21
1.
H.
Use a steam-rated safety relief valve that has a cast iron body, a bolted
bonnet design, seats lapped to optical flatness, and dual control rings. The
valve must have bronze semi-nozzle trim. Due to the varying steam
pressure reducing valve manufacturers safety relief valve requirements,
the safety relief valve shall be of the same manufacture brand as the steam
PRV.
If piping run is longer than 10, the pipe size must be increased one pipe size
larger.
PART 4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

4.01
AIR VENTS
A.
4.02
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
4.03
4.04
Do not install on posi-pressure control systems (steam coils). Pipe relief

discharge to floor.
Use on all bolts and cap screws.
CONDENSATE PUMP
A.
All welds to be done by a ASME certified welder.
B.
Threads on pipe must be cut correctly. Not allowing more then 3 turn
by hand and a minimum of 2 turns.
C.
Pumps to be leveled and plumb.
D.
All equipment should be set for ease of maintenance.
E.
Vent piping to be taken to an outside location. 1st Choice would be the roof.
F.
All piping should be individually hung to secure.
G.
Motive steam should have drip trap.
H.
Air lines will use black pipe or rigid copper.
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
All weld to be done shall be done by a certified welder.
B.
Expansion joints to be properly anchored according to drawings.
C.
Guides to be spaced per manufactures recommendation.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-22
4.05
4.06
HOT WATER CONVERTERS/HEAT EXCHANGES

A.
Unit must be piped for ease of tube removal.
B.
Unit must be set at a height for ease of maintenance.
C.
Feed forward units must have thermal loops. (18 minimum)
D.
Feed forward units with recirc must have a diverting valve installed.
E.
Condensate to be returned by gravity.
F.
Isolation valves on all piping to unit.
G.
Vacuum breaker must be installed after unit and before trap.
PRESSURE REDUCING STATION

A.
Support piping on each side of reducing valve using pipe saddles (for full wrap of
insulation).
B.
Install drip traps on the high and low sides of reducing station (see detail on drips for
proper piping).
C.
Install strainers with blowdown valves before all regulating valves and traps.
D.
Install gauges, isolation valve, and pigtail on high and low side of station.
D.
Use a high performance butterfly valve with gear operator (lug style) on 2.5 pipe
and larger. Use a forged steel gate valve on 1 1/2 and smaller pipe.
E.
Use a concentric reducer on the outlet of the regulator.
F.
Use pipe for the control piping between GPK and low pressure steam main.
G.
Mount Leslie AF-2 air mate where it is accessible. Use rigid copper to pipe from the
air mate to the GPK.
H.
Mount safety relief valve where it is accessible.
I.
Mount drip pan elbow as close to safety relief as possible. Use a flange or a union
(depending on size) for ease of replacing valve if needed.
J.
Drain from drip pan shall be run to a floor drain with a union at the drip pan for ease
of removal if necessary.
K.
Apply anti-seize on all bolts.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-23
4.07
4.08
L.
Use Teflon tape only on all threaded joints.
M.
Use only spiral wound gaskets on flanges.
N.
All welding being performed to be done by a ASME certified welder.
O.
Use 250# steam rated ball valves on all blowdowns. See standards for required
valve.
P.
Pilot lines need to be run with slope down away from GPK.
Q.
All pressure reducing valves to have unions or flanges on each side for ease of
removal.
R.
See Appendix Diagram A.
TESTING
A.
All new steam and condensate piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 1 times the
operating pressure of the system, or 100 psig, whichever is higher. The test must
hold TEST pressure for a minimum time period of two hours.
B.
Must inspect all piping welded, threaded and any type of soldering before piping
can be insulated. Systems must be inspected by UCB Steam Shop before operation.
TRAPS
A.
All traps to be installed with unions and isolation valves for ease of removal.
B.
All traps to be installed below equipment.
C.
Check valves on inlet of all bucket traps (see drawing)
D.
Test tees after trap to point down.
E.
See Diagram for Main Drip Appendix A.
PART 5 INSTALLER (CONTRACTOR) QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

5.01
QUALIFICATION
A.
5.02
Any Journeyman Steamfitter working on jobsite shall be licensed by City and

County of Denver. The license must be carried on their person at all times while
on the jobsite, and be available for inspection by UCB staff at anytime.
ALLOWABLE JOURNEYMAN/APPRENTICE RATIOS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-24
A.
5.03
5.04
The installer (contractor) may use apprentice steamfitters on the jobsite. At no

time shall the ratio of two apprentices to one journeyman be exceeded on the
jobsite.
WELDER QUALIFICATIONS AND QUALIFICATONS AND PROCEDURES FOR

STEAM AND CONDENSTE PIPING
A.
B.

of the ASME code, Boiler and Pressure Vessel (welding and brazing), ASME B31
and Appendix B31.1 2007, Power Piping Welding Procedures.
WELD INSPECTION
A.
Standards (visually), then Contractor may be required to X-ray weld or cut out
weld for further inspection. Contractor will be responsible for costs associated
with X-raying or removal and re-welding.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-25
SECTION 15521
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.02
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.

Manufacturers
4.
5.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
JULY 2012

UCB STANDARDS
15521-1
B.
needs.
C.

D.
E.

2.01
AIR VENTS
A.
2.02
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
2.03
CONDENSATE COOLERS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-2
A.
2.04
CONDENSATE PUMPS
A.
JULY 2012

1.

2.

3.

vessel.
4.

5.
relay.
6.
7.
8.
10.
11.
outlet.
a.
b.
12.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-3
a.
b.
JULY 2012

substitutes).
13.
14.
150#.
15.

16.
valve.
17.
18.
19.

20.
21.
22.

23.
24.

25.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-4
a.
Armstrong
b.
2.05
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
B.
JULY 2012
Design
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

8.
Materials
1.
2.
3.
expansion order.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-5
C.
Insulation Blankets
1.

2.
cover.
a.
b.
Or approved equal
D.
Guides
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.

6.

7.
a.
b.
Or approved equal
2.06
FITTINGS
A.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-6
B.
C.
2.07
2.
Unions:
1.
2.

3.
Flanges:
1.

be permitted.
2.
correctly.
GAUGES, PRESSURE
A.
2.09
GASKETS
A.
2.08
1.
anti-siphon tube.

A.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-7
JULY 2012
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
internals.
9.
10.
11.

12.
13.
14.

_____________ gpm.
15.
steel, schedule 80.
16.
17.
18.

UCB STANDARDS
15521-8
19.
20.
21.

22.
23.
24.
25.
26.

27.

28.
29.
a.
Armstrong Flo-rite
b.
Leslie Constantemp
B.

1.
2.10
heating hot water.

A.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-9
2.11
MAIN STEAM METERS
2.12
GENERAL
A.

B.
C.
D.
Units
1.
2.13

A.
B.
C.
1.

a.
2.

Protocol.
D.
E.

A.
JULY 2012

UCB STANDARDS
15521-10
B.
C.
D.
2.15
steam meter
No substitutions
METERS
A.
B.
JULY 2012

1.

2.

3.
4.

5.
a.
b.
McCrometer Vcone
c.

1.

2.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-11
C.
3.

4.

revision
5.
Manufacturers
a.
Vortex Meter:
1.
D.
E.
JULY 2012
Condensate Meter:
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.

6.

primary billing.
7.
Meter Submittals
UCB STANDARDS
15521-12
1.
2.12
NUTS AND BOLTS

A.
2.13
2.17
1.
2.
3.
details.
SEALS, MECHANICAL
A.
2.16
maximum load.
REGULATORS / PRVs
A.
2.15
PIPING
A.
2.14


STRAINERS
A.
B.
1.
Cast Steel
HPS
15 psi + Above
2.
Cast Iron
LPS
15 psi + Below
TRAPS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-13
A.
B.

3.01
3.02
3.03
AIR VENTS
A.
B.
1.
Spirax/Sarco
2.
Armstrong
3.
Hoffman ITT
4.
Approved equal
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
B.
flange bolts.
C.

1.
Permatex
2.
Approved equal
CONDENSATE COOLERS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-14
A.
3.04
3.05
3.06
CONDENSATE PUMPS
A.
medium.
B.
1.
Johnson Liqui-Mover
2.
Armstrong
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Association.
B.
1.
Pathway CTU
2.
Approved equal
FITTINGS
A.
B.

1.
2.

Unions:
1.
C.
JULY 2012
Flanges:
1.

2.
a.
Ladish
b.
Grinnel
c.
Bonney Forge
d.
Approved equal
UCB STANDARDS
15521-15
3.07
3.08
3.09
GASKETS
A.
B.
1.
Flexitallic
2.
Garlock
3.
Lamons
4.
Approved equal
GAUGES, PRESSURE
A.
intervals.
B.
1.
U.S. Gauge
2.
Winters LF
3.
Trerice 700 Series
4.

A.
B.

1.
C.

1.
JULY 2012

a.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-16
3.10
3.11

a.
Armstrong Flo-Rite
b.
Leslie Constantemp
3.

a.
Bell & Gossett
b.
Armstrong Pump
c.
Approved equal

A.
B.
1.
2.
Approved equal
METERS
A.
B.
3.12
2.
Steam Meters:
1.

2.

Condensate Meters:
1.
2.
PIPING
A.
Steam Piping:
1.
B.
JULY 2012
schedule 80.
Condensate Piping:
1.
UCB STANDARDS
15521-17
2.
C.

1.
3.13
3.15
3.16

a.
Ricwil / Perma-Pipe
b.
Approved equal
REGULATORS / PRVs
A.
3.14
SEALS, MECHANICAL
A.
B.
1.
2.
Approved equal
STRAINERS
A.
B.
C.
1.
Spirax/Sarco
2.
Leslie
3.
Armstrong
4.
Approved equal
TRAPS
A.
JULY 2012

UCB STANDARDS
15521-18
1.
B.
C.
3.17

1.
disturbing piping.
2.
3.

1.
2.

a.
Armstrong only
3.

a.
Armstrong only
4.

Body:
a.
b.
5.

a.
Tunstall Model TA
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
stainless steel.
B.
JULY 2012
1.
2.
Armstrong
UCB STANDARDS
15521-19
3.18
3.
Johnson
4.
Approved equal
VALVES
A.
Butterfly Valves:
1.

2.

a.
Keystone
b.
DeZurik
c.
Jamesbury
d.
Vanessa
3.
a.
Vogt
b.
Bonney Forge
c.
Anvil
d.
Approved equal
4.

Toyo]
a.
b.
c.
d.
JULY 2012
Vogt
Bonney Forge
Anvil
Approved equal
5.

a.
b.
c.
Approved equal
6.

a.
Crane
b.
Stockham
c.
Mueller
d.
Milwaukee
e.
Approved equal
7.

a.
b.
Armstrong
c.
Approved equal
8.

UCB STANDARDS
15521-20
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
9.
10.
B.
F.
JULY 2012
Check Valves:
1.
2.
psi WSP or better.
3.
be

1.
G.
top gasket.
Ball Valves:
1.
E.

a.
Leslie
b.
Spence
Globe Valves:
1.
D.

a.
Ammark
b.
American Steam
Gate Valves:
1.
C.
Durabla
Mueller
Marlin
Approved equal

controller.

UCB STANDARDS
15521-21
1.
H.
PRV.
larger.

4.01
AIR VENTS
A.
4.02
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
4.03
4.04
Do not install on posi-pressure control systems (steam coils). Pipe relief

discharge to floor.
CONDENSATE PUMP
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-22
4.05
4.06

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

A.
insulation).
B.
proper piping).
C.
D.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-23
4.07
4.08
L.
M.
N.
O.
valve.
P.
Q.
removal.
R.
TESTING
A.
B.
TRAPS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

5.01
QUALIFICATION
A.
5.02

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-24
A.
5.03
5.04

jobsite.

A.
B.

WELD INSPECTION
A.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15521-25
SECTION 15521
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.02
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.

Manufacturers
4.
5.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-1
B.
needs.
C.

D.
E.

2.01
AIR VENTS
A.
2.02
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-2
2.03
CONDENSATE COOLERS
A.
2.04
CONDENSATE PUMPS
A.

1.

2.

3.

vessel.
4.

5.
relay.
6.
7.
8.
10.
11.
outlet.
a.
b.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-3
12.
a.
b.
substitutes).
13.
14.
150#.
15.

16.
valve.
17.
18.
19.

20.
21.
22.

23.
24.

25.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-4
a.
Armstrong
b.
2.05
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
B.
Design
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

8.
Materials
1.
2.
3.
expansion order.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-5
C.
Insulation Blankets
1.

2.
cover.
a.
b.
Or approved equal
D.
Guides
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.

6.

7.
a.
b.
Or approved equal
2.06
FITTINGS
A.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-6
B.
C.
2.07
2.
Unions:
1.
2.

3.
Flanges:
1.

be permitted.
2.
correctly.
GAUGES, PRESSURE
A.
2.09
GASKETS
A.
2.08
1.
anti-siphon tube.

A.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-7
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
internals.
9.
10.
11.

12.
13.
14.

_____________ gpm.
15.
steel, schedule 80.
16.
17.
18.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-8
19.
20.
21.

22.
23.
24.
25.
26.

27.

28.
29.
a.
Armstrong Flo-rite
b.
Leslie Constantemp
B.

1.
2.10
heating hot water.

A.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-9
2.11
MAIN STEAM METERS
2.12
GENERAL
A.

B.
C.
D.
Units
1.
2.13

A.
B.
C.
1.

a.
2.

Protocol.
D.
E.

A.

AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-10
B.
C.
D.
2.15
steam meter
No substitutions
METERS
A.
B.

1.

2.

3.
4.

5.
a.
b.
McCrometer Vcone
c.

1.

2.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-11
C.
3.

4.

revision
5.
Manufacturers
a.
Vortex Meter:
1.
D.
Condensate Meter:
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.

6.

primary billing.
7.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-12
E.
Meter Submittals
1.
2.12
NUTS AND BOLTS

A.
2.13
1.
2.
3.
details.
SEALS, MECHANICAL
A.
2.16
maximum load.
REGULATORS / PRVs
A.
2.15
PIPING
A.
2.14


STRAINERS
A.
B.
1.
Cast Steel
HPS
15 psi + Above
2.
Cast Iron
LPS
15 psi + Below
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-13
2.17
TRAPS
A.
B.

3.01
3.02
AIR VENTS
A.
B.
1.
Spirax/Sarco
2.
Armstrong
3.
Hoffman ITT
4.
Approved equal
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
B.
flange bolts.
C.

1.
AUGUST 2011
Permatex
UCB STANDARDS
15521-14
2.
3.03
CONDENSATE COOLERS
A.
3.04
3.05
3.06
Approved equal
CONDENSATE PUMPS
A.
medium.
B.
1.
Johnson Liqui-Mover
2.
Armstrong
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Association.
B.
1.
Pathway CTU
2.
Approved equal
FITTINGS
A.
B.

1.
2.

Unions:
1.
C.
Flanges:
1.

2.
a.
Ladish
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-15
b.
c.
d.
3.07
3.08
3.09
Grinnel
Bonney Forge
Approved equal
GASKETS
A.
B.
1.
Flexitallic
2.
Garlock
3.
Lamons
4.
Approved equal
GAUGES, PRESSURE
A.
intervals.
B.
1.
U.S. Gauge
2.
Winters LF
3.
Trerice 700 Series
4.

A.
B.

1.
C.

a.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-16
3.10
3.11
2.

a.
Armstrong Flo-Rite
b.
Leslie Constantemp
3.

a.
Bell & Gossett
b.
Armstrong Pump
c.
Approved equal

A.
B.
1.
2.
Approved equal
METERS
A.
B.
3.12
1.
Steam Meters:
1.

2.

Condensate Meters:
1.
2.
PIPING
A.
Steam Piping:
1.
B.
schedule 80.
Condensate Piping:
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-17
C.
1.
2.

1.
3.13
REGULATORS / PRVs
A.
3.14
3.15

a.
Ricwil / Perma-Pipe
b.
Approved equal
SEALS, MECHANICAL
A.
B.
1.
2.
Approved equal
STRAINERS
A.
B.
C.
1.
Spirax/Sarco
2.
Leslie
3.
Armstrong
4.
Approved equal
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-18
3.16
TRAPS
A.

1.
B.
C.
3.17

1.
disturbing piping.
2.
3.

1.
2.

a.
Armstrong only
3.

a.
Armstrong only
4.

Body:
a.
b.
5.

a.
Tunstall Model TA
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
stainless steel.
B.
1.
AUGUST 2011

UCB STANDARDS
15521-19
3.18
2.
Armstrong
3.
Johnson
4.
Approved equal
VALVES
A.
Butterfly Valves:
1.

2.

a.
Keystone
b.
DeZurik
c.
Jamesbury
d.
Vanessa
3.
a.
Vogt
b.
Bonney Forge
c.
Anvil
d.
Approved equal
4.

Toyo]
a.
b.
c.
d.
Vogt
Bonney Forge
Anvil
Approved equal
5.

a.
b.
c.
Approved equal
6.

a.
Crane
b.
Stockham
c.
Mueller
d.
Milwaukee
e.
Approved equal
7.

a.
b.
Armstrong
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-20
c.
8.

a.
Durabla
b.
c.
Mueller
d.
Marlin
e.
Approved equal
9.

a.
Ammark
b.
American Steam
10.
B.
F.
Ball Valves:
1.
E.
top gasket.
Globe Valves:
1.
D.

a.
Leslie
b.
Spence
Gate Valves:
1.
C.
Approved equal
Check Valves:
1.
2.
psi WSP or better.
3.
be
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-21
1.
G.

1.
H.

controller.
PRV.
larger.

4.01
AIR VENTS
A.
4.02
4.04
Pipe relief
ANTI-SEIZE
A.
4.03
Do not install on posi-pressure control systems (steam coils).

discharge to floor.
CONDENSATE PUMP
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
EXPANSION JOINTS
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-22
4.05
4.06
A.
B.
C.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

A.
insulation).
B.
proper piping).
C.
D.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-23
4.07
4.08
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
valve.
P.
Q.
removal.
R.
TESTING
A.
B.
TRAPS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

5.01
QUALIFICATION
A.

AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-24
5.02

A.
5.03
5.04

jobsite.

A.
B.

WELD INSPECTION
A.
AUGUST 2011
UCB STANDARDS
15521-25
SECTION 15531
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Tube, Fittings and Joints.
2. Refrigeration Specialties.
3. Section 15650 - Refrigeration.
4. Section 15790 - Air Coils: Refrigeration Coils.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

ANSI B9.1 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration"
(also known as ANSI/ASHRAE 15).
ANSI B31.5 "Refrigeration Piping", and extend applicable lower pressure limits to
pressures below 15 psig.
B. American Welding Society (AWS).
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. Refrigerants:
a. This refrigerant piping guide section is written for the typical small project using
Group I Refrigerants which are negligibly toxic and non-flammable. The use of
HCFC refrigerants is discouraged and the use of CFC refrigerants is unacceptable.
Specify refrigerants such as R134a, R410A, and R407C when possible.
LEED EAp3: CFC Reduction in HVAC&R Equipment and EAc4: Ozone Depletion:
Meet requirements.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15531-1
2. Piping:
a. Specify Type ACR Copper Tube with brazed joints as applicable. Use 15% silver
solder.
3. Oil Traps:
a. Ascertain that oil traps are not required and design piping to avoid their use
whenever possible.
4. Accessory Equipment to include:
a. Sight glass moisture indicator installed in the liquid line at a convenient and
accessible location.
b. Liquid solenoid valve located near the expansion valve on systems using coil
pump-down.
c. Service hand valves shall be required on small and extensive or large refrigerant
systems. They shall be located for component isolation purposes during normal
maintenance.
d. Liquid charging port and service valve installed in the liquid line on large
systems.
e. Oil separators required if evaporator is below 0 degree F and located below
condensing unit.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Three year minimum installation experience on projects with

refrigeration piping system work similar in scope and nature to that required for the
project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A. Line sets are not allowed.

B. Tube, Fittings and Joints:
1. Tube Material:
a. Size 3/4" and smaller: No soft copper.
b. Size 7/8" through 4-1/8" ALH Pipe: Hard drawn temper copper tube.
2. Type ACR.
3. Fittings: Wrought-copper, solder-joints, ANSI B16.22
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15531-2
4. Joints: Brazed or soldered with material having shear strength of 10,000 PSI or
greater.
2.02
REFRIGERANT VALVES
A. Globe and Check Valves:

1. Manufacturers:
Henry Valve Co.
Parker Hannifin Corp.
Singer
Sporlan Valve Co.
B. Solenoid Valves:
1. Manufacturers:
Alco Controls Division, Emerson Electric Co.
Automatic Switch Co.
Sporlan Valve Co.
C. Refrigeration Accessories (Strainers, Moisture-Liquid Indicators, Filter-Driers,
Evaporator Pressure Regulators, Discharge Line Mufflers, Expansion Valves, Superheat
Adjustment):
1. Manufacturers:
Alco Controls Division, Emerson Electric Co.
Henry Valve Co.
Parker Hannifin Corp.
Sporlan Valve Co.
2.03
COMPRESSORS
A. Specify 5-year extended warranty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Specify that it is not acceptable to vent to atmosphere when using refrigerant for testing
systems.
B. In general for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" sub-paragraph A in
C. Specify condensate pans which slope toward drain.
D. Pressure Test System shall hold 300 psi nitrogen charge for a 24-hour period, and be
inspected by HVAC representative.
E. Evacuation System shall be evacuated to 250 microns, and inspected by HVAC
representative.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15531-3
F. Suction line pipe shall be insulated and pipe hangers and pipe supports shall be on
outside of insulation. Insulation should carry the hangers.
G. All pipe on the outside of building to Condenser shall have a metal cover.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15531-4
SECTION 15540
PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Base Mounted Pumps.
2. Horizontal Split Case Pumps.
3. In-line Pumps.
4. Steam Condensate Return Pumps.
4. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation.
5. Section 15511 - Hydronic Piping and Specialties.
6. Section 15521 - Steam and Condensate Piping and Specialties.
7. Section 15548 - HVAC Water Treatment.
8. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Hydraulic Institute Standards.

1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. Pumping System Design:
a. A primary-secondary pumping system is preferred, where practical.
b. Design pumping systems so that the available positive head at the pump intake
will be larger than the required net positive suction head at the highest possible
water temperature at the pump intake.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15540-1
c. The pump curve representing flow-head relationship shall intersect the system
curve at design operating point.
d. Select pumps to operate at optimum efficiency as the primary selection criteria.
LEED EAp2: Minimum Energy performance and EAc1:
Optimize Energy Performance
e. Base friction head calculations on Hydraulic Institute Standards for:
1). Chilled water systems: New Pipe.
2). Hot water systems: 15 year old pipe.
3). Steam condensate: 15 year old pipe.
f. When pump redundancy is necessary, provide parallel pumping (with check
valves) instead of two pumps with automatic change-over.
g. Select pump motor as non-overloading over the entire pump curve shown by the
manufacturer. Consider option of pump operation reset based on reference
temperature.
h. Specify pumps with separate pump and motor shafts and replaceable couplings
for all but cartridge pumps.
i. Mechanical shaft seals shall be specified. Gland seals are not acceptable.
j. LEED EAp2: Minimum Energy Performance and EAc1: Optimize Energy
Performance
Pump motors with nominal horsepower in excess of HP shall be premium
efficiency.
2. Base-Mounted Water Pumps:
a. For primary pumping applications, split case centrifugal pumps are preferred over
end-suction pumps.
b. Mechanical seals are required. Gland seals are not acceptable.
c. Specify complete flushing arrangement for mechanical seals and packing.
d. Specify double row outboard ball bearings on horizontal split case pumps.
e. Specify vent and drain plugs and pressure gage tappings on pump casings.
f. Specify guard on coupling.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15540-2
3. Steam-Condensate Return Pumps (electric):

a. Specify compressed air-powered condensate pump. Refer to Section 15521 for
details.
4. Steam-Condensate Return Pumps (steam or air):
a. In addition to standard specifications, specify ductile-iron body and stainless-steel
float mechanism.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Specify performance curves submitted with shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOTE: Only motors from the UCB approved list shall be used.
2.01
BASE-MOUNTED PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
Armstrong
Aurora
Bell and Gossett
ITT-AC
Paco
Peerless
Taco
Weinman
Wilo
2.02
HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
Aurora
Bell & Gossett
ITT-AC
Peerless
Weinman
Wilo
2.03
IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
Armstrong
Bell and Gossett
Grundfos*
Taco
Wilo
*Housing wants only this manufacturer
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15540-3
2.04
STEAM CONDENSATE RETURN PUMPS/RECEIVERS (AIR-TOWERED)
A. Manufacturers:
Johnson LiquiMover
Armstrong
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" sub-paragraph A in

on specific requirements of installation in addition to the following items for each
product specified.
B. Coupling Alignment:
1. After pump is permanently installed:
a. Align coupling flanges for concentricity to assure that the face and curved edge
are concentric within the manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Align coupling for angular alignment to tolerances recommended by the
manufacturer.
C. Piping Connections:
1. Install pump to be completely removed for maintenance without dismantling or
removal of any piping.
2. All pumps installed with line size isolation valves on both sides. The valve at the
discharge side shall be of balancing type with "Memory Stop".
3. Flexible connections mounted horizontally on base mounted pumps.
4. Provide valved gages at pump suction and discharge.
D. In-Line Pumps:
1. Connect directly to piping.
2. Motor shall not be separately supported except for large pumps specifically
recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Pumps shall not be mounted with motor shaft vertical unless special thrust bearings
are provided in pump design for vertical installation.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15540-4
SECTION 15548
WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Pre-Start Cleaning of HVAC Piping Systems
2. Chemical Feeders
3. Treatment for Closed Systems
4. Treatment for Open Systems
5. Corrosion Coupons
1. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
2. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
3. Section 15511 - Hydronic Piping and Specialties
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. Spill containment requirement for each chemical treatment station will be determined by
University of Colorado at Boulders Facilities Management, Refrigeration Shop water
treatment technician. Chemical containers will vary from 5 gallons to 55 gallons.
Containments of concrete or polyethylene, holding drums 30 gallons or larger, must have
a ramp to the platform level. Concrete containments must have a ramp outside and inside
the containment to wheel drums into pit area.
B. Specify the following procedures.
1. Pre-Cleaning
a. Closed Systems
JULY 2012
Hot and chilled water systems must be cleaned in the same manner prior to being
ready for operation. The chemical cleaning must be alkaline material containing
Dispersants, Detergent and Organic Corrosion inhibitors. Required system cleaner is
Ashland Flushout 624L or UCB prior approved equivalent. Once system is properly
dosed with chemical, circulate for 24 hours and, if possible, heating system water up
to 140-180F. Following circulation, drain down and flush. Fill, circulate 30
minutes and flush system until the water is clear and TDS of system water is +/- 50
UCB STANDARDS
15548-1
mhos that of city water. Once system has been properly flushed, add closed-system
inhibitor (Nitrate based) to boost chilled water levels to 400-600 ppm as N02. Hot
systems should be dosed with inhibitor to boost nitrite levels to 600-800 ppm.
Required closed-system inhibitor is Ashlands Drewgard 2808 unless prior approval
is obtained by UCB.
Note: If glycol is specified in the system, and it is not pre-inhibited, (such as
Dowtherm & Dowfrost as required in Section 15511) proper glycol levels are added
to the system prior to adding inhibitor. Report system volume and glycol/water
mixture added.
b. Open Recirculating System (Cooling-Tower Water)
With system circulating, add a phosphate-based cleaner/passivation chemical.
Liquid chemical should be a blend of inorganic phosphate, organic corrosion
inhibitor, dispersant and an oil emulsifier. Ashland Flushout 2624 L, Ashland
equivalent or prior approved equivalent by UCB is the required product. In order for
optimum passivation and cleaning system, pH must be maintained in The 6.5-7.5
range. Sulfuric acid may be gradually added to adjust pH if it increases above 7.5.
Soda ash may be added if pH drops below 6.5. Sufficient Ashland Enviroplus 2503,
Enviroplus 2499 should be added to raise total inorganic phosphate levels to 500
ppm minimum. Circulate for a minimum of 48 hours. Circulate and flush the
system until TDS is +/- 50 mhos that of city water. Verify all pump strainers are
clean and functioning. Lay up the system dry until ready for use or begin
recommended treatment program.
c. Steam Boiler
Fill the boiler and add an alkaline cleaner containing detergents, emulsifiers and
organic inhibitors. Ashland L.A.C. or prior approved equivalent by UCB is the
required cleaner in sufficient amount to boost system pH to 11.0 - 12.0. Fire the
boiler at normal operating levels and allow system pressure to build to 1/3 normal
operating pressure. Fire for 4 - 6 hours then drain to 1/2 normal operating level in
site glass. Add sufficient water to refill to normal operating level. Blowdown again
to 1/2 normal operating level. Repeat this procedure at least 4 times allowing system
pressure to drop during each flush. Allow the boiler to cool, then drain and flush.
Begin normal treatment program or layup dry.
2. Chemical- Feed Equipment
a. Inhibitor Feed and TDS Control for Cooling Towers
Provide a proportional make-up chemical feed system where chemical feed is fed in
proportion to the quantity of make-up water fed to the cooling tower. A certified
contacting water meter shall be provided and installed in the make-up water line.
The water meter will sense the quantity of make-up water in 10 gallon increments.
Send an electrical signal to a cooling tower controller. The tower control device will
accept and accumulate the electrical signals from the water meter. The correct
contacting water meter may be specified by the chart below:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-2
TOWER
CONDENSER
TONNAGE
0-200
300-400
500-800
900-1600
1600-3000
CIRC. RATE
0-6000
900-1200
1500-2400
2700-4800
4800-9000
RECOMMENDED WATER
METER
SIZE
GALLON COUNT
5/8"
10
3/4"
10
1"
10
1 1/2"
10
2"
10
The controller must have the capability to actuate a variable timer when a
predetermined number of signals is accepted from the water meter. The controller
will be capable of activating the timer when 1 to 99 pulse-signals are sent to the
controller. The timer circuit will activate a 110V circuit to energize a chemical
pump for feeding scale inhibitor.
Tower bleed will be controlled via a flow through TDS/conductivity sensor. The
controller will read conductivity of the cooling water the 0-2000 microohms/cm
range in a digital format on the front of the control device. The controller will be
designed to energize a 110V circuit to open a solenoid bleed valve any time a preset
conductivity is exceeded.
The controller will also include a 28-day programmable biocide time clock for
feeding 2 (two) liquid biocides. The time clock shall be capable of energizing a
110V electrical outlet that can be used to energize a chemical feed pump for biocide,
in 15-minute increments.
The controller will have a mounted flow assembly TDS sensor. Flow assembly will
de-energize the controller when a loss of flow is sensed.
The required tower control unit is a LMI DC4500-111A, with LMI manifold
(manifold contains flow switch and conductivity probe) or prior approved equivalent
by UCB.
b. Inhibitor Feed and TDS Control for Cooling Towers 100 Tons and Smaller.
Provide a bleed-and-feed tower control system. Tower bleed will be controlled via a
flow-through TDS/conductivity sensor. The control unit will read out in the 0-2000
micro mho/cm range in a digital format on the front of the control device. The
controller will be designed to energize a 110V circuit to open a solenoid bleed valve
any time preset conductivity is exceeded. While the solenoid bleed valve is open,
and additional 110V circuit will energize to provide power to a chemical feed pump.
Although the system will be designed to operate in the bleed-and-feed mode, the
system should have the capability of accepting pulses from a contacting water meter.
The control unit should be capable of energizing a 110V circuit for 0-300 seconds
following receipt of a pulse from a contacting water meter. The controller will have
a mounted flow assembly/TDS sensor. Flow assembly will de-energize the
controller when a loss of flow is sensed. The required tower controller is a LMI
DC4500-111A controller or prior approved equivalent by UCB. See attached parts
list for required controller options for each tower configuration.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-3
c. Inhibitor Feed Pumps

An electronically-actuated diaphragm pump will be provided. The pump must be a
110V, rated at 0.24-24 GPD. Discharge pressure must be capable of overcoming the
maximum pressure rating of the condenser-water pump. Materials of construction
are Polypropylene/Teflon/Ceramic. An LMI Model A151-392SI series pump or
UCB prior approved equivalent is required. The inhibitor will be fed using the
injector supplied with LMI pump.
d. Biocide Feeders for Towers
An electronically-actuated diaphragm pump will be provided. The pump must be for
110V, rated at 0.24-24 GPD. Materials of construction are
Polypropylene/Teflon/ceramic. An LMI model A151-392SI or UCB prior approved
equivalent is required. The pump shall be activated by the Tower control unit.
Injection quills of 304 Stainless Steel will only be used on injection points with 4 or
greater pipe diameter, all others will use injection check valve supplied with LMI
A151-392SI pumps or UCB prior approved equivalent.
Sonoxide unit and solid feeders see attached sheets e and f.
e. Steam Boilers
1) TDS
Provide a TDS control unit that periodically samples boiler water by opening the
blowdown line for a short sampling period. If TDS is below the trip point, the
blowdown valve closes after the timed sample. If TDS exceeds preset limits, the
controller overrides the timer, allowing the blowdown valve to remain open until
the system returns to the desired TDS.
The control device shall provide a 0-10,000 micro-ohm or 0-6,500 ppm TDS
analog readout. Trip point can be adjusted on the front panel of the control unit.
An LMI DC4500 250 psi valve package is the required Boiler Control Unit.
2) Feed of Oxygen Scavenger
Sulfite based oxygen scavenger must be fed on a continuous basis. The chemical
is fed using an injection quill that is positioned in the deaerator storage tank or
the feed-water tank (if no deaerator exists). The injection quill should be
constructed of 304 stainless steel. An electronically - actuated diaphragm pump
rated at 0.24-24 gallons per day must be provided. Materials of construction are
Polypropylene/Teflon/Ceramic. An LMI model A151-392SI or UCB prior
approved equivalent.
3) Inhibitor Feed
Scale inhibitors are fed into the suction side of the feed water pumps using a 304
stainless steel injection quill. An electronically-actuated diaphragm pump rated
at 0.24-24 GPD must be provided. Materials of construction are
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-4
Polypropylene/Teflon/ceramic. A LMI model A151-392SI pump or UCB prior

approved equivalent is required.
The inhibitor pump should be wired such that it will energize when the feed
pump runs or when make-up water is supplied to the boiler system. Operators
must have the option of either control mode by providing a dual-receptacle plug.
One plug will energize based on the feed pump the other will energize when
make-up water is called for.
4) Water Softener
A water softener must be provided for all steam boilers. It shall be capable of
producing a consistent supply of make-up water containing <0.5 ppm total
hardness. The softener must be equipped with a salt tank and provisions for
automatic regeneration based on total gallons supplied by the unit.
If the boiler is an intermittent-operating unit that shuts down at least 4 hours per
day, a single softener vessel system must be provided. If the boiler runs on a
continuous basis, a dual-vessel system must be provided. The dual-vessel system
will regenerate the exhausted vessel as soon as the new vessel is put into service.
See attached schematic WT-7A and parts list WT-7B.
f. Closed Systems
1) All hot-water or chilled-water closed-loop systems under 1,000 gallons shall
have a 2 gallon bypass (pot) filter feeder installed.
2) All hot-water or chilled-water closed-loop systems over 1,000 gallons shall have
a 5 gallon by-pass filter feeder installed.
A Neptune by-pass filter feeder or prior approved equivalent by UCB will be
provided. The vessel will be constructed of mild steel and be capable of operating
up to 200 psig. A filter bag kit should be provided to fit inside the feeder. The bag
filter will remove scale, rust, chips, etc. from the system. This bag filter shall be
marked bag inside.
The contractor installing the bypass filter feeder will be required to provide piping
and valves for installation of this feeder. See attached schematic WT-D and parts list
WT-D.
g. Corrosion Coupon Racks
Corrosion coupon racks shall be supplied on all process-cooling, heating water,
chilled-water and water systems served by open cooling towers, such as condensers
and indirect evap-cooling coils. All racks shall be constructed of 1" Sch 80 PVC
Pipe with the exception of Hot Water systems which should be Sch 80 mild steel
pipe. Coupon racks should be capable of accepting two corrosion test specimens. A
orifice-valve must be supplied in each rack which provides a 3.0-4.0 ft/sec flow
throughout the rack. A flowmeter shall be installed near the coupon rack, after
orifice-valve. Flowmeter shall be within 1 foot of union.
JULY 2012
When installing a rack in the condenser water system, the warmest water in the
system should be the supply water to the coupon rack. Usually, the water exiting the
condenser would be considered supply to the coupon rack.
UCB STANDARDS
15548-5
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Water Treatment, Chemical and Service Company shall be recognized specialist,
active in the field of industrial water treatment for at least ten years, whose major business is
in the field of water treatment, and shall have regional water analysis laboratories,
development facilities and service department, plus full-time service personnel within the
locale of the job site.
B. All products shall be provided by a single subcontractor to ensure there is a single source of
responsibility. Sub-contractor shall be on State approved list.
C. Firms must submit a list of satisfied customer service references and evidence of
qualifications and experience for acceptance to execute the work on the project.
1.04
MAINTENANCE
A. Provide the services of a fully-qualified Field Engineer and laboratory and technical
assistance form a fully-qualified laboratory staff for one year warranty period. Services and
assistance shall include the following:
1. A training course for the University's operating personnel, instructing them clearly and
fully on the installation care, maintenance, testing, and operation of the water treatment
systems length of training shall be given as needed, per system size and complexity.
2. A periodic technical service visit to the job site to perform field inspections and to make
water analysis on site, in order to evaluate the condition of the treated systems.
3. The Field Engineer shall report findings to the University's operating personnel in
writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements, and any corrective actions
needed to protect the water systems from scale, corrosion, and fouling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
WATER TREATMENT CHEMICALS
A. Supplier:
Ashland Water Technologies
2.02
CHEMICAL FEED PUMPS
A. Manufacturer:
LMI
2.03
WATER METERS/ CERTIFIED
A. Manufacturer:
LMI, Badger or Seametrics
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-6
2.04
CONDUCTIVITY METERS
A. Manufacturer:
LMI, DC4500-111A or approved LMI equivalent, with manifold (34752)
2.05
WYE STRAINERS
Threaded wye strainers shall have screens of 20 mesh maximum, watts preferred or prior
approved equivalent.
2.06
SPILL CONTAINMENT
Spill containment made of polypropylene (or equivalent) or concrete shall be provided.
Total volume of containment shall exceed total volume of chemical containers by 50%.
Concrete containments must have ramp inside and outside. Containments using 30 drums or
greater mush have ramp to drum platform level.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
A. Specify the following:

1. Emergency eye wash/shower (potable water) shall be located at or in close proximity
(within 10) to chemical treatment station with no obstruction or tripping hazards in
between chemical containers, filter-feeders, chemical pumps and conductivity controller
are considered chemical treatment station.
2. Chemical treatment station shall be located at or in close proximity to sanitary sewer
floor drain or be constrained in a basin piped to sanitary drain.
3. All chemical pumps shall be mounted no higher than 5 foot above floor elevation, with 4
foot being the optimal height.
4. All chemical pumps shall be located within 5 feet of conductivity controller.
5. Wye strainers must be installed before (upstream) of all controller sensors, bleed
solenoids before controller sensor can be used for both controller and coupon rack. On
systems 1,500 gallons or less, wye strainer located before controller sensor can be used
for both controller and coupon rack. Systems over 1,500 gallons shall have wye
strainers upstream of coupon rack, one upstream of controller and one upstream of bleed
solenoid.
6. Conductivity controller must be mounted on fixed walls or stands free of vibration.
Controller shall not be mounted on cooling towers, duct work or air handlers. Controller
must be insulated from extreme cold and heat if installed on building exterior wall. All
controllers shall be mounted between 5 & 5 6 above floor (eye level). 36 clearance
in front of controller is required.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-7
7. All chemical pumps must be secured to shelf or support to prevent any movement due to
pump action or normal contact.
8. All chemical pumps and conductivity controllers must be 110 volt, 60 Hz.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-8
ATTACHMENT TO SECTION 15548

WATER TREATMENT SCHEMATICS AND PARTS LISTS
NO.
DESCRIPTION
WT-A
Towers with Sump ............................................................................................................ 10
WT-B
Towers without Sump ....................................................................................................... 11
WT-C
Steam Boiler Control Schematic ....................................................................................... 12

Boiler with less than 5000#/HR Capacity Schematic ....................................................... 12
WT-D
By-pass Filter Feeder Installation ..................................................................................... 13
WT-E
Examples of Corrosion Test Rack Installations ................................................................ 13
WT-F
Sonoxide Unit .................................................................................................................... 14
JULY 2012
PAGE
UCB STANDARDS
15548-9
PARTS LIST FOR SCHEMATIC

WT-A
ITEM
QUANTITY
REQUIRED
MANUFACTURER/MODEL
TOWER
CONTROLLER
LMI DC4500-111A W/LMI

#34752 MANIFOLD
CERTIFIED
CONTACTING
WATER METER
Refer to UCB plumbing section

for approved meters
(1 PULSE/10 GAL.) WM
ASCO SERIES 8210G95
VALVE SIZED ACCORDING
TO SPECIFIED TOWER
BLEED LINE
SOLENOID VALVE
1
INJECTION CHECK
VALVES
SUPPLIED WITH LMI

CHEMICAL PUMPS
LMI # 25073
CHEMICAL PUMPS
LMI-A151-392SI
CORROSION
COUPON RACK
Drew #6029-01-2
WYE STRAINERS
Drew PART #6032-01-5
FLOW METER
Drew #9922-28-8
ISOLATION BALL
VALVES
Refer to UCB approved ball

valves in UCB plumbing
standards
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-10

WT-B
ITEM
QUANTITY
REQUIRED
MANUFACTURER/MODEL
TOWER
CONTROLLER
LMI DC4500-111A W/LMI

#34752 MANIFOLD
SOLENOID VALVE
ASCO SERIES 8210G95

VALVE SIZED ACCORDING
TO SPECIFIED TOWER
BLEED LINE
INJECTION CHECK
VALVE
SUPPLIED WITH LMI

PUMPS LMI #25073
CHEMICAL PUMPS
LMI-A151-392SI
CORROSION
COUPON RACK
Drew #6029-01-2
WYE STRAINERS
Drew PART #6032-01-5
FLOW METER
Drew #9922-28-8
CERTIFIED
CONTRACTING
WATER METER
(PULSE)
Refer to UCB plumbing

standards for acceptable water
meters
ISOLATION BALL
VALVES
Refer to UCB standards

approved values
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-11

WT-C
ITEM
QUANTITY
REQUIRED
MANUFACTURER/MODEL
BOILER
CONTROLLER
LMI DC4500
CHEMICAL FEED
PUMPS
LMI #A141-392SI
VALVE PACKAGE
CRANE VP-300
INJECTION QUILLS
RACK
SUPPLIED W/LMI PUMPS
WATER SOFTENER
SIZED BY WATER
SOFTENER SUPPLIER OR
DESIGN ENGINEER
MAKEUP WATER
VALVE
BY DESIGN ENGINEER
CONTACTING
WATER METER

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
See plumbing section
15548-12
WT-D
ITEM
QUANTITY
REQUIRED
MANUFACTURER/MODEL
BYPASS FEEDER
FILTERED 2 OR 5 GALLON
FEEDER WINGERT
BALL VALVES
3/4" BALL VALVES,

APPROVED SUPPLIER FOR
BRASS BODY VALVES,
STAINLESS STEEL BALL
AND STEM FULL PORT
BALL VALUE RATED FOR
SYSTEM PRESSURE
MAXIMUM 600 PSIG
CHECK VALVE
3/4" BALL VALVES,

APPROVED SUPPLIER FOR
BRASS BODY VALVES,
STAINLESS STEEL BALL
AND STEM FULL PORT
BALL VALUE RATED FOR
SYSTEM PRESSURE
MAXIMUM 600 PSIG
WATER TREATMENT SPECIFICATION: SONOXIDE

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-13
Water treatment Specification for cooling towers using non-chemical microbiological control
systems.
Provide complete chemical treatment program including corrosion inhibitor and non-chemical
mechanical system for microbiological control.
The biocide system will be Ashland Water Technologies SONOXIDE ultrasonic treatment.
No other non-mechanical devices will be accepted.
1. The Biocide equipment for the tower water treatment shall be a complete
packaged, pre-piped, pre-wired, automatic system.
2. Installation will require piping the inlet and outlet of the SONOXIDE system to
the cooling tower system. Installation also requires wiring the power supply to
the SONOXIDE system. Installation will be provided by others.
3. The biocide unit shall have a fail safe back up control and warning alarm in the
event of operational malfunction such as loss of water flow. This output will be
wired to the Andover building management system.
4. The Biocide equipment will be run independently of the bulk water inhibitor and
not be connected to the conductivity control equipment.
5. All maintenance of the unit shall be the responsibility of the vendor. Any and all
replacement parts to keep the unit operational will remain the responsibility of
the vendor for the life of the contract.
6. 24 hour emergency response to be provided to keep unit operational.
7. The contractor is to abide by the following terms and conditions.
8. The contractor is to fill out and submit with the shop drawing submittals the
following signed documents and agreements regarding terms of use/contractor
acknowledgement and terms of use.
SONOXIDE Terms of Use
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-14
The SONOXIDE equipment provided is to be kept in good condition, normal wear and tear
excepted. Additionally, an Ashland representative or an outside designee of Ashland may
periodically perform an inspection or otherwise need access to the equipment. You will do
everything is your power to prevent damage and reimburse Ashland for any damages that may
occur while the equipment is under your control. Pricing to include all necessary items for the
initial 12 moth warranty period.
The SONOXIDE ultrasonic water treatment system is patented and proprietary. Therefore,
embodied within the equipment is certain information of a confidential and proprietary nature, and
you agree not to reverse engineer, disassemble or create an equivalent of the equipment or allow
others to do so. You will also keep information not in the public domain relating to the equipment
and the procedures associated with the operation thereof confidential. You further agree that you
will use said information only in connection with your receipt of Ashlands performance, and for no
other reason.
The obligations contained in this section shall be binding to Ashland, the University and their legal
successors.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15548-15
SECTION 15555
BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Inclined Water Tube, Hot Water, Forced Draft
2. Flexible Tube, Hot Water, Forced Draft
3. Section Cast Iron, Hot Water, Forced Draft
4. High-Efficiency Compact Boiler
4. Section 15575 - Breechings, Chimneys, Stacks and Flues.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American Gas Association (AGA).

B. Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (I-B-R).
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. This Section will be expanded to include central steam plant boilers at such time
as an expansion or rehabilitation of the existing central plant is required.
b. Boilers included at this time in this Design Guide Section are intended for
structures which are constructed outside the practical limits of the campus central
steam distribution system and have access to natural gas from Public Service
Company utility distribution system.
c. Design these systems as simple hot water hydronics systems to meet building
heating requirements.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-1
d. Consult with University regarding insurance requirements for gas train.

e. Whenever possible Specify the positive-pressure requirements at the collar of
forced-draft boilers.
f. Specify Honeywell series 7800 Burner Control.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
BOILER (INCLINED WATER TUBE), Hot Water, Forced Draft
A. Manufacturers:
Ajax
Rite
B. Type:
Forced Draft inclined water tube boiler. Factory-assembled and tested. Non-condensing
design to operate at 80% efficiency.
C. Construction:
1. Tube bundle assembly to consist of steel tubes, 2" diameter supported by steel frame
with expansion joints at each corner. Headers to be 5/8" pressure vessel steel.
2. Tubes to be sloped upward at 1/2" per linear foot from rear to front to eliminate air
bubbles.
3. Tube bundle assembly to be free-floating to prevent thermal shock damage.
4. Head gaskets to be full-face fabric reinforced neoprene, 3/16" thick.
5. Jacket to be 18 gauge galvanized or painted steel.
6. Larger models to be mounted on I-beam skids.
D. Pressure rating:
1. 125 psi working pressure, ASME stamped.
E. Burner: Forced Draft
1. U.L. Listed forced draft automatic burner for operation with pressurized vent stack
without barometric damper or induced draft fan.
2. Burner to be designed to burn natural gas
3. Electronic supervised spark ignition
4. Burner operation to be Modulating Firing
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-2
5. Burner Safety Controls:

a. Electric safety controls to be U.L. and A.G.A. design certified
b. Scanner or ultraviolet flame detector
c. Air flow switch
6. Start-up by factory-authorized agent only
7. Specify positive pressure at flue collar
F. Fuel:
1. Natural Gas [840 BTU/CF @ 5200 ft. elevation] Inlet gas pressure to burner to be 7"
to 11" W.G.
G. Boiler Controls and Trim:
1. Operating control
2. Hi-limit control
3. Low water cutoff
4. Electronic supervised spark ignition
5. ASME pressure relief valve set at proper psi, for operating conditions.
6. Combination temperature/pressure gauge
7. Built-in air elimination
8. Control panel with indicating lights
9. ASME CSD-la compliance
H. Gas Train:
1. U.L. and FM-listed gas train completely factory assembled
2. Main and pilot gas shut-off valves
3. Main gas pressure regulator
4. Main gas valve
5. Auxiliary gas valve
6. Dual safety gas valves (IRI only)
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-3
7. Low and High gas pressure gas switches above 2500 MBH
I. Warranty:
1. Boiler to be guaranteed to operate at a minimum fuel to water efficiency of 80%.
2. Pressure vessel to have 20 year warranty from damage to thermal shock.
2.02
BOILERS (FLEXIBLE TUBE) Hot Water, Forced Draft
A. Manufacturers:
Bryan
Superior Combustion
B. Type:
1. Flexible watertube
2. Forced-draft flame retention gas burner
C. Construction: Each boiler shall be ASME-Stamped and shall conform to applicable State
and Local Codes. The boiler shall be constructed and assembled as a complete packaged
unit with the following features:
1. Shell:
Welded steel boiler plate. Boiler shall be constructed with adequately sized upper
drums, water legs and tube headers, providing proper thermal internal water
circulation, not requiring an external circulation source.
2. Water Tubes:
1" O.C., 13 gauge steel, flexible serpentine bend design, not subject to thermal shock
damage. Individual water tubes shall be easily removable and replaceable without
either welding or rolling. The entire tube area shall be easily accessible for fireside
cleaning.
3. Insulation:
Complete with a metal jack, consisting of not less than 1 1/2" fiberglass insulation
and heavy gauge rust-resistant, zinc coated steel casing, painted with a suitable heat
resisting primer and lacquer. Complete jacket and insulation shall be easily
removable where access is required.
4. Thermal Shock:
The boiler shall be warranted for 20 years against thermal shock damage on a nonprorated basis.
5. Forced Draft:
Forced draft units shall be furnished with a refractory tube combustion chamber to be
constructed of high temperature insulating firebrick or insulating wool and properly
insulated from steel base. Front and rear observation ports shall be furnished for
flame observation.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-4
D. Burner:
Power burner arranged for High-Low fire or Modulating (above 80 HP) with the
following trim and controls:
1. Combination thermometer and pressure gauge
2. Water temperature control operator
3. High limit safety control
4. Low water cutoff
5. ASME safety relief valve
6. Automatic gas valve operator
7. Auxiliary safety shut-off valve
8. Pilot solenoid valve
9. Pilot ignition assembly
10. Ignition transformer
11. Manual gas shut-off valve
12. Pilot cock
13. Pilot and main gas pressure regulation
14. Air safety switch
15. Electronic combustion safety control with UV sensor
E. Pressure Rating: 30 psig at 250o F
F. Fuel:
1. Natural gas
2. Pressure 11" w.c.
G. Control:
Boiler shall be suitable for on/off control by outdoor-compensated thermostat furnished
under Automatic Temperature Control Division.
H. Trim and Accessories:
1. Suitable for use with 50% propylene or ethylene glycol and water heating fluid.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-5
2.03
BOILERS (CAST IRON) Hot Water, Forced Draft
A. Manufacturers:
Buderus
Burnham
H.B. Smith
Peerless
Weil-McLain
*Housing wants only this manufacturer, with high-efficiency models
B. Type:
1. Sectional cast iron
2. Pressurized firebox, positive pressure outlet
C. Burner:
Forced Draft burner for operation with pressurized vent stack. Operation:
1. Modulation firing
2. Prepurge
3. Low fire start
4. High fire run
5. Modulating position air control
6. Post-purge
D. Burner Safety Controls:
1. Ultraviolet flame detector
2. Dual automatic gas valves
3. Proven gas pilot
4. Air flow switch
E. Pressure Rating:
1. 30 psig
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-6
2. Boiler with 40 psig pressure may be considered if larger expansion tank is provided,
and complete calculations confirming expansion tank selection are submitted with
boiler submittal.
F. Smoke Venting:
1. Burner/Boiler shall be design tested for forced draft firing
2. Double wall positive pressure stack shall be used for venting per NFPA 211
G. Fuel
1. Natural gas [840 BTU/CF @ 5200 ft. elevation]
2. Inlet gas pressure: [12" to 14" w.c.]
H. Control:
1. Boiler shall be suitable for temperature control by outdoor-compensated thermostat
furnished under Automatic Temperature Control Division.
I. Trim and Accessories
1. ASME rated relief valve, set at boiler pressure rating
2. Low water cutoff
3. High limit control
5. Manual main gas shut-off valves
6. High pressure gas switches
7. Electronic pilot ignition
8. Safety pilot switches, 100% shut-off
9. Gas pressure regulator
10. Pilot shut-off valves
11. Combination pressure temperature altitude gauge
12. Built-in air eliminator
J. Burner start-up and Combustion Test:
1. Start-up shall be performed by a factory authorized technician. A complete
combustion test report shall be submitted to Engineered Products Company indicating
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-7
CO2 percent, CO percent, stack temperature and pressure, room temperature, and
manifold gas pressure.
2.04
HIGH-EFFICIENCY COMPACT BOILER
A. Manufacturers:
1. Lochinvar Copper-Fin II
2. Patterson-Kelley Thermific
B. Type:
Radial fired, vertical hot water boiler with gas fired power burner. Non-condensing
design to operate at AGA certified efficiency of 85%.
C. Construction:
1. Combustion chamber to be a minimum of 16 gauge corrosion resistant aluminized
steel or cast iron.
2. Heating surface to be 7/8" I.D. intermeshed finned copper tubes. "V" baffles between
tubes are NOT acceptable.
3. Outer cabinet to be minimum 16 gauge steel, air tight, with an insulating air space
between the combustion chamber and outer cabinet.
4. Cabinet to be finished, both inside and out, with baked epoxy coating.
5. Boiler controls to be top mounted and readily accessible.
6. Control panel to be furnished with 10-point diagnostic annunciator with visual
displays.
7. The entire boiler shall be factory assembled and fire-tested. Complete operating and
start-up instructions are to be furnished in booklet form.
D. Pressure rating:
1. 160 psi working pressure
2. Boiler shall be constructed and stamped in accordance with Section IV of ASME
Code with maximum water working pressure of 160 psi.
E. Burner:
1. Gas power burner, radial fired
2. Screen type diffuser to provide 360 degree flame pattern
3. Fuel-air mixture shall be controlled by multiple brass orifices and venturi core
equipped to measure air flow rate to the burner.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-8
F. Burner Controls:
1. Electric spark ignition with interrupted type pilot.
2. Flame rod pilot and main flame control
3. AGA-Approved electronic flame safeguard programmer with pilot failure and lockout with manual reset.
G. Gas Manifold:
1. AGA lubricated plug cock
2. Pressure regulator
3. Low gas pressure switch
4. (2) solenoid operated diaphragm valves
5. Pilot gas manifold with cock, pressure regulator, gas filter and solenoid valve.
6. Bot gas manifolds (main and pilot) to be accessible without removing cabinet.
7. Boiler shall be capable of operating at 4" W.G. gas pressure.
H. Smoke Venting:
1. Boiler shall be AGA-certified as "Category 1" for venting, requiring either a double
wall or an insulated type "B" vent pipe.
I. Trim & Accessories:
1. Combination temperature/pressure gauge
2. ASME relief valve set at 100 psi. [30, 60, 75, and 125 psi also available]
3. Manual reset high-limit temperature control with field adjustable4 ranges of 100
degrees F to 240 degrees F.
4. Water flow switch
5. Auxiliary low water cut off.
J. Warranty:
1. Boiler shall carry a 10 year guarantee against thermal shock.
K. Start-Up:
1. Boiler price shall include complete start-up services by a factory authorized service
agent.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-9
2.07
BOILER (SCOTCH MARINE 3-PASS), [LOW] [HIGH] PRESSURE STEAM
A. Manufacturers:
Burnham
Kewanee
Superior
B. General Boiler Requirements:
1. 3 Pass Wet-back Scotch Marine boiler/burner units. Each unit to be supplied with
840 B.T.U.H. per C.F.H. natural gas at 7"-11" W.G., and 14 W.G. for forced-draft
boilers. The boiler/burner units to be complete and factory tested.
C. Low Pressure Construction Requirements for 15# S.W.P.
[High Pressure Construction Requirements for 150# S.W.P.]
ASME boiler shell with:
1. Skid base
2. Insulated metal jacket
3. Insulated front flue doors
4. 16" diameter refractory filled rear access with observation port
5. Lifting loops
6. [Roller expanded and beaded tubes for 150# S.W.P.]
7. 5" Diameter flue gas thermometer
8. ASME relief valves
9. Flanged rear smoke outlet with damper and locking quadrant
10. 6" diameter steam gauge
11. McDonnell Miller safety low water cut-off, water column with gauge glass and cocks
12. 2nd McDonnell Miller safety low water cut-off
13. Magnetrol (No. APM-W-131L) modulating pneumatic feed water controller to
control pneumatic modulating boiler feed valves provided for field mounting. The
valve and controller require 15 to 20 psi control air.
14. Side feed water connection with internal baffle
15. Bottom blowdown connections [with slow opening and quick opening valves]
16. Safety high limit control
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-10

18. Modulating fire controller
D. Gas UL/FM-approved forced-draft burner to produce full output at 5,400' elevation.
1. Forced-draft fan
2. Air flow safety switch
3. Radial port flame retention type burner head and diffusers
4. Ultra-violet flame detector
5. 6,000 volt ignition transformer
6. Gas/Elec pilot burner with direct spark ignition electrode
7. Modulating control motor with linkage to control the modulating gas or oil valve and
air inlet damper for the proper fuel air mixtures.
E. Control Panel Factory Mounted and Wired and Including:
1. Duct tight door with locking latch
2. Control voltage step-down transformer
3. Programming combustion relay
4. Control circuit fuse
5. Pilot lights
a. Power on
b. Ignition
c. Main fuel
d. Flame failure
e. Low water
6. Low water and flame failure alarm bell with alarm silencing switch and relay for
remote alarm bell annunciation.
7. Burner on/off switch and manual potentiometer.
F. Gas Train To Be UL/FM [IRI] approved gas train consisting of:
1. Gas cock
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-11
2. Gas regulator
3. Motorized gas valve with proof of closure switch
4. Safety gas valve
5. Normally open vent valve
6. Gas checking cock
7. High and low gas pressure switches
8. Pilot cock
9. Pilot regulator
10. Pilot solenoid valve
G. Start-up, testing, adjusting, instruction of owners operating personnel and 90 days free
service by representatives in-house factory authorized start-up personnel who are on 24
hour call.
H. Boiler to provide 80% plus efficiency of either fuel and shall have 10 year unlimited
warranty on all refractory within the boiler.
2.08
BOILER, ELECTRIC, HOT WATER, STEAM
A. Manufacturers
Bryan
Burnham
Coates
Lochinvar
Weil-McLain Electric Boiler
B. Type:
1. Electric resistance element, cast iron packaged boiler
2. Factory assembled tested
C. Construction:
1. One piece cast iron boiler section built in compliance with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
2. Incoloy sheathed, low watt density elements
3. Individual fuses for each element leg
4. Heavy duty steel jacket with fiberglass insulation and wall mountain brackets
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-12
5. 24 volt control system with heavy duty contactors and electronic time-delay relays
D. Pressure Rating:
1. Boiler to be tested at 50 psi working pressure
E. Electrical Requirements:
1. [
] KW, [
] BTUH DOE heating capacity
2. [208] [240] [480] volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz power

F. Boiler Trim and Controls:
1. ASME safety relief valve
2. Low water cut-off
3. Hot water trim
a. Combination operating and high limit control
b. Pressure/temperature gauge
4. Steam Trim
a. High limit pressure control
b. Operating pressure control
c. Water gauge glass and gauge cocks
d. Steam pressure gauge
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" in Part 1, paragraph

1.03, sub-paragraph A, and expand here on specific requirements of installation for boiler
products specified in Part 2.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15555-13
SECTION 15575
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, STACKS AND FLUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Type B Flue Vents.
2. Positive Pressure Chimney and Manifold System.
3. All Fuel Chimney.
4. Barometric Damper.
3. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment.
4. Section 15555 - Boilers.
5. Section 15620 - Fuel Fired Heaters.
1.02
REFERENCES
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. Design breechings, chimneys, stacks and flues consistent with the requirements of the
appliance and Architectural design as determined by UCB staff.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
TYPE B FLUE VENTS
A. Manufacturers:
Ameri-Vent, American Metal Products Co.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15575-1
Dura-Vent Corporation.
Metal Fab, Inc.
Metlvent, Hart and Cooley Division of Clevepak Corporation.
Selkirk Metalbestos (No asbestos acceptable)
B. General: Double wall gas vents, UL-Listed for Type B, consisting of double wall metal
construction pipe sections and fittings and accessories required for complete installation.
2.02
POSITIVE PRESSURE CHIMNEY AND MANIFOLD SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
Ampco
Metal Fab
Selkirk Metalbestos Model PS.
Van-Packer
Venting Systems Inc. Trip-L-Wall.
B. General: Double wall metal chimney, UL-Listed for use with building heating equipment
burning gas, solid or liquid fuels as described in NFPA (304 stainless steel liner for gas
and No. 2 oil).
2.03
ALL FUEL CHIMNEY
A. Manufacturers:
Ampco
Dura-Vent Corporation Dura-Chimney
Hart and Cooley Metlvent.
Selkirk Metalbestos Model SS
Metal Fab
Van-Packer
B. General: Stainless steel double-walled, pre-insulated chimney sections, fittings, and
accessories required for a complete installation in compliance with UL Standard 103.
2.04
BAROMETRIC DAMPER
A. Manufacturers:
Field Control Division of Conco Engineering Works.
B. Construction: Heavy duty design with stainless steel knife-edge bearing and precision
balanced gate.
C. Control: Adjustable wide range of draft settings from .002 inches to .5 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15575-2

1.02, sub-paragraph A and expand here on specific requirements of installation for
products specified in Part 2.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions to assure UL compliance.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15575-3
SECTION 15620
FUEL-FIRED HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Gas Fired Unit Heaters.
2. Gas Fired Furnaces.
5. Section 15485 - Natural Gas System.
6. Section 15575 - Breechings, Chimneys, Stacks and Flues.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American Gas Association (AGA).

1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Requirement for gas fired equipment is limited to structures which are constructed
outside the practical limits of the campus central steam distribution system and
have access to natural gas from Public Service Company utility distribution
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
Hastings
ITT Reznor
Lennox
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15620-1
Modine
Trane
B. Units AGA approved.
C. Heat exchanger 18 gage aluminized steel.
D. Following trim and controls furnished as a minimum:
1. 24-volt gas valve and transformer.
2. Fan control.
3. Summer-Winter switch.
4. Gas cock.
5. Pressure regulator.
6. Spark ignition.
7. Limit control.
8. Draft diverter.
9. Adjustable horizontal and vertical louvers.
2.02
GAS-FIRED FURNACES
A. Manufacturers:
Carrier
Command Air
Day and Night
Fedders
Lennox
Trane
York
B. Furnaces AGA approved.
C. Heat exchangers of 18 gage aluminized steel or stainless steel.
D. Factory-installed controls furnished as a minimum:
1. Fan control.
2. Limit control.
3. 24-volt automatic main gas control valve.
4. Main gas and pilot gas shut-off valves.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15620-2
5. Spark ignition or hot-wire ignition.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION

1.03, sub-paragraph A, and expand here on specific requirements of installation for gas
fired equipment products specified in Part 2.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15620-3
SECTION 15631
SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Solar Fluid Heat Exchanger (Shell and Tube).
2. Solar Fluid Heat Exchanger (Double Wall Tube).
3. Solar Collectors.
4. Thermal Storage Tanks (Domestic Hot Water).
5. Thermal Storage Tank (Underground).
3. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation.
5. Section 15540 - HVAC Pumps.
6. Section 15950 - Controls.
7. Section 15985 - Control Sequence of Operation.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

B. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO).
C. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15631-1
a. For potable water systems, comply with latest Edition of IAPMO Uniform Solar
Energy Code.
2. Solar Collectors:
a. Specify manufacturer to furnish all supports, bracing and cross-bracing to
withstand 55 PSF wind (146 mph) loading from any direction.
b. Specify manufacturer to submit F-Chart data indicating energy output using the
ASHRAE 93-77 efficiency curve and the net aperture area of the total array of the
collector.
c. Run F-Chart for a full year by months.
d. Specify compliance with ASHRAE 93-77 (ANSI B198.1) Methods of Testing to
Determine the Thermal Performance of Solar Collectors.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Solar Energy Equipment with minimum of five

years experience.
B. Installation: Contractor shall be required to submit a list of references of successful
contracts showing at least three years experience installing solar energy systems.
1.05
WARRANTIES
A. Specify the following for Solar Collectors:

1. Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair defective
units where materials or workmanship failures have resulted in leakage of liquid,
obstruction of liquid flow, excessive internal soiling, significant loss of efficiency,
abnormal aging or deterioration of materials or finishes, or other failures of units or
forms of deterioration causing units to not perform as initially required; warranty
includes disconnection, removal, reinstallation and reconnection of units and
replacement of solar fluid.
2. Product warranty period shall be for a period of ten years from date of substantial
completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SOLAR FLUID HEAT EXCHANGER (Shell and Tube)
A. Manufacturers:
Ace-Buehler
Adamson
A. O. Smith
Carlson
ITT Bell and Gossett
Noranda
Weben-Jarco
B. Unit National Board Certified, ASME Certified and Labeled.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15631-2
2.02
SOLAR FLUID HEAT EXCHANGER (Double Wall Tube)
A. Manufacturers:
Ace-Buehler
Novan/Noranda
B. Description:
1. Heat exchanger with double wall copper tubes and manifolds with leak detection
feature.
2.03
SOLAR COLLECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
Gulf Thermal
Lennox
Novan
Raypak
Solaron
U.S. Solar Corporation
B. Description:
1. Manufacturer's standard or custom fabricated liquid solar collector units.
2.04
THERMAL STORAGE TANKS (Domestic Hot Water)
A. Manufacturers:
Ace-Buehler
Adamson
A. O. Smith
Lochinvar
Rheem
Weben-Jarco
Wessels
B. NSF Approved, ASME Certified and Labeled and National Board Certified.
2.05
THERMAL STORAGE TANK (Underground)
A. Manufacturers:
Eaton Metal Products/American Steel and Iron Works, Inc.
B. Tanks complete with "Stip 3" corrosion protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
APPLICATION/INSTALLATION
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15631-3

on specific project applications in Part 2 - Products and specific installation requirements
in this Part 3 for each item specified.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15631-4
SECTION 15650
REFRIGERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
JULY 2012
Section Includes:
1.
Reciprocating Compressors (Hermetic).
2.
Reciprocating Compressors (Open Drive).
3.
Water Cooled Condensing Units.
4.
Air Cooled Condensing Units.
5.
Reciprocating Chillers (Water Cooled) (Remote Condenser).
6.
Water Cooled Condensers.
7.
Air Cooled Condensers.
8.
Centrifugal Water Chiller.
9.
Cooling Tower (Induced Draft, Vertical Discharge).
10.
Remote Sump Tank.
11.
Cooling Tower Sump Filtration System.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
4.
Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation.
5.
Section 15511 - Hydronic Piping and Specialties.
6.
Section 15531 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties.
7.
Section 15548 - HVAC Water Treatment.
8.
Section 15651 - Computer Room Air Conditioning.

UCB STANDARDS
15650-1
1.02
1.03
9.
Section 15950 - Controls.
10.
Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI).
C.
D.
Cryogenic Society of America (CSA).
E.
Cooling Tower Institute (CTI).
F.
National Electrical Code (NEC).
G.
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.
General:
a.
Design and specify refrigeration systems and equipment in

accordance with "Energy Conservation Standards" stipulated in
b.
Every effort should be made to specify equipment which does not

require any CFC refrigerants, including R-11, R-12, R113, or
R114, or R-500. HCFC refrigerants such as R-22 and R123 are
discouraged.
LEED EAp3: CFC Reduction in HVAC & R Equipment & EAc4:
Ozone Protection: Use HFC refrigerants where possible.
JULY 2012
c.
Specify that isolation valves shall be provided by manufacturer in

order to allow servicing of major components (e.g., compressor,
receiver, condenser, filter-dryer, expansion valve) with no loss of
refrigerant the filter-dryer shall have a 3-valve arrangement with
bypass.
d.
Review with University the equipment-mounted gages desired for

diagnosis and service.
e.
Specify that Contractor needs to label the amount of refrigerant in

the system in pounds, as required by UMC.
UCB STANDARDS
15650-2
2.
f.
Demolition: Specify that all refrigerant be removed, recovered and

reclaimed prior to demolition of any equipment containing
refrigerant such as; rooftop units, split system condensing units, air
conditioning units and chillers. Specify that contractor notify
University Refrigeration Shop supervisor prior to commencing
demolition work. University personnel will either remove
refrigerant from equipment or direct contractor to remove
refrigerant. All handling of refrigerant will be by certified
refrigeration technicians, approved by the U.S. EPA. The
refrigerant and refrigerator shall be returned to the CU
refrigeration shop.
g.
Compliance: Specify that the contractor shall comply with

Colorado Department of Health Regulation 15 and all applicable
EPA rules and regulations regarding the purchase, disposal and
handling of refrigerants.
Compressors over 100-ton capacity:

a.
Motors and Starters:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
b.
c.
JULY 2012
Dual winding, wye-delta design with matching two-step,

closed transition, time-delay starting switch gear is
preferred. (An auxiliary timer in the starting circuit is
required).
Specify that timer be set to limit starts to a minimum of 30
minutes apart, or greater as recommended by the
manufacturer.
An auto-transformer with reduced voltage start is an
acceptable alternate starter.
All motors shall have heat sensors in the wind- windings
for thermal protection.
Full-running protection:
i.
Specify compressors equipped with high and low pressure

safety cut out, external overload protection, and inherent
thermal protection, and low oil pressure.
ii.
Manual reset type safeties which cause an electrical lockout of the starting circuit when it has tripped, with an
indication of which safety device has operated.
Gages and Lubrication:

i.
Not required if unit equipped with micro-processor control

which shows pressure at control panel.
ii.
Forced-feed lubrication system with filter, cooler and

visual inspection port in the oil reservoir.
UCB STANDARDS
15650-3
d.
e.
Heaters:
i.
Specify crankcase heaters wired on a separate electrical

circuit.
ii.
Specify oil pump starter wired on a separate electrical

circuit.
Purge:
i.
f.
Refrigerant Transfer:
i.
g.
JULY 2012
Show on Drawings, safety valve pressure relief piping

vented to outdoors in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 15-78. Pressure relief valves shall be self-closing,
resealing type.
Ethernet Interface:
i.
3.
Unit should have provisions for pump out/down into unitmounted receiver if application warrants it. (University
authorization required.)
Pressure Relief:
i.
h.
Specify purge units to eliminate the non-condensable gases

on units using R-11, R-113, R-114 or similar refrigerants
where evaporator pressure is below atmospheric pressure.
Provide interface for connection to the campus ethernet

network.
Compressors of 60 to 100 ton capacity:

a.
Semi-hermetic, reciprocating type, helical rotor or scroll.
b.
Full running protection as described for larger compressors.
c.
Crankcase heaters.
d.
Oil reservoir sight glass.
e.
Replaceable refrigerant filter-dryers in liquid line.
f.
Hydraulic capacity control by cylinder unloading for adjustments

to load fluctuations.
g.
Positive unloaded start.
h.
An adequate discharge muffler.

UCB STANDARDS
15650-4
4.
5.
i.
Internal vibration isolation to provide minimum vibration

transmission.
j.
Closed transition starting switch-gear, determined by the electrical

requirements for the particular sizes of motors. Part-winding start
is acceptable.
k.
As described on larger air-cooled units, specify a receiver on the

condenser and provisions for pumping the full refrigerant charge
into the receiver. If condenser will hold the full charge, this is an
acceptable alternative.
l.
Extended 5 year warranty on compressor(s).
Compressors under 60 but over 15 ton capacity:

a.
Hermetic or semi-hermetic reciprocating, scroll or helical rotor.
b.
Inherent thermal overload protection for motors.
c.
Crankcase heaters.
d.
Oil reservoir sight glass.
e.
Replaceable refrigerant filter-dryers.
f.
Hydraulic capacity control by cylinder unloading or staging of

multiple compressors.
g.
Positive unloaded start.
h.
Adequate discharge muffler.
i.
Internal vibration isolation.
j.
Closed transition starting switchgear determined by the electrical

requirements for the particular sizes of motors.
k.
A receiver on the condensers and provisions for pumping the full

refrigerant charge into the receiver. If condenser will hold the full
charge, this is an acceptable alternative.
l.
Extended 5 year warranty on compressor(s).
Compressors between 7-1/2 and 15 ton capacity:

a.
6.
JULY 2012
Same requirements as 15 to 60 ton compressors except that

cylinder unloading and unloaded start features are not required on
the small units.
Compressors below 7-1/2 tons capacity:

UCB STANDARDS
15650-5
a.
7.
8.
Condensers:
a.
Select air cooled condensers with sufficient capacity to

compensate for altitude deration of 5400 feet and 105 F inlet air
temperature.
b.
A horizontal blow with a weather protecting shroud designed to

prevent possible blade icing and unbalance during cold weather is
required.
c.
Arrange water-cooled condensers so that tubes can be rodded

without hindrance from walls, piping, or equipment.
Cooling Towers:
a.
b.
JULY 2012
Same requirements as 7-1/2 to 15 ton compressors except that

gages are not required.
Specify the following for induced-draft towers:

i.
Steel, galvanized except as noted.
ii.
A propeller type fan, on which blade pitch can be adjusted.
iii.
A gear reducer drive for anything beyond 10 horsepower, if

applicable.
iv.
Motors situated outside the tower's humid airstream.
v.
Fill manufactured of fire-retardant PVC material (minimum

15 mil. thickness).
vi.
Hot return water basin covers.
vii.
Safety railings and ladder to fan deck.
viii.
Safety cage on ladder.
ix.
Oversized sump outlet for gravity flow to inside remote

sump.
x.
Extended lube and oil fill lines with sight glass or dipstick.
xi.
Stainless-steel hardware, and brass or stainless-steel

fittings, throughout within wet area.
xii.
Vibration switch.
Specify, in addition, the following for forced-draft towers:

UCB STANDARDS
15650-6
9.
"Baltibond" (Baltimore Air Coil Trademark) or equivalent

coating.
ii.
Stainless-steel sump with blow-through prevention kit.
iii.
If installed indoors, tower shall be stainless steel

throughout, with relief dampers made of stainless steel with
stainless steel knuckles.
Remote Sump Tank (if used):

a.
JULY 2012
i.
Incorporate the following requirements in sump tank design:

i.
Allow minimum water level of 4 feet of suction head under

operating conditions or greater if required to meet NPSH of
pump.
ii.
Provide a minimum of 150 percent of drain down storage

capacity in addition to above operating level.
iii.
Drain down capacity to consist of volume of cooling tower

water retention plus all piping exposed to freeze conditions.
iv.
Design vortex breaker and screen at suction outlet.
v.
Provide maximum separation between sump intake and

suction outlet to minimize entrained air entering pump
suction.
vi.
Design overflow drain capacity equal to system drain down

flow rate.
vii.
Provide for maintenance drain down.
viii.
Design separate water chamber for steady make-up water

float control to minimize fatigue on control valve due to
wave action in tank.
ix.
Provide taps on tank for sump filtration cleaning system.
x.
If tower drain pipe to sump exceeds one floor level, provide

balancing valve at sump inlet to provide steady flow to
minimize pipe vibration, sound and air entrainment in
water flow.
xi.
Include inspection ladder on tank to monitor water

conditions.
xii.
Provide adequate ventilation in sump room to control

humidity.
UCB STANDARDS
15650-7
10.
11.
Cooling Tower Sump Filtration System:

a.
To improve and maintain good water conditions in condenser

water, specify and show on Drawings a pumped system to
recirculate water from sump through a filter and back to sump.
b.
Sidestream filters are preferred.
DX Condensers:
a.
For units requiring operation down to -30 F, provide low ambient

control package to allow start-up and positive head pressure
control.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS (HERMETIC)

A.
Manufacturer:
Bohn
Bristol
Carrier
Copeland
Tecumseh
Trane
York
2.02
B.
Unit performance certified in accordance with latest edition of ARI Standard 520.
C.
Unit construction in accordance with ANSI B9.1 Safety Code.
D.
Factory wired control panel in accordance with NEC.
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS (OPEN DRIVE)

A.
Manufacturer:
Bohn
Carrier
Trane
York
2.03
WATER-COOLED CONDENSING PACKAGE UNITS

A.
Manufacturer:
Bohn
Carrier
McQuay
Trane
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15650-8
York
2.04
2.05
2.06
B.
C.
Unit construction in accordance with ANSI B9.1 Safety Code and ASME Code.
D.
AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

A.
Manufacturer:
Submit recommendation
B.
Unit performance certified in accordance with latest edition of ARI Standards 210
and 270.
C.
D.
RECIPROCATING CHILLER (WATER COOLED and/or REMOTE CONDENSER)

A.
Manufacturer:
B.
C.
D.
E.
Units UL Listed and CSA certified.
WATER-COOLED CONDENSERS
A.
Manufacturers:
Bohn
Carrier
Refrigeration Services
Trane
York
2.07
B.
C.
AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS
A.
JULY 2012
Manufacturers:
UCB STANDARDS
15650-9
2.08
B.
Unit performance certified in accordance with latest edition ARI Standard 460.
C.
Unit construction in accordance with ANSI B9.1 Safety Code.
D.
E.
Units UL Listed and CSA certified.
F.
In units with multiple fans, isolate each fan section.
CENTRIFUGAL OR ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLER

A.
Manufacturers:
Carrier
McQuay (with sound abatement kit)
Trane
York
B.
2.09
Chiller performance rated in accordance with latest edition of ARI Standard 550.
COOLING TOWER (INDUCED DRAFT, VERTICAL DISCHARGE)

A.
Manufacturers:
Tower-Tech
Baltimore Aircoil
Marley
CCT
B.
2.10
REMOTE SUMP TANK

A.
2.11
Capacity rating in accordance with CTI Standards. Include altitude effects.
Furnish and install welded stainless-steel or fiberglass sump tank of size and
capacity shown on Drawings.
COOLING TOWER SUMP FILTRATION SYSTEM

A.
Manufacturer:
Submit recommendation.
B.
Description: Pumped recirculation of water from cooling tower sump or draindown sump through filter and back to sump as shown on drawings. Include use
of distribution piping to sweep floor of tower sump towards the outlet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15650-10
A.
In general, for project specifications, remove in Part 1, paragraph 1.03 "System

Description" sub-paragraph A, "Design Requirements" of this Design Guide and
use list to expand on specific requirements of installation for each product
specified.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15650-11
SECTION 15651
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units.
2. Air Cooled Condenser Package.
3. Water Cooled Condenser Package.
4. Glycol Cooled Condenser Package.
5. Glycol Pump Package.
6. Glycol Drycooler.
7. Glycol Free Cooling System.
8. Control Package.
9. Recessed Ceiling Units.
3. Section 15885 - Air Cleaning.
4. Section 15900 - Ductwork and Accessories.
5. Section 15936 - Air Inlets and Outlets.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Computer room air conditioning systems shall be self-contained factory
assembled units with matching accessories.
b. Depending on location and user condition, designer may use any of the following
types of heat rejection:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15651-1
1)
2)
3)
4)
Directly to central chilled water system.

DX with air-cooled condenser.
DX with water-cooled condenser.
DX with glycol-cooled condenser.
c. Easily removable panels on all units for maintenance access to equipment.

Compressor serviceable out of airstream.
d. Solid state electronic control systems, easily accessible with plug-in modules, out
of main electrical panel.
2. Humidifiers:
a. Any of the following:
1) Infra-red type consisting of high-intensity quartz lamps mounted above and
out of the water supply. (Least desired)
2) Electric immersion heaters. (Preferred).
3) Lattice electrode steam type.
b. Evaporator pans arranged to be serviceable for cleaning without disconnecting
water supply lines, drain lines or electrical connections.
c. Lattice electrodes enclosed within disposable plastic cylinder and shall not
require periodic cleaning.
d. Automatic flush cycle.
3. Condensate Pumps:
a. Provide as an accessory inside cabinets for upflow condensate drain systems.
4. Filters:
a. Disposable media type in accordance with Section 15885 - Air Cleaning.
5. Floor Stands:
a. Isolate air conditioning units from raised floors with adjustable floor stands
mounted on vibration isolation pads.
6. Air Cooled Condensers:
a. Low profile, slow speed, multiple direct drive propeller fan type.
b. Provide low ambient control package to allow start-up and positive head pressure
control with ambient temperature as low as -30 F.
c. Outdoor design temperature: 105 F if on roof.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15651-2
7. Water Cooled Condensers:

a. Cleanable, shell and tube, counter flow type with removable heads.
8. Glycol Systems:
a. Glycol-cooled condenser cleanable, shell and tube, counterflow type with
removable heads.
b. Drycooler, low profile, slow speed, multiple direct drive propeller fan type.
c. Provide dual pump package with automatic start on stand-by pump upon failure
of lead pump.
d. Consider glycol "free cooling" economizer coil and all controls necessary to
provide winter cooling without compressor operation.
e. Outdoor design temperature: 105F if on roof.
9. Controls:
a. During preliminary design meetings, review with the University which controls
are required before submitting final design documents.
10. Ceiling Recessed Units (Last choice):
a. Factory assembled, completely packaged for horizontal ceiling mounting and
sized to fit a 2 ft by 4 ft. opening of a standard "T-Bar" ceiling.
b. Air cooled types shall have the condenser air (outside air) taken from and
discharged to the outside by means of a remote blower pack suitable for duct
mounting and having a low limit outside ambient control to operate the unit down
to -30 F.
c. Use of ceiling cavity to reject heat of compression is unacceptable.
11. Compressors:
a. Semi-hermetic for 5-ton units and up.
12. Water-Dumping Units:
a. Water cooled types which utilize tap water for condensating, after which the
water is disposed of in the drain, will not be permitted.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide factory assembled, package type computer room air conditioning units; product
of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of size and type of unit specified and
issuing complete catalog data on such products.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15651-3
B. Manufacturer shall be responsible for selection and operation of components furnished.

Provide written certification that related components not furnished by him have been
selected in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Manufacturer:
Airflow
Carrier
Liebert
Trane
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15651-4
SECTION 15755
HEAT EXCHANGERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Shell and Tube Type Heat Exchangers.
2. Condensate Coolers.
3. Flat-plate Heat Exchangers.
3. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment: Hot Water Generators.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. This section does not apply to domestic hot water. Refer to Section 15450.
2. Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers:
a. Central steam campus distribution system shall be used for heating buildings.
b. Redundant heat exchanges with 75% capacity shall be provided.
c. Use steam in shell and water in tubes to convert steam heat to hot water for
hydronic heating systems.
d. In steam supply to shell, provide, in line, an isolation valve, strainer, union,
automatic control valve, union, and isolation valve with a globe valve by-pass
around assembly. Provide a plugged or capped valve at strainer for blowdown.
Use a ball valve for this application.
e. In condensate return from shell, provide dripleg, isolation valve, strainer, union,
steam trap, union, test tee, check valve and rising-stem gate valve.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15755-1
f. At hot water outlet, provide ASME-rated pressure relief valve. Pipe the relief
valve discharge to the floor
g. Specify pressure gages and thermometers at water inlet(s) and outlet(s), and oilfilled pressure gage at inlet and outlet of steam control valve.
h. Design heat exchanger piping with isolation valves and unions or flanges at all
unit connections to allow for both the removal of entire unit and for tube pull
without dismantling the connected piping. Locate heat exchanger so adjacent
equipment does not interfere with exchangers tube-pull.
i. Specify a vacuum breaker, steam air vent, and a compound pressure/vacuum
gauge with pigtail siphon and 1/4" ball valve to be installed at factory-provided
tappings in shell.
j. Specify fouling factor for tubes and shell as required.
k. Allow for any glycol in water
l. Specify the appropriate construction for heat exchangers, including pressure and
temperature ratings.
m. Specify that the heat exchanger shall bear the ASME U symbol for unfired
pressure vessels.
n. Provide a valved shell drain.
o. Specify insulation.
3. Flat-Plate Heat Exchanger
a. Allow for glycol if used.
b. Specify insulation for both hot and chilled-water applications.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to Sections 8D of the ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code for
manufacture of tubular heat exchangers and heat exchanger shells.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER
A. Manufacturers:
Ace Boiler
Armstrong
Bell and Gossett
DHT
Dunham-Bush
Patterson-Kelley
Taco
2.02
PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER
A. Manufacturers:
No preference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15755-2

B. Incorporate Y-strainers prior to heat-exchanger inlets.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15755-3
SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Hydronic Coils.
2. Steam Coils.
3. Direct-Expansion Refrigerant Coils.
4. Section 15531 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
5. Section 15548 - HVAC Water Treatment
6. Section 15650 - Refrigeration
7. Section 15835 - Electric Heat: Electric Heating Coils in Ductwork.
8. Section 15855 - Air Handling Unit with Coils.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)

1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Except where special design requirements might dictate, coils shall have copper
tubes with aluminum fins, permanently bonded.
b. Provide access areas on inlet and discharge sides of coils for maintenance
purposes.
c. Provide for coil pull space and specify full track support for easy installation and
service.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15790-1
d. Specify all water coils to be drainable type.

e. Provide drain piping and air venting at all water coils.
f. Specify all coil ratings to be ARI Standard 410 certified.
g. Specify fin spacing to be 12 fins per inch or less unless otherwise indicated.
h. As a measure to improve indoor air quality as per ASHRAE 62-1989: Coil drain
pans and drip troughs at the bottom of coils should be designed to slope to drain
to minimize standing water in the air handling unit, plenum, etc. (Stagnant water
is prime habitat for microorganisms.)
i. Specify working pressures and temperatures for coils. Be sure to allow for the
static head that a coil will see due to the height of the building.
j. Specify type and percent of glycol in water.
k. Provide good mixing of return and outside air streams upstream of coil to
minimize stratification and possible coil freeze-up.
l. Provide flexibility in piping where connected to the coil if the coil is not isolated
from fan or other vibrating equipment.
2. Chilled Water Coils:
a. Design for full counter-flow of water and air with water inlet at the bottom of the
supply header and outlet at the top of the return header.
b. Specify stainless-steel frames and blank-off spacers between coil frame and
housing. Use stainless-steel hardware to fasten blank-offs and frame.
3. Direct-Expansion Refrigerant Coils:
a. Direct expansion coils may be used on small systems and shall be piped and
installed in accordance with factory recommendations.
b. Additional design precautions shall be taken, or a field refinement procedure shall
be included in the specifications, on those installations not covered by the
manufacturer's guide.
c. Specify full face active coils in applications involving variable airflow thru the
coils such as multi-zone or VAV systems.
d. Specify face split coils for constant volume or where humidity control is required.
4. Hot Water Coils:

a. Standard construction.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15790-2
5. Steam Coils:
1. All steam coils to be of the Centri-Feed type
2. All steam coils to be horizontal flow with sloped tubes
3. Tubes to be a minimum of 12 gauge carbon steel
4. Fins to be a minimum .020 thick aluminum (imbedded type)
5. Header to be a minimum schedule 40 carbon steel pipe
6. Connections to be a minimum schedule 80 carbon steel pipe
7. Casing to be a minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel
8. Tubes, headers, and connections shall be welded together to form monometallic
joints.
1. Need pre-approval
6. Where coils are exposed to all outside air, use steam preheat coils, with face and by
pass dampers to allow full flow of heating medium at or below freezing conditions
(with modulation of steam flow above freezing). Downstream coils, if required, can
then be modulated to provide desired supply air temperature.
7. Coils in built-up plenums:
a. When cooling coils are stacked one above the other, design and specify drip
troughs on the downstream side of each of the upper coils to eliminate drip into
the air stream of the bottom coil. Drip troughs shall slope to drain as noted above.
b. Condensate drain piping should incorporate a P-trap with the height of its water
seal correctly sized to prevent trap from being sucked or blown dry by the static
pressure differential between the inside and outside of air handling unit.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All coils shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with all requirements of ARI
Standard 410.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
Aerofin
Airtherm
Carrier
Dunham-Bush
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15790-3
Heatcraft
McQuay
Pace
Precision Coils
Rosemex
Temtrol
Trane
Wing
York
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION

on specific requirements of installation/application for each product specified.
B. Steam Coil Installation:
1. Support coils and piping individually to prevent undue strains on the steam and
condensate connections.
2. Install a drip trap prior to the coils (and before the control valve) on installation
where the steam main is higher than the control valve or the control valve is more
than 5 from the steam main.
3. Install strainers with blowdown valves before all control valves and traps.
4. Install a vacuum breaker in the steam piping prior to the coil and on the downstream
side of the coil before the trap.
5. Trap all coils individually. Locate trap as close as possible.
6. Install only inverted bucket traps with large vent buckets on any coil that will see
temperatures below 32 degrees F.
7. Install a dirt pocket prior to the steam trap.
8. All condensate to be gravity drained.
9. See Appendix A: Typical piping for steam coil.
C. Trap Sizing:
1. Modulating:
0-15 psi steam pressure- use a 2 to 1 safety factor at a .5psi differential
16-30 psi steam pressure-use a 2 to 1 safety factor at a 2 psi differential
above 30 psi steam pressure-use a 3 to 1 safety factor at of maximum differential
2. Constant pressure:
Use a 3 to 1 safety factor at operating pressure differentials.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15790-4
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15790-5
SECTION 15810
HUMIDIFIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.02
Injection Type Steam Humidifiers.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
Section 15521 - Steam and Condensate Piping and Specialties.
3.
Section 15855 - Air Handling Units with Coils.
4.
Section 15900 - Ductwork and Accessories.
5.
Section 15950 - Controls.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.
High-Pressure Mist Humidifiers are to be used wherever possible and

appropriate.
2.
The use of steam humidifiers is discouraged. However, where design

requires duct type steam humidifiers, specify injection type steam
humidifiers; but using central steam is not allowed due to chemicals being
used for water/steam treatment. Provide a dedicated steam generator with
chemically-approved water, or use packaged electric steam generators.
3.
Specify downstream ductwork to be soldered water tight, without duct

liner, with external duct insulation, for the length of duct expected to be
moist (absorption zone).
4.
Specify in Section 15950 - Controls, a high-limit safety humidistat in duct

in series with space humidistat to prevent over-saturation in duct. Specify
airflow switch to confirm fan operation.
Note: Expand Part 2 Product specification minimums to include specific project
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15810-1
2.01
HIGH-PRESSURE MIST HUMIDIFIER (Preferred)

A.
B.
2.02
Product Requirements
1.
Direct-drive stainless-steel pump
2.
Automatic flush cycle
3.
Self-draining manifolds
4.
Droplet size: 10-40 microns (not less than 95% 15 microns)
5.
Noise insulation of pump
Manufacturer:
1.
MeeFog
2.
Nortec (Preferred)
INJECTION TYPE STEAM HUMIDIFIER

A.
Manufacturer:
1.
Armstrong
2.
Dri-Steem
3.
Nortec
4.
Pure
B. Completely assembled with steam separator, control valve which discharges through a
drying chamber, silencing chamber, steam-jacketed distribution manifold, steam trap and
strainer upstream.
C. We strongly prefer systems with steam humidifier grid or panel similar to Dri-Steem
Ultra-Sorb or Pure Insty-Pac.
D. Manifold full duct width and furnished with mounting flange.
E. Provide integral warm-up control to prevent liquid discharge at start-up.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15810-2
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
and use list to expand on specific requirements of installation.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15810-3
SECTION 15830
HEATING TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Baseboard or Fin-Tube Radiation.
2. Convectors.
3. Cabinet Unit Heaters.
4. Unit Heaters - Hot Water.
5. Hydronic Radiant Ceiling Panels.
6. Unit Ventilators
5. Section 15835 - Electric Heat.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (IBR), superseded by Hydronics Institute.

B. Hydronics Institute (HYDI).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Expand Part 2 Product specification minimums to include specific project
requirements.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15830-1
b. Baseboard radiation is preferred for heating the exterior wall of all perimeter
rooms. Use radiant ceiling panels only as a last choice.
c. Use convectors where architectural features cause greater capacity requirements
than baseboard radiation can provide in the available space.
d. Use cabinet unit heaters at building entrances where greater capacity and quick
response is necessary to adequately handle rapid changes in space temperature.
e. Select cabinet unit heaters and unit heaters on low speed capacity of three speeds
to provide quiet operation under normal conditions and have extra capacity at
higher speeds for extreme conditions. Specify a fan-speed switch.
f. For all the product types listed in this standard, specify the appropriate pressure
and temperature ratings.
g. When providing any of the product types listed in this standard, allow for thermal
expansion and contraction as required.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Radiation capacities shall be in accordance with HYDI Standard for "Testing and Rating
Code for Finned-Tube Commercial Radiation".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FIN-TUBE RADIATION
A. Manufacturer:
Dunham-Busch
Rittling
Rosemex
Sterling
Trane
Vulcan
B. Heating Element:
1. Copper tubes with aluminum fins.
C. Enclosures:
1. Fabricated from 16 gage steel.
2. Manual control dampers with knob actuators.
3. Enclosure to be readily removable between each mullion bracket and support
enclosure for access to manual valves, balance cocks and air vents.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15830-2
4. Enclosures shall be furnished less access panels. Provide hinged access panels
separately, to be installed after piping and radiation covers are in place, to all manual
valves, balance cocks, and air vents.
5. Enclosures shall have sloped top with manual damper or flat top with front outlet and
manual damper.
2.02
CONVECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
Airtherm
Dunham-Bush
Rittling
Rosemex
Sterling
Trane
Vulcan
B. Heating Element:
C. Enclosure:
1. Minimum 16 gage steel fronts and tops, 18 gage on backs.
2. Manual control damper with knob actuator.
3. Non-recessed types shall have sloping tops.
4. End caps where butted to wall, and on exposed ends.
2.03
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
Airtherm
McQuay
Modine
Rittling
Rosemex
Sterling
Trane
Vulcan
B. Heating Element:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15830-3
C. Cabinet:
1. Minimum 16 gage furniture grade steel.
2. Non-recessed types shall have sloping tops.
D. Fans:
1. Statically and dynamically balanced to eliminate vibrations.
E. Motors:
1. Three speed.
F. Filters:
1. One inch thick, disposable, located in a frame in the return air stream, easily
removable for service by removing front access panel.
G. Control:
1. Internal unit mounted, pre-wired 3-speed switch and "off" in addition to automatic
temperature controls as specified in Section 15950 - Controls.
2.04
UNIT HEATERS - HOT WATER
A. Manufacturers:
Airtherm
McQuay
Modine
Rittling
Rosemex
Sterling
Trane
Vulcan
B. Heating Element:
C. Cabinet:
1. Heavy gage steel.
D. Fans:
1. Horizontal or vertical propeller type.
E. Control:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15830-4
1. As specified in Section 15950 - Controls.

F. Louvers:
1. Movable for lateral and horizontal diffusion.
2.05
HYDRONIC PANEL RADIATORS
A. Manufacturer:
Rittling
Runtal
B. Performance:
1. Panel performance and water pressure drops shall be certified by an independent
certified testing laboratory.
C. Finishes:
1. Baked enamel
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION

Part 1, paragraph 1.03, "System Description" of this Design Guide and use list to expand
on specific requirements of installation.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15830-5
SECTION 15835
ELECTRIC HEAT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Electric Cabinet Heaters and Unit Heaters.
2. Electric Baseboard Heaters.
3. Electric Heating Coils in Ductwork.
4. Electric Wall Insert Heaters.
5. Electric Radiant Heater Panels.
1.02
REFERENCES

1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Electric heat shall not be used unless authorized by the University.
b. Specify that all contactors, relays, terminal boxes, thermostats and other electrical
appurtenances for electric heat to be in accordance with "Electric Wiring"
paragraph in Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
2. Electric Cabinet Heaters and Unit Heaters:
a. Specify entire unit UL listed.
b. Provide summer-winter switch to allow operation without heat when desired.
3. Electric Baseboard Heaters:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15835-1

b. Enclosure panel minimum 16 gage steel.
4. Electric Heating Coils in Ductwork:
b. Provide safety control to prohibit operation without air blower operation.
Consider stepped control or SCR control.
5. Electric Wall Insert Heaters:
b. Suitable for recessed or surface mounting.
6. Electric Radiant Heater Panels:
a. Specify UL listed.
b. Use only for small spot problem heating solutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS AND UNIT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
Carrier
Chromalox
Electromode
Indeeco
Markel
Modine
2.02
ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
Chromalox
Electromode
Markel
Modine
Thermador
2.03
ELECTRIC HEATING COILS IN DUCTWORK
A. Manufacturers:
Brasch
Carrier
Chromalox
Indeeco
Markel
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15835-2
2.04
ELECTRIC WALL INSERT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
Chromalox
Electromode
Markel
Thermador
2.05
ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATER PANELS
A. Manufacturers:
Aztec International Ltd.
Markel
PART 3 - EXECUTIION
3.01
INSTALLATION

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15835-3
SECTION 15850
AIR HANDLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Utility Set Fans
2. Central Centrifugal Fans.
3. In-Line Tubular Centrifugal Fans.
4. Variable-Pitch Vane Axial Fans.
5. Propeller-Type Ventilation Fans.
6. Power Roof Ventilators.
7. Ceiling Type Exhaust Fans.
4. Section 15855 - Air Handling Units with Coils: Cabinet Fans.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA).

B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Placement within a mechanical room is required for all major mechanical
equipment. Only small units may be roof-mounted, and shall be made as
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15850-1
inconspicuous as possible by placing as far away as possible from edge of roof,

painting, screening or a combination of these. UCB approval is required.
b. Centrifugal, tubular centrifugal, axial and propeller fans may be used. The use of
propeller fans shall be kept to a minimum.
c. Specify that scroll-type fans are required to have a continuously-welded housing
(spot or tack-weld or lock-seam construction is not acceptable). Bearing life shall
be stated to be L50 life of 200,000 hours at the maximum speed for the class of
fan provided.
d. Equipment shall be of adequate size to handle air quantities and static pressure
efficiently in accordance with design.
e. Specify each type of fan separately.
f. All fans shall be statically and dynamically machine balanced and shall have solid
shafts. See UCB Standards 15010-1.05.
g. All fan motors shall operate within name-plate values and shall be in accordance
with "Motors" paragraph in Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods.
h. Fan ratings shall be based upon test performance in strict accordance with AMCA
Standard 210-67 Test Code for Air Moving Devices.
i. Specify that each fan bear the seal authorized by AMCA indicating that ratings
are certified and that fans not bearing this seal will not be accepted.
j. Fans, motors and drives shall be located for safe and easy access for periodic
inspection and maintenance.
k. Systems selected for operation above 6 inches static pressure must be approved
by the University.
l. Specify that fan nameplate indicate maximum permissible fan RPM.
m. Specify that all belt-drive motors over 5 HP shall have dual push-pull adjustment
screws for the motor mounts. For retrofits, require that the motor mounts be
replaced if not of this type. (Same as Section 15050-1.03-g.)
n. When fans and/or motors are located in a hazardous environment or are handling
an explosive or potentially-explosive airstream, specify spark-resistant fan

construction and explosion-proof motors, as required. The fan should be
specified to meet AMCA Spark Resistant Construction, Type A, B, or C as
required. The fan and motor should both be well grounded.
o. If the design fan RPM at design airflow rate and pressure approaches the
maximum safe fan RPM as listed by the manufacturer for that class of fan, specify
a more heavy-duty class of fan. This will provide a safety margin to allow for
adverse field conditions which can increase the fan system pressure. This margin
of safety can also perhaps allow for some possible future changes.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15850-2
p. Specify fan inlet and outlet screens as required for personnel protection.
2. Drives:
a. Single belt drives shall not be used on equipment with 1 HP motor and above.
b. Drives shall always be installed with provisions for center distance adjustment.
c. Motors shall be located on their respective motor bases allowing for 1/6 of the
total motor base travel for installation of new belts with remaining 5/6 of the
travel available for belt tightening.
d. Arc of contact on the smaller sheave should not be less than 120 degrees.
e. Ratios of sheaves should not exceed 8 to 1.
f. Belt speed should not exceed 5000 feet per minute.
g. A full and free circulation of air should be around the drive at all times.
h. Drives operating in explosive atmosphere or potentially explosive should be well
grounded and be equipped with static conducting non-sparking belts.
i. Specify OSHA-approved belt-drive covers with tachometer access, with side
made of expanded metal.
j. Specify belt covers.
k. Rated for 150 percent (minimum) of fan motor power.
l. Before allowing or specifying synchronous drives such as the Gates Poly Chain,
verify that all associated equipment (fan, motor, fan mountings, etc.) is designed
to handle the stress of starting up with this type of drive where there is absolutely
no slippage.
3. Utility Set Fans:
a. When only design solution requires exposure to weather, specify weather covers
with quick release fasteners for ease of access to belts and bearings.
b. Greaseable ball bearings for all accessible fans.
4. Central Centrifugal Fans:
a. Motors 5HP or over shall have bearings of the split pillow block, double row
roller or ball, grease lubricated type with pedestal-type supports.
5. Variable-Pitch Vane Axial Fans:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15850-3
a. University approval for use of these fans will require careful acoustical design
treatment to the barrel casing, flexible connections and inlet and discharge
conditions.
6. Power Roof Ventilators:
a. The use of power roof ventilators is acceptable only if fan can be screened from
view and is not used to exhaust toxic fumes.
b. Wall-mounted power ventilators are strongly discouraged.
7. Ceiling Type Exhaust Fans:
a. Specify motor speed not to exceed 1150 RPM.
b. Specify housing of heavy gage steel completely insulated internally with
acoustical material to deaden sound.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of specified fans

with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose specified fan has been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following:
1. AMCA Compliance: Provide fans which have been tested and rated in accordance
with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with
NEMA standards.
3. UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators which are designed, manufactured, and
tested in accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
UTILITY-SET FANS AND ALTERNATIVES
A. Manufacturers:
Acme
Barry Blower
Cook
Greenheck
New York Blower
Twin City
Trane
2.02
CENTRAL CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Manufacturers:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15850-4
Acme
Barry Blower
Buffalo
Cook
Greenheck
New York Blower
Pace
Twin City
Trane
2.03
IN-LINE TUBULAR CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Manufacturers:
Acme
Barry Blower
Chicago Blower
Cook
Greenheck
New York Blower
Twin City
2.04
HIGH-PLUME DILUTION EXHAUST FANS
A. Manufacturers, FRP:
MK Plastics
B. Manufacturers, Non-FRP:
Strobic
Greenheck
C. Manufacturers, FRP Perchloric Exhaust:
MK Plastics
2.05
VANE AXIAL FANS (FIXED-PITCH ONLY)
A. Manufacturers:
Chicago Blower
Flakt
Greenheck
Joy
Trane "Variax Fan"
Woods
2.06
PROPELLER-TYPE VENTILATION FAN
A. Manufacturers:
Acme
Aerovent
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15850-5
Carnes
Cook
Greenheck
Penn
2.07
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers:
Acme
Carnes
Cook
Greenheck
Jenn-Air
Penn
2.08
CEILING TYPE EXHAUST FANS
A. Manufacturers:
Acme
Carnes
Cook
Greenheck
Jenn-Air
Pace
Penn Co. (Zephyr Model)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION

B. Specify that all fans, AHUs, etc. Shall be installed plumb and level by technicians
trained accordingly.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15850-6
SECTION 15852
SPECIAL EXHAUST SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Laboratory Ventilation and Hazardous Exhaust Systems

1.
Pre-Design Considerations
2.
General Design Criteria
3.
Chemical Fume Hoods and Storage Cabinets
4.
Ducts, Fans and Control Systems
5.
Testing, Inspecting and Certification
6.
Dust Collectors
7.
Gas Cabinets
B.
Dust Collectors
C.
Gas Cabinets
D.
Laundry Dryer Exhaust
E.
Demolition
F.
Related Sections:
JULY 2012
1.
Section 11610 Laboratory Fume Hoods
2.
Section 11611 Laboratory Biological Safety Cabinets
3.
Section 12345 Metal Laboratory Casework
4.
Section 12346 Wood Laboratory Casework
5.
Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements
6.
Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
7.
Section 15240 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control

UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 1
1.02
1.03
8.
Section 15850 Air Handling
9.
Section 15880 Air Cleaning
10.
Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
REFERENCES
A.
"Industrial Ventilation, a manual of Recommended Practice" published by American

Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
B.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
C.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
D.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
E.
American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA)
F.
Center for Disease Control (CDC)
G.
The National Institute of Health (NIH)
H.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
I.
International Building Code (IBC)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A.
Laboratory Ventilation and Hazardous Exhaust Systems

1.
*Pre-Design Considerations*
Other safety cabinets and enclosures for highly-reactive or toxic gases, and other
specialized operations such as Dark RoomsPhotographic, Spray Painting Rooms
Booths, Animal Quarters-Vivariums, glove boxes, Food Preparation and Serving
Areas, Chemical or Gas Storage Rooms, etc. will have different and/or additional
requirements than those listed below. EH&S must be consulted before planning
such installations.
Any deviation from these design criteria must be reviewed and approved by EH&S.
JULY 2012
a.
Laboratories shall be ventilated per ASHRAE Standard 62, NFPA 45,

NFPA 91, ANSI/AIHA Z9.5, and UCB Sections 15850 and 15885.
b.
Early in the design process, the HVAC Design Engineer responsible for the
fume hood exhaust system shall obtain a complete list of the chemicals,
biological and radiological materials, and gases to be used and stored in the
lab and submit to the University Environmental Health and Safety
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 2
compliance group through the University Project Manager. This list shall
be used to analyze fume hood exhaust for flammability, toxicity,
corrosiveness, and explosion hazards. In selecting and analyzing fume
hazard control techniques, the HVAC Design Engineer shall work closely
with University EH&S personnel.
2.
c.
If perchloric acid must be used, a specialized, dedicated hood (stainless

steel, porcelain coated, or non-plasticized PVC lined) labeled for perchloric
acid use only must be installed. A regular chemical fume hood may not be
used for perchloric acid. The perchloric hood must have its own nonreactive duct and exhaust fan, built-in water wash-down system, and other
features as described in the ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual.
d.
Radioisotope hood installations and the use of radioactive materials on

campus, require prior review, approval and licensing by EH&S Health
Physics. Conventional chemical fume hoods are suitable for many low
level radioisotope applications, however, the use of some materials such as
radioactive iodine, requires a specialized radioisotope hood equipped with
integral filter components. In these cases, service contracts must be set up
for maintenance, calibration and filter replacement or disposal.
e.
Biosafety cabinet installations and proposals for biological or biomedical

research must be reviewed and approved by EH&S and the UCB
Institutional biosafety Committee (IBC) to evaluate conformance with
requirements of the Center for Disease Control (CDC) and the National
Institute of Health (NIH). Such requirements can be found in CDC/NIH
publication: Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories.
The CU-Boulder campus is not approved for biohazardous work above
Biosafety Containment Level 2. Biosafety cabinet selection and room
designs must comply with National Science Foundation Publication 49:
International Standard for Class II (Laminar Flow) Biohazard Cabinetry
in addition to CDC and NIH requirements. If NIH funding is used to
facilitate project, then the NIH Building and Construction requirements
must be followed. Biohazard cabinetry equipped with integral filter
components will require a special service contract for maintenance,
calibration and filter replacement or disposal. Cabinet will require
certification by a qualified Vendor to meet Manufacturers operating
specifications and/or NSF 49 Standard prior to being placed into service for
BL-2 required containment.
General Design Criteria

a.
JULY 2012
Laboratory modules in which hazardous chemicals and gases are being used
shall be maintained at an air pressure of at least 0.03" wg* that is negative
to the corridors or adjacent non-laboratory areas. Laboratory modules in
which hazardous biological materials are being used shall be maintained at
an air pressure of at least 0.03" wg* that is negative to the corridors or
adjacent non-laboratory areas for all new construction and whenever
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 3
feasible for renovated existing spaces. An exception to this requirement is

where operations, such as those requiring clean rooms, preclude a negative
pressure relative to surrounding areas; in this case, special precautions shall
be taken (e.g., The HEPA units are laminar flow and will be located as far
from the hood as possible in order to avoid air currents near the hood. In an
emergency situation, a ventilation "off" switch will be located in the room
near the door that will, when activated, shut off the air coming into the
room (via a control damper) and shut off the air handler and fan. The main
exhaust fan will continue to run, and the room will be negative.).
Also meets LEED EQc5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control.
JULY 2012
b.
Air containing hazardous chemicals and gases shall be discharged through

hood/duct systems maintained at a negative pressure relative to the pressure
of normally occupied areas of the building. Air exhausted from laboratory
modules shall not pass unducted or be recirculated through other areas.
c.
If a hood is to be connected to an existing central or manifold exhaust

system serving multiple fume hoods, then the air system will have to be
evaluated to see if it has sufficient capacity for the addition of other
exhausted equipment. Each individual exhaust drop on a central or
manifold exhaust system shall be labeled for the specific room(s) it
services.
d.
Hazardous exhaust systems are not typically equipped with filters to capture
contaminants. In some cases, however, prefilters may be installed to protect
heat exchange coils or other HVAC equipment from accumulating debris.
Consult with EH&S regarding filters specifications for hazardous exhaust
systems. Ductless (filtered) fume hoods may be used in place of ducted
fume hoods only on a limited case by case basis and after review by EH&S
and meets compliance with Building and Fire Codes.
e.
Hoods shall be located in close proximity to where chemicals are stored,

and should be located a minimum of 10 feet from any door or doorway or
where interfering air currents and cross drafts from windows, high traffic
areas, HVAC systems, or other apparatus, could adversely affect the proper
function of the hood enclosure. Any source which decreases a hoods
containment ability or capture efficiency shall be mitigated.
f.
Make-up air shall be provided to compensate for the air being exhausted.
The location and volume of make-up air is critical to assuring proper fume
hood operation and worker protection. Air distribution around fume hoods
shall be such that cross drafts, dead air pockets, and reverse air currents are
to be avoided. Care shall be exercised in the selection and placement of air
supply diffusion devices to avoid air currents that would adversely affect
the performance of laboratory hoods, exhaust systems, and fire detection or
extinguishing systems. Unless otherwise specified, supply air velocities
shall be no more than 35 fpm at work stations and fume hoods.
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 4
3.
JULY 2012
Chemical Fume Hoods and Storage Cabinets

a.
Constant-volume chemical fume hoods must be capable of maintaining 100

fpm minimum face velocity through the sash opening with the sash at 13
measured from the top of the airfoil or 14 above work surface if airfoil is
not present. Variable-Air-Volume fume hoods shall be capable of
maintaining 100 fpm at all sash heights below 13 measured from the top of
the airfoil or 14 above work surface if airfoil is not present or is flush with
work surface (Provide sash with stops located 18 above working surface
and with override release. Special local exhaust systems, such as fume
extractor arm, drop canopy and slot exhaust, shall have sufficient capture
velocities to entrain the hazardous chemicals being released per
manufacturer specifications and/or ACGIH Industrial Ventilation, a
manual of Recommended Practice. NOTE: Some hoods require 120
fpm min. face velocity. HVAC Design Engineer shall consult EH&S for
minimum face velocity.
i.
Floor Mounted (Walk-In) Fume Hoods HVAC Design Engineer
shall consult EH&S for minimum face velocity at specified sash
position(s).
ii.
Combination Vertical and Horizontal Sash Fume Hoods - HVAC
Design Engineer shall consult EH&S for minimum face velocity at
specified sash position(s).
b.
Fume hoods must be equipped with audible and visual low air flow alarm
which shall be field calibrated to alarm at 75 fpm face velocity. Provide one
2-gang duplex, 20A, 125V receptacle for electrical service to alarm.
Receptacle shall be located on top panel of hood to accommodate alarm. A
removable strap or cover shall be located over the power adapter plug to
assure its fixed placement in the receptacle. Alarm shall be located on fume
hood and installed per manufacturer specifications. Special
equipment/systems such as Fume Extractor Arms, Drop Canopy and Slot
exhausts, used for capturing hazardous vapors shall have an audible and
visual low air flow or duct static pressure indicator.
c.
Chemical fume ducts are generally not equipped with fire sprinklers or fire
dampers, but whenever code requires, ducts shall be in fire-rated or fireprotected shafts. Where fume hood exhaust contains flammable vapor, UCB
Standards compliance with the requirements of Building and Fire Codes for
automatic fire suppression systems protecting the fume hood and/or the
exhaust duct. However, this requirement shall be carefully addressed on a
case-by-case basis, since it may result in a variety of other potential hazards
associated with fume hood operation.
d.
Class I Division I interior lighting and other electrical utilities are required
where internal utilities are desired.
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 5
4.
e.
Sinks inside fume hoods must have a minimum 3/8 raised edge around cup
sink cut out, i.e., provide a 3/8 lip above work surface. Do not install sinks
inside hoods unless they are specifically requested and needed.
f.
Chemical fume hoods shall include base chemical storage cabinets which
meet UCB Standard, Sections 12345 or 12356. Stand-alone chemical
storage cabinets should be located in close proximity to where chemicals will
be used, preferably adjacent to fume hoods. Chemical storage cabinets
should be vented per UCB Standard, section 12345, 12346 or manufacturers
instructions and provide a minimum of 10 air changes per hour.
g.
Flammable storage cabinets must be equipped with flame arrestors, and

vented using metal or PVC duct. Materials used for venting must meet an
NFPA Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less and be of rigid construction. Metal
duct should be PVC coated or resistant to corrosive or reactive materials.
PVC piping may be used to vent corrosive and other non-flammable storage
cabinets. Chemical storage cabinets, whether they are stand-alone or built-in
under a fume hood, must be UL listed for the materials they contain and
must comply with the applicable requirements of NFPA 30, 45 and 99.
Separate cabinets must be used to segregate, by hazard class, the following:
acids, bases, oxidizers, flammables and organics. Cabinets must also be
provided with spill-containment features or devices. Consult EH&S for
additional requirements and restrictions in areas where flammable liquid
dispensing occurs.
h.
Chemical fume hoods shall be equipped with an exterior mounted single

point or remote adjustment baffle system.
i.
Exhaust fan, ON/OFF switches are not permitted on fume hoods or other
special hazardous exhaust equipment/systems without expressed approval
from CU EH&S. ON/OFF switches may be considered for special
operations and situations, EH&S shall be consulted for review. Hazardous
exhaust systems should be provided with emergency backup power and not
shut down upon activation of any alarm, however, dedicated switches may
be provided in the building fire alarm panel to allow capability for manual
fan shut-down by the fire department.
Ducts, Fans and Control Systems

a.
JULY 2012
All chemical exhaust shall discharge through unobstructed, uncapped

vertical stacks. The stacks shall terminate at least 10 feet above roof level,
away from eddy currents, air intakes and openings. Discharge velocities
shall not be less than 3,000 fpm. Fan selection, stack height and discharge
velocity determinations shall give consideration to preventing the reentry of
contaminants into buildings. A discharge-height exception might be made
by the AHJ if it deems that adequate velocity and dilution will be achieved
by the specified fan.
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 6
JULY 2012
b.
Controls and dampers, where required for balancing or control of the

exhaust system, shall be of a type that, in event of failure, will fail open to
assure continuous draft. If energy conservation devices are used, they shall
not recirculate laboratory exhaust air or otherwise compromise the safety of
the building occupants.
c.
Methods of providing emergency ventilation shall be considered, such as

variable-speed fan systems, stand-by local exhaust systems, etc., to protect
occupants against major chemical spills or similar hazards.
d.
Duct work shall be installed with a minimum of elbows, using round ducts
and sweep ells wherever possible. To further minimize friction loss and
turbulence, the interior of ducts shall be smooth and free from obstructions,
especially at joints. Rectangular elbows shall not be used unless there is no
other choice. If used, turning vanes and inspection doors upstream of the
vanes shall be required.
e.
Ducts for ventilating chemical fume hoods and special exhaust

equipment/systems for hazardous vapors must be stainless steel or PVC
coated galvanized steel and of rigid construction.
f.
Ducts for venting flammable storage cabinets must be metal or PVC duct.
Materials used for venting must meet an NFPA Flame Spread Rating of 25
or less and be of rigid construction. Metal duct should be PVC coated or
resistant to corrosive or reactive materials. PVC piping may be used to vent
corrosive and other non-flammable storage cabinets.
g.
Installation of ductwork must be in compliance with NFPA 91 and ANSI

Z9.5, including provisions for properly sealing penetrations, grounding and
sealing duct construction materials. Penetration of fire barriers should be
avoided. Fume hoods and special exhaust equipment/systems shall be
equipped with a balancing damper.
h.
The fan housing and components shall be corrosion resistant and meet the
AMCA standard for spark-resistant construction. The motor must be vapor
tight (Class I, Division I) if it is located in the air stream. All fans, ducts,
and power supplies shall be clearly labeled to indicate exactly which areas
they serve.
i.
Ducts for ventilating flammable storage cabinets shall be tied into the
hazardous exhaust as far down steam from the fume hood as practical to
prevent fire-flashback.
j.
Ducts for ventilating corrosive or reactive chemical storage cabinets shall be

tied into the hazardous exhaust so as not to immediately mix with
flammable storage cabinet exhaust.
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 7
5.
B.
k.
Fans used for hazardous exhaust and are located in enclosed areas, such as
attics, penthouses, and mechanical rooms, shall comply with ASHREA.
l.
Internal fans or blowers are not permitted on or within fume hoods. Fans or
blowers must not be located inside any duct that is used to vent hazardous
exhaust.
Testing, Inspecting and Certification

a.
Testing, inspecting and certifying hazardous exhaust systems, fume hoods

and chemical storage cabinets will be performed by Facilities Management
Department and Environmental Health and Safety.
b.
Testing procedures shall conform to UCB Section 15890 and sections 4.7,
4.8, 5 (excluding 5.5.4 and 5.5.5) and 6 of the ANSI/ASHRAE 110-1995
Standard: Method of Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods.
Calibrated air velocity measuring devices as specified in Chapter 9 of the
ACGIH Industrial Ventilation, a Manual of Recommended Practice
shall be used in testing procedures. EH&S will use a calibrated, directreading air velocity measuring device for certification and inspection
purposes. If a meter has not been calibrated at, or adjusted for 5,000 feet
above sea level, a density-correction factor must be used when measuring
air velocities. EH&S shall certify that the fume hood is in safe operating
condition and meets applicable UCB Standards.
Dust Collectors
1.
Provide the following information on the drawings

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
C.
Gas Cabinets
1.
JULY 2012
Manufacturer's name and model number

CFM at total pressure
Horsepower and TEFC motor: 3600 or 1725
Drive type: direct or belted
Maximum sq. ft. of ground slab that the unit can occupy
Overall maximum height of unit including leg extensions and plenum
silencer
Capacity in cu. ft. of storage hopper
Length of legs to provide clearance under hopper without violating overall
maximum height restriction of building space.
Continuously mechanically ventilated gas cabinets are required for the storage of
cylinders of all gases that are greater than lecture bottle size and have an NFPA
Health Hazard Rating of 3 or 4. Lecture bottles of these gases must be used and
stored inside a chemical fume hood (NFPA 45 8.1.4.2 Special Ventilation
Requirements of Gas Cylinders). (Examples of NFPA Health Hazard Rating 4:
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 8
arsine, chlorine, hydrogen fluoride, phosgene; NFPA Health Hazard Rating 3:

ammonia, carbon monoxide.)
D.
JULY 2012
2.
Continuously mechanically ventilated, sprinklered gas cabinets are required for all
cylinders larger than lecture bottle size that contain pyrophoric gases (NFPA 45
8.1.4.3 Special Ventilation Requirements of Gas Cylinders).
3.
All gas cabinets must comply with 2000 current Uniform Fire Code 8003.1.3.2
4.
Duct for venting gas cabinet must be stainless steel or PVC coated galvanized steel
and of rigid construction.
5.
Compatibility of the gases and other chemicals being vented must be taken into
account when determining the proper ventilation materials, mixing distance, etc.
6.
The maximum allowable amount of flammable gases in any one area is determined
by the square footage of the area, the types and concentrations of gas being used
and stored, and whether or not the gases are stored in gas cabinets. Using NFPA 45
and 2000 UFC 8001.15A as guidelines, the maximum allowable amount of
flammable gases stored outside of flammable gas cabinets is 0.012 cu ft (internal
volume)/ ft2 area. This equates to about four full size cylinders per 500-ft2 area.
The maximum allowable amount may be doubled if the gases are stored in
ventilated flammable gas cabinets.
7.
A gas detecting system is required when a cylinder larger than lecture bottle size
containing a gas with a Health Hazard Rating of 4 is being used or stored in the
laboratory (NFPA 55, Chapter 3 Toxic Gases).
8.
A gas detecting system may also be required if a cylinder larger than lecture bottle
size containing a gas with a Health Hazard Rating of 3 has been approved by
EH&S to be stored outside of a gas cabinet.
9.
EH&S will determine if a gas detecting system is required based on gas types,
volumes, concentrations, toxicity, physiological warning properties and how the
gases are to be used.
10.
Gas cabinets shall be vented to meet Manufacturers exhaust specifications.
Laundry Dryer Exhaust

1.
Dryer vents providing shared exhaust of multiple dryers shall have an exhaust fan
designed for this purpose. The fans shall be easily accessible for service and easily
cleanable.
2.
The shared exhaust vent shall have a Lint Collection Box installed inline,
upstream from the exhaust fan. It shall be easily accessible for maintenance, and
made of corrosive resistant materials with an in-line filter material and a
differential-pressure sensor with contacts for remote alarming.
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 9
E.
Demolition
1.
If a project's scope includes or will affect either supply or exhaust ventilation, the
design team shall verify if there are fume hoods or other special exhaust systems
that could be affected.
2.
For hood disposal or relocation, hood owners/users shall complete a Property

Services, Facilities Management, Environmental Health & Safety Equipment
Disposal/Resale Form, return the original to EH&S with a copy to the Party
responsible for the project, and post a copy on the fume hood for the Contractor.
3.
Interior room duct(s) that serviced disposed fume hood(s) should be removed and
capped at the wall or ceiling so lab /room occupants cannot access the ducts for
unauthorized use. All remaining hoods or special exhaust equipment must be
balanced to conform to Section 15852 or Manufacturers specifications
immediately following the removal of hood from exhaust ventilation system.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15852 - 10
SECTION 15855
AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.02
1.03
Central Station Air Handling Units.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
4.
5.
Section 15885 - Air Cleaning.
6.
7.
Section 09900 - Painting
REFERENCES
A.
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI).
B.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
C.
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
D.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
E.
National Electric Code (NEC).
F.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE).
G.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.
JULY 2012
General:
UCB STANDARDS
15855-1
2.
a.
Factory-fabricated and factory-tested air handling units consisting

of combinations of sections of fan, coils, pre-heat, filters, plenums,
dampers and mixing box as required for project design conditions.
b.
Equipment shall be of adequate size to handle air quantities and

static pressure efficiently in accordance with design.
c.
Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI

Standard 430 for central station air handling units.
d.
Provide adequate clearances for servicing or removal of motors,

drives, bearings, coils, filters and dampers.
e.
Medium and high velocity draw-through and built-up systems shall

have transitions to achieve velocity energy recovery.
f.
Specify P-traps for condensate drains.
g.
Specify full NEMA rating of electrical components.
h.
Specify maximum sound levels at the discharge, return and from

casing.
Variable Volume:
a.
3.
JULY 2012
Select discharge dampers (forward curved fans only), variable inlet

vanes or variable speed drive control to best suit design conditions
of air flows and static pressure in harmony with budget and energy
conservation requirements for project.
Casings:
a.
Specify access doors that are easily openable for inspection and
access to internal parts.
b.
Specify access door handles to be safety latch type. Thumb screws

are not acceptable.
c.
Specify stainless-steel drain pans for cooling coils and humidifiers

to be extensive enough to catch condensate leaving coil at highest
catalogued face velocity. Bottom shall be designed to slope to
drain to minimize standing water.
d.
Condensate lines from drain pan must have deep traps to prevent
either draw or blow through conditions. Specify proper depth
dimension.
e.
Specify lights with wire guards in accessible sections, factory

wired to one switch mounted on casing exterior. Switch shall have
pilot light in handle.
UCB STANDARDS
15855-2
4.
5.
JULY 2012
f.
Downstream of evap. or humidifier sections, specify marine lights

with sealed wire-and-glass.
g.
Specify viewports in evap-pad, filter, fan, damper and humidifier

sections.
h.
Specify insulation to meet NFPA-90A flame spread and smoke

generation requirements.
i.
Specify double-wall construction, with perforated panels in fan

section(s).
Fan Section:
a.
See UCB Standards 15010-1.05 for special submittal and

construction standards
b.
The use of a two-fan wheel housing assembly in a common section

can be a cause for shaft flexing due to length, and should be
evaluated before specifying.
c.
Fans selected for operation above 6 inches static pressure must be

approved by the University.
d.
Original drive sheaves shall be changed when required by

balancing.
e.
Specify solid steel fan shafts.
f.
Specify self-aligning, pillow block regreasable ball type fan

bearings for an average, L10 life of 200,000 hours at design
operating conditions, per ANSI Code B3.15.
g.
Specify externally accessible fittings for lubrication.
h.
Fan motors shall be in accordance with "Motors" paragraph in

Vibration Isolation: (Only if required after consultation with the

University)
a.
Specify entire fan, motor and drive assembly to be internally

spring mounted at the factory, together with fan discharge flexible
connection and thrust restraint springs.
b.
Internal factory selected and installed vibration isolation is

preferred over an alternate design requiring external field installed
deflection springs, pipe and duct flexible connections, thrust
restraint springs and spring type pipe hangers on all pipes direct
connected to the unit per Section 15240\-\Mechanical Sound and
Vibration Control.
UCB STANDARDS
15855-3
6.
7.
8.
9.
Coil Sections:
a.
Provide for removal of coils and space coils to allow for cleaning
them without removal.
b.
Specify differential pressure gage across coils.
c.
All other coils shall be in accordance with Section 15790 - Air

Coils.
d.
Steam coils shall not exceed 6 feet in width.
Damper Sections:
a.
Bronze or nylon bearings.
b.
Blades mechanically secured to control rods.
c.
Blades with neoprene gaskets to seal against entire stop.
d.
Leakage rate not to exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000 fpm

velocity through damper and 4 inch w.g. pressure difference.
Filter Section:
a.
Capable of accepting standard 2 inch thick pre-filters and a

combination of 4 inch by 24 inch and 24 inch extended-surface
retained-media filters. Provide the filters in accordance with
Section 15885 - Air Cleaning.
b.
Provide hinged access doors on both sides for filter replacement.
c.
Required upstream of all coils, including heat recovery.
Casing Section Lengths:

a.
10.
Mixing Boxes:
a.
11.
JULY 2012
Provide equal sized flanged openings capable of handling full air

flow.
Zone Damper Sections:

a.
12.
Indicate minimum lengths for access to filters, coils and dampers.
In general, multi-zone type units penalize energy conservation and

should be avoided where conditioned air in cold deck is mixed
with heated air.
Spray Coil Assemblies:

UCB STANDARDS
15855-4
Not acceptable.
13.
14.
15.
JULY 2012
Direct Evaporative Cooling Section:

a.
Evaporative-cooling section shall be downstream of all coils.
b.
Specify stainless steel sumps and housings (i.e., all surfaces

subjected to continuous wetting). Sump shall extend 6 upstream
of face of media to avoid splashing out of the sump under low
airflow conditions.
c.
Specify stainless-steel fasteners and brackets within, as well as

dielectric gaskets between housing and rest of AHU.
d.
Pump shall be stainless steel with low-water pump cut-off switch

in other than residential-type evaporative-cooling systems. Specify
a means to disconnect the pump within the unit and an external Jbox.
e.
Specify quick-fill valve within the unit, upstream of the fill float
valve. The quick-fill shall have a ball valve with stainless-steel
ball, stem and handle, and a brass male hose connection. The
discharge of the float valve shall be above the level of the overflow
drain. On design drawing, specify P-trap for sump drain.
f.
Specify copper water-distribution header with flushing valve(s) at

each end. Valve shall be full-port with stainless-steel ball, stem
and handle and a brass male hose connection. Header supply shall
have a flow-control valve with locking handle. Provision for water
bleed-off is necessary only if sump automatic drain-down is not
used.
g.
Specify automatic controls to schedule daily drying-out of

evaporative media and weekly sump drain-down. In exterior
applications, specify automatic drain-down to avoid freezing.
h.
Specify Glasdek media. Celdek is not acceptable.
Indirect Evaporative Cooling

a.
Is encouraged, either where direct evaporative cooling is being

designed or in conjunction with backup/complementary
"mechanical air-chilling" coil.
b.
Chilled water from an absorption chilled-water source may be

considered an indirect-cooling coil equivalent when used in
conjunction with direct evaporative cooling, and chilled water
temperature is controlled by supply air temperature.
Humidifiers:
UCB STANDARDS
15855-5
a.
1.04
When required, specify steam grid type to inject steam into air
stream. Do not use steam from Central Plant.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of

packaged air handling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B.
Codes and Standards: Comply with the following:

1.
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI
430 "Standard for Central-Station Air Handling Units", display
certification symbol on units of certified models.
2.
NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having

flame spread rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher
than 50; and complying with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of
Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
3.
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as

part of air handling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL and
comply with NEMA Standards.
4.
NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as

applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical
components of air handling units.
5.
ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in

accordance with ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
6.
ASHRAE-compliant and UL-approved filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS:
(Specify only those units with similar quality.)
Aerosonics
Alliance
Annexair
ClimateCraft
Dunham-Bush
Energy Labs
Engineered Air
Governair
Haakon
Mammoth
McQuay
Pace
Scott-Springfield
Team Air
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15855-6
Temtrol
Trane
York
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
and use list to expand on specific project applications in Part 2 - Products and
specific installation requirements in this Part 3 for each unit specified.
B.
Specify that AHUs shall be started only when authorized by UCB staff.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15855-7
SECTION 15855
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Central Station Air Handling Units.
4. Section 15790 - Air Coils.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI).

E. National Electric Code (NEC).
F. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
December 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-1
a. Factory-fabricated and factory-tested air handling units consisting of combinations

of sections of fan, coils, pre-heat, filters, plenums, dampers and mixing box as
required for project design conditions.
b. Equipment shall be of adequate size to handle air quantities and static pressure
efficiently in accordance with design.
c. Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430 for
central station air handling units.
d. Provide adequate clearances for servicing or removal of motors, drives, bearings,
coils, filters and dampers.
e. Medium and high velocity draw-through and built-up systems shall have
transitions to achieve velocity energy recovery.
f. Specify P-traps for condensate drains.
g. Specify full NEMA rating of electrical components.
h. Specify maximum sound levels at the discharge, return and from casing.
2. Variable Volume:
a. Select discharge dampers (forward curved fans only), variable inlet vanes or
variable speed drive control to best suit design conditions of air flows and static
pressure in harmony with budget and energy conservation requirements for
project.
3. Casings:
a. Specify access doors that are easily openable for inspection and access to internal
parts.
b. Specify access door handles to be safety latch type.
acceptable.
Thumb screws are not
c. Specify stainless-steel drain pans for cooling coils and humidifiers to be extensive
enough to catch condensate leaving coil at highest catalogued face velocity.
Bottom shall be designed to slope to drain to minimize standing water.
d. Condensate lines from drain pan must have deep traps to prevent either draw or
blow through conditions. Specify proper depth dimension.
e. Specify lights with wire guards in accessible sections, factory wired to one switch
mounted on casing exterior. Switch shall have pilot light in handle.
f. Downstream of evap. or humidifier sections, specify marine lights with sealed
wire-and-glass.
g. Specify viewports in evap-pad, filter, fan, damper and humidifier sections.
December 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-2
h. Specify insulation to meet NFPA-90A flame spread and smoke generation

requirements.
i. Specify double-wall construction, with perforated panels in fan section(s).

4. Fan Section:
a. See UCB Standards 15010-1.05 for special submittal and construction standards
b. The use of a two-fan wheel housing assembly in a common section can be a cause
for shaft flexing due to length, and should be evaluated before specifying.
c. Fans selected for operation above 6 inches static pressure must be approved by the
University.
d. Original drive sheaves shall be changed when required by balancing.
e. Specify solid steel fan shafts.
f. Specify self-aligning, pillow block regreasable ball type fan bearings for an
average, L10 life of 200,000 hours at design operating conditions, per ANSI Code
B3.15.
g. Specify externally accessible fittings for lubrication.
h. Fan motors shall be in accordance with "Motors" paragraph in Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
5. Vibration Isolation: (Only if required after consultation with the University)
a. Specify entire fan, motor and drive assembly to be internally spring mounted at
the factory, together with fan discharge flexible connection and thrust restraint
springs.
b. Internal factory selected and installed vibration isolation is preferred over an
alternate design requiring external field installed deflection springs, pipe and duct
flexible connections, thrust restraint springs and spring type pipe hangers on all
pipes direct connected to the unit per Section 15240\-\Mechanical Sound and
Vibration Control.
6. Coil Sections:
a. Provide for removal of coils and space coils to allow for cleaning them without
removal.
b. Specify differential pressure gage across coils.
c. All other coils shall be in accordance with Section 15790 - Air Coils.
December 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-3
d. Steam coils shall not exceed 6 feet in width.

7. Damper Sections:
a. Bronze or nylon bearings.
b. Blades mechanically secured to control rods.
c. Blades with neoprene gaskets to seal against entire stop.
d. Leakage rate not to exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000 fpm velocity through
damper and 4 inch w.g. pressure difference.
8. Filter Section:
a. Capable of accepting standard 2 inch thick pre-filters and a combination of 4 inch
by 24 inch and 24 inch extended-surface retained-media filters. Provide the filters
in accordance with Section 15885 - Air Cleaning.
b. Provide hinged access doors on both sides for filter replacement.
c. Required upstream of all coils, including heat recovery.
9. Casing Section Lengths:
a. Indicate minimum lengths for access to filters, coils and dampers.
10. Mixing Boxes:
a. Provide equal sized flanged openings capable of handling full air flow.
11. Zone Damper Sections:
a. In general, multi-zone type units penalize energy conservation and should be
avoided where conditioned air in cold deck is mixed with heated air.
12. Spray Coil Assemblies:
Not acceptable.
13. Direct Evaporative Cooling Section:
a. Evaporative-cooling section shall be downstream of all coils.
b. Specify stainless steel sumps and housings (i.e., all surfaces subjected to
continuous wetting). Sump shall extend 6 upstream of face of media to avoid
splashing out of the sump under low airflow conditions.
c. Specify stainless-steel fasteners and brackets within, as well as dielectric gaskets
between housing and rest of AHU.
December 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-4
d. Pump shall be stainless steel with low-water pump cut-off switch in other than
residential-type evaporative-cooling systems. Specify a means to disconnect the
pump within the unit and an external J-box.
e. Specify quick-fill valve within the unit, upstream of the fill float valve. The
quick-fill shall have a ball valve with stainless-steel ball, stem and handle, and a
brass male hose connection. The discharge of the float valve shall be above the
level of the overflow drain. On design drawing, specify P-trap for sump drain.
f. Specify copper water-distribution header with flushing valve(s) at each end.
Valve shall be full-port with stainless-steel ball, stem and handle and a brass male
hose connection. Header supply shall have a flow-control valve with locking
handle. Provision for water bleed-off is necessary only if sump automatic draindown is not used.
g. Specify automatic controls to schedule daily drying-out of evaporative media and
weekly sump drain-down. In exterior applications, specify automatic drain-down
to avoid freezing.
14. Indirect Evaporative Cooling

a. Is encouraged, either where direct evaporative cooling is being designed or in
conjunction with backup/complementary "mechanical air-chilling" coil.
b. Chilled water from an absorption chilled-water source may be considered an
indirect-cooling coil equivalent when used in conjunction with direct evaporative
cooling, and chilled water temperature is controlled by supply air temperature.
15. Humidifiers:
a. When required, specify steam grid type to inject steam into air stream. Do not use
steam from Central Plant.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air

handling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430
"Standard for Central-Station Air Handling Units", display certification symbol on
units of certified models.
2. NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame spread
rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50; and complying with
NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems".
December 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-5
3. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of air

handling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA
Standards.
4. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to
installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of air
handling units.
5. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance with
ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
6. ASHRAE-compliant and UL-approved filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS:
Aerosonics
Alliance
ClimateCraft
Dunham-Bush
Energy Labs
Engineered Air
Governair
Haakon
Mammoth
McQuay
Pace
Scott-Springfield
Temtrol
Trane
United Metal
York
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

in this Part 3 for each unit specified.
B. Specify that AHUs shall be started only when authorized by UCB staff.
December 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-6
SECTION 15855
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Central Station Air Handling Units.
4. Section 15790 - Air Coils.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI).

E. National Electric Code (NEC).
F. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
AUGUST 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-1
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Factory-fabricated and factory-tested air handling units consisting of sections with
fan, coils, pre-heat, filters, plenums, dampers and mixing box as required for
project design conditions.
b. Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430 for
central station air handling units.
c. Provide adequate clearances for servicing or removal of motors, drives, bearings,
coils, filters and dampers.
d. Medium and high velocity draw-through and built-up systems shall have
transitions to achieve velocity energy recovery.
e. Specify P-traps for condensate drains.
f. Specify full NEMA rating of electrical components.
g. Specify maximum sound levels at the discharge, return and from casing.
h. Transport rails in coil and motor sections are required where access or
replacement is not a viable due to weight or size of components. Exceptions
permitted with UCB written approval only.
2. Variable Volume:
a. Select variable-speed drive control to best suit design conditions of air flows and
static pressure.
3. Casings:
a. Specify stainless-steel drain pans for cooling coils and humidifiers to be extensive
enough to catch condensate leaving coil at highest catalogued face velocity.
Bottom shall be designed to triple slope to drain to minimize standing water.
b. Condensate lines from drain pan must have deep-enough traps to prevent either
draw or blow through conditions. Specify proper depth dimension.
c. Specify fluorescent or LED lights with wire guards in accessible sections, factory
wired to one switch mounted on casing exterior. The light switch shall be located
nearest to access of unit.
AUGUST 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-2
d. Downstream of evaporative or humidifier sections, specify marine lights with

sealed wire-and-glass covers.
e. Provide tread plate or slip-resistant coatings on flooring downstream of CHW
coils, upstream and downstream of evap-cooling pads, and intake plenums if OA
damper is immediately past OA louver.
f. Specify insulation to meet NFPA-90A flame spread and smoke generation
requirements.
g. Casing-section lengths shall allow good access to all internal components.
h. Specify double-wall construction, with perforated panels in fan section(s), 2 for
interior units, and 4 for sound-sensitive and outdoor applications.
4. Doors:
a. Specify access doors that open against pressure: inward for sections that are
pressurized and outward for sections that are under negative pressure.
b. Six-foot-high doors are preferred with a 24-inch minimum width.
c. Specify access door handles to be safety-latch type with rollers. Two-stage
handles shall be used in out-swinging doors under pressure which should be
avoided. Three handles are required for 5-foot and higher doors.
d. Specify viewports in evap-pad, filter, fan, damper and humidifier sections.
e. Three hinges are required for 5-foot and higher doors.
f. Door frames with seals mounted over edge of metal are not acceptable because
they are easily damaged.
5. Fan Section:
a. See UCB Standards 15010-1.05 for special submittal and construction standards
b. The use of a two-fan wheel housing assembly in a common section can be a cause
for shaft flexing due to length, and should be evaluated before specifying.
c. Fans selected for operation above 6 inches static pressure must be approved by the
University.
d. Original drive sheaves shall be changed if required when balancing.
e. Specify solid steel fan shafts.
f. Specify self-aligning, pillow block regreasable ball type fan bearings for an
average, L10 life of 200,000 hours at design operating conditions, per ANSI Code
B3.15.
AUGUST 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-3
g. Specify accessible fittings for lubrication, with aluminum or copper extensions

where needed. Plastic extensions are not acceptable.
h. Fan motors shall be in accordance with "Motors" paragraph in Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
6. Vibration Isolation: (Only if required after consultation with the structural engineer).
a. Specify entire fan, motor and drive assembly to be internally spring mounted at
the factory, together with fan discharge flexible connection and thrust restraint
springs.
b. Internal factory-selected and installed vibration isolation is preferred over an
alternate design requiring external field installed deflection springs, pipe and duct
flexible connections, thrust restraint springs and spring type pipe hangers on all
pipes directly connected to the unit per Section 15240-Mechanical Sound and
Vibration Control.
7. Coil Sections:
a. Provide for removal of coils and space coils to allow for cleaning them without
removal.
b. Specify differential pressure gage across coils.
c. All other coils shall be in accordance with Section 15790 - Air Coils.
d. Chilled-water coils shall have stainless-steel frame.
e. Air-tight neoprene grommets shall be installed at pipe penetrations of both sides
of casing. Chilled-water piping shall be insulated within the wall to avoid
condensation.
f. Steam coils shall not exceed 6 feet in width, and shall be of the tube-in-tube type.
Provide by-pass damper (to be opened and minimize pressure drop when not
heating). Centri-Feed quality as a minimum or prior approved equivalent.
g. Face-and-bypass hot-water or steam coils are no longer acceptable in either new
or replacement applications.
8. Damper Sections:
a. Bronze or nylon bearings.
b. Blades mechanically secured to control rods.
c. Rods with non-round cross-section are required.
d. Blades with neoprene gaskets to seal against entire stop.
AUGUST 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-4
e. Side-seals are required for all exterior dampers.

f. Leakage rate not to exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000 fpm velocity through
damper and 4 inch w.g. pressure difference.
9. Filter Section:
a. Capable of accepting standard 2 inch thick pre-filters and 24-inch extendedsurface retained-media filters. Provide the filters in accordance with Section
15885 - Air Cleaning.
b. Provide hinged access doors on both sides for filter replacement in units that are
too small for a person to walk inside.
c. Required upstream of all coils, including heat recovery. Heat-recovery coils only
require single-stage 4-inch filters.
10. Mixing Boxes:
Provide equal sized flanged openings capable of handling full air flow.
11. Zone Damper Sections:
In general, multi-zone type units penalize energy conservation and should be avoided
where conditioned air in cold deck is mixed with heated air.
12. Spray Coil Assemblies:
Not acceptable.
13. Direct Evaporative Cooling Section:
a. Evaporative-cooling section shall be downstream of all coils.
b. Specify stainless steel sumps and housings (i.e., all surfaces subjected to
continuous wetting). Sump shall extend 6 upstream of face of media to avoid
splashing out of the sump under low-airflow conditions. Specify an air dam
between the bottom of the media and 2 inches below operating level of the sump
water.
c. Specify stainless-steel fasteners and brackets within, as well as dielectric gaskets
between housing and rest of AHU.
d. Pump shall be stainless steel with low-water cut-off switch in other than
residential-type evaporative-cooling systems. Specify a means to disconnect the
pump within the unit.
AUGUST 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-5
e. Specify quick-fill valve within the unit, upstream of the fill float valve. The
quick-fill shall have a ball valve with stainless-steel ball, stem and handle, and a
brass male hose connection. The discharge of the float valve shall be above the
level of the sump, and shall have an air deflector. On design drawing, specify Ptrap for sump drain, downstream of where the overflow drain connects to common
drain.
f. Specify copper water-distribution header with flushing valve(s) at each end.
Valve shall be full-port with stainless-steel ball, stem and handle and a brass male
hose connection. Header supply shall have a flow-control valve with locking
handle. Water bleed-off is not necessary unless sump automatic drain-down is not
used.
g. Specify automatic controls by controls contractor to schedule daily drying-out of
evaporative media and weekly sump drain-down. In exterior applications, specify
automatic drain-down to avoid freezing.
h. Specify one-third, two thirds staging by dividing the pad surface into three
sections, with the middle one being first stage (with one pump) and the two other
sections being second stage (with one or two pumps). Face-and-bypass dampers
for control do not work acceptably.
14. Indirect Evaporative Cooling
Is encouraged, either with a dedicated cooling tower and an AHU coil or waterside
economizer by using chilled water in the CHW coil.
15. Humidifiers:
Using evaporative humidification provided by the evaporative-cooling section is
preferred.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE

handling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430
"Standard for Central-Station Air Handling Units", display certification symbol on
units of certified models.
2. NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame spread
rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50; and complying with
NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems".
AUGUST 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-6
3. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of air

handling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA
Standards.
4. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to
installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of air
handling units.
5. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance with
ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
6. ASHRAE-compliant and UL-approved filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS:
a. Custom:
Aerosonics
Air Flow
Alliance
ClimateCraft
Dunham-Bush
Energy Labs
Governair
Haakon
Mammoth
McQuay
Pace
Scott-Springfield
Temtrol
Trane
United Metal
York
b. Modular/Packaged:
Carrier
McQuay
Trane
York
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

AUGUST 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-7
B. Specify that AHUs shall be started only when authorized by UCB staff.
AUGUST 2010
UCB STANDARDS
15855-8
SECTION 15856
PACKAGED ROOF-TOP HEATING/COOLING UNITS
(Information only. Not allowed without specific UCB authorization.)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Single Zone Packaged Roof-Top HVAC Units.
2. Central System Packaged Roof-Top HVAC Units.
1.02
REFERENCES

B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA).
C. American Gas Association (AGA).
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. Because of problems with appearance, packaged roof-top units are not to be used
without special authorization from the University staff.
b. See UCB Standards 15010-1.05/3.
c. Units UL Listed and carry UL Label.
d. Gas units AGA approved specifically for outdoor installation.
Note: RTU manufacturer-specific (e.g., Carrier) gas trains and controls are not
acceptable.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15856-1
e. Roof curbs to comply with National Roofing Contractors Association

requirements.
f. Take special care to minimize sound and vibration transmissions to structure by
locating units symmetrically over columns and beams.
g. Provide adequate clearances for servicing filters and unit components.
h. Specify a 115-volt convenience outlet on unit sized to handle a small power load
or service light.
i. On large units, specify lights with wire guards in accessible sections, factory
wired to switch mounted on exterior of casing.
j. Specify filters to be in accordance with Section 15885 - Air Cleaning.
k. Provide complete calculations to show:
1) Catalogued capacity rating of packaged unit for standard conditions.
2) Correction factors that have been applied to Sensible Heat Capacity for actual
entering drybulb temperature conditions.
3) Actual leaving dry-bulb temperature.
4) Indoor fan motor heat has been included.
5) Deration of total unit capacity for 5400 feet altitude using 105F temperature
for air/ entering condenser.
l. Coordinate Painting Section 09900 to include painting HVAC Roof-Top Units an
approved color if units are to be exposed to view.
m. Specify units with "economizer" cycle with motorized fresh, return, and exhaust
air dampers, automatically controlled and pre-wired at the factory.
n. Provide low ambient control package when required by design conditions.
o. Specify painting of AHU per UCB color criteria.
2. Refer to Air Handling, Section 15850.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE

handling units whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SINGLE ZONE PACKAGED ROOF-TOP HVAC UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
McQuay
Trane
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15856-2
York
2.02
CENTRAL SYSTEM PACKAGED ROOF-TOP HVAC UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
Energy Labs
Engineered Air
Mammoth
McQuay
Pace
Temtrol
Trane
York
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A. In general, for project specifications, remove "Design Requirements" Sub-paragraph A in

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15856-3
SECTION 15885
AIR CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Disposable Panel Pre-Filters.
2. Extended Surface Retained Media Filters.
3. Extended Surface High Efficiency Media Filters.
4. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filters.
5. Activated Carbon Filters.
6. Filter Frames.
7. Filter Gages.
2. Section 15855 - Air Handling Units with Coils.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE 52 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for
Removing Particulate Matter.
B. ANSI/UL 586 - Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units.
C. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
D. MIL-STD-282 - Filter Units, Protective Clothing, Gas-Mask Components and Related
Products: Performance-Test Methods.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Filter media shall be ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class 1 or Class 2, as approved by local
authorities.
B. Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer.
C. Assemble filter components to form filter banks from products of one manufacturer.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15885-1
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. All air supplied by a forced air type unit or system shall be filtered.
2. Single filter installation or a pre-filter-intermediate filter combination shall be
upstream from the coils and blow-through fans, as well as exhaust energy-recovery
units.
3. After-filter, where required, shall be on the discharge side of the fan and downstream
from all coils.
4. Adequate clearances must be allowed for cleaning or changing filters.
5. In general, air filtration systems shall utilize replaceable, dry type extended surface
media having an efficiency of 60 percent (MERV 11), based on ASHRAE Standard
No. 52 Atmospheric Dust Spot Test.
LEED EQc3: Construction IAQ Management Plan:
Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 13 is required. This is
approximately an 85% dust spot efficiency.
6. Where space allows, a pre-filter (MERV 7) and primary filter (MERV 11) shall be
provided.
7. Media shall be supported to minimize flexing during start-stop fan cycles.
8. Pre-Filters shall be included during the construction phase and shall be considered for
permanent installation where necessary.
LEED EQc3: Construction IAQ Management Plan:
MERV 8 rating or better
9. Each filter bank shall be equipped with a Magnehelic or similar gage that indicates
static pressure drop across the filters. One gage for two-stage filter banks is
acceptable.
10. The design change-out pressure drop, in inches water gage, shall be indicated on the
gauge.
11. Built-up filter frames shall be specified to accommodate the replacement media of not
less than three filter manufacturers.
12. Air filtration systems for clean rooms and special clean areas shall be designed for
ease of filter maintenance and minimum interruption of operation.
13. Specify extended surface high efficiency media filters where the filtering of
biological organisms is required.
14. Specify HEPA filters where very high efficiency filtering is required.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15885-2
15. Consider activated carbon filters where odor control is required, or other odor-control
systems such as Cosatron (TM).
16. Specify "Extra Stock" to be provided to insure that a completely clean set of filter
media is available at project completion.
17. The initial set of filter media is to be used for testing and trial use and may not
necessarily be replaced at project completion.
18. For LEED 3.1: Provide MERV 13 (85%) filters during occupancy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
DISPOSABLE PANEL PRE-FILTERS
A. Manufacturers:
American Air Filter
Farr
Flanders
Grainger
B. Media: 2 inch minimum (4 inch preferred) fiber blanket, factory sprayed with
flameproof, non-drip, non-volatile adhesive, nominal size 24 by 24 inches.
C. Rating: 500 FPM Face velocity, 0.15 inch WG initial resistance, 0.50 inches WG
recommended final resistance.
D. Casing: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer.
E. Holding Frames: 20 gage minimum galvanized steel frame with expanded metal grid on
outlet side and steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged with pull and retaining handles.
2.O2
EXTENDED SURFACE RETAINED MEDIA FILTERS
A. Manufacturers:
American Air Filter
Farr
ULOK Fiberbond
B. Media: Pleated, non-woven cotton fabric, scrim reinforced; supported by welded steel
retainer; in 16 gage steel holding frame with corrosion resistant coating; effective media
area 50 sq. ft. per 1000 CFM capacity rating. Nominal size 24 by 24 by 12 inches deep.
C. Rating: ASHRAE 52: 60 percent dust spot efficiency (MERV 11), 96 percent average
weight arrestance; 500 FPM face velocity, initial resistance, 0.50 inch WG,
recommended final resistance 1.2 inch WG above initial resistance.
2.03 EXTENDED-SURFACE HIGH EFFICIENCY MEDIA FILTERS
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15885-3
A. Manufacturers:
American Air Filter
Farr
ULOK Fiberbond
B. Media: Pleated, water-resistant glass fiber with aluminum or kraft separators; in 16 gage
steel holding frame with corrosion resistant coating. Nominal size 24 by 24 by 12 inches
deep.
C. Rating: ASHRAE 52: 95 percent dust spot efficiency; effective media are 50 sq. ft. per
1000 CFM capacity rating, 0.65 inch w.q. initial resistance, 1.0 inch w.q. recommended
final resistance.
2.04
HIGH EFFICIENCY PARTICULATE AIR (HEPA) FILTERS
A. Manufacturers:
American Air Filter
Farr
Flanders
MSA
Weber
B. Media: Pleated, water-resistant glass fiber with aluminum separators; ANSI/UL 586; in
16 gage zinc coated steel holding frame; nominal size 24 by 24 by 12 inches deep.
C. Rating: 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke (DOP) to 99.97 percent efficiency, in
accordance with MIL-STD-282 thermal (DOP) penetration test method; 250 FPM face
velocity, 1.0 inch WG initial resistance, 3.0 inch WG recommended final resistance.
2.05
ACTIVATED CARBON FILTERS
A. Manufacturers:
American Air Filter
Barneby-Sutcliffe
Farr
B. Assembly: Galvanized steel unit incorporating extruded aluminum tracks to
accommodate filter servicing trays in deep V arrangement arranged for upstream
downstream side servicing with disposable panel pre-filter.
C. Media: Activated carbon density 34 lb/cu ft pelletized or granular to 6 by 10 Tyler mesh
screen; minimum carbon tetrachloride activity of 60 percent; in thin bed trays, nominal
size 24 by 24 by 1 inch thick; 9 lbs. of carbon per 2000 CFM air flow capacity.
D. Rating: 500 FPM face velocity, 0.45 inch WG initial resistance.
2.06
FILTER FRAMES
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15885-4
A. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 16 gage galvanized steel or
extruded aluminum T-section construction with necessary gasketing between frames and
walls. Corners of frames shall be welded.
B. Standard Sizes: Provide for interchangeability of filter media of other manufacturers; for
panel filters, size for 24 by 24 inches filter media, minimum 2 inches thick; for extended
surface and high efficiency particulate air filters, provide for upstream mounting of panel
filters.
C. Side Servicing Housings: Flanged for insertion into ductwork, or reinforced 16 gage
galvanized steel; access doors with continuous gasketing and positive locking devices on
both sides; extruded aluminum tracks or channels for primary <and
secondary>,<secondary and tertiary> filters with positive sealing gaskets.
2.07
FILTER GAGES
A. Manufacturer:
Dwyer
B. Direct Reading Dial: 4-3/4 inch OD diaphragm actuated dial in metal case, vent valves,
black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment, appropriate ranges of
0.05, 0-1.0, 0-2.0, 0-3.0 or 0-4.0 inch WG, 2 percent of full scale accuracy; Magnehelic
Series 2000 manufactured by Dwyer.
C. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4 inch aluminum
tubing, 2-way or 3-way vent valves.
D. Inclined manometer: Not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15885-5
SECTION 15900
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
JULY 2012
Section Includes:
1.
Ductwork.
2.
Manufactured duct joints.
3.
Casings.
4.
Fibrous glass ductwork.
5.
Damper Operator Hardware.
6.
Volume control dampers.
7.
Fire dampers.
8.
Combination fire and smoke dampers.
9.
Smoke dampers.
10.
Backdraft dampers.
11.
Triple lock aluminum round ductwork (uninsulated).
12.
Insulated triple lock aluminum round ductwork.
13.
Insulated flexible round ductwork.
14.
Flexible duct fan connections.
15.
Access door hardware.
16.
Duct access doors.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
Section 15240 - Mechanical, Sound and Vibration Control - acoustical

liner, sound attenuators.
4.
Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation - ductwork insulation.

UCB STANDARDS
15900-1
1.02
1.03
5.
Section 15950 - Controls - automatic dampers.
6.
REFERENCES
A.
ASHRAE - Fundamentals Handbook - Duct Design.
B.
ASHRAE - Equipment Handbook - Duct Construction.
C.
ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel

Articles.
D.
ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,

and Strip.
E.
ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

by the Hot-Dip Process.
F.
ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock

Forming Quality.
G.
ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
H.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
I.
SMACNA - Duct Construction Standards.
J.
SMACNA - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
K.
U1 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
L.
UL 555 - Fire Dampers, UL555C & UL555S.
M.
Uniform Mechanical Code
N.
Uniform Building Code
O.
SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual
P.
NFPA 91 - Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials
Q.
NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations
R.
ASHRAE 62-1989 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15900-2
1.
2.
Ductwork:
a.
Design ductwork in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA

guidelines, recommendations and standards unless otherwise
indicated in this Design Guide.
b.
Fibrous glass ductwork will not be allowed, except for air-transfer

ducts above ceilings not routed through walls, and soundattenuation elbows.
c.
Specify that all duct construction, including sheet metal gage and
reinforcement, shall follow the SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, latest edition, unless otherwise noted.
SMACNAs duct construction is based on Duct Pressure Classes,
which correspond to the maximum operating static pressure for the
portion of the system receiving the classification from the
designer. The designer needs to be aware of possible static
pressure changes in system due to abnormal or emergency
conditions, and account for these when selecting the Duct Pressure
Classes for the various parts of the system. The designer may want
to install pressure or vacuum relief devices in the ductwork to
account for unusual pressure fluctuations instead of going with
more heavy-duty sheet metal construction. Review with
University before deciding.
d.
With larger duct systems, sheet metal cost savings can be realized
if the designer specifies different Duct Pressure Classes for the
portions of the system that do not experience as much static
pressure due to being farther away from the fan. (Do not specify
just one Duct Pressure Class for the entire system if it is a large
system with static pressures that are significantly less in parts of
the system than the pressures seen close to the fan. But, for
personnel and equipment protection, design should allow for
abnormal or emergency pressure changes as noted in the item
above.) Using the SMACNA symbol for Point of Change in Duct
Construction (by the Static Pressure Class), the designer should
indicate on Drawings the points in the ductwork system where duct
construction should change because of change in Duct Pressure
Class.
e.
Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork shall conform to NFPA 96 and the

Uniform Mechanical Code.
f.
Ductwork for special exhaust systems shall conform to NFPA 91

and the Uniform Mechanical Code.
Plenums:
a.
JULY 2012
If masonry plenums or air shafts are used to handle air flow, they
shall be checked for structural design strength which takes into
account the maximum design pressure or vacuum, and be coated
UCB STANDARDS
15900-3
with special materials or lined with sheet metal to make them air
tight.
3.
b.
Arrangement of return air plenums must be approved by the

University.
c.
All materials in plenums must be in full compliance with NFPA

90A and the Uniform Mechanical Code.
Sound Attenuation:
a.
4.
5.
6.
Air Leakage:
a.
Review the duct sealing requirements listed in SMACNA HVAC

Duct Construction Standards, and specify the appropriate
requirements, adjusting the SMACNA sealing requirements as
necessary. Special exhaust systems may require more stringent
sealing requirements, especially if the exhaust fans discharge duct
(under positive static pressure) is located in an occupied area or
plenum.
b.
Pressure testing of ductwork in the 3 and higher Duct Pressure

Classes is required. The SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test
Manual provides detailed information on leak test procedures.
Volume Control Dampers:

a.
Show on the Drawings all required locations for volume control

dampers in the ductwork where required for air balancing. Avoid
locating dampers where it is obvious they wont be needed because
of the inherent pressure drops in the system due to duct layout,
longest runs, etc.
b.
Do not install a volume damper with a frame that protrudes into an

airstream. Otherwise, excessive noise and pressure drop will
result. Some possible solutions are to use a damper downstream of
a 45 take-off or enlarge the duct at the point of damper location.
c.
Specify locking, indicating quadrant regulators on these volume

control dampers.
Take-offs:
a.
JULY 2012
Refer to Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control

for coordination of duct sound attenuators, acoustical duct and
plenum linings and other acoustical treatment of ductwork
systems.
Take-offs shall be conical with a manual damper if warranted. If

the main duct is not deep enough for a conical fitting, specify a 45
fitting with a round collar.
UCB STANDARDS
15900-4
b.
7.
JULY 2012
Take-offs to VAV terminal units shall not have manual dampers.
Fire and Smoke Dampers:

a.
Indicate all fire and smoke dampers on the Drawings.
b.
Coordinate locations with code review authority during design

process.
c.
Drawing notes or specifications indicating fire damper or

fire/smoke damper locations to be "Where required by Code" are
not acceptable. Drawings must indicate location and type of all
dampers.
d.
Specify electrical actuators requiring 120 V. Actuator shall have an

auxiliary switch to monitor full-closure of the smoke damper
through the BAS.
e.
Specify that the contractor shall install all fire and smoke dampers
in strict accordance with their UL listing, NFPA 90A, 90B, 92A,
Uniform Building code, Uniform Mechanical Code, and the
manufacturers installation instructions.
f.
Fire and smoke dampers in small ducts (under 16 in height) can

cause excessive pressure drop and noise due to insufficient fee
area. One solution is to increase the duct size with gradual sheet
metal transitions to increase the free area at the damper location.
Another solution can be to specify a damper frame style that does
not impinge on the ducts cross-sectional free area.
g.
Ceiling-type fire dampers are required where HVAC components

penetrate fire-rated ceiling membranes. Standard fire dampers are
not acceptable in this application.
h.
Combination fire/smoke dampers are often used in applications

where both a fire damper and a smoke damper are required.
i.
Where both a fire damper and a smoke damper are required by

code at a ceiling penetration, various types of combination
fire/smoke dampers are available which are listed by UL as
acceptable for a ceiling penetration. The correct selection of a
ceiling-type combination fire/smoke damper depends on the type
of rated ceiling construction. The alternative to a ceiling-type
combination fire/smoke damper is to have a separate fire damper
(appropriate for the type of ceiling construction) and a separate
smoke damper. (The smoke damper must b within a certain
distance of the ceiling penetration.
j.
Specify only dynamic rated fire dampers, which provide more

positive closure than static rated fire dampers. Do not specify or
allow static rated fire dampers.
UCB STANDARDS
15900-5
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Back-Draft Dampers:
a.
Specify motorized back-draft dampers for positive closure of air

duct on exhaust systems where stack effect would open gravity
type dampers.
b.
Back-draft dampers of flexible materials are not acceptable.
Flexible Duct:
a.
Specify flexible duct which meets the pressure class requirements.
b.
Specify a maximum length of 6 feet. Design for a maximum

velocity of 600 ft/ min.
Flexible Duct Fan Connections:

a.
Specify at least one inch slack in these connections to insure that

no vibration is transmitted from fan to ductwork.
b.
Exhaust ducts shall have flexible connections appropriate for the

type of exhaust and NFPA/UMC requirements.
Access Doors:
a.
Specify duct access doors for inspection, maintenance and cleaning

at all automatic dampers and fire and smoke dampers.
b.
Specify access panels (sheet metal covers with hemmed edges and
gaskets) upstream of duct turning vanes in return air and exhaust,
and before all booster (heating, reheat, cooling) coils. Panels shall
be sheet metal covers with hemmed edges and gaskets screwed
over the opening (do not seal).
Elbows:
State that:
Radius elbows with throat radius (measured at inside surface) equal to
duct depth should be used wherever possible. Rectangular elbows are
discouraged. If rectangular elbows are needed, they shall have single-wall
turning vanes, with intermediate support rails if the length of the vanes
exceeds 36. Edges of the turning vanes shall be parallel with the sides of
the elbow. Rails shall be 2 wide for elbows up to 12, and 4 wide for
elbows above 24 in the dimension perpendicular to the vanes.
13.
Chemical Fumehood Exhaust:

Chemical fumehood exhaust shall have stainless-steel or PVC-coated
ductwork. PVC-coated exhaust duct is to be used unless stainless steel is
considered necessary or truly better.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15900-6
14.
General Exhaust:
Galvanized metal shall be used for general exhaust.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
LEED EQc4.1: Low-Emitting Materials:
All interior adhesives and sealants must meet or exceed VOC limit requirements of South
Coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168 and sealants used as fillers must meet
requirements of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.
2.02
2.03
A.
General: All duct materials shall be non-combustible or conforming to

requirements for Class 0 or Class 1 air duct materials, as per UL 181 with
limitations as noted in NFPA 90A.
B.
Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming
quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz. per sq. ft. for each side in conformance
with ASTM A90.
C.
Aluminum Ducts: ANSI/ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14.

Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
D.
Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304.
E.
For many applications, PVC-coated exhaust duct for chemicals may be used or
even preferred in place of stainless steel.
F.
Sealant: Non-hardening, non-asbestos, water resistant, UL classifies as fire

resistive, compatible with mating materials. Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146 or
Duro Dyne SAS UL duct sealant mastic.
G.
Duct liner in evaporative cooling systems: Manville Permacote Linacoustic Duct

Liner, or equally-coated duct liner installed per manufacturers recommendations.
Alternate: Armacell AP Armaflex or Armacell AP Coilflex elastomeric duct
liners.
MANUFACTURED DUCT JOINTS

A.
Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries, Inc. or approved equal.
B.
Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System, or approved
equal, components of standard catalog manufacture.
CASINGS
A.
Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction

Standards.
2.04 FIBROUS GLASS DUCTWORK

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15900-7
A.
2.05
Not allowed.
DAMPER-OPERATOR HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers:
Duro Dyne
Ventfabrics Ventlok Regulators
2.06
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A.
2.07
2.08
2.09
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
Only manufacturers who meet the codes standards and codes listed below.
B.
Specify that fire dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance
with UL555 Standard and shall also be in compliance with NFPA 90A.
C.
Specify that fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with their UL listing,
NFPA 90A, and the manufacturers installation instructions.
COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A.
Manufacturers:
Only manufacturers who meet the standards and codes listed below.
B.
The combination fire/smoke dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in

accordance with UL555/UL555S Standards and shall also be in compliance with
NFPA 90A.
C.
The combination fire/smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with their

UL listing, NFPA 90A, and the manufacturers installation instructions.
D.
Provide UL-rated electrical actuator requiring 120 V. Actuator shall have an

auxiliary switch to monitor full-closure of the smoke damper through the BAS.
SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
Only manufacturers who meet the standards and codes listed below.
B.
The smoke dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with
UL555S Standard and shall also be in compliance with NFPA 90A.
C.
The smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with their UL listing, NFPA
90A, and the manufacturers installation instructions.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15900-8
D.
2.10
Provide UL-rated electrical actuator requiring 120 V. Actuator shall have an

auxiliary switch to monitor full-closure of the smoke damper through the BAS.
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
Air Balance
Airstream
American Warming/Air Balance
Arrow United
C.E. Sparrow
Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
Prefco
Ruskin
B.
2.11
Backdraft dampers furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving
equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
TRIPLE-LOCK ALUMINUM ROUND DUCTWORK (UNINSULATED)

A.
Manufacturers:
Flexmaster Triple Lock Type NITL Flexible Aluminum Air Duct.
Hercules
Omni-Air
Thermaire
2.12
INSULATED TRIPLE LOCK ALUMINUM ROUND DUCTWORK

A.
Manufacturers:
Flexmaster Triple Lock Type TL-M Alum. Duct Insulated.
Hercules
Omni-Air
Thermaire
2.13
INSULATED FLEXIBLE ROUND DUCTWORK

A.
JULY 2012
Manufacturers:
Cleva-Flex
Flexmaster Type 5
Flexmaster Type 8M
Genflex
Hercules
H.K. Porter Co.
Omni-Air
Owens-Corning
Schuller
Thermaflex
Wiremold
UCB STANDARDS
15900-9
2.14
2.15
FLEXIBLE DUCT FAN CONNECTIONS

A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and

as indicated.
B.
UL Listed fire-resistant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,
minimum density 30 oz. per sq. yd, crimped into metal edging strip.
ACCESS DOOR HARDWARE

A.
Manufacturers:
Duro Dyne
Ventfabrics Ventlok Series
2.16
2.17
DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as

indicated.
B.
Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
TRANSITIONS
Diverging transitions shall not exceed 15 per side. Converging transitions shall not
exceed 30 per side.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Specify: All flexible ductwork shall be secured to collars with metal bands.
Plastic bands are not allowed. Length shall not exceed 6 feet, and shall be
supported at least every 3 feet.
B.
In general, for project specifications, remove Design Requirements

subparagraph A in Part 1, paragraph 1.03, System Description of this Design
Guide and use list to expand on specific requirements for the specific project.
TESTING
Specify the following:
A.
Fire and smoke dampers shall be tested under the supervision and approval of the
University's testing staff.
B.
Fire dampers shall be activated and reset under the supervision of the University's
representative.

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15900-10
SECTION 15930
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Variable Air Volume Terminal Units.
5. Section 15936 - Air Inlets and Outlets.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA).
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. VAV Systems in General:
a. Variable volume air distribution systems should be used to vary the air flow rates
as the cooling loads vary rather than falsely loading the system with reheat or
mixing at the terminal units.
b. By having the heating system independent of the cooling system, between-season
change-over cycle problems are minimized and economies of operation can be
obtained by shutting off the air cooling system during unoccupied hours.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15930-1
c. A simple system design using zoned perimeter baseboard to fin-tube radiation

(BBR) offset the transmission heat loss through the walls and glass or other
exposed components and a separate VAV cooling system to balance the heat gain
from solar, lights, equipment and people is preferred, with each VAV zone
interlocked with the corresponding BBR.
d. Since there are several types of VAV Systems, manufacturers, and proprietary
features, the Design Engineer shall review his proposed design and qualify
manufacturers with the University in a preliminary submittal for approval before
finalizing design.
e. Proposed VAV Cooling System should include the following features:
i.
ii.
A 100 percent outside air economy cycle.

Maintenance or service requirements in the occupied space should be
minimal.
iii. All air filtering requirements should be accomplished in the central
station equipment.
iv. The amount of air balance required to make the system operate should
be minimal.
v. Space air outlets should be aspirating types to prevent dumping of air
into occupied spaces at minimal volumes.
vi. Design for flexibility to revise zoning with only minimal changes in
ductwork and controls.
vii. Specify control provisions to open units to full ventilation volume if
required for life safety smoke control.
viii. Provisions should be made to always provide at least the required
minimum outside air (ventilation air) for an occupied space, even when
the supply air flow rates are reduced because of decreased cooling load.
2. VAV Terminal Units:
a. Show terminal unit size and design air flow rate setting on each terminal unit on
the Drawings.
b. Units to include damper control section and sound attenuation section as a
complete factory assembled unit. Specify damper control outside of units.
Specify factory-installed Kreuter reset volume controller.
c. Insulation lining in accordance with NFPA Standard 90A requirements.
d. Units capable of handling minimum 5 inches static pressure.
e. Units independent of pressure variations and capable of operating satisfactorily
throughout their range, from minimum to maximum air flow.
f. Volume control calibrated to identify air volume in increments of percent of
maximum air flow.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15930-2
g. Specify that terminal unit performance and sound rating shall be tested and rated
in accordance with ARI 880 Industry Standard for Air Terminals and shall bear
the ARI certification seal.
h. Specify that VAV unit shall be in full compliance with UL 181 and NFPA 90A
and shall meet bacteriological standards of ASTM C665.
i. If VAV unit is to be used in a healthcare, clean room, or lab facility, specify a
special VAV unit liner as required to minimize the amount of liner erosion.
Follow healthcare facility standards as required.
j. VAV units shall be selected so required RC sound levels in various spaces are not
exceeded at 1.5 w.g. inlet pressure. Both unit-casing radiated sound levels (as
attenuated by ceilings when present) and discharge sound levels shall be
considered in terminal unit selection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS
A. Manufacturer:
Anemostat
Carnes
Carrier
Environmental Technologies
Krueger
Metal-Aire
Tempmaster
Titus
Tuttle and Baily
Trane
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION

on specific requirements of installation.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15930-3
SECTION 15936
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Diffusers.
2. Registers.
3. Grilles.
4. Louvers.
5. Lowered Penthouses.
6. Gravity Roof Hoods.
7. Gravity Roof Ventilators.
8. Goosenecks.
4. Section 15930 - Air Terminal Units.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.
B. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 500 - Test Method for Louvers,
Dampers and Shutters.
C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
70 - Methods of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15936-1
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. General:
a. Provisions for balancing air flow from outlets or into inlets shall be included in
the specifications as well as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Air quantities and distribution pattern shall be shown on the Drawings.
c. Identify outlet and inlet types on Drawings using the following basic code
recognitions:
Supply (S)
Exhaust (E)
Return (R)
Transfer (T)
Diffuser (D) for air pattern control (include damper for volume control).
Grille (G) no volume control, inlet or outlet.
d. When more than one type is used, add a schedule item reference number after the
code name, i.e. SD-1, ER-2,etc.
e. Specify balancing dampers and indicate on Drawings on duct take-off to
diffusers, grilles and register, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part
of the diffuser, grille or register assembly to minimize acoustical problems in
balancing air flow.
2. Intakes and Relief:
a. Air-intake louvers shall have birdscreen on outside and relief/exhaust louvers on
inside (with access to clean them).
b. It is important to locate unprotected vertical plane intake louvers on the South or
East side of buildings, opposite prevailing winds, unless other orientations are the
only solutions.
c. Specify storm type louvers and provide sufficient distance or directional change
of fresh air between the outside air intake louver and the dampers and the filters
to eliminate or at least minimize snow and rain being carried to the air filters. Do
not exceed manufacturers recommended inlet velocities to also help minimize
snow and rain.
d. Roof type intakes or relief are to be minimized and are only acceptable where no
other solution is possible.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15936-2
Where the design solution requires roof type intakes or reliefs, design and specify
hoods with hinges and quick-release fasteners for ease of access to dampers.
e. Use ingenuity in the preliminary design stages to achieve pleasing Architectural
solutions to avoid any unnecessary roof openings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment
Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CEILING DIFFUSERS
Notes:
We have a strong preference for louver-faced diffusers. In offices and other small
spaces, we want diffusers with adjustable louvers on the face, such as Metal-Aire DCD
9000 or equivalent by others
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
Carnes
Krueger
Metal-Aire
Price
Titus
Tuttle-Bailey
B. Round Ceiling Diffusers (SD-).
C. Rectangular Louvered Ceiling Diffuser (SD-).
D. Perforated-Face Ceiling Diffuser (SD-)
Note: Do not use unless approved by the University Engineer.
2.02
CEILING REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Note: These are generally devices with built-in dampers, which can cause a fair amount of
noise. They should be used only where strictly necessary
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
Carnes
Krueger
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15936-3
Metal-Aire
Price
Titus
Tuttle-Bailey
B. Ceiling Supply Registers and Grilles (Adjustable Curved Blades) (SR-) (SG-)
C. Ceiling Exhaust and Return Registers and Grilles (Louvered Rectangular) (ER-) (RR-)
(EG-) (RG-).
D. Ceiling Exhaust and Return Registers and Grilles (Perforated Face) (ER-) (RR-) (EG-)
(RG-).
E. Ceiling Grid Core Exhaust and Return Registers and Grilles (Egg Crate) (ER-) (RR-)
(EG-) (RG-).
2.03 CEILING SLOT DIFFUSERS (SD-)
Note: We have found these to be unreliable in VAV systems due to their tendency to dump,
so we prefer not having them
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
Carnes
Carrier
Donco
Krueger
Metal-Aire
Price
Tempmaster
Titus
2.04
CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES (EG-) (RG-)
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
Carnes
Krueger
Metal-Aire
Price
Titus
2.05
WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS AND GRILLES (SR-) (SG-)
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15936-4
Carnes
Krueger
Metal-Aire
Price
Titus
2.06 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS AND GRILLES (ER-) (RR-) (EG-)
(RG-)
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
Carnes
Krueger
Metal-Aire
Price
Titus
2.07
LINEAR WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS AND GRILLES (SR-) (SG-)
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
Carnes
Metal-Aire
Krueger
Price
Titus
2.08
LINEAR FLOOR SUPPLY REGISTERS AND GRILLES (SR-) (SG-)
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
Carnes
Krueger
Metal-Aire
Price
Titus
2.09
FLOOR SUPPLY REGISTER AND GRILLES (SR-) (SG-)

(Heavy duty service only)
A. Manufacturers:
Anemostat
Krueger
Metal-Aire
Price
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15936-5
Titus
2.10
LOUVERS
A. Manufacturers:
Airstream
American Warming/Air Balance
Arrow
C.E.Sparrow
Dowco
Greenheck
Krueger
Penn Ventilator
Ruskin
2.11
LOUVERED PENTHOUSES
A. Manufacturers:
American Warming
Arrow
Dowco
Greenheck
Penn Ventilator
Ruskin
2.12
GRAVITY ROOF HOODS
A. Manufacturers:
Acme
C.E. Sparrow
Carnes
Greenheck
Loren Cook
Mallory
Penn Ventilator
B. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards.
2.13
GRAVITY ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15936-6
Acme
Carnes
Greenheck
Loren Cook
Mallory
Penn Ventilator
2.14
GOOSENECKS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Provide

removable screen in discharge. Discharge to be cut back 45. Opening of discharge shall
not face north or west.
2.15
RETURN-AIR GRILLES
A. Perforated-face R.A. grilles are preferred for ceiling applications. Any other type of
grille requires UCB approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION

JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15936-7
SECTION 15950
{23 0900}
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) GENERAL
(THIS SECTION MUST BE REVIEWED PRIOR TO EACH PROJECT)
PART I.
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
General Requirements
B.
Description of Work
C.
Quality Assurance
D.
System Architecture
E.
Distributed Processing Units/Quantity and Location
F.
Demolition and Reuse of Existing Materials and Equipment
G.
Sequence of Work
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section {15010} -Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B.
Section 15951 Building Automation System (BAS) Basic Materials, Interface

Devices, and Sensors
C.
Section 23 0913 Building Automation System (BAS) Basic Materials,

Interface Devices, and Sensors
D.
Section 15952 - BAS Operator Interfaces
E.
Section 23 0902 - BAS Operator Interfaces
F.
Section 15953 - BAS Field Panels
G.
Section 23 0903 - BAS Field Panels
H.
Section 15954 - BAS Communication Devices
I.
Section 23 0904 - BAS Communication Devices
J.
Section 15955 - BAS Software and Programming
K.
Section 23 0905 - BAS Software and Programming
L.
Section 15958 - Sequences of Operation
M.
Section 23 0993 - Sequences of Operation
N.
Section 15959 - BAS Commissioning
O.
Section 23 0801 - BAS Commissioning
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
JULY 2012
Contractor shall furnish and install a direct digital control and building
automation system (BAS). The new BAS shall utilize electronic sensing,
UCB STANDARDS
15950-1
microprocessor-based digital control, and electronic actuation of dampers and

valves to perform control sequences and functions specified. Refer also to control
drawings, sequences of operation, and point lists.
1.04
B.
The distributed digital control (DDC) and building automation system (BAS)
defined in this specification shall interface with the University private VLAN, and
shall utilize open communications. Towards this end, contractor shall provide a
router/gateway(s) as necessary to facilitate all specified objects and services and
have them configured/mapped as applicable.
C.
The systems to be controlled under work of this section basically comprise

{describe the scope of the project.} The HVAC systems being controlled are
{describe the configuration of and the type of mechanical systems included in
the project}. This Section defines the manner and method by which these controls
function.
D.
All control work shall be installed by the BAS contractor, unless specified
otherwise. Certain mechanical systems such as chillers, boilers, cooling towers,
and energy recovery units are equipped with manufacturer furnished controls. All
labor, materials, equipment, software, and services necessary for the installation
of a complete integrated system shall be provided.
APPLICATION OF OPEN PROTOCOLS

The following requirement applies only at the direction of UCB and must be carefully
edited to achieve the Interoperability Level applicable to this project.
A.
1.05
Subject to the detailed requirements provided throughout the specifications, the

BAS and digital control and communications components installed, as work of
this contract shall be an integrated distributed processing system utilizing
BACnet. System components shall communicate using native BACnet in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 135 and current addenda and annexes,
including all workstations, all building controllers, and all application specific
controllers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The following requirement is relative to the demonstrated history of the product line
they are proposing. Edit to suit project.
A.
Product Line Demonstrated History: The product line being proposed for the
project must have an installed history of demonstrated satisfactory operation for a
length of [5] years since date of final completion in at least [20] installations of
comparative size and complexity. Documentation of this requirement with
references shall be available upon request.
The following requirement relates to the actual installing contractor.

B.
JULY 2012
Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in control system

installations for not less than [5] years. Firms with experience in DDC
installation projects with point counts equal to this project and systems of the
same complexity as those of this project. Experience starts with awarded Final
UCB STANDARDS
15950-2
Completion of previous projects. Documentation of this requirement with

references shall be available upon request.
C.
Installer's Experience with Proposed Product Line: Firms shall have

specialized in and be experienced with the installation of the proposed product
line for not less than [three] years from date of final completion on at least [5]
projects of similar size and complexity. Submittals shall document this
experience with references.
The following requirements relate to the key individuals who will be working on the
project.
D.
Installers Field Coordinator and Sequence Programmer Qualifications:

Individual(s) shall specialize in and be experienced with control system
installation for not less than [5] years. Proposed field coordinator shall have
experience with the installation of the proposed product line for not less than [2]
projects of similar [size] [and complexity]. Installer shall submit the names of the
proposed individual and at least one alternate for each duty. Submittals shall
document this experience with references. {Edit as applicable} The proposed
individuals must show proof of the following training:
1. Product Line Training: Individuals overseeing the installation and
configuration of the proposed product line must provide evidence of the most
advanced training offered by the Manufacturer on that product line for
installation and configuration.
2. Programming Training: Individuals involved with programming the sitespecific sequences shall provide evidence of the most advanced programming
training offered by the vendor of the programming application offered by the
Manufacturer.
E.
Installers Service Qualifications: The installer must be experienced in control

system operation, maintenance and service. Installer must document a minimum
[5] year history of servicing installations of similar size and complexity. Installer
must also document at least a one year history of servicing the proposed product
line.
F.
Installers Response Time and Proximity

1. Installer must maintain a fully capable service facility within a [45 mile]
radius of the project site. Service facility shall manage the emergency service
dispatches and maintain the inventory of spare parts.
2. Emergency response times are listed below in this section. Installer must
demonstrate the ability to meet the response times.
G.
Installers Quality Assurance Plan

1. Installer must provide a description of their quality assurance operations from
contract award through final delivery. The description shall include
organizational responsibilities for each department represented within the
execution of this document from installers to engineers, service technicians
and management.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-3
1.06
CODES AND STANDARDS

A.
The following codes and standard intended to apply as applicable as not all will
apply to all installations
B.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE)
1. ASHRAE 135-2004: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Networks. American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2004 including
Addendums A through E
C.
Electronics Industries Alliance

1. EIA-709.1-B-2002: Control Network Protocol Specification
2. EIA-709.3-99: Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel Specification
3. EIA-232: Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data CircuitTerminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange.
4. EIA-458: Standard Optical Fiber Material Classes and Preferred Sizes
5. EIA-485: Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generator and Receivers
for use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems.
6. EIA-472: General and Sectional Specifications for Fiber Optic Cable
7. EIA-475: Generic and Sectional Specifications for Fiber Optic Connectors
and all Sectional Specifications
8. EIA-573: Generic and Sectional Specifications for Field Portable Polishing
Device for Preparation Optical Fiber and all Sectional Specifications
9. EIA-590: Standard for Physical Location and Protection of Below-Ground
Fiber Optic Cable Plant and all Sectional Specifications
D.
Underwriters Laboratories
1. UL 916: Energy Management Systems.
The following rating is required only for devices used for smoke control purposes. If
these are not intended, delete.
2. UUKL 864: UL Supervised Smoke Control
E.
NEMA Compliance
1. NEMA 250: Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
2. NEMA ICS 1: General Standards for Industrial Controls.
F.
NFPA Compliance
1. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences.
2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
G.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

1. IEEE 142: Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems
2. IEEE 802.3: CSMA/CD (Ethernet Based) LAN
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-4
3.
IEEE 802.4: Token Bus Working Group (ARCNET Based) LAN
Edit the definitions below to apply for a given project.

1.07
DEFINITIONS
A.
Accuracy: As stated in Section 15951 {23 0913}, accuracy shall include

combined effects of nonlinearity, non-repeatability and hysteresis.
B.
Advanced Application Controller (AAC): A device with limited resources

relative to the Building Controller (BC). It may support a level of programming
and may also be intended for application specific applications.
C.
Application Protocol Data Unit (APDU): A unit of data specified in an

application protocol and consisting of application protocol control information
and possible application user data (ISO 9545).
D.
Application Specific Controller (ASC): A device with limited resources relative

to the Advanced Application Controller (AAC). It may support a level of
programming and may also be intended for application-specific applications. .
E.
BACnet/BACnet Standard: BACnet communication requirements as defined by

ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2004.
F.
BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB): A BIBB defines a small

portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task.
BIBBS are combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device in
a specification.
G.
Binding: In the general sense, binding refers to the associations or mappings of

the sources network variable and their intended opr required destinations.
H.
Building Automation System (BAS): The entire integrated management and

control system
I.
Building Controller (BC): A fully programmable device capable of carrying out

a number of tasks including control and monitoring via direct digital control
(DDC) of specific systems, acting as a communications router between the LAN
backbone and sub-LANs, and data storage for trend information, time schedules,
and alarm data.
J.
Change of Value (COV): An event that occurs when a measured or calculated

analog value changes by a predefined amount (ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2004).
K.
Client: A device that is the requestor of services from a server. A client device
makes requests of and receives responses from a server device.
L.
Continuous Monitoring: A sampling and recording of a variable based on time

or change of state (e.g. trending an analog value, monitoring a binary change of
state).
M.
Controller or Control Unit (CU): Intelligent stand-alone control panel.

Controller is a generic reference and shall include BCs, AACs, and ASCs as
appropriate.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-5
N.
Control Systems Server (CSS): This shall be a computer (or computers) that
maintains the systems configuration and programming database. This may double
as an operator workstation.
O.
Direct Digital Control (DDC): Microprocessor-based control including

Analog/Digital conversion and program logic
P.
Functional Profile: A collection of variables required to define a the key

parameters for a standard application. As this applies to the HVAC industry, this
would include applications like VAV terminal, fan coil units, and the like.
Q.
Facility Maintenance Information Technology (FMIT): Reference to the

facilitys Information Technology department, responsible for providing and
maintaining all OI hardware.
R.
Gateway (GTWY): A device, which contains two or more dissimilar

networks/protocols, permitting information exchange between them
(ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2004).
S.
Hand Held Device (HHD): Manufacturers microprocessor based device for

direct connection to a Controller.
T.
LAN Interface Device (LANID): Device or function used to facilitate

communication and sharing of data throughout the BAS
U.
Local Area Network (LAN): General term for a network segment within the
architecture. Various types and functions of LANs are defined herein.
V.
Local Supervisory LAN: Ethernet-based LAN connecting Primary Controller

LANs with each other and OWSs and CSSs. See System Architecture below.
This LAN can function as the Primary Controlling LAN.
W.
Master-Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP): Data link protocol as defined by the

BACnet standard. (ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2004).
X.
Open Database Connectivity (ODBC): An open standard applicationprogramming interface (API) for accessing a database developed. ODBC
compliant systems make it possible to access any data from any application,
regardless of which database management system (DBMS) is handling the data.
Y.
Operator Interface (OI): A device used by the operator to manage the BAS
including OWSs, POTs, and HHDs.
Z.
Operator Workstation (OWS): The users interface with the BAS system. As
the BAS network devices are stand-alone, the OWS is not required for
communications to occur.
AA.
Point-to-Point (PTP): Serial communication as defined in the BACnet standard.
BB.
Portable Operators Terminal (POT): Laptop PC used both for direct

connection to a controller and for remote dial up connection.
CC.
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS): A written

document, created by the manufacturer of a device, which identifies the particular
options specified by BACnet that are implemented in the device (ASHRAE/ANSI
135-2004).
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-6
1.08
DD.
Primary Controlling LAN: High speed, peer-to-peer controller LAN connecting

BCs and optionally AACs and ASCs. Refer to System Architecture below.
EE.
Router: A device that connects two or more networks at the network layer.
FF.
Secondary Controlling LAN: LAN connecting AACs and ASCs, generally

lower speed and less reliable than the Primary Controlling LAN. Refer to System
Architecture below.
GG.
Server : A device that is a provider of services to a client. A client device makes

requests of and receives responses from a server device.
HH.
SQL: Standardized Query Language, a standardized means for requesting

information from a database.
II.
Smart Device: A control I/O device such as a sensor or actuator that can directly
communicate with the controller network to which it is connected. This differs
from an ASC in that it typically deals only with one variable.
JJ.
University of Colorado at Boulder (UCB): Owner of the facility.
KK.
UCB Ethernet: Reference to the facilitys Information Technology network,

used for normal business-related e-mail and Internet communication. Internetbased network connecting multiple facilities with a central data warehouse and
server, accessible via standard web-browser.
LL.
XML (Extensible Markup Language): A specification developed by the World

Wide Web Consortium. XML is a pared-down version of SGML, designed
especially for Web documents. It allows designers to create their own customized
tags, enabling the definition, transmission, validation, and interpretation of data
between applications and between organizations.
FUNCTIONAL INTENT
A.
1.09
Throughout Sections 15950 {23 0900} through 15955 {23 0905}, the Sequences of
Operation, and Section 15959 {23 0801} detailed requirements are specified, some
of which indicate a means, method or configuration acceptable to meet that
requirement. Contractor may submit products that utilize alternate means,
methods, and configurations that meet the functional intent. However these will
only be allowed with prior approval by the University.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section {Insert Appropriate Section Number}.
B.
Electronic Submittals: Control submittals and O&M information shall be

provided in Adobe PDF or Microsoft Word format. Preferably documents will be
converted from their native electronic format directly to a preferred format. Any
documents scanned as images must be converted to a searchable text format using
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) and reduced in size prior to submission.
C.
Qualifications: Manufacturer, Installer, and Key personnel qualifications as

indicated for the appropriate item above. Include QA/QC plan for all phases
(design, install, Cx, warranty) along with documentation of industry standard
QA/QC practices followed.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-7
D.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control
device, panel, and accessory furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities,
performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include
installation and start-up instructions.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, including a
complete drawing for each air handling unit, system, pump, device, etc. with all
point descriptors, addresses and point names indicated. Each shop drawing shall
contain the following information:
Designer shall provide general panel locations on bid set mechanical floor plan documents.
1. System Architecture and System Layout:
a) One-line diagram indicating schematic locations of all control units,
workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate network
number, device ID, drawing reference number, and controller type for
each control unit. All optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors,
junctions, ground locations etc. shall be located on the diagram.
{Edit the following for the level of detail required, particularly with
regard to open protocol application. (i.e. Campus wide
implementations of BACnet require higher levels of coordination)}
Indicate device instance and MAC address for each CU. Indicate media,
protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN.
b) Provide floor plans on Adobe PDF software locating all control units,
LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Include all WAN and LAN
communication wiring routing, power wiring, power originating sources,
and low voltage power wiring. Wiring routing as-built conditions shall
be maintained accurately throughout the construction period and the
drawing shall be updated to accurately reflect accurate, actual installed
conditions.
{Edit the following for the level of detail required, particularly with
regard to open protocol application. (i.e. Campus wide
implementations of BACnet require higher levels of coordination)}
Indicate network number, device ID, address, device instance, MAC
address, drawing reference number, and controller type for each control
unit. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN. All
optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors, junctions, ground
locations etc. shall be located on the floor plans.
2. Schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils,
dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment and control devices.
Include verbal description of sequence of operation.
3. All physical points on the schematic flow diagram shall be indicated with
names, descriptors, and point addresses identified as listed in the point
summary table.
4. With each schematic, provide a point summary table listing building number
and abbreviation, system type, equipment type, full point name, point
description, Ethernet backbone network number, network number, device ID,
object ID (object type, instance number). See Section 15955 {23 0905} - Part
III for additional requirements.
E.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-8
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.

Label each input and output with the appropriate range.
Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic. Indicate device
identification to match schematic and actual field labeling, quantity, actual
product ordering number, manufacturer, description, size, voltage range,
pressure range, temperature range, etc. as applicable.
Provide a Control Valve Schedule listing valve and actuator information
including: size, Cv, design flow, design pressure drop, manufacturer, model
number, close off rating, control signal, etc. Indicate normal positions of
spring return valves.
Provide a Control Damper Schedule listing damper and actuator information
including: size, material, blade arrangement, manufacturer, model number,
control signal, etc. Indicate normal positions of spring return dampers.
Indicate all required electrical wiring. Electrical wiring diagrams shall
include both ladder logic type diagram for motor starter, control, and safety
circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with
all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel
termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on
system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring, which
are existing, factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
Provide details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and
labeling shown in plan or elevation indicating the installed locations. Provide
panel layout drawing including power supply, control unit(s) and wiring
terminals.
Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.
Each sheet shall have a title indicating the type of information included and
the HVAC system controlled.
Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.
Provide a symbol legend and list of abbreviations.
Include the following whenever third party open applications will be accessing the control
system.
F.
Open Protocol Information

1. BACnet Systems:
a) BACnet object description, object ID, and device ID, for each I/O point.
b) Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, or
enumerations used detailing their structure, data types, and any
associated lists of enumerated values.
c) Submit PICS indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of
each controller.
G.
Control Logic Documentation

1. Submit control logic program listings to document the control software of all
control units.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-9
2.
3.
4.
1.10
Include written description of each control sequence.

Include test plan for each unique control program.
Include control response, settings, setpoints, throttling ranges, gains, reset
schedules, adjustable parameters and limits.
H.
Operation and Maintenance Materials:

1. Submit documents under provisions of Section {Insert Appropriate Section
Number}. Documents shall be provided electronically as described above
(1.10/B).
2. Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control
device, control unit, and accessory.
3. Include all submittals (product data, shop drawings, control logic
documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides or
manuals, maintenance instructions and spare parts lists) in maintenance
manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. Only include
sections for equipment and software used on this project. Do not provide
entire catalog of product data with extraneous information.
4. Submit BAS Users Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and
for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripherals.
5. Submit BAS advanced Programming Manuals for each controller type and
for all workstation software.
I.
Controls contractor shall provide University with all product line technical
manuals and technical bulletins, to include new and upgraded products, by the
same distribution channel as to dealers or branches throughout the warranty
period of the project.
J.
Manufacturers Certificates: For all listed and/or labeled products, provide

certificate of conformance.
K.
Product Warranty Certificates: UCB shall approve all warranty start dates.
Coordinate and submit manufacturers product warranty certificates covering the
hardware provided once approved.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A.
Submit documents under provisions of Section {Insert Appropriate Section

Number}. Documentation shall be provided electronically as defined in
section1.10/B above.
B.
Record copies of product data and control shop drawings updated to reflect the
final installed condition.
C.
Record copies of approved control logic programming and database on CD/DVD.

Accurately record actual setpoints and settings of controls, final sequence of
operation, including changes to programs made after submission and approval of
shop drawings and including changes to programs made during specified testing.
D.
Record copies of approved project specific graphic software on CD/DVD.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-10
1.11
E.
Record copies shall include individual floor plans with controller locations with
all interconnecting wiring routing including space sensors, LAN wiring, power
wiring, low voltage power wiring.
F.
Provide record riser diagram showing the location of all controllers.
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A.
The system provided shall incorporate hardware resources sufficient to meet the
functional requirements of these Specifications. The Contractor shall include all
items not specifically itemized in these Specifications that are necessary to
implement, maintain, and operate the system in compliance with the functional
intent of these Specifications.
B.
The system shall be configured as a distributed processing network(s) capable of

expansion as specified below.
C.
The system architecture shall consist of a Ethernet-based, wide area network

(WAN), a single Local Area Network (LAN) or multi-leveled LANs that support
BCs, AACs, ASCs, Operator Workstations (OWS), Smart Devices (SD), and
Remote Communication Devices (RCDs) as applicable. The following indicates
a functional description of the BAS structure.
1. UC WAN: Internet-based network connecting multiple facilities with a
central data warehouse and server, accessible via standard web-browser.
This is an existing infrastructure and contractor is not required to configure
any components of this WAN. Refer to Section 15954 {23 0904} for
requirements:
2. Local Supervisory LAN: The Local Supervisory LAN shall be an Ethernetbased, 100 Mbps LAN connecting Primary Control LANs and OWSs. The
LAN serves as the inter-BC gateway and OWS-to-BC gateway and
communications path. Contractor shall provide this as a dedicated LAN for
the control system. LAN shall be IEEE 802.3 Ethernet over Fiber or
Category 5 cable with switches and routers that support 100 Mbps
throughput. Power-line carrier communication shall not be acceptable for
communications.
3.
4.
JULY 2012
The following specifies a typical BACnet system

The higher level layers of this network shall be BACnet as described below:
a) BACnet Supervisory LAN: BACnet/IP as defined in Addendum A
(Annex J) of the BACnet standard, and shall share a common network
number for the Ethernet backbone, as defined in BACnet. Point/Object
naming conventions are specified in 15955 {23 0905} - Part III.
Primary Controller LAN (Primary LAN): High-speed, peer-to-peer
communicating LAN used to connect AACs, ASCs and Building Controllers
(BCs) and communicate exclusively control information. Acceptable
technologies include:
a) Ethernet (IEEE802.3)
Secondary Controller LAN (Secondary LAN): Network used to connect
AACs, ASCs or SDs. These can be Master Slave/ Token Passing or polling,
UCB STANDARDS
15950-11
in addition to those allowed for Primary Controller LANs. Network speed

vs. the number of controllers on the LAN shall be dictated by the response
time and trending requirements.
D.
Dynamic Data Access: Any data throughout any level of the network shall be
available to and accessible by all other devices, Controllers and OWS, whether
directly connected or connected remotely.
Remote Data Access: Coordinate remote access connectivity with FMIT

(Facilities Management Information Technology) department. The system shall
support the following methods of remote access to the building data.
UCB uses Ethernet for campus wide BAS access. Special cases requiring dial-up connectivity
will be addressed as needed by UCB.
1. Browser-based access: A remote user using a standard browser shall be able
access all control system facilities and graphics with proper password. UC
shall provide the required internet connection. The following paradigms are
acceptable for browser-based access:
a) Native Internet-based user interfaces (HTML, Java, XML, etc.) that do
not require a plug-in. The user interface must be compatible with the
most current stable version of the supporting software (Java, etc.)
without requiring the user to downgrade to a lesser version.
E.
F.
The communication speed between the controllers, LAN interface devices, and
operator interface devices shall be sufficient to ensure fast system response time
under any loading condition. In no case shall delay times between an event,
request, or command initiation and its completion be greater than those listed
herein. Contractor shall reconfigure LAN as necessary to accomplish these
performance requirements. Generally requirements do not apply when a remote
connection must be established via modem:
1. 5 seconds between a Level 1 (critical) alarm occurrence and enunciation at
operator workstation.
2. 10 seconds between a Level 2 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator
workstation.
3. 20 seconds between and a Level 3-5 alarm occurrence and enunciation at
operator workstation.
4. 10 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to
change a setpoint and the subsequent change in the controller.
5. 5 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to
start/stop a device and the subsequent command to be received at the
controller.
6. 10 seconds between a change of value or state of an input and it being
updated on the operator interface.
7. 10 seconds between an operator selection of a graphic and it completely
painting the screen and updating at least 10 points.
G.
Control Systems Server (CSS): This shall be a computer (or computers) that
maintain the systems configuration and programming database. This server may
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-12
operate virtually under the supervision of FMIT. It shall hold the backup files of
the information downloaded into the individual controllers and as such support
uploading and downloading that information directly to/from the controllers. It
shall also act as a control information server to non-control system based
programs. It shall allow secure multiple-access to the control information. Refer
to Section 15952 {23 0902} - BAS Operator Interfaces for its requirements.
1.12
H.
The Operator Interface shall provide for overall system supervision, graphical
user interface, management report generation, alarm annunciation, and remote
monitoring. Refer to Section 15952 {23 0902} BAS Operator Interfaces.
I.
The BCs, AACs, ASCs, and SDs shall monitor, control, and provide the field
interface for all points specified. Each BC, AAC, or ASC shall be capable of
performing all specified energy management functions, and all DDC functions,
independent of other BCs, AACs, or ASCs and operator interface devices as more
fully specified in Section 15953 {23 0903} - BAS Field Panels.
J.
Interruptions or fault at any point on any Primary Controller LAN shall not
interrupt communications between other nodes on the network. If a LAN is
severed, two separate networks shall be formed and communications within each
network shall continue uninterrupted.
K.
All line drivers, signal boosters, and signal conditioners etc. shall be provided as
necessary for proper data communication.
WARRANTY MAINTENANCE
A.
Contractor shall warrant all products and labor for a period of two years after
Final Acceptance by UCB. Provide unit pricing for additional warranty years at
discretion of UCB
B.
The University reserves the right to make changes to the BAS during the warranty
period. Such changes do not constitute a waiver of warranty. The Contractor
shall warrant parts and installation work regardless of any such changes made by
the University, unless the Contractor provides clear and convincing evidence that
a specific problem is the result of such changes to the BAS. Any disagreement
between the University and the Contractor on such matters shall be subject to
resolution through the contract Disputes clause.
C.
At no cost to the University, during the warranty period, the Contractor shall
provide maintenance services for software and hardware components as specified
below:
1. Maintenance services shall be provided for all devices and hardware
specified in sections 15951 {23 0913} through 15954 {23 0904}. Service all
equipment per the manufacturers recommendations. All devices shall be
calibrated within the last month of the warranty period.
2. Emergency Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware
component or failure of any control programming that would result in
property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and repaired
following notification by the University to the Contractor.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-13
a)
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.13
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
1.14
Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided

within one (1) hour of the University's initial telephone request for
service.
b) In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected
through the telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware and
software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall be
dispatched to the University's site within two (2) hours of the
University's initial telephone request for such services, as specified.
Normal Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware
component or failure of any control programming that would not result in
property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and repaired
following telephonic notification by the University to the Contractor.
a) Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided
within two (2) working hours (contractor specified 40 hr per week
normal working period) of the University's initial telephone request for
service.
b) In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected
through the telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware and
software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall be
dispatched to the University's site within three (3) working days of the
University's initial telephone request for such services, as specified.
Telephonic Request for Service: Contractor shall specify a maximum of
three telephone numbers for University to call in the event of a need for
service. At least one of the lines shall be attended at any given time at all
times. Once contacted a technician shall respond to every call within 15
minutes.
Technical Support: Contractor shall provide technical support by telephone
throughout the warranty period.
Preventive maintenance shall be provided throughout the warranty period in
accordance with the hardware component manufacturer's requirements.
Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device.
Maintain cartons during shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent
equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store
equipment and materials inside and protect from construction work and weather.
LISTING AND LABELING

A.
The BAS and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 916)
as an Energy Management System.
The following should only be included when it is applicable, namely when the system is
part of an engineered smoke control system. Smoke control and fire alarm systems
should be segregated from the BAS in any new installations. Modify the applicability
of this listing as appropriate.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-14
B.
JULY 2012
The BAS shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UUKL 864) for supervised
smoke control.
UCB STANDARDS
15950-15
PART II.
2.01
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A.
2.02
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds without imperfections or
blemishes and shall not be damaged in any way. Used equipment shall not be
used in any way for the permanent installation except where drawings or specs
specifically allow existing materials to remain in place.
UNIFORMITY
A.
JULY 2012
To the extent practical, all equipment of the same type serving the same function
shall be identical and from the same manufacturer
UCB STANDARDS
15950-16
PART III.
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
3.02
3.03
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

A.
General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings.
B.
Refer to additional requirements in other sections of this specification.
CONTROL PANELS, CONTROLLER QUANTITY AND LOCATION

A.
Control panels shall consist of one or multiple controllers to meet requirements

of this specification. Control panels shall be wall mounted within mechanical
equipment rooms. In no case shall panels, other than terminal unit controllers,
be located above ceilings. Control panels for lighting control may be located in
the electrical equipment room served by the control panel only with prior
approval from UCB.
B.
Restrictions in applying controllers are specified in Section 15953 {23 0903}:

BAS Field Panels. This Contractor shall extend power to the control panel from
an acceptable power panel. If the control contractor wishes to further distribute
panels to other locations, control contractor is responsible for extending power
to that location also. Furthermore, contractor is responsible for ensuring
adequate locations for the panels that do not interfere with other requirements of
the project and maintain adequate clearance for maintenance access.
C.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide enough controllers to ensure a

completely functioning system, according to the point list and sequence of
operations.
D.
For rooftop AHUs and ERUs, controllers rated for use outside the building
envelope shall be mounted inside the unit casings. If adequate space is not
available for installation of the controllers per the manufacturers
recommendations, they shall be installed in NEMA4X enclosures adjacent to
the unit served. For all other controllers serving rooftop equipment coordinate
with UCB for control panel location, typically within the building envelope
directly below equipment served in an accessible location.
E.
Controllers for terminal equipment:

1. For equipment located in the conditioned space, controllers shall be
mounted inside the unit enclosure. Where sufficient mounting space is not
available inside the unit enclosure, a control panel shall be installed above
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-17
2.
F.
3.04
Laminated control drawings, including system control schematics, sequences of

operation and panel termination drawings, shall be provided in panels for major
pieces of equipment. Terminal unit drawings shall be located in the central
plant equipment panel or mechanical room panel.
SURGE PROTECTION
A.
3.05
the drop ceiling, inside the room, as close to the room space sensor as
possible. Coordinate with UCB to clarify acceptable mounting locations.
For equipment located above the drop ceiling, controllers shall be unit
mounted. (Notify UCB if 36 clearance in front of control panel has not or
cannot be provided.) Provide adhesive backed ceiling labels, affixed to
ceiling grid below all ceiling concealed controllers, affix to ceiling panel
access door for solid ceilings.
The Contractor shall furnish and install any power supply surge protection,
filters, etc. as necessary for proper operation and protection of all BCs,
AAC/ASCS operator interfaces, printers, routers, gateways and other hardware
and interface devices. All equipment shall be capable of handling voltage
variations 10% above or below measured nominal value, with no affect on
hardware, software, communications, and data storage.
DEMOLITION AND REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

{Include and edit if applicable}
A.
Contractor shall assume that existing equipment that specifically is indicated to

be reused is in good condition and is operable. Coordinate with UCB for
clarification of reusable equipment. Contractor, during the course of work, shall
inspect these devices and determine if any devices are in need of replacement or
repair. Contractor shall prepare an itemized list of suggested
repairs/replacement. This repair/replacement will be at the discretion of the
University.
B.
Existing wire, conduit, and control panel cabinets may be reused at the
University Project Engineers discretion, but only if such materials or
equipment comply with the applicable specification for new materials and
equipment. Such materials shall not be reused if visibly damaged or otherwise
unsuitable for the intended service.
C.
Where such materials are reused, the contractors shop drawings shall reflect the
existing wiring designation. If existing labeling is illegible or otherwise does
not comply with the applicable specification for labeling, wiring runs shall be
relabeled in accordance with the requirements specified elsewhere.
D.
Existing pneumatic tubing and tubing conduit located between the existing BAS
panels and the pneumatic operators may be reused as long as such materials
comply with the applicable specification for new materials. Materials shall not
be reused if visibly damaged or otherwise unsuitable for the intended service.
All pneumatic tubing to be reused shall be pressure tested and all leaks shall be
repaired. All reused pneumatic tubing shall be purged with dry air or nitrogen.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-18
E.
The existing pneumatic main air supply system shall be modified as required
and reused to serve existing pneumatic controls that are to remain, and shall be
extended as necessary to serve new pneumatic controls. Where existing
pneumatic controls are removed, main air piping shall be removed back to the
point of connection to the main air supply which remains in use, and shall be
capped or plugged.
F.
Existing valves and dampers and their operators may be reused only when
preapproved by University. Contractor shall lubricate all damper linkages of
dampers being controlled under this project.
G.
Other materials and equipment not specifically mentioned herein may be reused
only if specifically allowed by indications on the drawings and approved by
UCB.
H.
For HVAC systems which are indicated to receive a new BAS, all existing
materials and equipment associated with the existing pneumatic controls and
EMCS shall be removed unless otherwise specified or indicated to remain, or
unless reused in accordance with the above requirements, except for the
following:
1. Conduit and electrical boxes (but not wiring within conduit) may remain in
place if not reused (leave a pull line);
2. Inaccessible pneumatic tubing may remain in place if not reused. Tubing
must be sealed and permanently labeled as Abandoned in Place.
Existing materials and equipment to be removed shall be removed subject to the
requirements in paragraph Sequence of Work. For HVAC systems, which are
not to receive a new DDC BAS, the existing pneumatic control system shall
remain fully functional.
Include and edit the following only when applicable.

3.06
SEQUENCE OF WORK FOR EXISTING SYSTEMS CONVERSION

A.
General: All work involving changeover of control functions from existing

pneumatic control system to the new DDC BAS shall be performed in
accordance with the following sequence in order to minimize the duration of
equipment outages. The following descriptions are intended to indicate the
sequence in which the work shall be performed, not to define fully the scope of
the work.
B.
Install operators terminal, peripherals, graphic software, and LAN prior to

placing any equipment under the control of the new BAS.
C.
Work which requires shutting down a pump motor, fan motor, or chiller shall be
considered a utility shutdown and shall be subject to the restrictions specified in
UCBs power outage protocol UCB Outage Notification Protocol.
D.
The following sequence applies to an individually controlled HVAC subsystem,

such as an air handling unit. Only one such system shall be placed under
manual control (as described below) at any given time.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-19
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.07
Install controllers adjacent to (or within) existing control panel.

Programming shall be complete (except for loading and debugging) prior to
installation. Install all field devices, which do not require interruption of
the existing control system.
Install all conduit, wiring, and pneumatic tubing which does not require
interruption of the existing control system.
Remove existing controls including wiring, conduit, and tubing (except
materials to be reused in accordance with provisions specified elsewhere)
which must be removed to facilitate installation of new BAS materials and
equipment.
Remove existing digital control system points (if applicable). Install and
calibrate remainder of new BAS materials and equipment for this
subsystem. Load controller software. Connect controller(s) to LAN.
Perform all field testing and calibration that does not require connection of
permanent pneumatic outputs.
Remove remaining existing pneumatic and digital control system materials
and equipment (except materials to be reused in accordance with provisions
specified elsewhere). All existing digital controls equipment for those
subsystems that have not yet been converted shall remain intact, on-line,
and fully functional.
Schedule work in University occupied spaces 10 working days in advance
with the Universitys representative. Scheduling shall not be required for
work in equipment rooms, electrical closets, and similar service areas.
CONTROL POWER SOURCE AND SUPPLY

A.
Section 15950 {23 0900} Contractor shall extend all power source wiring
required for operation of all equipment and devices provided under Sections
15950 {23 0900} through 15955 {23 0905} and Sequences of Operation.
General requirements for obtaining power include the following:

1. All control panels shall be served by dedicated power circuits. BC control
panels shall additionally be provided with external UPS power supplies to
meet the requirements for BC power failure operation in Section 15954 {23
0904}. Control panel shall be labeled with electrical panel & circuit source.
2. Where a controller controls multiple systems on varying levels of power
reliability (normal, emergency, and/or interruptible), the controller shall be
powered by the highest level of reliability served.
3. Standalone Functionality: Refer to Section 15953 {23 0903}.
The following applies to repair/renovation work where dedicated power circuits are not
available.
4. Obtain power from a source that feeds the equipment being controlled such
that both the control component and the equipment are powered from the
same panel. Where equipment is powered from a 460V source, obtain
power from the electrically most proximate 120v source fed from a
common origin.
B.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-20
5.
3.08
BAS START UP, COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING

A.
3.09
Where control equipment is located inside a new equipment enclosure,

coordinate with the equipment manufacturer and feed the control with the
same source as the equipment. If the equipments control transformer is
large enough and of the correct voltage to supply the controls it may be
used. If the equipments control transformer is not large enough or of the
correct voltage to supply the controls provide separate transformer
Refer to Section 15959 {23 0801} BAS Commissioning
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A.
Refer to Section 15958 {23 0993} - Sequences of Operation
END OF SECTION 15950 {23 0900}
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15950-21
SECTION 15951
{23 0913}
BAS BASIC MATERIALS, INTERFACE DEVICES, AND SENSORS
Refresh the table of contents after editing section. Unless specifically required for a
repair/renovation project all pneumatic sections will be removed.
PART I.
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
PART 1 - GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 2

SECTION INCLUDES .................................................................................................................................. 2
RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK .......................................................................................................................... 2
WORK BY OTHERS .................................................................................................................................... 3
PART II.
2.00
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
2.09
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.24
2.25
2.26
2.27
2.28
2.29
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................ 3
APPROVED VENDORS ..................................................................................................................................... 3

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 3
CONTROL VALVES .......................................................................................................................................... 5
CONTROL DAMPERS ....................................................................................................................................... 7
ACTUATORS ............................................................................................................................................... 9
GENERAL FIELD DEVICES ..................................................................................................................... 11
TEMPERATURE SENSORS (TS) .............................................................................................................. 12
HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS .................................................................................................................. 13
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (DP) ............................................................................. 13
VALVE BYPASS FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS.............................................................................. 15
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES (DPS) ..................................................................................... 15
PRESSURE SWITCHES (PS) ..................................................................................................................... 15
TRANSDUCERS .............................................................................................................................................. 15
PHASE-VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY MONITOR ....................................................................................................... 15
CURRENT SWITCHES (CS) ............................................................................................................................ 16
CURRENT TRANSDUCER (CT) ............................................................................................................... 17
OUTDOOR AIR STATIC PRESSURE SENSING TIP ............................................................................... 17
CONTINUOUS LEVEL TRANSMITTERS ........................................................................................................... 17
INSERTION TYPE TURBINE METER FOR WATER SERVICE ................................................................................ 18
FLOW METER FOR STEAM: ............................................................................................................................. 18
VORTEX SHEDDING FLOW METER FOR LIQUID AND GAS SERVICE: ................................................................. 18
AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS (AFMS) ........................................................................................ 18
AIR VELOCITY PRESSURE SENSORS (INSERTION TYPE) ................................................................................ 19
CO2 SENSORS/TRANSMITTERS (CO2)........................................................................................................... 19
[PNEUMATIC CONTROL COMPONENTS ............................................................................................. 19
ELECTRIC CONTROL COMPONENTS ................................................................................................... 19
REFRIGERANT MONITOR .............................................................................................................................. 21
[SMOKE CONTROL/FIREMANS OVERRIDE PANEL ........................................................................................ 23
NAMEPLATES ........................................................................................................................................... 23
TESTING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................. 23
PART III.
PART 3 - EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 24
3.01 INSPECTION .............................................................................................................................................. 24

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS ............................................................................................ 24
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15951-1
PART I.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
1.02
[Pneumatic Tubing]
Wiring
Control Valves and Actuators
Control Dampers and Actuators
Control Panels
Sensors
Flow Meter
[Pneumatic Control Components (Gauges, switches, relays, etc.)]
Electric Control Components (Switches, EP Valves, Thermostats, Relays, Smoke
Detectors, etc.)
Transducers
Air Flow Measuring Stations
Current Switches
Nameplates
Testing Equipment
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
1.03
PART 1 - GENERAL
Section {Insert Applicable Specification Section} - Basic Mechanical Requirements

Section 15950 - Building Automation System (BAS) General
Section 23 0900 Building Automation System (BAS) General
Section 15954 - BAS Communications Devices
Section 15955 - BAS Software
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
Refer to Section 15950 {23 0900} for general requirements.

Refer to other Division-15 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and
dampers in mechanical systems; not work of this section.
Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with
requirements of Division-16 sections:
UCB STANDARDS
15951-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.04
WORK BY OTHERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
PART II.
2.00
2.01
Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control
panels.
Interlock wiring between electrically interlocked devices, sensors, and between a
hand or auto position of motor starters as indicated for all mechanical and controls.
Wiring associated with indicating and alarm panels (remote alarm panels) and
connections to their associated field devices.
All other necessary wiring for fully complete and functional control system as
specified.
Control Valves furnished under this section shall be installed under the applicable piping
section under the direction of Section 15951 {23 0913} Contractor who will be fully
responsible for the proper operation of the valve.
Control Dampers furnished under this section shall be installed under the applicable air
distribution or air handling equipment section under the direction of Section 15951 {23
0913} Contractor who will be fully responsible for the proper operation of the damper
Water Pressure Taps, Thermal Wells, Flow Switches, Flow Meters, etc. that will have wet
surfaces, shall be installed under the applicable piping Section under the direction of
Section 15951 {23 0913} Contractor who will be fully responsible for the proper
installation and application.
Controlled Equipment Power Wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 16.
Where control involves 120V control devices controlling 120V equipment, Division 16
Contractor shall extend power wiring to the equipment and control panel. Section 15951
{23 0913} Contractor shall extend it from the equipment to the control device and provide
transformers as necessary to step the voltage down.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Approved Vendors
A.
The approved vendors are:
1.
Andover
2.
Automated Logic (ALC)
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
JULY 2012
General: Provide electronic [pneumatic,] [and] [electric] control products in sizes and
capacities indicated, consisting of valves, dampers, thermostats, clocks, controllers,
sensors, and other components as required for complete installation and reviewed and
approved by UC. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials
and components as published in their product information; designed and constructed as
recommended by manufacturer, and as required for application indicated.
Instrument Pipe and Tube
1. Hydronic and Instruments
a) Connection to Main Piping: Pipe fitter to provide inch minimum size
threadolet, x 2 inch brass nipple, and ball valve for connection to welded
steel piping. Provide tee fitting for other types of piping.
b) Remote Instruments: Adapt from ball valve to specified tubing and extend to
remote instruments. Provide a union or otherwise removable fitting at ball
valve so that connection to main can be cleaned with straight rod. Where
UCB STANDARDS
15951-3
C.
D.
E.
JULY 2012
manifolds with test ports are not provided for instrument, provide tees with
FPT branch with plug for use as test port. Adapt from tubing size to instrument
connection.
c) Line Mounted Instruments: Extend rigid piping from ball valve to
instrument. Do not use close or running thread nipples. Adapt from ball valve
outlet to instrument connection size. Provide a plugged tee if pipe makes 90
degree bend at outlet of valve to allow cleaning of connection to main with
straight rod without removing instrument.
d) Instrument Tubing: Seamless copper tubing, Type K or L, ASTM B 88; with
cast-bronze solder joint fittings, ANSI B1.18; or wrought-copper solder-joint
fittings, ANSI B16.22; or brass compression-type fittings. Solder shall be 95/5
tin antimony, or other suitable lead free composition solder. Tubing OD size
shall be not less than the larger of or the instrument connection size.
e) Rigid Piping for Line Mounted Instruments: Schedule 40 threaded brass,
with threaded brass fittings.
2. Low Pressure Air Instrument Sensing Lines
a) Connections: Use suitable bulkhead type fitting and static sensing tip for static
pressure connections. Adapt tubing to instrument connection.
b) Tubing: Virgin polyethylene non-metallic tubing type FR, ASTM D 2737, and
with flame-retardant harness for multiple tubing. Use compression or push-on
brass fittings.
Communication Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturers
requirements, National Electrical Codes and Division 16 of this specification. All wire
insulation shall be color-coded and labeled for ease of identification.
1. Contractor shall supply all communication wiring between Building Controllers,
Routers, Gateways, AACs, ASCs and local and remote peripherals (e.g., operator
workstations, printers, and modems).
2. Local Supervisory LAN: For any portions of this network required under this
section of the specification, contractor shall use Fiber or Category 5e of standard
TIA/EIA (100/1000BaseT). Network shall be run with no splices and in separate
conduit from any other wiring.
3. Primary and Secondary Controller LANs: Communication wiring shall be
individually 100% shielded pairs per manufacturers recommendations for distances
installed, with overall PVC cover, Class 2, plenum-rated run with no splices and
separate from any other wiring. Shield shall be terminated and wiring shall be
grounded as recommended by BC manufacturer.
Signal Wiring: Contractor shall run all signal wiring in accordance with National Electric
Codes, Division 16 of this Specification and within the allowances of UCBs wiring
guideline. All wire insulation shall be color-coded and labeled for ease of identification.
1. Signal wiring to all field devices, including, but not limited to, all sensors,
transducers, transmitters, switches, etc. shall be per manufacturers requirements.
Signal wiring shall be run with no splices and separate from all other wiring above
thirty (30) volts.
2. Signal wiring shield shall be grounded at controller end only unless otherwise
recommended by the controller manufacturer.
Low Voltage Analog Output Wiring: Contractor shall run all low voltage control wiring
in accordance with National Electric Codes and Division 16 of this Specification. All wire
insulation shall be color-coded and labeled for ease of identification.
UCB STANDARDS
15951-4
1.
F.
2.02
Low voltage control wiring shall be per manufacturers requirements. Low voltage
control wiring shall be run with no splices separate from any wiring above thirty
(30) volts.
Control Panels: Provide control panels with suitable brackets for wall mounting for each
control system. Locate panel adjacent to systems served.
1. Fabricate panels of 16-gage furniture-grade steel, or 6063-T5 extruded aluminum
alloy, totally enclosed on four sides, with hinged door and keyed lock, with
manufacturer's standard shop- painted finish and color.
2. Provide UL-listed cabinets for use with line voltage devices.
3. Control panel shall be completely wired prior to delivery and all electrical
connections made to a labeled terminal strip. Control panel shall have standard
manufacturer's color.
4. All gauges and control components shall be identified by means of nameplates.
5. All control tubing and wiring shall be run neatly and orderly in open slot wiring duct
with cover.
6. Complete wiring and tubing termination drawings shall be mounted in or adjacent to
panel.
CONTROL VALVES
A.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
General: Provide factory fabricated control valves of type, body material and pressure
class indicated. They shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating
service as scheduled, shown on drawings, or as specified in Sequence of Operation.
Close-Off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to
provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings:
1. Water Valves:
a) Two-way - 150% of total system (pump) head.
b) Three-way - 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design
flow or 100% of total system (pump) head.
2. Steam Valves:
a) 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.
Water Valves: [The designer shall provide a schedule for the Controls Contractor
listing the available pressure drop to be used for valve sizing for each control valve in
the project, unless it is a reverse-return system. It is not acceptable to list a single
pressure drop to be used for all valves. For a piping system in which modulated twoway valves are used, for example, the valves nearest the pump will have a larger
available pressure drop than those farther away from the pump.]
1. Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for
design conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating
service, except where stated otherwise.
2. Sizing Criteria:
a) Two-position service: Full port line size.
b) Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop across the valve in a wide-open
position, with full flow through the valve, shall be equal to 50% of the available
pressure differential between the mains, with a minimum of 4 psi.
c) Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop across the valve in a wide-open
position, with full flow through the valve, shall be equal to twice the pressure
drop through the heat exchanger (load), with a 3 psi minimum..
3. Construction:
UCB STANDARDS
15951-5
a)
Valves through globe style serving terminal units, AHU coils and
baseboard radiation shall be:
1)
Honeywell VP-525A or C series:
i. 2-way, N.O., VP-526A OR 2-way, N.O., VP-531A
ii. 3-way, VP-527A
iii. C series, 2-way, N.O. OR preapproved equal (Siemens Powermite599
Series (electric) or Siemens Powermite 599 (pneumatic))
b)
Valves 1" and 1 for sequencing applications may be:

i. Powers VP-658 (2-way, N.O. or N.C.)
ii. Powers VP-658WM (3-way), VP-591 also acceptable
c)
D.
E.
JULY 2012
Valves 1" through 8 globe style for control of differential pressure shall be:
1)
Siemens 200 series electric actuators or pre-approved equal.
d) Valves 2" through 12 butterfly style for control of condenser water
temperature (cooling tower bypass) shall be:
1)
Siemens 2-way butterfly assemblies with Siemens electric actuators or
pre-approved equal.
e) Valves 2" through 12 single butterfly style two-position or modulated
applications shall be:
1)
Johnson VF Series Powers/Siemens BV2W Series with electric actuator
or pre-approved equal.
4. Water valves shall fail as specified in the Control Sequences section.
5. Evaporative Cooler Drain and Fill Valves:
a) Valve normal position shall be as shown on the drawings.
6. For systems with glycol solutions, provide documentation that the valve components
in contact with the fluid are compatible with it.
Water Valves Pressure Independent:
1. Acceptable brands:
a) Delta-P
b) Belimo
c) Danfoss
Steam Valves:
1. Body and trim materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design
conditions and service, except stainless steel seats are required for all applications.
Equal percentage ports for modulating service.
2. Sizing Criteria:
a) Two-position Service - pressure drop 10 to 20% of inlet psig.
b) Modulating Service - 15 psig or less. Pressure drop 80% of inlet psig.
c) Modulating Service - 16 to 50 psig. Pressure drop 50% of inlet psig.
d) Modulating Service - over 50 psig. Pressure drop as scheduled on plans.
3. Steam valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans or as follows:
a) Low pressure heating - normally open.
b) Heating coils in air handlers - normally open.
c) Steam-to-water converters for heating water - normally closed.
d) Steam-to-water converters for domestic hot water - normally closed.
e) High-pressure applications - as scheduled.
4. Acceptable manufacturers as follows:
UCB STANDARDS
15951-6
a)
b)
c)
2.03
Globe style; terminal units, baseboard radiation.

1)
through ; Honeywell VP-525A (N.O., 2-way).
2)
Siebe VB-9223 (N.C., 2-way).
3)
Powers 591/593 (N.O. or N.C. 2-way) series.
Globe style; steam/water heat exchangers, AHU coils.
1)
1 through 2; Powers 591/593 series.
2)
2 through 4; Powers 591/593 series, Fisher Easy-E series, Leslie
Class DLOS-2 .
Smart Steam Valves (for Mains): Keystone valves with Peaktronics DHC-100
series or pre-approved equal.
CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
General: Provide factory fabricated automatic control dampers of sizes, velocity and
pressure classes as required for smooth, stable, and controllable air flow. Provide parallel
or opposed blade dampers as recommended by manufacturers sizing techniques. For
dampers located near fan outlets, provide dampers rated for fan outlet velocity and closeoff pressure, and recommended by damper manufacturer for fan discharge damper service.
Control dampers used for smoke dampers shall comply with UL 555S. Control Dampers
used for fire dampers shall comply with UL 555.
For general isolation and modulating control service in rectangular ducts at velocities not
greater than 1500 fpm (7.62 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 2.5 w.c. (622 Pa):
1. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
2. Frames: Galvanized steel, 16-gauge minimum thickness, welded or riveted with
corner reinforcement.
3. Blades: Stainless steel in lab exhausts and galvanized steel elsewhere, maximum
blade size 8 inches (200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to
minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) shafts with set screws, 16 gauge minimum thickness.
4. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomer, mechanically attached, field replaceable.
5. Jamb Seals: Stainless steel.
6. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze, graphite impregnated nylon
sleeve or other molded synthetic sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings.
7. Linkage: Concealed in frame.
8. Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or graphite impregnated nylon.
9. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 1500 ft./min. (7.62
m/s) and 1 inches wg. (249Pa).
10. Maximum Pressure Differential: 2.5 inches wg. (622 Pa)
11. Temperature Limits: -40 to 200 F (-40 to 93 C).
12. Where opening size is larger than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide, or 72 inches (1829
mm) high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with intermediate frames
appropriate for installation.
greater than 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 6 w.c. (1493 Pa):
UCB STANDARDS
15951-7
3.
Blades: extruded aluminum hollow airfoil shape, maximum blade size 8 inches
(200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 1/2 inch (12.7
mm) shafts, 14 gauge minimum extrusion thickness.
4. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomeric, mechanically attached, field replaceable.
5. Jamb Seals: Stainless steel.
6. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze sleeve, graphite impregnated
nylon sleeve, molded synthetic sleeve, or stainless steel sleeve, with thrust washers
at bearings.
7. Linkage: Concealed in frame.
9. Leakage: Less than 0.1 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 ft./min. (20.3
m/s) and 1 inches wg. (249Pa).
10. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg. (622 Pa)
D.
E.
JULY 2012
mm) high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with appropriately intermediate
frames.
greater than 4000 fpm, differential pressure not greater than 12 w.c.:
3. Blades: Extruded aluminum hollow airfoil shape, maximum blade size 8 inches
(200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 3/4 inch (19
mm) shafts with set screws
4. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or stainless steel, pressed into
frame, with thrust washers at bearings.
5. Linkage: 10-gauge minimum thickness galvanized steel clevis type crank arms,
3/16 x3/4 (4.76 mm x 19 mm) minimum thickness tie rods.
m/s) and 1 inches wg. (249Pa) differential pressure.
mm) high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with appropriately intermediate
frames, and jackshafts.
For general isolation and modulating control service in round ducts up to 40 inches in size
at velocities not greater than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 4
w.c. (994 Pa):
2. Frames: rolled 12 gauge steel strip for sizes 6 inch and smaller, rolled 14 gauge
steel channel for larger sizes, galvanized or aluminum finish.
3. Blades: Steel construction, 12 gauge minimum thickness for dampers less than 18
inches (457 mm) in size, 10 gauge minimum thickness for larger dampers.
4. Blade Seals: Full circumference neoprene.
UCB STANDARDS
15951-8
5.
6.
7.
8.
F.
Shaft: inch (12.7 mm) diameter zinc or cadmium plated steel.

Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or stainless steel, pressed into
Leakage: Less than 0.2 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 ft./min. (20.3
Maximum Pressure Differential: 4 inches wg. (994 Pa)

For general isolation and modulating control service in round ducts up to 60 inches in size
at velocities not greater than 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 6
w.c. (1492 Pa):
2. Frames: rolled 10-gauge steel channel for sizes 48 inch and smaller, rolled 3/16
inch (4.76 mm) thick steel channel for larger sizes, galvanized or aluminum finish.
3. Blades: Steel construction, 10-gauge minimum thickness for dampers not greater
than 48 inches in size, inch (6.35 mm) minimum thickness for larger dampers.
4. Blade stops: inch x inch (12.7 mm x 6.35 mm) full circumference steel bar.
5. Blade Seals: Full circumference neoprene.
6. Shaft: zinc or cadmium plated steel, angle reinforcing as necessary.
7. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or stainless steel, pressed into
2.04
ACTUATORS
A.
B.
JULY 2012
General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with a
single actuator with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action
or 2-position action as specified. Multiple actuators for any single application must be
preapproved by UCB. Select spring-return actuators with manual override to provide
positive shut-off of devices as they are applied. Actuators relying on batteries for any
operation are not acceptable.
Damper Actuators
1. Ambient Operating Temperature Limits: -10 to 150F (-12.2 to 66 C)
2. Two Position Electric Actuators: Low voltage or line voltage with spring return.
a) Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Siemens
2)
Belimo
3)
Honeywell
4)
Johnson Controls
5)
Snyder Electric
6)
Substitutions: or approved equal
3. Electronic Actuators: Provide actuators with spring return for two-position (24v),
0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10Vdc, 4-20 mA, or PWM input (subject to restrictions) as
required. Actuators shall travel full stroke in less than [90] seconds. Actuators shall
be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque and be UL 873 listed.
UCB STANDARDS
15951-9
C.
JULY 2012
Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have positive positioning circuit. Where
two actuators are required in parallel or in sequence provide an auxiliary actuator
driver. Actuators shall have current limiting motor protection. Actuators shall have
manual override where indicated.
a) Close-Off Pressure: Provide the minimum torque required, and spring return
for fail positioning (unless otherwise specifically indicated) sized for required
close-off pressure. Required close-off pressure for two-way water valve
applications shall be the shutoff head of associated pump. Required close-off
rating of steam valve applications shall be design inlet steam pressure plus 50
percent for low pressure steam, and 10 percent for high pressure steam.
Required close-off rating of air damper applications shall be shutoff pressure of
associated fan, plus 10 percent.
b) Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
approved manufacturers are as follows:
1)
Belimo
2)
Honeywell
3)
Invensys
4)
Johnson Controls
5)
Snyder Electric
6)
Substitutions: Must be pre-approved by UCB
Quarter-Turn Actuators (for ball and butterfly valves):
1. Electric
a) Motor: Suitable for 120 or 240 Volt single-phase power supply. Insulation
shall be NEMA Class F or better. Motor shall be rated for 100 percent duty
cycle. Motors shall have inherent overload protection.
b) Gear Train. Motor output shall be directed to a self locking gear drive
mechanism. Gears shall be rated for torque input exceeding motor locked rotor
torque.
c) Wiring: Power and control wiring shall be wired to a terminal strip in the
actuator enclosure
d) Failsafe Positioning: Actuators shall be spring return type for failsafe
positioning.
e) Enclosure: Actuator enclosure shall be NEMA-4 rated, and shall have a
minimum of two threaded conduit entries. Provide an enclosure heater for
actuators located outside of buildings.
f) Limit Switches: Travel limit switches shall be UL and CSA approved.
Switches shall limit actuator in both open and closed positions.
g) Mechanical Travel Stops: The actuator shall include mechanical travel stops
of stainless steel construction to limit actuator to specific degrees of rotation.
h) Manual Override: Actuators shall have manual actuator override to allow
operation of the valve when power is off. For valves 4 inches and smaller the
override may be a removable wrench or lever or geared handwheel type. For
larger valves, the override shall be a fixed geared handwheel type. An
automatic power cut-off switch shall be provided to disconnect power from the
motor when the handwheel is engaged for manual operation.
i) Valve Position Indicator: A valve position indicator with arrow and open and
closed position marks shall be provided to indicate valve position.
UCB STANDARDS
15951-10
j)
2.
2.05
Torque Limit Switches: Provide torque limit switches to interrupt motor

power when torque limit is exceeded in either direction of rotation.
k) Position Controller: For valves used for modulating control, provide an
electronic positioner capable of accepting 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, and
135 Ohm potentiometer.
l) Ambient Conditions: Actuator shall be designed for operation from 140 to
150 F ambient temperature with 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.
m) Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Belimo
2)
Honeywell
3)
Siemens
4)
Snyder Electric
5)
Substitutions: approved equal
[Pneumatic Single- and Double-Acting Cylinder Type:
a) Air Cylinder: Shall consist of steel or aluminum cylinder, dual pistons, double
rack and pinion gearing mechanism. Housing shall be protected both internally
and externally with corrosion resistant coating. Actuator shall be equipped with
piston guide rods or similar mechanism so that seals are not loaded as linear
bearings. Single acting units shall have multiple symmetrically arranged
springs to apply equal force to piston. Cylinder shall be configurable for
direction of fail-safe mode in the field. Actuators shall be spring return type for
failsafe positioning.
b) Position Indication: Provide extended shaft position indicator that is
removable for manual override of valve.
c) Two-Position Actuators: Provide appropriate three-way or four-way solenoid
valve mounted on the actuator. Solenoid valve electrical enclosure shall meet
NEMA-4 requirements. Provide actuator with position switches where
required.
d) Modulating Actuators: Provide a rotary electronic positioner designed to
accept 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, or 135 Ohm potentiometer and operate
integral 3-way or 4-way solenoid valve to position valve rotation angle as
sensed by integral position feedback device to match signal input. Enclosure
shall meet NEMA-4 requirements. Actuator linearity and resolution shall be
0.5% of span. Hysteresis and deadband shall be adjustable. Provide accessory
mechanical or proximity type position switches and position transmitters where
required. Actuators shall be spring return type for failsafe positioning. Provide
an enclosure heater for positioners located outside of buildings.]
GENERAL FIELD DEVICES

A.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
Provide field devices for input and output of digital (binary) and analog signals into
controllers (BCs, AACs, ASCs). Provide signal conditioning for all field devices as
recommended by field device manufacturers, and as required for proper operation in the
system.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assure that all field devices are compatible
with controller hardware and software.
Field devices specified herein are generally two-wire type transmitters, with power for
the device to be supplied from the respective controller. If the controller provided is not
equipped to provide this power, or is not designed to work with two-wire type
transmitters, or if field device is to serve as input to more than one controller, or where the
UCB STANDARDS
15951-11
D.
E.
2.06
length of wire to the controller will unacceptably affect the accuracy, the Contractor shall
provide four-wire type equal transmitter and necessary regulated DC power supply or
120 VAC power supply, as required.
For field devices specified hereinafter that require signal conditioners, signal boosters,
signal repeaters, or other devices for proper interface to controllers, Contractor shall
furnish and install proper device, including 120V power as required. Such devices shall
have accuracy equal to, or better than, the accuracy listed for respective field devices.
Accuracy: As stated in this Section, accuracy shall include combined effects of
nonlinearity, non-repeatability and hysteresis.
TEMPERATURE SENSORS (TS)

A.
Sensor range: When matched with A/D converter of BC, AAC/ASC, or SD, sensor range
shall provide a resolution of no worse than 0.3F (0.16 C) (unless noted otherwise).
Where thermistors are used, the stability shall be better than 0.25F over 5 years.
Include and edit where matched sensors are required for the specific project.
B.
Matched Sensors: The following applications shall require matched sensors:
1. Building Loop Connections: Provide matched loop and building supply sensors
where control sequence requires controlling to a temperature rise (differential).
2. Hydronic Temperature Difference Calculations: Provide matched supply and
return temperature sensors where the pair is used for calculating temperature
difference for use in load calculations or sequencing such as across chillers and
plants.
3. Air Handling Unit Sequencing: Provide matched pair for the cooling and heating
coil leaving sensors where the sequence includes calculating an offset from the
supply air setpoint to maintain a leaving heating coil temperature.
C.
Room Temperature Sensor: Shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover,
suitable for wall mounting. Provide insulated base. Following sensing elements are
acceptable:
1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4F
accuracy at calibration point.
2. Provide setpoint adjustment where indicated. The setpoint adjustment shall be a
warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BAS (initial range of +/- 2F).
3. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure where
indicated. This shall be a momentary contact closure
4. Provide current temperature indication via an LCD readout where indicated.
D.
Single-Point Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of sensing element, junction box
for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. Temperature
range as required for resolution indicated in paragraph A. Sensor probe shall be 316
stainless steel.
accuracy at calibration point
E.
Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of an averaging element, junction
box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and
quantities to result in one lineal foot of sensing element for each three square feet of
cooling coil/duct face area. Temperature range as required for resolution indicated in
paragraph A.
1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, or thermistor, +/- 0.2F accuracy at
calibration point.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15951-12
F.
Liquid immersion temperature sensor shall include brass thermowell, sensor and
connection head for wiring connections. Temperature range shall be as required for
resolution of 0.15F.
accuracy at calibration point. Temperature range shall be as required for resolution
of 0.3F.
Include and edit where surface-mount may be allowed in the project with prior approval by UCB
G.
[Pipe Surface-Mount Temperature Sensor: Shall include metal junction box and
clamps and shall be suitable for sensing pipe surface temperature and installation under
insulation. Provide thermally conductive paste at pipe contact point. Temperature range
shall be as require for resolution indicated in paragraph A.
accuracy at calibration point.]
H.
Outside air sensors shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket
to prevent water seepage. Temperature range shall be as require for resolution indicated in
Paragraph A
accuracy at calibration point.
2.07
HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A.
B.
2.08
Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room) or outdoor mounting. Unit shall be two-wire
transmitter utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film capacitance change
humidity sensor. Unit shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for percent
relative humidity (% RH). A combination temperature and humidity sensor may be used
for zone level monitoring. Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and
application criteria:
1. Input Range: 0 to 100% RH.
2. Accuracy(% RH): +/- 2% (when used for enthalpy calculation, dewpoint calculation
or humidifier control) or +/- 3% (monitoring only) between 20-90% RH at 77F,
including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability.
3. Sensor Operating Range: As required by application
4. Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Units shall be Vaisala HM Series. Substitutions shall be
allowed per Division 1.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (DP)

A.
B.
General Purpose - Water: Two-wire transmitter, 4-20 mA output with zero and span
adjustments. Plus or minus 0.5% overall accuracy, 450 psig (3103 KPa) maximum static
pressure rating, 200 psid maximum overpressure rating for 6 through 60 psid range, 450
psid for 100 through 300 psid range.
Industrial Application, Liquid, Steam and Gas:
1. General: Two-wire smart DP cell type transmitter, 4-20 mA or 1-5 Vdc userselectable linear or square root output, adjustable span and zero, stainless steel
wetted parts.
2.
3.
4.
JULY 2012
Environmental limits: 40 to 250 F (-40 to 121C), 0 to 100% RH..

Accuracy: less than 0.1 percent of span.
Output Damping: Time constant user selectable from 0 to 36 seconds.
UCB STANDARDS
15951-13
Vibration Effect: Less than 0.1% of upper range limit from 15 to 2000 Hz in any
axis relative to pipe mounted process conditions.
6. Electrical Enclosure: NEMA-4, -4X, -7, -9.
7. Approvals: FM, CSA.
8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rosemount Inc. 3051 Series, Foxboro, JohnsonYokagawa, Setra, or Mamac. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
General Purpose Low Pressure Air: Generally for use in static measurement of duct
pressure or constant volume air velocity pressure measurement where the range is
applicable.
1. General: Loop powered two-wire differential capacitance cell-type transmitter.
2. Output: two wire 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.
3. Overall Accuracy: Plus or minus 1%.
4. Minimum Range: 0.1 in. w.c.
5. Maximum Range: 10 inches w.c.
6. Housing: Polymer housing suitable for surface mounting.
7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ashcroft, Modus T30. Substitutions shall be allowed
per Division 1.
8. Static Sensing Element: Pitot-type static pressure sensing tips similar to Dwyer
model A-301 and connecting tubing.
9. Range: Select for specified setpoint to be between 25% and 75% full-scale.
General Purpose Low Pressure/Low Differential Air: Generally for use in static
measurement of space pressure or constant volume air velocity pressure measurement
where the range is applicable.
1. General: Loop powered, two-wire differential capacitance cell type transmitter.
2. Output: Two-wire 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.
3. Overall Accuracy: Plus or minus 1%.
4. Minimum Range: 0 in. w.c.
5. Maximum Range: 0.1, 0.25, or 0.5 inches w.c.
7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ashcroft, Modus T30. Substitutions shall be allowed
per Division 1.
8. Static Sensing Element: Pitot-type static pressure sensing tips similar to Dwyer
model A-301 and connecting tubing.
9. Range: Select for specified setpoint to be between 25% and 75% full-scale.
VAV Velocity Pressure: Generally for use in variable volume air velocity pressure
measurement where the range is applicable.
1. General: Loop powered two-wire differential capacitance cell type transmitter.
2. Output: Two-wire, 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.
3. Overall Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25%
4. Minimum Range: 0 in. w.c.
5. Maximum Range: 1 inch w.c.
7. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Ashcroft
b) Modus
5.
C.
D.
E.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15951-14
8.
2.09
VALVE BYPASS FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS

A.
2.10
B.
B.
Diaphragm or bourdon tube with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap-acting Form
C contacts rated for the application. Pressure switches shall be capable of withstanding
150% of rated pressure.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, ITT Neo-Dyn, ASCO, Penn, Honeywell, and
Johnson Controls. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
TRANSDUCERS
A.
2.13
General Service - Air: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap
acting form C contacts rated for the application. Provide manufacturer's recommended
static pressure sensing tips and connecting tubing
General Service - Water: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint, 2 psig or adjustable
differential, and snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. 60 psid minimum
pressure differential range. 0F to 160F operating temperature range.
PRESSURE SWITCHES (PS)

A.
2.12
Provide a three or five valve bypass kit for protection of DP sensors where the static on the
pipe can cause on over pressure when connected to one port with the other at atmospheric
pressure. Kit shall include high and low pressure isolation valves, high and low pressure
vent valves (five valve kit) and a bypass valve contained in a NEMA-1 enclosure.
Enclosure shall be mounted no higher than 6 feet above floor level.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES (DPS)

A.
2.11
c) Setra.
d) Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
Range: Select for minimum range that will accept the maximum velocity pressure
expected.
Standard Capacity Electronic-to-Pneumatic (E-P) Transducers: E-P transducers shall

be Voltage-to-Pneumatic (V-P) type, Current-to-Pneumatic (I-P) type:
1. Electrical Power Supply: 24 Vac or 24 Vdc.
2. Pneumatic Air Supply: 30 psig (2.07 bar) maximum.
3. Air Capacity: 1100 scim @ 20 psig (300 cm3/sec @ 1.4 bar).
4. Air Consumption: Zero at steady state.
5. Output Span: 0-20 psig (0-1.4 bar).
6. Input: 4-20 mA, 0-5 Vdc, 1-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, 0-15 Vdc, or 3-15 Vdc
input.
7. Enclosure: Polymer designed for surface or panel mount.
8. Air Connections: (6.35 mm) barbed.
9. Failure Mode on Power Loss: Non-failsafe transducers shall have no output air
loss. Failsafe transducers shall exhaust output upon power loss.
10. Acceptable Manufacturers: Mamac EP-313-020, Johnson Controls. Substitutions
shall be allowed per Division 1
PHASE-VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY MONITOR
Include only when requested by UCB.

A.
Provide with two (2) sets of alarm relay outputs:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15951-15
B.
2.14
1. One monitored by the BAS

2. One monitored by UCB
Provide Motor Saver Model MS250A or equal.
CURRENT SWITCHES (CS)
UCB prefers using current transducers; unless there is a specific application for current switches.
A.
Clamp-On Design Current Operated Switch (for Constant Speed Motor Status
Indication)
1. Range: 1.5 to 150 amps.
2. Trip Point: Adjustable.
3. Switch: Solid state, normally open, 1 to 135 Vac or Vdc, 0.3 Amps. Zero off state
leakage.
4. Lower Frequency Limit: 6 Hz.
5. Trip Indication: LED
6. Approvals: UL, CSA
7. Max. Cable Size: 350 MCM
8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries H-708/908; Inc., RE Technologies
SCS1150A-LED. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
B.
Clamp-on Wire Through Current Switch (CS/CR) (for Constant Speed Motors):
Same as CS with 24v command relay rated at 5A @ 240 Vac resistive, 3A @ 240 Vac
inductive, load control contact power shall be induced from monitored conductor
(minimum conductor current required to energize relay 5A, max. rating of 135A).
Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Veris Industries, Inc., Model # H938/735; or RE
Technologies RCS 1150. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
1. Where used for single-phase devices, provide the CS/CR in a self-contained unit in a
housing similar with override switch to Kele RIBX. Substitutions shall be allowed
per Division 1.
C.
Clamp-On Design Current Operated Switch for Variable Speed Motor Status
Indication
1. Range: 1.5 to 135 Amps.
2. Trip Point: Self-calibrating based on VA memory associated with frequency to
detect loss of belt with subsequent increase of control output to 60 Hz.
3. Switch: Solid state, normally open, 1 to 135 Vac or Vdc, 0.3 Amps. Zero off state
leakage.
4. Frequency Range: 5-75 Hz
5. Trip Indication: LED
6. Approvals: UL, CSA
7. Max. Cable Size: 350 MCM
8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries, Inc. H-904. Substitutions shall be
D.
Clamp-On Wire Through Current Switch (CS/CR) (for Variable Speed Motors):
Same as CS with 24v command relay rated at 5A @ 240 Vac resistive, 3A @ 240 Vac
inductive, load control contact power shall be induced from monitored conductor
(minimum conductor current required to energize relay 5A, max. rating of 135A).
Acceptable manufacturer shall be Veris Industries, Inc., Model # H934. Substitutions shall
be allowed per Division 1.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15951-16
E.
2.15
CURRENT TRANSDUCER (CT)

A.
2.16
Clamp-On Design Current Transducer (for Motor Current Sensing)

1. Range: 1-10 amps minimum, 20-200 amps maximum
2. Trip Point: Adjustable
3. Output: 0-5 VDC.
4. Accuracy: 0.2% from 20 to 100 Hz.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Veris # 7222, 822, 922
b) Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
OUTDOOR AIR STATIC PRESSURE SENSING TIP

A.
B.
2.17
Variable Speed Status: Where current switches are used to sense the status for variable
speed devices, the CT shall include on-board VA/Hz memory to allow distinction between
a belt break and subsequent ramp up to 60 Hz, versus operation at low speed. The belt
break scenario shall be indicated as a loss of status and the operation at low speed shall
indicate normal status.
Pressure sensor: Pressure sensing tip shall be designed to minimize the effects of wind
and resulting velocity pressure up to 80 mph. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Dwyer
A-306. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
Low Air Pressure Surge Dampener: 30-second time constant. Acceptable manufacturer
shall be Modus SD030. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
CONTINUOUS LEVEL TRANSMITTERS

A.
Ultrasonic Type
1. Provide a non-contacting, temperature compensating, narrow beam, ultrasonic type
level transmitter with adjustable span and zero.
2. Output: 4-20 mA.
3. Transducer Materials: PC/ABS, Polypropylene, PVC and/or Teflon.
4. Electrical Enclosure: NEMA-4X, -6.
5. Approvals: UL, CE or CSA.
Accuracy: .5% of calibrated span.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Flowline EchoSpan, Princo Instruments, & Greyline.
Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
Capacitance Type
1. Provide a loop powered, continuous capacitance type level transmitter with
adjustable span and zero.
2. Output: 4-20 mA.
3. Probe: Fluoropolymer coated stainless steel rod or cable. Provide cable probe with
end attachment hardware or weight.
4. Electrical Enclosure: NEMA-4, -7.
5. Approvals: UL or CSA.
6.
7.
B.
6.
7.
8.
JULY 2012
Accuracy: 1% of calibrated span.

Process Connection: MPT or ANSI Flange as required.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Drexelbrook, Endress & Hauser. Substitutions shall
be allowed per Division 1.
UCB STANDARDS
15951-17
2.18
INSERTION TYPE TURBINE METER FOR WATER SERVICE

A.
2.19
2.20
2.21
Turbine Insertion Flow Meter sensing method shall be impedance sensing (iron magnetic
and non-photoelectric), with volumetric accuracy of +/- 2% of reading over middle 80% of
operating range, and +/- 4% of reading over the entire operating range. Turbine Insertion
Flow Meter shall have maximum operating pressure of 400 psi and maximum operating
temperature of 200F continuous (220F peak). All wetted metal parts shall be
constructed of 316 stainless steel. Flow meter shall meet or exceed all of the accuracy,
head loss, flow limits, pressure and material requirements of the AWWA standard C70470 for the respective pipe or tube size. Analog outputs shall consist of non-interactive
zero and span adjustments, a DC linearly of 0.1% of span, voltage output of 0-10 V, and
current output of 4-20 mA.
1. Install in water systems with a minimum of 10 pipe diameters unobstructed flow.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Onicon Corp. and Hersey. Substitutions shall be
FLOW METER FOR STEAM

A.
Flow Computer: KEP Supertrol II with MODBUS RTU Communication Card
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Maximum Fluid Temperature: 800 F (427 C)

Wetted Parts: Stainless Steel
Housing: NEMA 4X
Turndown: 10:1 minimum.
Accuracy: 1% of calibrated span
Body: Wafer style or ANSI flanged to match piping specification.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Accelebar and Onicon Vortex. Substitutions shall be
VORTEX SHEDDING FLOW METER FOR LIQUID AND GAS SERVICE

A.
Output: 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, 0-5 Vdc
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Maximum Fluid Temperature: 800 F (427 C)

Wetted Parts: Stainless Steel
Housing: NEMA 4X
Turndown: 10:1 minimum.
Accuracy: 0.5% of calibrated span for liquids, 1% of calibrated span for gases.
Body: Wafer style or ANSI flanged to match piping specification.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Foxboro 83 series, Johnson-Yokagawa, and Rosemount.
AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS (AFMS)

A.
B.
JULY 2012
Pitot Tube Grids: Provide an array of velocity pressure sensing elements with averaging
manifolds and air straightening vanes packaged in a sheet metal casing. Distribute sensing
elements in accordance with ASHRAE for traversing ducts. Provide taps to connect
tubing from instrumentation. Label AFM with drawing number designation, design flow,
velocity pressure, and pressure drop. Application of pitot grids shall be allowed only
where minimum expected flow is greater than 30% or maximum flow
Vortex Shedding Grid: Provide an array of vortex shedding elements designed to
produce stable Karmen Vortices that are linear with air velocity. Provide the electronics
UCB STANDARDS
15951-18
to totalize the pulses and output average velocity proportional to an output signal of 420ma.
1. Sensor Accuracy: 1.5%
2. Electronics Accuracy: 0.5%
3. Range: Select minimum range to accommodate the expected flow range of the
project
4.
5.
2.22
AIR VELOCITY PRESSURE SENSORS (INSERTION TYPE)

A.
2.23
Temperature Limits: 20-140F

Acceptable Manufacturer: Tek-Air Systems Inc. Vortek Model. Substitutions
shall be allowed per Division 1.
Single or Multi-Point Averaging (as indicated): Sensing tip shall be for insertion into
duct with mounting flange and push on tube connections. Material shall be suitable to the
application.
CO2 SENSORS/TRANSMITTERS (CO2)

A.
CO2 sensors shall use silicon based, diffusion aspirated, infrared single beam, dualwavelength sensor.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Accuracy: 36ppm at 800 ppm and 68F.

Stability: 5% over 5 years.
Output: 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc or relay.
Mounting: Duct or Wall as indicated.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Vaisala, Inc. GMD20 (duct) or GMW20 (wall).
The following applies to repair or minor modification of existing pneumatic systems.

2.24
[PNEUMATIC CONTROL COMPONENTS

A.
B.
C.
2.25
Analog Pressure Gauges: Gauges shall be pneumatic type, minimum 1-1/2" in (38 mm)
diameter, with white face and black numerals. Surface-mounted gauges shall have chrome
plated trim and be a minimum of 2-1/2" in (64 mm ) diameter.
Pneumatic Actuated Pressure Switches (PE) (for 30 psig max pressure control
systems): Pressure ranges and sensitivity of PEs shall match control system sequence of
operation. Switch operation shall be externally adjustable over the operating pressure
range (nominal 0-20 psig, 0 to 138 KPa ). PE switches shall be SPDT type, rated for the
particular application, and shall be UL listed. PE shall be as manufactured by Penn.
Substitutions shall be allowed as per Division 1
Pilot Positioners: Operating span adjustment range is from 3 to 13 psi (21 to 91 kPa).
Positioner shall be furnished with a mounting bracket for attachment directly to the
actuator.]
ELECTRIC CONTROL COMPONENTS

A.
B.
JULY 2012
Limit Switches (LS): Limit switches shall be UL listed, SPDT or DPDT type, with
adjustable trim arm. Limit switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley.
[Electric Solenoid-Operated Pneumatic Valves (EP): EP valves shall be rated for a
minimum of 1.5 times their maximum operating static and differential pressure.. Valves
shall be ported 2-way, 3-way, or 4-way and shall be normally closed or open as required
by the application. EPs shall be sized for minimum pressure drop, and shall be UL and
UCB STANDARDS
15951-19
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
JULY 2012
CSA listed. Furnish and install gauges on all inputs of EPs. Furnish an adjustable air
pressure regulator on input side of solenoid valves serving actuators operating at greater
than 30 psig.
1. Coil Enclosure: Indoors shall be NEMA-1, Outdoors and NEMA-3, 4, 7, 9.
2. Fluid Temperature Rating: Valves for compressed air and cold water service shall
have 150 F (66 C) minimum rating. Valves for hot water or steam service shall
have fluid temperature rating higher than the maximum expected fluid temperature.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: EP valves shall be as manufactured by ASCO or
Parker. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
4. Coil Rating: EP valves shall have appropriate voltage coil rated for the application
(i.e., 24 VAC, 120 VAC, 24 VDC, etc.).]
Low Temperature Detector (Freezestat) (FZ): Low temperature detector shall consist
of a cold spot element which responds only to the lowest temperature along any one foot
of entire element, minimum bulb size of 1/8" x 20' (3.2mm x 6.1m), junction box for
wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise, DPST ( 4 wire, 2
circuit) with manual reset. Temperature range 15 to 55F (-9.4 to 12.8C), factory set at
38F.
Surface-Mounted Thermostat: Surface-mounted thermostat shall consist of SPDT
contacts, operating temperature range of 50 to 150 F (10 to 65C) , and a minimum 10F
fixed setpoint differential.
Low Voltage Wall Thermostat: Wall-mounted thermostat shall consist of SPDT sealed
mercury contacts, operating temperature range of 50 to 90F (10 to 32C), switch rating of
24 Vac (30 Vac max.), and both manual and automatic fan operation in both the heat and
cool modes.
Control Relays: All control relays shall be UL listed, with contacts rated for the
application, and mounted in minimum NEMA-1 enclosure for indoor locations, NEMA-4
for outdoor locations.
1. Control relays for use on electrical systems of 120 volts or less shall have, as a
minimum, the following:
a) AC coil pull-in voltage range of +10%, -15% or nominal voltage.
b) Coil sealed volt-amperes (VA) not greater than four (4) VA.
c) Silver cadmium Form C (SPDT) contacts in a dustproof enclosure, with 8 or 11
pin type plug.
d) LED pilot light indication of power-to-coil and coil retainer clips.
e) Coil rated for 50 and 60 Hz service.
f) Acceptable Manufacturers: Relays shall be Potter Brumfield, Model KRPA.
2. Relays used for across-the-line control (start/stop) of 120V motors, 1/4 HP, and 1/3
HP, shall be rated to break minimum 10 Amps inductive load. Relays shall be
IDEC. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
3. Relays used for stop/start control shall have low voltage coils (30 VAC or less), and
shall be provided with transient and surge suppression devices at the controller
interface.
General Purpose Power Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose magnetic
contactor. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, NEMA type 1enclosure. Manufacturer shall be Square
'D', Cutler-Hammer or Westinghouse.
Control Transformers: Furnish and install control transformers as required. Control
transformers shall be machine tool type, and shall be US and CSA listed. Primary and
UCB STANDARDS
15951-20
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.26
secondary sides shall be fused in accordance with the NEC. Transformer shall be proper
size for application, and mounted in minimum NEMA-1 enclosure.
1. Transformers shall be manufactured by:
a) Westinghouse
b) Square D
c) Jefferson
d) Veris x100, x040, x020
e) Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
Time Delay Relays (TDR): TDRs shall be capable of on or off delayed functions, with
adjustable timing periods, and cycle timing light. Contacts shall be rated for the
application with a minimum of two (2) sets of Form C contacts, enclosed in a dustproof
enclosure.
1. TDRs shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one
million operations. TDRs shall have solid state, plug-in type coils with transient
suppression devices.
2. TDRs shall be UL and CSA listed, Crouzet type. Substitutions shall be allowed per
Division 1.
Electric Push Button Switch: Switch shall be momentary contact, oil tight, push button,
with number of N.O. and/or N.C. contacts as required. Contacts shall be snap-action type,
and rated for minimum 120 Vac operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by
Allen Bradley. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
Pilot Light: Panel-mounted pilot light shall be NEMA ICS 2 oil tight, transformer type,
with screw terminals, push-to-test unit, LED type, rated for 120 VAC. Unit shall be 800T
type, as manufactured by Allen-Bradley. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
Electric Selector Switch (SS): Switch shall be maintained contact, NEMA ICS 2, oiltight selector switch with contact arrangement, as required. Contacts shall be rated for
minimum 120 Vac operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by AllenBradley. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.
REFRIGERANT MONITOR
A.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
General: Contractor shall provide a refrigerant sensitive infrared-based stationary

refrigerant gas leak monitor system designed to continuously measure refrigerants.
Refrigerant monitor shall be coordinated to detect {insert refrigerant types here if known
or delete} refrigerants used in chiller equipment installed under Section {Insert
appropriate Section}. The alarm system shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994 and
local code requirements.
The refrigerant monitor shall be capable of monitoring multiple refrigerant gas compounds
at multiple locations in concentrations of 0 PPM to a minimum of 1000 PPM. The
Monitor shall have a low range resolution of 1 PPM in the range of 1 PPM through 100
PPM. Readings above 100 PPM must be accurate to within 5% of reading. Accuracy
shall be maintained within ambient environmental ranges of 0C. through 50C., (32F.
through 122F.) and 5% through 90% relative humidity, non-condensing.
The refrigerant monitor shall automatically and continuously monitor the areas through a
sample draw type tubular pick up system with an internal pump and filter. The installation
of the monitoring control and the tubing shall be in strict accordance with the
manufactures instructions. The location, routing, and final position of the sample tubes
shall be submitted to the engineer with all necessary shop drawings and monitor
specifications and installation instructions. Tubing size, tubing material, and tube length
limitations shall be within the specifications of the monitor manufacture. The location and
UCB STANDARDS
15951-21
D.
E.
F.
G.
JULY 2012
method of tube support and hangers must be identified on the shop drawings. Each of the
sampling tubes shall have end of line filters.
The analyzer will be based on infrared detection technology, and will be factory tested and
calibrated for the specified refrigerant or refrigerants. Factory certification of the
calibrations shall be provided with the O&M manuals. . The analyzer shall provide a
menu driven or automatic method of checking both zero, span calibration for each sensor,
and allow for adjustment.
The monitor shall be equipped with 4 outputs. Three relays shall energize at an adjustable
user defined set point based on refrigerant concentration levels. The relay threshold
adjustment shall be protected by keyed or password access controls. Adjustments and
observations shall be made at the front panel operator interface. The relay threshold
values can be viewed without a password. The digital display will continuously display
the refrigerant concentration level and alarm status. The fourth output shall indicate a
monitor malfunction alarm. The monitor shall also have an analog output that will provide
a liner scaled reference to the refrigerant concentration in parts per million. The analog
output signal shall be an industry standard DC voltage, or mA current signal.
The monitor shall have a NEMA-4 moisture resistant enclosure with a gasketed, hinged
front cover. Conduits and tube connections shall be located on the bottom of the
enclosure. The enclosure shall have a rust and corrosion resistant finish.
The following alarm modes will be provided by the refrigerant monitor:
1. ALARM LEVEL ONE Low level of refrigerant concentration at one of the
sampling points has detected the presence of a possible refrigerant leak. The initial
alarm threshold shall be set to 5 PPM (adj.) and increased if there are nuisance
alarms. This alarm level shall be displayed on the refrigerant monitor interface
panel, indicating which sensor has triggered the alarm, and the associated
concentration of refrigerant in PPM. This event will also send an Alarm Level One
signal to the BAS through a digital output from the monitor relay. This alarm will
remain active until the refrigerant concentration is reduced below set point.
2. ALARM LEVEL TWO This alarm shall indicate that one of the sensors has
detected a refrigerant concentration that is approaching dangerous levels in the area
being monitored. This alarm shall be set to 25% below the maximum calculated
refrigerant level specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994 and ASHRAE 34-1992. This
alarm will be displayed on the monitor interface, and will indicate which of the
sensors has caused the alarm, and the highest concentration in PPM. This event will
also activate the beacon and audible alarm mounted on the refrigerant monitoring
enclosure. This alarm will also be sent to the BAS through the digital output of the
relay. In this mode the audible alarm can be silenced, but the beacon shall remain
active until the fault is cleared
3. ALARM LEVEL THREE This alarm shall be set at the maximum calculated
refrigerant level specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994 and ASHRAE 34-1992
whichever is the lowest concentration. The refrigerant monitor interface will display
which sensor has caused the alarm, and the associated concentration in PPM. This
event will also activate the beacon and audible alarm mounted on the refrigerant
monitoring enclosure. If the audible alarm had been silenced by an earlier alarm, the
activation of this level three alarm will cause the audible alarm to be activated again.
The relay in the refrigerant monitoring panel shall activate the space ventilation
system, and will disable all combustion or flame-producing equipment via hardwired
control interlocks. In addition, this event and will de-energize the energy source for
any hot surface (850F or 454C) located in the space. Interlocks must also be
provided to close any normally open doors or openings to the space for proper
ventilation and isolation during this alarm condition. This alarm level will also
UCB STANDARDS
15951-22
H.
signal the BAS through the digital output through the same relay. In this mode, the
audible alarm can be silenced, but the beacon shall remain active until the fault is
cleared.
All alarm conditions shall be report to the BAS system as follows:
1. ALARM LEVEL ONE - The lowest refrigerant alarm level shall detect the presence
of refrigerant in low concentrations and energize a relay to signal a low level alarm
to the BAS operator terminal(s). The alarm shall display an alarm message stating
that there is a potential refrigerant leak in the designated area.
2. ALARM LEVEL TWO - The second refrigerant level alarm shall be a high
refrigerant alarm alert. This alarm shall energize a relay to signal the BAS system
indicating a high level alarm on the BAS operator terminal(s). This BAS alarm shall
state that high levels of refrigerant have been detected in the designated area.
3. FAULT ALARM Reports a high level alarm to the BAS operator terminal(s) that
there is a fault in the refrigerant monitoring alarm system.
The following only applies for smoke control applications. UCB will provide details for interface to
Simplex system.
2.27
[SMOKE CONTROL/FIREMANS OVERRIDE PANEL

A.
B.
C.
2.28
NAMEPLATES
A.
B.
C.
2.29
Integral enunciator/control panel part of complete engineered and UUKL 864 listed
system.
Provide clear, laminated graphic schematically representing the building air systems.
Status LEDs shall be associated with graphic representations of fans. Override switches
shall be provided as required by NFPA 110 to allow override of the fans and dampers
applicable to the code requirements.
Interface with Fire Alarm System (Simplex) as required to implement the requirements
specified in the Sequence of Operations.]
Provide engraved phenolic or micarta nameplates for all equipment, components, and field
devices furnished. Nameplates shall be 1/8 thick, black, with white center core, and shall
be minimum 1" x 3", with minimum 1/4" high block lettering. Nameplates for devices
smaller than 1" x 3" shall be attached to adjacent surface.
Each nameplate shall identify the function for each device.
For pump Variable Speed Drives (VSDs), provide an engraved nameplate at the VSD
indicating the location of the controlling Remote Differential Pressure (RDP)
transmitter(s). Location shall include the Plan room number as well as the actual
Building room number.
TESTING EQUIPMENT
A.
JULY 2012
Contractor shall test and calibrate all signaling circuits of all field devices to ascertain that
required digital and accurate analog signals are transmitted, received, and displayed at
system operator terminals, and make all repairs and recalibrations required to complete
test. Contractor shall be responsible for test equipment required to perform these tests and
calibrations. Test equipment used for testing and calibration of field devices shall be at
least twice as accurate as respective field device (e.g., if field device is +/-0.5% accurate,
test equipment shall be +/-0.25% accurate over same range).
UCB STANDARDS
15951-23
PART III.
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
3.02
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
JULY 2012
General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings. Install electrical components and
use electrical products complying with requirements of National Electric Code and all
local codes.
[Main Control Air Piping: All main air piping between the compressors and the control
panels shall be copper, run per ASTM B88
Branch Control Air Piping: Accessible tubing is defined as that tubing run in
mechanical equipment rooms; inside mechanical equipment enclosures, such as heating
and cooling units, instrument panels; across roofs, in pipe chases, etc. Inaccessible
tubing is defined as that tubing run in concrete slabs; furred walls; or ceilings with no
access.
1. Provide copper tubing with maximum unsupported length of 3'-0", for accessible
tubing run exposed to view. Polyethylene tubing may be used in lieu of above,
when run within adequately supported, rigid enclosure, such as metallic raceways,
or EMT. Terminal single-line connections less than 18 in length may be copper
tubing, or polyethylene tubing run inside flexible steel protection. Accessible
tubing run in concealed locations, such as pipe chases, suspended ceilings with easy
access, etc. may be copper or polyethylene bundled and sheathed tubing.
2. Provide copper or polyethylene tubing for inaccessible tubing, other than in
concrete pour. If polyethylene tubing is used, install in EMT or vinyl-jacketed
polyethylene tubing.
3. Pressure test control air piping at 30 psi (207 kPa) for 24 hours. Test fails if more
than 2 psi loss occurs.
4. Fasten flexible connections bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side,
and protect against abrasion. Tie and support tubing neatly.
5. Number-code or color-code tubing, except local individual room control tubing, for
future identification and servicing of control system. Code shall be as indicated on
approved installation drawings.]
Control Wiring: The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire,
conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connection of electric
control devices.
1. Wiring System: Install complete wiring system for electric control systems.
Conceal wiring except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and
piping are exposed. Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines.
Install in accordance with National Electrical Code and Division 16 of this
Specification. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along
hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly.
2. Control Wiring Conductors: Install control wiring conductors, without splices
between terminal points, labeled with device served. Install in neat workmanlike
UCB STANDARDS
15951-24
E.
F.
G.
JULY 2012
manner, securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code and
Division 16 of this Specification.
3. Communication wiring shall be run in separate conduit from all other wiring.
Signal wiring and low voltage control wiring shall be installed separate from any
wiring over thirty (30) volts. Signal wiring shield shall be grounded at controller
end only, unless otherwise recommended by the controller manufacturer.
4. All WAN and LAN Communication wiring shield shall be terminated as
recommended by controller manufacturer. All WAN and LAN Communication
wiring shall be orange jacketed and labeled with a network number, device ID at
each termination and shall correspond with the WAN and LAN system architecture
and floor plan submittals.
5. All communications wiring shall be in conduit unless pre-approved by UCB.
6. All low-voltage wiring external to control panels shall be in conduit, unless preapproved. Conduit type, sizing, and installation requirements shall conform to
NEC and Division 16.
The following only applies when a pre-approved exception to conduit has been
granted.
Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines. Run in a neat and
orderly fashion, bundled where applicable, and completely suspended (strapped to
rigid elements or routed through wiring rings) away from areas of normal access.
Tie and support conductors neatly with suitable nylon ties. Conductors shall not be
supported by the ceiling system or ceiling support system. Conductors shall be
pulled tight and be installed as high as practically possible in ceiling cavities.
Wiring shall not be laid on the ceiling or duct. Conductors shall not be installed
between the top cord of a joist or beam and the bottom of roof decking. Contractor
shall be fully responsible for noise immunity and rewire in conduit if electrical or
RF noise affects performance.
7. Number-code or color-code conductors appropriately for future identification and
servicing of control system. Code shall be as indicated on approved installation
drawings. Preferred identification system: BRADY
Control Valves: Install so that actuators, wiring, [and tubing] connections are accessible
for maintenance. Where possible, install with valve stem axis vertical, with operator side
up. Where vertical stem position is not possible, or would result in poor access, valves
may be installed with stem horizontal. Do not install valves with stem below horizontal,
or down.
Freezestats: Install freezestats in a serpentine fashion where shown on drawing. Provide
one foot of element for each square foot of coil face area. Where coil face area exceeds
required length of element, provide multiple devices, wired in parallel for normally open
close on trip application, wired in series for normally closed, open on trip application.
Adequately support with coil clips.
Space Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be located as indicated on drawings.
1. Mount non-adjustable sensors with centerline 60" above finished floor. Sensors
with adjustable setpoints and/or override switches must be mounted 36 to 48
above finished floor; coordinate with UCB.
2. Coordinate location of sensor with work of other trades so sensor does not conflict
with or is obstructed by such items as blackboards, bleachers, bookcases, etc.
3. Conceal all control wiring to sensors located in new finished spaces; the use of
wiremold is prohibited.
UCB STANDARDS
15951-25
4.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
Thermostats located in Locker Rooms, Team Rooms, Storerooms, and Corridors

shall be flush mounted type.
Averaging Temperature Sensors: Cover no more than three square feet per linear foot
of sensor length except where indicated. Generally where flow is sufficiently
homogeneous/adequately mixed at sensing location, consult AE for requirements.
Airflow Measuring Stations: Install per manufacturers recommendations in an
unobstructed straight length of duct (except those installations specifically designed for
installation in fan inlet). For installations in fan inlets, provide on both inlets of double
inlet fans and provide inlet cone adapter as recommended by AFM station manufacturer.
Fluid Flow Sensors: Install per manufacturers recommendations in an unobstructed
straight length of pipe.
Relative Humidity Sensors: Provide element guard as recommended by manufacturer
for high velocity installations. For high limit sensors, position remote enough to allow
full moisture absorption into the air stream before reaching the sensor.
Differential Pressure Transmitters: Provide valve bypass arrangement to protect
against over pressure damaging the transmitter.
Flow Switches: Where possible, install in a straight run of pipe at least 15 diameters in
length to minimize false indications.
Phase-Voltage-Frequency Monitor: Electrical contractor shall provide and install.
Control contractor shall coordinate installation of control wiring with electrical
contractor.
Current Switches for Motor Status Monitoring: Adjust so that setpoint is below
minimum operating current and above motor no load current.
Supply Duct Pressure Transmitters:
1. General: Install pressure tips with at least 4 round equivalent duct diameters of
straight duct with no takeoffs upstream. Install pressure tips securely fastened with
tip facing upstream in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions.
Locate the transmitter at an accessible location to facilitate calibration.
2. VAV System Down-Duct Transmitters: Locate pressure tips approximately 2/3
of the hydraulic distance to the most remote terminal in the air system. UCB must
approve final location.
Test Ports: Provide test ports in ductwork at each temperature and humidity sensor
location to facilitate sensor calibration. Test ports shall be 3/4 diameter minimum and
accessible via a 2 x 4 junction box with insulated cover.
Cutting and Patching Insulation: Repair insulation to maintain integrity of insulation
and vapor barrier jacket. Use hydraulic insulating cement to fill voids and finish with
material matching or compatible with adjacent jacket material.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15951-26
SECTION 15952
{23 0902}
BAS OPERATOR INTERFACES
PART I.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.02
Operator Workstations
Control System Servers
Portable Operator Terminal
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
1.03
PART 1 - GENERAL
15510 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.

15950 - Building Automation System (BAS) General
Section 23 0900 - Building Automation System (BAS) General
15951 - BAS Basic Materials, and Devices
Section 23 0913 BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and Sensors
15953 - BAS Field Panel
Section 23 0903 - BAS Field Panel
15954 - BAS Communications Devices
15955 - BAS Software and Programming
15958 BAS Sequence of Operation
15959 BAS Commissioning
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
B.
JULY 2012
Furnish and install software for Operator Interfaces and Control System Servers as
required for the BAS functions specified. All installed software shall be supported by the
manufacturer for a period of two years after Substantial Completion at no additional cost
to the University.
UCB STANDARDS
15952-1
PART II.
2.01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
OPERATOR WORKSTATION (OWS)

A.
Operator Workstation hardware and operating system will be provided and maintained
by the University. Contractor shall coordinate hardware and operating system
requirements with FMIT to meet software and specification requirements.
Edit the following as applicable.

B.
Operator Workstations shall be placed as follows and as indicated on the drawings or as
directed by the University.
2.02
CONTROL SYSTEM SERVER (CSS)

A.
Control System Server hardware and operating system will be provided and maintained
by the University. Contractor shall coordinate hardware and operating system
requirements with FMIT to meet software and specification requirements.
Edit the following as applicable

B.
Control System Server shall be placed as follows and as indicated on the drawings or as
directed by the University.
2.03
PORTABLE OPERATORS TERMINAL (POT)

A.
PART III.
3.01
Portable Operators Terminal hardware and operating system will be provided and
maintained by the University. Contractor shall coordinate hardware and operating
system requirements with FMIT to meet software and specification requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Install all software on the provided workstations and verify that the systems are fully
operational. Ensure licensing is provided for all software.
No license, software component, key, etc or any piece of information required to
install, configure, operate, diagnose and maintain the system shall be withheld from the
University.
Install electronic control system Operation and Maintenance Manuals, programming
guides, network configuration tools, control shop drawings etc on each OWS and CSS.
Provide interface or shortcuts to guide user to the appropriate information.
Set up portable operator terminal and configure it as a remote workstation. Install all
software and verify that the system is fully operational.
Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15952-2
SECTION 15953
{23 0903}
BAS FIELD PANELS
PART I.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A.
B.
C.
1.02
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Section {Insert Applicable Specification Section} - Basic Mechanical Requirements

Section 15950 - Building Automation System (BAS) General Refer to this section for
definitions of terminology
Section 15951 - BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and Sensors
Section 15958 - Sequence of Operation
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
B.
PART II.
2.01
Building Controller (BC)

Advance Application Specific Controller (AAC)
Application Specific Controller (ASC)
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
B.
1.03
PART 1 - GENERAL
Furnish and install DDC Control units and/or Smart Devices required to support
specified building automation system functions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
STAND-ALONE FUNCTIONALITY
A.
B.
JULY 2012
General: These requirements clarify the requirement for stand-alone functionality

relative to packaging I/O devices with a controller. Stand-alone functionality is
specified with the controller and for each Application Category specified in Part 3.
This item refers to acceptable paradigms for associating the points with the processor.
Functional Boundary: Provide controllers so that all points associated with and
common to one unit or other complete system/equipment shall reside within a single
control unit. The boundaries of a standalone system shall be as dictated in the contract
documents. Generally systems specified for the Application Category will dictate the
boundary of the standalone control functionality. See related restrictions below. When
UCB STANDARDS
15953-1
C.
D.
2.02
referring to the controller as pertains to the standalone functionality, reference is

specifically made to the processor. One processor shall execute all the related I/O
control logic via one operating system that uses a common programming and
configuration tool.
The following configurations are considered acceptable with reference to a controllers
standalone functionality:
1. Points packaged as integral to the controller such that the point configuration is
listed as an essential piece of information for ordering the controller (having a
unique ordering number).
2. Controllers with processors and modular back planes that allow plug in point
modules as an integral part of the controller.
3. I/O point expander boards, plugged directly into the main controller board to
expand the point capacity of the controller.
4. I/O point expansion devices connected to the main controller board via wiring and
as such may be remote from the controller and that communicate via a sub LAN
protocol. These arrangements to be considered standalone shall have a sub LAN
that is dedicated to that controller and include no other controller devices (AACs
or ASCs). All wiring to interconnect the I/O expander board shall be:
a) Contained in the control panel enclosure;
b) Or run in conduit. Wiring shall only be accessible at the terminations.
The following configurations are considered unacceptable with reference to a
controllers standalone functionality:
1. Multiple controllers enclosed in the same control panel to accomplish the point
requirement.
BUILDING CONTROLLER (BC)

A.
JULY 2012
1. The BC(s) shall provide fully distributed control independent of the operational
status of the OWSs and CSS. All necessary calculations required to achieve
control shall be executed within the BC independent of any other device. All
control strategies performed by the BC(s) shall be both operator definable and
modifiable through the Operator Interfaces.
2. BCs shall perform overall system coordination, accept control programs, perform
automated HVAC functions, control peripheral devices and perform all necessary
mathematical and logical functions. BCs shall share information with the entire
network of BCs and AACs/ASCs for full global control. Each controller shall
permit multi-user operation from multiple workstations and portable operator
terminals connected either locally or over the Primary Controller LAN. Each unit
shall have its own internal RAM, non-volatile memory, microprocessor, battery
backup, regulated power supply, power conditioning equipment, ports for
connection of operating interface devices, and control enclosure. BCs shall be
programmable from an operator workstation, portable operators terminal, or hand
held operating device. BC shall contain sufficient memory for all specified global
control strategies, user defined reports and trending, communication programs,
and central alarming.
3. BCs shall be connected to a controller network that qualifies as a Primary
Controlling LAN.
4. All BCs shall be protected from any memory loss due to a loss of power by one or
a combination of the following:
UCB STANDARDS
15953-2
a)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
JULY 2012
Volatile RAM shall have a battery backup using a lithium battery with a rated
service life of fifty (50) hours, and a rated shelf life of at least five years.
Self-diagnostic routine shall report an alarm for a low battery condition.
b) EEPROM, EPROM, or NOVROM non-volatile memory
In addition BCs may provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC functions.
Each BC may be capable of standalone direct digital operation utilizing its own
processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, wiring terminal strips, A/D
converters, real-time clock/calendar and voltage transient and lightning protection
devices. Refer to standalone functionality specified above.
The BC may provide for point mix flexibility and expandability. This requirement
may be met via either a family of expander boards, modular input/output
configuration, or a combination thereof. Refer to stand alone functionality
specified above.
All BC point data, algorithms and application software shall be modifiable from
the Operator Workstation.
Each BC shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a
microprocessor resident in the BC. The database and all application programs for
each BC shall be stored in non-volatile or battery backed volatile memory within
the BC and will be able to upload/download to/from the OWS and/or CSS.
BC shall provide buffer for holding alarms, messages, trends etc.
Each BC shall include self-test diagnostics, which allow the BC to automatically
alarm any malfunctions, or alarm conditions that exceed desired parameters as
determined by programming input.
Each BC shall contain software to perform full DDC/PID control loops.
For systems requiring end-of-line resistors those resistors shall be located in the
BC.
Input-Output Processing
a) Digital Outputs (DO): Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24 Vac or Vdc,
1 amp maximum current. Each shall be configurable as normally open or
normally closed. Each output shall have an LED to indicate the operating
mode of the output and [a manual hand off or auto switch to allow for
override]. [If these HOA switches are not provided on the main board they
shall be provided via isolation relays within the control enclosure.] Each DO
shall be discrete outputs from the BCs board (multiplexing to a separate
manufacturers board is unacceptable). Provide suppression to limit
transients to acceptable levels.
b) Analog Inputs (AI): AI shall be 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, and 0-20 mA. Provide
signal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for each input. Each input
shall be a discrete input to the BCs board (multiplexing to a separate
manufacturers board is unacceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise).
A/D converters shall have a minimum resolution of 12 bits.
c) Digital Inputs (DI): Monitor dry contact closures. Accept pulsed inputs of at
least one per second. Source voltage for sensing shall be supplied by the BC
and shall be isolated from the main board.
d) Universal Inputs (UI-AI or DI): To serve as either AI or DI as specified
above.
e) Electronic Analog Outputs (AO): Voltage mode: 0-5 Vdc and 0-10 Vdc;
Current mode: 4-20 mA. Provide zero and span calibration and circuit
protection. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) analog via a DO [and
transducer] is acceptable only with University approval (Generally these will
UCB STANDARDS
15953-3
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
JULY 2012
not be allowed on loops with a short time constant such as discharge

temperature loops, economizer loops, pressure control loops and the like.
They are generally acceptable for standard room temperature control loops.).
Where these are allowed, transducer/actuator shall be programmable for
normally open, normally closed, or hold last position and shall allow
adjustable timing. Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the BCs board
(multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable). D/A
converters shall have a minimum resolution of 10 bits.
f) Pulsed Inputs: Capable of counting up to 8 pulses per second with buffer to
accumulate pulse count. Pulses shall be counted at all times.
A communication port for operator interface through a terminal shall be provided
in each BC. It shall be possible to perform all program and database back-up,
system monitoring, control functions, and BC diagnostics through this port.
Standalone BC panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without
interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or
workstations.
Each BC shall be equipped with loop tuning algorithm for precise proportional,
integral, derivative (PID) control. Loop tuning tools provided with the Operator
Workstation software is acceptable. In any case, tools to support loop tuning must
be provided such that P, I, and D gains are automatically calculated.
All analog output points shall have a selectable failure setpoint. The BC shall be
capable of maintaining this failure setpoint in the event of a system malfunction,
which causes loss of BC control, or loss of output signal, as long as power is
available at the BC. The failure setpoint shall be selectable on a per point basis.
Slope intercepts and gain adjustments shall be available on a per-point basis.
BC Power Loss:
a) Upon a loss of power to any BC, the other units on the primary controlling
network shall not in any way be affected.
b) Upon a loss of power to any BC, the battery backup shall ensure that the
energy management control software, the Direct Digital Control software, the
database parameters, and all other programs and data stored in the RAM are
retained for a minimum of fifty (50) hours. An alarm diagnostic message
shall indicate that the BC is under battery power.
c) Upon restoration of power within the specified battery backup period, the BC
shall resume full operation without operator intervention. The BC shall
automatically reset its clock such that proper operation of any time dependent
function is possible without manual reset of the clock. All monitored
functions shall be updated.
d) Should the duration of a loss of power exceed the specified battery back-up
period or BC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel shall
automatically report the condition (upon resumption of power) and be
capable of receiving a download via the network, and connected computer.
In addition, the University shall be able to upload the most current versions of
all energy management control programs, Direct Digital Control programs,
database parameters, and all other data and programs in the memory of each
BC to the operator workstation via the local area network, or via the
telephone line dial-up modem where applicable, or to the laptop PC via the
local RS-232C port.
BC Failure:
a) Building Controller LAN Data Transmission Failure: BC shall continue to
operate in stand-alone mode. BC shall store loss of communication alarm
UCB STANDARDS
15953-4
along with the time of the event. All control functions shall continue with the
global values programmable to either last value or a specified value. Peer
BCs shall recognize the loss, report alarm and reconfigure the LAN.
b) BC Hardware Failure: BC shall cease operation and terminate
communication with other devices. All outputs shall go to their specified fail
position.
20. Each BC shall be equipped with firmware resident self-diagnostics for sensors and
be capable of assessing an open or shorted sensor circuit and taking an appropriate
control action (close valve, damper, etc.).
21. BCs may include LAN communications interface functions for controlling
secondary controlling LANs Refer to Section 15954 {23 0904} - BAS System
Communications Devices for requirements if this function is packaged with the
BC.
22. BCs shall be mounted on equipment, in packaged equipment enclosures, or
locking wall mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure, as specified elsewhere.
The following only applies to strict BACnet projects; coordinate with UCB
B.
2.03
BACnet Building Controller Requirements:

1. The BC(s) shall support all BIBBs defined in the BACnet Building Controller (BBC) device profile as defined in the BACnet standard.
2. BCs shall communicate over the BACnet Building Controller LAN.
3. Each BC shall be connected to the BACnet Building Controller LAN
communicating to/from other BCs.
ADVANCED APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (AAC) AND APPLICATION

SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC)
A.
JULY 2012
1. AACs and ASCs shall provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC
equipment. Each unit shall have its own internal RAM, non-volatile memory and
will continue to operate all local control functions in the event of a loss of
communications on the ASC LAN or sub-LAN. Refer to standalone requirements
by application specified in Part 3 of this section. In addition, it shall be able to
share information with every other BC and AAC /ASC on the entire network.
2. Each AAC and ASC shall include self-test diagnostics that allow the AAC /ASC
to automatically relay to the BC, LAN Interface Device or workstation, any
malfunctions or abnormal conditions within the AAC /ASC or alarm conditions of
inputs that exceed desired parameters as determined by programming input.
3. AACs and ASCs shall include sufficient memory to perform the specific control
functions required for its application and to communicate with other devices.
4. Each AAC and ASC must be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation
utilizing its own processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, minimum 8 bit A
to D conversion, voltage transient and lightning protection devices. All volatile
memory shall have a battery backup of at least fifty- (50) hrs with a battery life of
five years.
5. All point data; algorithms and application software within an AAC /ASC shall be
modifiable from the Operator Workstation.
6. AAC and ASC Input-Output Processing
a) Digital Outputs (DO): Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24 VAC or
VDC, 1 amp maximum current. Each shall be configurable as normally open
or normally closed. Each output shall have an LED to indicate the operating
mode of the output and [a manual hand off or auto switch to allow for
UCB STANDARDS
15953-5
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
override]. [If these HOA switches are not provided on the main board they
shall be provided via isolation relays within the control enclosure.] Each DO
shall be discrete outputs from the AAC/ASCs board (multiplexing to a
separate manufacturers board is unacceptable). Provide suppression to limit
transients to acceptable levels.
Analog Inputs (AI): AI shall be O-5 Vdc, 0-10Vdc, 0-20Vdc, and 0-20 mA.
Provide signal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for each input.
Each input shall be a discrete input to the BCs board (multiplexing to a
separate manufacturers board is unacceptable unless specifically indicated
otherwise). A/D converters shall have a minimum resolution of 8-10 bits
depending on application.
Digital Inputs (DI): Monitor dry contact closures. Accept pulsed inputs of at
least one per second. Source voltage for sensing shall be supplied by the BC
and shall be isolated from the main board. Software multiplexing of an AI
and resistors may only be done in non-critical applications and only with
prior approval of Architect/Engineer
Universal Inputs (UI-AI or DI): To serve as either AI or DI as specified
above.
Electronic Analog Outputs (AO) as required by application: voltage mode, 05VDC and 0-10VDC; current mode (4-20 mA). Provide zero and span
calibration and circuit protection. D/A converters shall have a minimum
resolution of 8 bits.
[Analog Output Pneumatic (AOP), 0-20 psi: Pneumatic outputs via an I/P
transducer or 0-10vdc to pneumatic transducer are acceptable. Multiplexed
pneumatic outputs of a separate manufacturer are unacceptable.]
The following only applies to strict BACnet projects; coordinate with UCB
B.
C.
JULY 2012
BACnet AAC(s) and ASC(s) Requirements:

1. The AAC(s) and ASC(s) shall support all BIBBs defined in the BACnet Building
Controller (B-AAC and B-ASC) device profile as defined in the BACnet standard.
2. AAC(s) and ASC(s) shall communicate over the BACnet Building Controller
LAN or the ASC LAN or sub-LAN.
3. Each BC shall be connected to the BACnet Building Controller LAN
communicating to/from other BCs.
Terminal Box Controllers:
1. Terminal box controllers controlling damper positions to maintain a quantity of
supply or exhaust air serving a space shall have an automatically initiated function
that resets the volume regulator damper to the fully closed position on a scheduled
basis. The controllers shall initially be set up to perform this function once every
24 hours. The purpose of this required function is to reset and synchronize the
actual damper position with the calculated damper position and to assure the
damper will completely close when commanded. The software shall select
scheduled boxes randomly and shall not allow more than 5% of the total quantity
of controllers in a building to perform this function at the same time. When
possible the controllers shall perform this function when the supply or exhaust air
system is not operating or is unoccupied.
UCB STANDARDS
15953-6
PART III.
3.01
INSPECTION:
A.
3.02
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS:

A.
3.03
PART 3 - EXECUTION

specifications roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings. Contractor shall
install all controllers in accordance with manufacturers installation procedures and
practices.
HARDWARE APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
JULY 2012
General: The functional intent of this specification is to allow cost effective

application of manufacturers standard products while maintain the integrity and
reliability of the control functions. A Building Controller as specified above is
generally fully featured and customizable whereas the AAC/ASC refers to a more costeffective unit designed for lower-end applications. Specific requirements indicated
below are required for the respective application. Manufacturer may apply the most
cost-effective unit that meets the requirement of that application.
Standalone Capability: Each Control Unit shall be capable of performing the
required sequence of operation for the associated equipment. All physical point data
and calculated values required to accomplish the sequence of operation shall originate
within the associated CU with only the exceptions enumerated below. Refer to Item
2.01 above for physical limitations of standalone functionality. Listed below are
functional point data and calculated values that shall be allowed to be obtained from or
stored by other CUs or SDs via LAN.
Where associated control functions involve functions from different categories
identified below, the requirements for the most restrictive category shall be met.
Application Category 0 (Distributed monitoring)
1. Applications in this category include the following:
a) Monitoring of variables that are not used in a control loop, sequence logic, or
safety.
2. Points on BCs, AACs, and ASCs may be used in these applications as well as SDs
and/or general-purpose I/O modules.
3. Where these points are trended, contractor shall verify and document that the
network bandwidth is acceptable for such trends and is still capable of acceptable
and timely control function.
Application Category 1 (Application Specific Controller):
a) Fan Coil Units
b) Airflow Control Boxes (VAV and Constant Volume Terminal Units)
c) Misc. Heaters
d) Unitary equipment <15 tons (Package Terminal AC Units, Package Terminal
Heat Pumps, Split-System AC Units, Split-System Heat Pumps, WaterSource Heat Pumps)
UCB STANDARDS
15953-7
e)
f)
2.
3.
Induction Units
Variable Speed Drive (VSD) controllers not requiring safety shutdowns of
the controlled device.
ASCs may be used in these applications.
Standalone Capability: Provide capability to execute control functions for the
application for a given setpoint or mode, which shall generally be occupied mode
control. Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired from other
controllers via LANs. In the event of a loss of communications with any other
controller, or any fault in any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of
any of these values, the ASC shall use the last value obtained before the fault
occurred. If such fault has not been corrected after the specified default delay
time, specified default value(s) shall then be substituted until such fault has been
corrected.
Physical/Virtual Point
Scheduling Period
Morning Warm-Up
Load Shed
Summer/Winter
Default Value
Normal
Off (cold discharge air)
Off (no shedding)
Winter
4.
F.
JULY 2012
Mounting:
a) ASCs that control equipment located above accessible ceilings shall be
mounted on the equipment in an accessible enclosure (36 clearance
required) and shall be rated for plenum use.
b) ASCs that control equipment mounted in a mechanical room may either be
mounted in, on the equipment, or on the wall of the mechanical room at an
adjacent, accessible location.
c) ASCs that control equipment mounted outside or in occupied spaces shall
either be located in the unit or in a proximate mechanical space.
d) Section 15953 {23 0913} contractor may furnish ASCs to the terminal unit
manufacturer for factory mounting.
5. Programmability: Operator shall be able to modify all setpoints (temperature
and airflow), scheduling parameters associated with the unit, tuning and set up
parameters, interstage timing parameters, and mode settings. Application-specific
block control algorithms may be used to meet the sequence of operations. The
ability to customize the control algorithm is not required unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
6. Network Restrictions: Limit the number of nodes on the network to the
maximum recommended by the manufacturer.
Application Category 2 (General Purpose Terminal Controller)
a) Unitary Equipment >= 15 tons (Air Conditioners, Heat Pumps, Packaged
Heating/Cooling Units, and the like)
b) Small, Constant Volume Single Zone Air Handling Units
c) Constant Volume Pump Start/Stop
d) Misc. Equipment (Exhaust Fan) Start/Stop
e) Misc. Monitoring (not directly associated with a control sequence and where
trending is not critical)
f) Steam Converter Control
2. BCs may be used in these applications.
UCB STANDARDS
15953-8
3.
G.
JULY 2012
ASCs may be used in these applications provided the ASC meets all requirements
specified below. This category requires a general-purpose ASC to which
application-specific control algorithms can be attached.
4. Standalone Capability: Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired
from other ASCs via LANs. In the event of a loss of communications with any
other ASCs, or any fault in any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of
any of these values, the AAC/ASC shall use the last value obtained before the
fault occurred.
5. Mounting:
a) ASCs that control equipment located above accessible (36 clearance
required) ceilings shall be mounted on the equipment and shall be rated for
plenum use.
b) ASCs that control equipment located in occupied spaces or outside shall
either be mounted within the equipment enclosure (responsibility for physical
fit remains with the contractor) or in a near by mechanical/utility room in
which case it shall be enclosed in a NEMA 1, locking enclosure.
parameters, interstage timing parameters, and mode settings. Operator shall be
able to address and configure spare inputs for monitoring. [Operator shall be able
to address and configure spare outputs for simple single loop control actions or
event initiated actions.] Application-specific block control algorithms may be used
to meet the sequence of operations.
7. Network Restrictions: Limit the number of nodes servicing any one of these
applications on the AAC/ASC LAN to 32.
Application Category 3 (Advanced Application Controller)
a) Large Constant Volume Air Handlers
b) VAV Air Handlers {generally >5,000 and <10,000cfm}
c) Dual Duct Air Handlers {generally >5000 and < 10,000 cfm}
d) Multizone Air Handlers
e) Self Contained VAV Units
2. BCs may be used in these applications.
3. AACs may be used in these applications provided:
a) The AACs meets all requirements specified below.
b) All control functions and physical I/O associated with a given unit resides in
one AAC.
c) Input A/D is 10-bit. Exception: 8-bit input A/D can be used when matched
with high accuracy sensors, the range of which meets the resolution
requirements specified for the applicable sensor in Section 15951 {23 0900}.
d) Pulsed inputs required for the application can be monitored and accumulated
effectively.
4. Standalone Capability: Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired
from other AACs via LANs. In the event of a loss of communications with any
other AACs, or any fault in any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of
any of these values, the AAC shall use the last value obtained before the fault
occurred.
5. Mounting:
UCB STANDARDS
15953-9
a)
H.
AACs that control equipment located above accessible (36 clearance

required) ceilings shall be mounted on the equipment and shall be rated for
plenum use.
b) AACs that control equipment located in occupied spaces or outside shall
either be mounted within the equipment enclosure (responsibility for physical
fit remains with the contractor) or in a near by mechanical/utility room in
which case it shall be enclosed in a NEMA 1, locking enclosure.
parameters, interstage timing parameters, and mode settings. Operator shall be
able to address and configure spare inputs for monitoring. Operator shall be able
to program custom DDC control algorithms and specify trending parameters,
which will be retained in memory in the event of a loss of communications.
Application-specific block control algorithms may be used provided they meet the
sequence of operations. The control algorithms shall be completely customizable.
7. Network Restrictions: Each LAN which participates in the transfer of data
between the CU and the local operator workstation shall be subject to the
following criteria:
a) Limit the number of nodes servicing any one of these applications on the
AAC/ASC LAN to 16.
b) The building controller LAN shall be subject only to manufacturers
published LAN limitations.
Application Category 4
a) Central Cooling Plant
b) Central Heating Plant
c) Cooling Towers
d) Sequenced or Variable Speed Pump Control
e) Local Chiller Control (unit specific)
f) Local Free Cooling Heat Exchanger Control
g) Air Handlers over 10,000 cfm or serving critical areas
2. BCs shall be used in these applications.
The following does not apply to all projects; coordinate with UCB
3.04
NETWORK BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT

A.
B.
3.05
This section is designed to address the MS/TP networks within the DDC systems.
Information passed within the MS/TP network will greatly affect the overall
performance of the building systems. Scan times from the first controller to the last
controller within the building network that exceed 2 seconds are not acceptable. If scan
times of 2 seconds or less cannot be achieved, contact UCB.
Once the network is properly configured the contractor shall provide a network
bandwidth analysis of the controller network. The analysis shall document network
bandwidth utilization does not exceed the requirements stated above for a continuous
one hour period.
CONTROL UNIT REQUIREMENTS

A.
JULY 2012
Refer to Section 15950 {23 0900} for requirements pertaining to control unit quantity
and location.
UCB STANDARDS
15953-10
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15953-11
SECTION 15954
{23 0904}
BAS COMMUNICATION DEVICES
PART I.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.02
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
PART II.
2.01
Network Connection
Local Supervisory LAN Gateways/Routers
Chiller Controls Interface Device (CID)
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.03
PART 1 - GENERAL
Contractor shall provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated
system connecting BCs, AACs, ASCs and Gateways to the University network.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NETWORK CONNECTION
A.
JULY 2012
UCB Private VLAN: Internet-based network connecting the BAS across multiple
facilities with a central data warehouse and server, accessible via standard webbrowser. This is an existing infrastructure and Contractor is not required to configure
any components of this VLAN.
The following ONLY applies to strict BACnet systems and will typically be deleted.
UCB STANDARDS
15954-1
Contractor is however required to provide BACnet Objects and services at the Local
Supervisory LAN via BACnet over IP.
2.02
LOCAL SUPERVISORY LAN GATEWAYS/ROUTERS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.03
The Supervisory Gateway shall be a microprocessor-based communications device that

acts as a gateway/router between the Supervisory LAN CSSs or OWS and the Primary
LAN.
The Gateway shall perform information translation between the Primary LAN and the
Local Supervisory LAN, which is 100 Mbps Ethernet TCP/IP and shall preferably use
BACnet over IP.
The gateway shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM, battery, real-time clock,
communication ports, and power supply as specified for a BC in Section 15953 {23
0903}. Each gateway/router shall be mounted in a lockable enclosure unless it is a PC
that also serves as an OWS.
The gateway/router shall allow centralized overall system supervision, operator
interface, management report generation, alarm annunciation, acquisition of trend data,
and communication with control units. It shall allow system operators to perform the
following functions from the CSS, OWSs, and POTs:
1. Configure systems.
2. Monitor and supervise control of all points.
3. Change control setpoints.
4. Override input values.
5. Override output values
6. Enter programmed start/stop time schedules.
7. View and acknowledge alarms and messages.
8. Receive, store and display trend logs and management reports.
9. Upload/Download programs, databases, etc. as specified.
Upon loss of power to the Gateway, the battery shall provide for minimum 100 hour
backup of all programs and data in RAM. The battery shall be sealed and selfcharging.
The Gateway shall be transparent to control functions and shall not be required to
control information routing on the Primary LAN
CHILLER CONTROLS INTERFACE DEVICE (CID)

A.
B.
C.
The CID shall be a microprocessor-based communications device that acts as a

gateway between the control protocol and the applicable chiller controller protocol.
The CID shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM, battery, communication ports
and, power supply.
Each CID shall support full bi-directional communications translation as more fully
specified in Section 15955 {23 0905}.
Edit the following list as necessary to meet the needs of UCB based on chiller size and application.
D.
JULY 2012
The following points shall be mapped as a minimum:

1. CHW Supply and Return Temperatures
2. CW Supply and Return Temperatures
3. Power Consumption (kW)
4. Percent of Power Consumption (compared to maximum)
UCB STANDARDS
15954-2
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
JULY 2012
Bearing Temperature
Suction and Head Pressures
Suction and Head Temperatures
All available alarms; common alarm as minimum
Chiller Status
Enable/Disable
Current Limit Percent
CHW Setpoint and Setpoint Reset
UCB STANDARDS
15954-3
PART III.
3.01
INSPECTION:
A.
3.02
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS:

A.
B.
C.

roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings.
Contractor shall provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated
system.
Contractor shall closely coordinate with the University, or designated representative, to
establish IP addresses and communications to assure proper operation of the building
control system on the University VLAN.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15954-4
SECTION 15955
{23 0905}
BAS SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING
PART I.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.02
System Software
Programming Description
Control Algorithms
Energy Management Applications
Password Protection
Alarm Reporting
Trending
Data Acquisition and Storage
Dynamic Color Graphics
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
1.03
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section 23 0900 Building Automation System (BAS) General
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
B.
JULY 2012
Fully configure systems and furnish and install all software, programming and dynamic
color graphics for a complete and fully functioning system as specified.
Refer to Section 15950 {23 0900} - Building Automation System (BAS) for general
requirements
UCB STANDARDS
15954-1
C.
1.04
LICENSING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
PART II.
2.01
Include licensing for all software packages at all required workstations.

All software used for the operator interface, programming environment, networking,
database management and any other software used by the Contractor to install the
system or needed to operate the system to its full capabilities shall be licensed and
provided to the University.
All software should be available on all Operator Workstations or CSSs provided, and
on all Portable Operator Terminals. Hardware and software keys to provide all rights
shall be installed on all workstations. At least 2 sets of CDs shall be provided with
backup software for all software provided, so that the University may reinstall any
software as necessary. Include all licensing for workstation operating systems, and all
required third-party software licenses.
Provide licensing and original software copies for each OWS or CSS.
Provide licensing and original software copies for each remote graphic workstation.
Licenses for remote graphic workstations shall allow for access to any site and shall not
be restricted to accessing only the LANs included in this project.
Upgrade all software packages to the release (version) in effect at the end of the
Warranty Period.
Refer to Section 15950 {23 0900} - Building Automation System (BAS) General for
further requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SYSTEM SOFTWARE-GENERAL
A.
B.
2.02
Refer to 15958 {23 0993} - Sequence of Operation for general sequence of operation
requirements.
Functionality and Completeness: The Contractor shall furnish and install all software
and programming necessary to provide a complete and functioning system as specified.
The Contractor shall include all software and programming not specifically itemized in
these Specifications, which is necessary to implement, maintain, operate, and diagnose
the system in compliance with these Specifications.
Configuration: The software shall support the system as a distributed processing
network configuration.
CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
A.
JULY 2012
BC Software Residency: Each BC as defined below shall be capable of control and

monitoring of all points physically connected to it. All software including the
following shall reside and execute at the BC:
1. Real-Time Operating System software
2. Real-Time Clock/Calendar and network time synchronization
3. BC diagnostic software
4. LAN Communication software/firmware
5. Direct Digital Control software
6. Alarm Processing and Buffering software
7. Energy Management software
UCB STANDARDS
15954-2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
JULY 2012
8. Data Trending, Reporting, and Buffering software

9. I/O (physical and virtual) database
10. Remote Communication software
AAC/ASC Software Residency: Each AAC/ASC as defined below shall be capable of
control and monitoring of all points physically connected to it. As a minimum,
software including the following shall reside and execute at the AAC/ASC. Other
software to support other required functions of the AAC/ASC may reside at the BC or
LAN interface device (specified in Section 15954 {23 0904}) with the
restrictions/exceptions per application provided in Section 15953 {23 0903}:
1. Real-Time Operating System software
2. AAC/ASC diagnostic software
3. LAN Communication software
4. Control software applicable to the unit it serves that will support a single mode of
operation
5. I/O (physical and virtual) database to support one mode of operation
Stand Alone Capability: BC shall continue to perform all functions independent of a
failure in other BC/AAC/ASC or other communication links to other BCs/AACs/ASCs.
Trends and runtime totalization shall be retained in memory. Runtime totalization shall
be available on all digital input points that monitor electric motor status. Refer also to
Section 15953 {23 0903} for other aspects of stand alone functionality.
Operating System: Controllers shall include a real-time operating system resident in
ROM. This software shall execute independently from any other devices in the system.
It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization
scheme to allow functional override of control functions. Refer also to Section 15953
{23 0903} for other aspects of the controllers operating system.
Network Communications: Each controller shall include software/firmware that
supports the networking of CUs on a common communications trunk that forms the
respective LAN. Network support shall include the following:
1. Building Controller/Primary LAN shall be a high-speed network designed and
optimized for control system communication. If a Primary LAN communications
trunk is severed, BCs shall reconfigure into two separate LANs and continue
operations without interruption or Operator intervention.
2. Controller communication software shall include error detection, correction, and
re-transmission to ensure data integrity.
3. Operator/System communication software shall facilitate communications
between other BCs, all subordinate AACs/ASCs, Gateways and LAN Interface
Devices or Operator Workstations. Software shall allow point interrogation,
adjustment, addition/deletion, and programming while the controller is on line and
functioning without disruption to unaffected points. The software architecture
shall allow networked controllers to share selected physical and virtual point
information throughout the entire system.
Diagnostic Software: Controller software shall include diagnostic software that
checks memory and communications and reports any malfunctions
Alarm/Messaging Software: Controller software shall support alarm/message
processing and buffering software as more fully specified below.
Application Programs: CUs shall support and execute application programs as more
fully specified below:
UCB STANDARDS
15954-3
1.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
2.03
All Direct Digital Control software, Energy Management Control software, and
functional block application programming software templates shall be provided in
a ready-to-use state, and shall not require (but shall allow) Owner programming.
Security: Controller software shall support multiple level password access restriction
as more fully specified below.
Direct Digital Control: Controller shall support application of Direct Digital Control
Logic. All logic modules shall be provided pre-programmed with written
documentation to support their application. Provide the following logic modules as a
minimum:
1. Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control with analog, PWM and floating
output
2. Two Position control (Hi or Low crossing with deadband)
3. Single-Pole Double-Throw relay
4. Delay Timer (delay-on-make, delay-on-break, and interval)
5. Hi/Low Selection
6. Reset or Scaling Module
7. Logical Operators (AND, OR, NOT, XOR)
Psychrometric Parameters: Controller software shall provide preprogrammed
functions to calculate and present psychrometric parameters (given temperature and
relative humidity) including the following as a minimum: Enthalpy, Wet Bulb
Temperature.
Updating/Storing Application Data: Site-specific programming residing in volatile
memory shall be uploadable/downloadable from an OWS or CSS connected locally, to
the Primary LAN, to the Local Supervisory LAN and remotely via the internet.
Initiation of an upload or download shall include the following methods; Manually and
Automatically upon detection of a loss or change.
Restart: System software shall provide for orderly shutdown upon loss of power and
automatic restart upon power restoration. Volatile memory shall be retained; outputs
shall go to programmed fail (open, closed, or last) position. Equipment restart shall
include a user definable time delay on each piece of equipment to stagger the restart.
Loss of power shall be alarmed at operator interface indicating date and time.
Time Synchronization: Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any device
on the network that supports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall be able to
select to set the time and date for an individual device, devices on a single network, or
all devices simultaneously. Automatic time synchronization shall be provided.
Misc. Calculations: System software shall automate calculation of psychometric
functions, calendar functions, kWh/kW, and flow determination and totalization from
pulsed or analog inputs, curve-fitting, look-up table, input/output scaling, time
averaging of inputs and A/D conversion coefficients.
APPLICATION PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION

A.
B.
JULY 2012
The application software shall be user programmable.

This specification generally requires a programming convention that is logical, easy to
learn, use, and diagnose. General approaches to application programming shall be
provided by one, or a combination, of the following conventions:
1. Point Definition: provide templates customized for point type, to support input of
individual point information. Use standard BACnet Objects as applicable.
UCB STANDARDS
15954-4
2.
C.
2.04
2.05
Graphical Block Programming: Manipulation of graphic icon blocks, each of

which represents a subroutine, in a functional/logical manner forming a control
logic diagram. Blocks shall allow entry of adjustable settings and parameters via
pop-up windows. Provide a utility that shall allow the graphic logic diagrams to
be directly compiled into application programs. Logic diagrams shall be viewable
either off-line, or on-line with real-time block output values.
Provide a means for testing and/or debugging the control programs both off-line and
on-line.
ENERGY MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS

A.
System shall have the ability to perform all of the following energy management
routines via preprogrammed function blocks or template programs. As a minimum
provide the following whether or not required in the software:
1. Time-of-Day Scheduling
2. Calendar-Based Scheduling
3. Holiday Scheduling
4. Temporary Schedule Overrides
5. Optimal Start/Optimal Stop-based on space temperature offset, outdoor air
temperature, and building heating and cooling capacitance factors as a minimum
6. Night Setback and Morning Recovery Control, with ventilation only during
occupancy
7. Economizer Control (enthalpy or dry-bulb)
8. Economizer Control (hydronic)
9. Peak Demand Limiting / Load Shedding
10. Lighting/Occupancy Control
11. Dead Band Control
B.
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator
intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs
shall be applied to building equipment as described in Section 15958 {23 0993} Sequence of Operation.
PASSWORD PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
JULY 2012
Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the Universitys

authorized BAS Administrator to limit workstation control, display and database
manipulation capabilities as they deem appropriate for each user, based upon an
assigned user name with a unique password.
All passwords for the system shall be provided to the University including
administrator, dealer, or factory level passwords for the systems provided under this
project.
Passwords shall restrict access to all Control Units.
Each user name shall be assigned to a discrete access level. A minimum of five levels
of access shall be supported. Alternately, a comprehensive list of
accessibility/functionality items shall be provided, to be enabled or disabled for each
user.
UCB STANDARDS
15954-5
E.
F.
G.
2.06
A minimum of 50 user names shall be supported and programmed per the Universitys
direction.
Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for the access level
assigned to their user name.
User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to
prevent operators from inadvertently leaving interface device software on-line.
ALARM AND EVENT MANAGEMENT REPORTING

A.
B.
JULY 2012
Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarms and
messages to operator devices and memory files. The CSS shall perform distributed,
independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to noncritical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no
time shall a BCs ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at an
Operator Workstation or local handheld device, or by communications with other
panels on the network.
1. Alarm Descriptor: Each alarm or point change shall include that points English
language description, and the time and date of occurrence. In addition to the
alarms descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display and
store an alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct
operator response.
2. Alarm Prioritization: The software shall allow users to define the handling and
routing of each alarm by their assignment to discrete priority levels. A minimum
of five priority levels shall be provided. For each priority level, users shall have
the ability to enable or disable an audible tone whenever an alarm is reported and
whenever an alarm returns to normal condition. Users shall have the ability to
manually inhibit alarm reporting for each individual alarm and for each priority
level. Contractor shall coordinate with the University on establishing alarm
priority definitions. Alarm Level 1 Life Safety (i.e. smoke detector), Level 2
Critical (i.e. controller failure), Level 3 Abnormal (i.e. out-of-range temperature),
Level 4 Energy Waste (i.e. fighting valves), Level 5 Maintenance Message (i.e.
runtime monitor, filter status).
3. Alarm Report Routing: Each alarm priority level shall be associated with a
unique user-defined list of operator devices including any combination of local or
remote workstations, printers, email accounts, SMS accounts and workstation disk
files. All alarms associated with a given priority level shall be routed to all
operator devices on the user-defined list associated with that priority level. For
each priority level, alarms shall be automatically routed to a default operator
device in the event that alarms are unable to be routed to any operator device
assigned to the priority level.
4. Alarm Acknowledgment: For alarm priority levels that are directed to a
workstation screen, an indication of alarm receipt shall be displayed immediately
regardless of the application in use at the workstation, and shall remain on the
screen until acknowledged by a user having a password that allows alarm
acknowledgment. Upon acknowledgment, the complete alarm message string
(including date, time, and user name of acknowledging operator) shall be stored in
the CSS database.
It shall be possible for any operator to receive a summary of all alarms regardless of
acknowledgement status; for which a particular recipient is enrolled for notification;
UCB STANDARDS
15954-6
based on current event state; based on the particular event algorithm (e.g., change of
value, change of state, out of range, and so on); alarm priority; and notification class.
Include the following only if you are trying to mandate strict BACnet Interoperability.
C.
BACnet Alarming Services: All alarms and events shall be implemented using
standard BACnet event detection and notification mechanisms. The workstation shall
receive BACnet alarm and event notifications from any gateway or BACnet controller
in the system and display them to an operator. The workstation shall also log alarms
and events, provide a way for an operator with sufficient privilege to acknowledge
alarms, and log acknowledgements of alarms. It shall be possible for an operator to
receive, at any time, a summary of all alarms that are currently in effect at any site
whether or not they have been acknowledged. Operators shall also be able to view and
change alarm limits for any alarm at the appropriate password level.
D.
Alarm Historical Database: The database shall store all alarms and events object
occurrences in an ODBC or an OLE database-compliant relational database. Provide a
commercially available ODBC driver or OLE database data provider, which would
allow applications to access the data using standard Microsoft Windows Data Services.
2.07
TRENDING
A.
The software shall display historical data in both a tabular and graphical format. The
requirements of this trending shall include the following:
1. Provide trends for all physical points, virtual points and calculated variables.
2. The sample rate and data selection shall be selectable by the operator.
3. The trended value range shall be selectable by the operator.
4. Workstations shall be able to display up to four simultaneous trend graphs with up
to four data points per graph.
5. The data points must be exportable from any operator interface in CSV or MS
Excel format.
B.
Control Loop Performance Trends: Controllers incorporating PID control loops

shall also provide high resolution sampling in less than five second increments for
verification of control loop performance.
Data Buffering and Archiving: Trend data shall be buffered at the CUs, and
uploaded to CSS storage when archival is desired. All archived trends shall be
transmitted to the on-site OWS as applicable. Uploads shall occur based upon a userdefined interval, manual command, or automatically when the trend buffers become
full.
Time Synchronization: Provide a time master that is installed and configured to
synchronize the clocks of all BACnet devices supporting time synchronization.
Synchronization shall be done using Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). All trend
sample times shall be able to be synchronized. The frequency of time synchronization
message transmission shall be selectable by the operator.
C.
D.
2.08
TOTALIZATION
A.
JULY 2012
The software shall support totalizing analog, digital, and pulsed inputs and be capable
of accumulating, storing, and converting these totals to engineering units used in the
documents. These values shall generally be accessible to the Operator Interfaces to
support management-reporting functions.
UCB STANDARDS
15954-7
B.
C.
2.09
SCHEDULING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.10
Totalization of electricity use/demand shall allow application of totals to different rate

periods, which shall be user definable.
When specified to provide electrical or utility Use/Demand, the Contractor shall obtain
from the local utility all information required to obtain meter data, including k factors,
conversion constants, and the like.
Provide a graphic utility for user-friendly operator interface to adjust equipmentoperating schedules.
Scheduling feature shall include multiple seven-day master schedules, holiday
schedules and override schedules, each with start time and stop time. Master schedules
shall be individually editable for each day and holiday.
Scheduling feature shall allow for each individual equipment unit to be assigned to one
of the master schedules.
Timed override feature shall allow an operator to temporarily change the state of
scheduled equipment. An override command shall be selectable to apply to an
individual unit, all units assigned to a given master schedule, or to all units in a
building. Timed override shall terminate at the end of an operator selectable time, or at
the end of the scheduled occupied/unoccupied period, whichever comes first. A
password level that does not allow assignment of master schedules shall allow a timed
override feature.
A yearly calendar feature shall allow assignment of holidays, and automatic reset of
system real time clocks for transitions between daylight savings time and standard
time.
OVERRIDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
JULY 2012
BAS shall provide an audit log report of all overrides currently active, historical
overrides along with the user who initiated the override.
Provide a screen graphic for manual override of the "OFF" for all Scheduled Start/Stop
Zones. Provide the necessary software to start any desired zone's equipment by touch
screen. The program shall permit operator selection of zones and shall enable all
related equipment for that particular zone. The program shall index the selected zone
to an "ON" mode in a minimum of one-hour increments for a period of up to six hours
in the override condition. Once overridden, the zone equipment shall operate in the
occupied mode, including exhaust fan interlocks.
Timed override feature shall allow an operator to temporarily change the state of
scheduled equipment. An override command shall be selectable to apply to an
individual unit, all units assigned to a given master schedule, or to all units in a
building. Timed override shall terminate at the end of an operator selectable time, or at
the end of the scheduled occupied/unoccupied period, whichever comes first. A
password level that does not allow assignment of master schedules shall allow a timed
override feature.
Provide equipment override programs for all energy recovery units, air handling units,
and heating and ventilating units. Program shall allow operator to override ERU,
AHU, or HVU Off command to enable individual units for operation without
overriding Zone command. Duration of override shall be for 3 hours. Intent is to allow
ERUs, AHUs, or HVUs to run for maintenance servicing without requiring other
equipment in the zone to operate as would be required if the Zone were overridden on.
UCB STANDARDS
15954-8
E.
F.
G.
2.11
Provide a single point outdoor air damper override. Intent is to allow the BAS operator
to command all outdoor air intake dampers controlled by BAS to be closed by a single
command.
Provide a single point Zones override. Intent is to allow the BAS operator to command
all Zones to the unoccupied mode, effectively closing all outdoor air dampers and
shutting down exhaust fans.
Override shall be possible for analog or time clock values for a given period of time,
until a given time or permanently. Overrides may be cleared at the keyboard or
through programmable user functions.
OPERATOR INTERFACE GRAPHIC SOFTWARE

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
JULY 2012
Graphic software shall facilitate user-friendly interface to all aspects of the System
Software specified above. The intent of this specification is to require a graphic
package that provides for intuitive operation of the systems without extensive training
and experience. It shall facilitate logical and simple system interrogation,
modification, configuration, and diagnosis.
Graphic software shall support multiple simultaneous screens to be displayed and
resizable in a Windows-like environment. All functions excepting text entry
functions shall be executable with a mouse.
Graphic software shall provide for multitasking such that third-party programs can be
used while the OWS software is on line. Software shall provide the ability to alarm
graphically even when operator is in another software package.
Operating system software shall be Microsoft Windows XP Professional, or latest
version of Windows supported by the BAS manufacturer and approved by UC.
The software shall allow for the Universitys creation of user-defined, color graphic
displays of geographic maps, building plans, floor plans, and mechanical and electrical
system schematics. These graphics shall be capable of displaying all point information
from the database including any attributes associated with each point (i.e., engineering
units, etc.). In addition, operators shall be able to command equipment or change
setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse
Screen Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various
system graphic screens via a graphical penetration scheme by using the mouse to select
from menus or button icons. Each graphic screen shall be capable of having a unique
list of other graphic screens that are directly linked through the selection of a menu
item or button icon.
Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic physical point values shall automatically updated
at a minimum frequency of 6 updates per minute without operator intervention. Point
value fields shall be displayed with a color code depicting normal, abnormal, override
and alarm conditions.
Point Override Feature: Each displayed point shall be individually enabled/disabled
to allow mouse-driven override of digital points or changing of analog points. Such
overrides or changes shall occur in the control unit, not just in the workstation
software. The graphic point override feature shall be subject to password level
protection. Points that are overridden shall be reported as an alarm, and shall be
displayed in a coded color. The alarm message shall include the operators user name.
A list of points that are currently in an override state shall be available through menu
selection.
UCB STANDARDS
15954-9
I.
J.
2.12
Dynamic Symbols: Provide a selection of standard symbols that change in appearance

based on the value of an associated point.
1. Analog symbol: Provide a symbol that represents the value of an analog point as
the length of a line or linear bar.
2. Digital symbol: Provide symbols such as switches, pilot lights, rotating fan
wheels, etc. to represent the value of digital input and output points.
3. Point Status Color: Graphic presentations shall indicate different colors for
different point statuses. (For instance, green = normal, red = alarm, gray (or ???)
for non-response).
4. Terminal Equipment Color: Floor plan graphics shall be color coded by the
equipment served as follows; green = zone temperature within setpoint, blue =
zone temperature below setpoint, yellow = zone temperature above setpoint, red =
zone temperature in alarm range.
Graphics Development Package: Graphic development and generation software shall
be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.
1. The Contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols
depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters,
dampers, etc.), mechanical system components (e.g., pumps, chillers, cooling
towers, boilers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal
reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.
2. The Graphic Development Package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device to
allow the user to perform the following:
a) Define symbols
b) Position items on graphic screens
c) Attach physical or virtual points to a graphic
d) Define background screens
e) Define connecting lines and curves
f) Locate, orient and size descriptive text
g) Define and display colors for all elements
h) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or
other displays.
i) Create hot spots or link triggers to other graphic displays or other functions in
the software.
j) Insert frames of html pages linked internally or externally to the CSS.
REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER WORKSTATION GRAPHIC SOFTWARE

Edit the following based on how operators will remotely connect
A.
Remote graphic operator software shall provide all the functionality specified for the
local graphic software.
B.
System configuration uses an Internet server and presents web pages that can be pulled
up using a standard browser.
C.
Software shall be capable of initiating communication to system, upon user command,
to perform all specified functions. Software shall be capable of initiating
communication to the LANs in accordance with user-programmed time schedules to
upload trend and report data. Software shall be capable of communicating from the
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15954-10
LAN in accordance with user-programmed time schedules to report alarms, upload

trend, and report data.
PART III.
3.01
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A.
3.02
Contractor shall thoroughly and completely configure BAS system software,

supplemental software, network communications, CSS, OWS, [remote operator
workstation], portable operators terminal, printer, and remote communications.
SITE-SPECIFIC APPLICATION PROGRAMMING

A.
B.
C.
3.03
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Provide all database creation and site-specific application control programming as

required by these Specifications, national and local standards and for a fully
functioning system. Contractor shall provide all initial site-specific application
programming and thoroughly document programming. Generally meet the intent of the
written sequences of operation. It is the Contractors responsibility to request
clarification on sequence issues that require such clarification.
All site-specific programming shall be fully documented and submitted for review and
approval, both prior to downloading into the panel, at the completion of functional
performance testing, and at the end of the warranty period.
All programming, graphics and data files must be maintained in a logical system of
directories with self-explanatory file names. All files developed for the project will be
the property of the University and shall remain on the workstation(s)/server(s) at the
completion of the project.
PASSWORD SETUP
A.
JULY 2012
Set up the following password levels to include the specified capabilities:

1. Level 1: (Universitys BAS Administrator)
a) Level 2 capabilities
b) View, add, change and delete user names, passwords, password levels
c) All unrestricted system capabilities including all network management
functions.
2. Level 2: (System Engineers)
b) Configure system software
c) Modify control unit programs
d) Modify graphic software
e) Essentially unrestricted except for viewing or modifying user names,
passwords, password levels
3. Level 3: (Senior Maintenance Technician)
b) Override output points
c) Change setpoints
d) Change equipment schedules
e) Exit BAS software to use third party programs
UCB STANDARDS
15954-11
4.
B.
3.04
Level 4: (Maintenance / Service Desk)

b) Acknowledge alarms
c) Temporarily override equipment schedules
5. Level 5: (Read Only)
a) Display all graphic data
b) Trend point data
Contractor shall assist Universitys operators with assigning user names, passwords and
password levels. UCB has designated custom access levels for use by contractors
actively using the system.
POINT PARAMETERS
A.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
Provide the following minimum programming for each analog input:

1. Name
2. Address
3. Scanning frequency or COV threshold
4. Engineering units
5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units
6. High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition
7. High and low value reporting limits (reasonableness values), which shall prevent
control logic from using shorted or open circuit values.
8. Default value to be used when the actual measured value is not reporting. This is
required only for points that are transferred across the primary and/or secondary
controlling networks and used in control programs residing in control units other
than the one in which the point resides. Events causing the default value to be
used shall include failure of the control unit in which the point resides, or failure
of any network over which the point value is transferred.
9. Selectable averaging function that shall average the measured value over a user
selected number of scans for reporting.
Provide the following minimum programming for each analog output:
1. Name
2. Address
3. Output updating frequency
4. Engineering units
5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units
6. Output Range
7. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting.
Provide the following minimum programming for each digital input:
1. Name
2. Address
3. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.)
4. Debounce time delay (Digital Filter)
5. Message and alarm reporting as specified
UCB STANDARDS
15954-12
6.
D.
3.05
TRENDS
A.
B.
C.
3.06
Reporting of each change of state, and memory storage of the time of the last
change of state
7. Totalization of on-time (for all motorized equipment status points), and
accumulated number of off-to-on transitions.
Provide the following minimum programming for each digital output:
1. Name
2. Address
3. Output updating frequency
4. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.)
5. Direct or Reverse action selection
6. Minimum on-time
7. Minimum off-time
8. Status association with a DI and failure alarming (as applicable)
9. Reporting of each change of state, and memory storage of the time of the last
change of state.
10. Totalization of on-time (for all motorized equipment status points), and
accumulated number of off-to-on transitions.
11. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting.
Contractor shall establish and store trend logs. Trend logs shall be prepared for each
physical input and output point, and all dynamic virtual points such as setpoints subject
to a reset schedule, intermediate setpoint values for cascaded control loops, and the like
as directed by the University.
The University will analyze trend logs of the system operating parameters to evaluate
normal system functionality. Contractor shall establish these trends and ensure they are
being stored properly.
1. Data shall include a single row of field headings and the data thereafter shall be
contiguous. Each record shall include a date and time field or single date stamp.
Recorded parameters for a given piece of equipment or component shall be
trended at the same intervals and be presented in a maximum of two separate 2dimensional formats with time being the row heading and field name being the
column heading.
The Contractor shall demonstrate functional trends as specified for a period of 30 days
after successful system demonstration before Substantial Completion of the system.
ALARMS
A.
B.
C.
JULY 2012
General: Contractor will be responsible for setting initial alarm parameters. Reporting
actions will be setup by UCB. No reporting actions will be initiated unless directed by
UCB.
Override Alarms: Any point that is overridden through the override feature of the
graphic workstation software shall be reported as a Level 3 alarm.
Analog Input Alarms: For each analog input, program an alarm message for
reporting whenever the analog value is outside of the programmed alarm limits. Report
a Return-to-Normal message after the analog value returns to the normal range, using
a programmed alarm differential. The alarm limits shall be individually selected by
UCB STANDARDS
15954-13
UCB. Contractor shall coordinate with UCB for final values based on the following
parameters:
1. Space temperature, except as otherwise stated in sequence of operation: Level 3
a) Low alarm: 64F
b)
2.
3.
D.
3.07
Low return-to-normal: 68F
c) High alarm: 85F

d) High return-to-normal: 80F
Controlled media temperature other than space temperature (e.g. AHU discharge
air temperature, steam converter leaving water temperature, condenser water
supply, chilled water supply, etc.): Level 3 (If controlled media temperature
setpoint is reset, alarm setpoints shall be programmed to follow setpoint)
a)
Low alarm: 3F below setpoint
b)
c)
Low return-to-normal: 2F below setpoint

High alarm: 3F above setpoint
d) High return-to-normal: 2F above setpoint.

AHU mixed air temperature: Level 4
a)
Low alarm: 45F
b)
c)
Low return-to-normal: 46F

High alarm: 90F
d) High return-to-normal: 89F

4. Duct Pressure:
a) Low alarm: 0.5w.g. below setpoint
b) Low return-to-normal: 0.25w.g. below setpoint
c) High alarm: 0.5w.g. above setpoint
d) High return-to-normal: 0.25w.g. above setpoint
5. Space humidity:
a) Low alarm: 35%
b) Low return-to-normal: 40%
c) High alarm: 75%
d) High return-to-normal: 70%
BAS System Failure Alarm: Generate alarm that reads BAS System Failure.
Alarm shall be generated when communication is lost to any controller or when any
controller is determined to be in an abnormal state.
GRAPHIC SCREENS
A.
JULY 2012
Floor Plan Screens: The contract document drawings will be made available to the
Contractor in AutoCAD format upon request. These drawings may be used only for
developing backgrounds for specified graphic screens; however the University does not
guarantee the suitability of these drawings for the Contractors purpose.
1. Provide graphic floor plan screens for each floor, wing, or tower of the building.
Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room
screens. Indicate all equipment zones with corresponding ON/OFF status.
Indicate the location of temperature sensors associated with each temperature-
UCB STANDARDS
15954-14
B.
C.
JULY 2012
controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHUs, etc.) on the
floor plan screens. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each
temperature sensor symbol. Use a distinct line symbol to demarcate each terminal
unit zone boundary. Use distinct colors to demarcate each air handling unit zone.
Mechanical floor plan drawings will be made available to the contractor upon
request for the purpose of determining zone boundaries. Indicate room numbers
as provided by the Owner. Provide a drawing link from each space temperature
sensor symbol and equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to
each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen.
2. Provide graphic floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and a
plan screen of the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical
equipment. Provide a drawing link from each equipment symbol shown on the
graphic plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic
graphic screen.
3. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building
key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically
indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link graphic building
key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale
graphic floor plan screen to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic
floor plan screens.
4. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building plan.
System Schematic Screens: Provide graphic system schematic screen for each HVAC
subsystem controlled with each I/O point in the project appearing on at least one
graphic screen. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints,
current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc. as applicable. General
layout of the system shall be schematically correct. Input/output devices shall be
shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineering units
for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be
included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a popup window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the mouse. Indicate all
adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic screen or, if space does
not allow, on a supplemental linked-setpoint screen.
1. Provide graphic screens for each air handling system. Indicate outside air
temperature and enthalpy, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied,
unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down). Link screens for air handlers to the heating
system and cooling system graphics. Link screens for supply and exhaust systems
if they are not combined onto one screen.
2. Provide a graphic screen for each zone. Provide links to graphic system schematic
screens of air handling units that serve the corresponding zone.
3. Provide a cooling system graphic screen showing all points associated with the
chillers, cooling towers and pumps. Indicate outside air dry-bulb temperature and
calculated wet-bulb temperature. Link screens for chilled water and condenser
water systems if they cannot fit onto one cooling plant graphic screen.
4. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports
showing current and monthly electric uses, demands, peak values, and other
pertinent values.
Alarms: Each programmed alarm shall appear on at least one graphic screen. In
general, alarms shall be displayed on the graphic system schematic screen for the
system that the alarm is associated with (for example, chiller alarm shall be shown on
UCB STANDARDS
15954-15
graphic cooling system schematic screen). For all graphic screens, display analog and
digital values that are in a alarm condition in a red color.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15954-16
SECTION 15958
{23 0993}
PART I.
GENERAL............................................................................................................................................ 1
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
SECTION INCLUDES ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1

RELATED DOCUMENTS: ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1
SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
PART II.
PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................................... 2
PART III.
3.01
3.02
3.03
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................... 3
GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
DEMAND LIMITING CONTROL: ........................................................................................................................................................... 5
AIR HANDLING UNITS - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 6
AIR HANDLING UNIT DIAGNOSTICS - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 10
AIR HANDLER MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................ 11
GLYCOL HEAT RECOVERY RUN AROUND LOOP ................................................................................................................ 11
STEAM TO HW CONVERTERS WITH VV PUMPS .............................................................................................................................. 12
CENTRAL PLANT MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................ 13
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15958-i
PART I.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.02
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the General Conditions and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Section 23 0500 Common Work Results for HVAC
Section 23 0903 BAS Field Panels
Section 15959 BAS Commissioning
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.04
Air Handling Units

Glycol Recovery System
Steam to Hot Water Converter
Central Plant Monitoring
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.03
GENERAL
This Section defines the manner and method by which controls operate and sequence the
controlled equipment. Included in this section are general requirements and logic
strategies that expand on the specific sequences shown on the drawings. Specific
drawing sequences refer to this section and reference the logic strategies as required.
Refer to the control drawings for specific sequences for individual systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
JULY 2012
Refer to Section 15950 {23 0900} and Division 1 for requirements for control shop
drawings, product data, Users Manual, etc.
UCB STANDARDS
15958-1
PART II.
PRODUCTS
Not Used
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15958-2
PART III.
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
B.
Sequences specified herein indicate the functional intent of the systems operation
and may not fully detail every aspect of the programming that may be required to
obtain the indicated operation. Contractor shall provide all programming
necessary to obtain the sequences/system operation indicated.
When an air handling unit is not in operation, control devices shall remain in
their off positions. Off positions may differ from the normal (meaning
failed) position. Except as specified otherwise, off and normal positions of
control devices shall be as follows:
Device
Heating coil valves
Cooling coil valves
Outside air damper
Return air damper
Exhaust/relief air damper
Var. Freq. Drive
C.
D.
Off Position
closed
closed
closed
open
closed
Off
Normal Position
open
closed
closed
open
closed
Min. Speed
Unless specified otherwise, throttling ranges, proportional bands, and cycle

differentials shall be centered on the associated setpoint. All modulating
feedback control loops shall include the capability of having proportional,
integral, and derivative action. Unless the loop is specified proportional only
or P+I, Contractor shall apply appropriate elements of integral and derivative
gain to each control loop which shall result in stable operation, minimum settling
time, and shall maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum
allowable variance.
Scheduling Terminology: When air handlers are scheduled throughout the day,
the following defines the terminology used:
Coordinate occupancy schedules with UCB on a per building basis.
1.
2.
3.
4.
JULY 2012
Occupied Period: period of time when the building is in use and occupied.
Unless indicated otherwise, this period is defined as X:XX AM - X:XX PM
weekdays and X:XX AM to XX:XX PM weekends. Exclude all national
holidays. Generally systems will be fully operational throughout this period
and ventilation air shall be continuously introduced. Space temperature
setpoints will generally be in the normal range of 69-77F.
Unoccupied period: period of time when the building or zone is not in use
and unoccupied. Ventilation air shall not be introduced.
Preoccupancy Period: Time prior to the Occupied period when the
systems are returning the space temperatures from setback to normal or
occupied setpoints (warm-up and cool-down). Ventilation air shall not be
introduced unless outside air conditions permit free-cooling. Time period
shall be determined by an optimum start strategy unless otherwise specified.
Setback Period: Setback will typically coincide start with the end of the
occupied period and end with the start of the preoccupacy period, however it
shall be provided with its own schedule. Generally systems will be off
except to maintain a setback temperature.
UCB STANDARDS
15958-3
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
JULY 2012
Where any sequence or occupancy schedule calls for more than one motorized
unit to start simultaneously, the BAS start commands shall be staggered by 5
second (adj.) intervals to minimize inrush current.
Alarm messages specified throughout the sequences are assigned to discrete
priority levels. Priority levels dictate the handling and destination of alarm
reports, and are defined in Section 15955 {23 0905} - ATC System Software and
Programming.
Wherever a value is indicated as adjustable (adj.), it shall be modifiable, with the
proper password level, from the operator interface or via a function block menu.
For these points, it is unacceptable to have to modify programming statements to
change the setpoint.
When a power failure is detected in any phase, the BAS start commands shall be
retracted immediately from all electrically powered units served by the failed
power source. If the associated primary control unit (PCU) is powered by normal
or emergency power, it may monitor its own power source as an indication of
power status. If the PCU is powered by uninterruptable power supply (UPS), or
if PCU is not capable of monitoring its own power for use in sequences,
Contractor shall provide at least one voltage monitor (three phase when
applicable) per building. When the BAS detects that power has been restored, all
equipment for which the BAS start command had been retracted shall be
automatically restarted on staggered 5 second intervals to minimize inrush
current. When loss of equipment status coincides with a power failure, system
shall not alarm individual equipment failures. Instead, only a single Level 2
alarm shall be enunciated.
Where reset action is specified in a sequence of operation, but a reset schedule is
not indicated on the drawings, one of the following methods shall be employed:
1. Contractor shall determine a fixed reset schedule which shall result in stable
operation and shall maintain the primary variable within the specified
maximum allowable variance.
2. A floating reset algorithm shall be used which increments the secondary
variable setpoint (setpoint of control loop being reset) on a periodic basis to
maintain primary variable setpoint. The recalculation time and reset
increment shall be chosen to maintain the primary variable within the
specified maximum allowable variance.
Where a supply air temperature or duct pressure setpoint is specified to be reset
by the space temperature of the zones calling for the most cooling/heating, the
following method shall be employed:
variable (e.g., supply air temperature or duct pressure) setpoint on a periodic
basis to maintain primary variable (e.g. space temperature) setpoint. The
reset increment shall be determined by the quantity of need heat or need
cool requests from individual SCUs. A SCUs need heat virtual point
shall activate whenever the zones space temperature falls below the
currently applicable (occupied or unoccupied) heating setpoint throttling
range. A SCUs need cool virtual point shall activate whenever the zones
space temperature rises above the currently applicable (occupied,
unoccupied, or economy) cooling setpoint throttling range. The
recalculation time and reset increment shall be chosen to maintain the
primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance while
UCB STANDARDS
15958-4
K.
L.
M.
N.
3.02
minimizing overshoot and settling time. Reset range maximum and

minimum values shall limit the setpoint range.
Where a supply air temperature, duct pressure, or differential water pressure
setpoint is specified to be reset by valve or damper position of the zone or zones
calling for the most cooling/heating, the following method shall be employed:
variable (e.g., supply air temperature, pipe or duct pressure) setpoint on a
periodic basis to maintain primary variable (e.g. cooling valve, heating
valve, damper position) setpoint of 85% open. The reset increment shall be
calculated based on the average position of the quantity of the worst (most
open valve/damper) zone(s) as specified. The recalculation time, reset
increment and control device position influence shall be chosen to maintain
the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance
while minimizing overshoot and settling time. The BAS analog output
value shall be acceptable as indicating the position of the control device.
2. Alternatively to continuously calculating the average of the quantity of
worst valve/damper positions, a method similar to the one described above
may be employed whereby the need heat or need cool virtual point shall
increment by one unit each time a zones valve/damper position rises to
greater than 95%. The quantity of need heat or need cool points shall
then be the basis for reset.
Where prove operation of a device (generally controlled by a digital output) is
indicated in the sequence, it shall require that the BAS shall, after an adjustable
time delay after the device is commanded to operate (feedback delay), confirm
that the device is operational via the status input. If the status point does not
confirm operation after the time delay or anytime thereafter for an adjustable
time delay (debounce delay) while the device is commanded to run, an alarm
shall be enunciated audibly and via an alarm message at the operator interface
and print at the alarm printers. A descriptive message shall be attached to the
alarm message indicating the nature of the alarm and actions to be taken.
Contractor shall provide messages to meet this intent. Upon failure, run
command shall be removed and the device shall be locked out until the alarm is
manually acknowledged unless specified otherwise.
BAS shall provide for adjustable maximum rates of change for increasing and
decreasing output from the following analog output points:
1. Speed control of variable speed drives
2. Chiller supply water temperature setpoint reset
3. Chiller demand limit
4. Travel rate of tower isolation and chiller isolation valves
Wherever a value is indicated to be dependent on another value (i.e.: setpoint
plus 5F) BAS shall use that equation to determine the value. Simply providing a
virtual point that the operator must set is unacceptable. In this case three virtual
points shall be provided. One to store the parameter (5F), one to store the
setpoint, and one to store the value which is the result of the equation.
DEMAND LIMITING CONTROL:

A.
JULY 2012
BAS shall monitor kW demand over a 15-minute sliding window period.
UCB STANDARDS
15958-5
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.03
Demand limiting shall be disabled during the winter billing period. When
demand limiting is enabled, it shall be possible for the operator to disable it on a
daily basis during, but it shall be automatically re-enabled each day at 12
midnight.
On a rise in kW to within 200 kW (adj.) of setpoint, a Level 4 alarm shall be
enunciated and BAS shall begin to make one load shed command every 3
minutes (adj.). On a fall in kW to 200 kW less than the demand setpoint, BAS
shall begin to broadcast one load restore command every 3 (adj.) minutes on a
first shed, first restored basis. If demand exceeds the demand setpoint and there
are no more loads left to shed, the demand setpoint shall be increased to the
maximum demand experienced. Demand setpoint shall be automatically reset to
an adjustable value at the beginning of each billing period.
Loads available for shedding are defined elsewhere in this specification
section.
On a rise in kW to within 50 kW (adj.) of setpoint, a Level 3 and Level 4 alarm
shall be enunciated.
AIR HANDLING UNITS - GENERAL

A.
JULY 2012
Logic Strategies: The BAS shall fully control the air handlers. Generally the
BAS shall energize the AH (start the fans and activate control loops) as dictated
for each air handle. The following indicates when and how the BAS shall
energize the AHs and control various common aspects of them. The following
logic strategies shall be included by reference, if required, from each AHU
sequence of operation:
1. Scheduled Occupancy: BAS shall determine the occupancy periods
(occupied, unoccupied, preoccupancy, and setback) as defined above. The
following details the common control aspects related to the scheduled
occupancy.
a) Occupied Period: BAS shall energize the AH during all occupied
periods. Note that the beginning of the occupancy period shall be set
sufficiently before the actual start of occupancy to obtain the required
building component of ventilation per ASHREA 62. Minimum OA
flow setpoint shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Normal
setpoints shall apply.
b) Unoccupied Period: Minimum OA flow shall be 0 CFM or the
minimum OA damper position shall be 0%. If during the unoccupied
period there is a request for occupancy override, the occupancy mode
shall become active for an adjustable period. The unoccupied period
and the preoccupancy period will typically overlap.
c) Setback Period: the BAS shall deenergize the unit except as required
to maintain a setback temperature as indicated in the individual
sequences with a 5F cycle differential. Generally, where setback
temperatures apply in multiple zones, the worst zone shall control the
system. Setback setpoints generally apply except during preoccupancy
[and night purge]. If during the unoccupied period there is a request for
occupancy override, the occupancy mode shall become active for an
adjustable period.
UCB STANDARDS
15958-6
d)
2.
3.
JULY 2012
Preoccupancy: BAS shall energize the AH continuously during the

preoccupancy period. Minimum OA flow shall be 0 CFM or the
minimum OA damper position shall be 0%. Normal setpoints shall
apply. Preoccupancy duration shall be one of the following as
specified by reference:
1)
Fixed: The duration of the preoccupancy period shall be fixed
as scheduled by the operator/
2)
Optimum: The duration of the morning warm-up period shall
vary according to outside air temperature and space temperature
such that the space temperature rises to occupied period heating
setpoint at the beginning of, but not before, the scheduled
occupied period. The duration of the cool-down period shall vary
according to outside air temperature and space temperature such
that the space temperature falls to the occupied period cooling
setpoint at the beginning of, but not before, the scheduled
occupied period
Night Purge Cycle: The night purge cycle shall configure the AH for 100%
fresh air intake operation and will be enabled/disabled manually via a
graphic icon. While the mode is enabled and during the unoccupied period,
BAS shall energize the unit (and associated exhaust/relief fans) when the
OA temperature falls to 10F below space temperature AND space
temperature is greater than the occupied heating setpoint
AND outdoor air enthalpy is below 24 Btu/#. BAS shall de-energize AH
when the space temperature falls to within 5F of OA temperature OR the
space temperature fall(s) below the occupied heating setpoint
OR outdoor air enthalpy rises to 25 Btu/#.During the night purge cycle any
applicable terminal units shall be indexed to their normal setpoints.
Minimum OA Control: BAS shall maintain minimum ventilation during
the occupied period. The following strategies may apply:
a) Balanced Position: During the occupied period, applicable mixing and
OA dampers shall never be positioned less than the position set for the
required minimum OA ventilation rate. If the air handler has a single
OA damper that is capable of economizer, the minimum position output
shall be determined by the balancer. If the AH has a two position
minimum OA damper, that position shall be fully open to its balanced
position. This logic strategy is only applicable to constant volume Ahs.
b) Reset Balanced Position: During the occupied period, applicable
mixing and OA dampers shall never be positioned less than the
minimum position. Minimum position shall be reset between limits of a
position delivering system exhaust make-up air CFM and the design
minimum position delivering design minimum CFM to maintain a CO2
setpoint of 900 ppm (adj.). Loop shall be a sample and bump or
dynamic proportional only loop tuned for the slow response. The
balancer shall determine the minimum position outputs at both extreme
points. This logic strategy is only applicable to constant volume Ahs.
c) Damper Controlled Fixed: During the occupied period, applicable
mixing dampers shall be modulated to maintain an OA flow rate of no
less than the MVR as dictated in the design and required by ASHRAE
62. Setpoint flow rates shall be provided by the A/E. Flow rate shall be
UCB STANDARDS
15958-7
4.
JULY 2012
determined in any of the following ways as specified for the particular

AH:
1)
Measured directly by an OA flow station
2)
As determined by CO2 mixing equations using the SA, OA, and
RA CO2 sensors
d) Damper Controlled Reset: During the occupied period, applicable
mixing dampers shall be modulated to maintain an OA flow rate
setpoint. Setpoint shall be reset between limits of system exhaust
make-up air CFM and the design minimum CFM to maintain an RA
CO2 setpoint of 900 ppm (adj.). Loop shall be a sample and bump or
dynamic proportional only loop tuned for the slow response. Setpoint
flow rates shall be provided by the A/E. Flow rate shall be determined
in any of the following ways as specified for the particular AH:
1)
Measured directly by an OA flow station
2)
As determined by CO2 mixing equations using the SA, OA, RA,
and/or Space CO2 sensors
e) Mixed Air Temperature Control: Minimum position of the OA
damper shall be set to obtain the design required minimum OA. This
balanced minimum position shall remain fixed. Whenever the
minimum loop is active BAS shall control the dampers to maintain a
mixed air temperature setpoint which will be 2F below discharge air
temperature cooling setpoint (adj.).
VAV Return Fan Capacity Control: BAS shall control the output of the
return fan as follows:
a) Flow Tracking: The return air fan shall run to maintain a return flow
setpoint of the supply flow minus an offset value. The offset value
shall be determined as follows:
1)
Fixed Differential: It shall be fixed at the design minimum OA
value.
2)
Differential Reset From RA CO2: It shall be reset between
limits of system exhaust make-up air CFM and the design
minimum CFM to maintain an RA CO2 setpoint of 900 ppm
(adj.). Loop shall be a sample and bump or dynamic
proportional only loop tuned for the slow response. Setpoint
flow rates shall be provided by the A/E
3)
Differential Reset From Measured OA to Maintain Fixed
OA: It shall be reset to maintain the measured minimum OA
flow at the design value any time the economizer mode is
inactive. Whenever it is inactive, it shall be set to the value that
existed when the unit became active.
4)
Differential Reset From Measured OA to Maintain Reset OA
When the economizer mode is inactive, it shall be reset to
maintain the measured OA flow setpoint. The OA setpoint shall
be reset between limits of system exhaust make-up air CFM and
the design minimum CFM to maintain a CO2 setpoint of 900
ppm (adj.). Loop shall be a sample and bump or dynamic
proportional only loop tuned for the slow response. Setpoint
flow rates shall be provided by the A/E. Whenever the
UCB STANDARDS
15958-8
5.
6.
7.
8.
JULY 2012
economizer is active, it shall be set to the value that existed when

the unit became active.
b) Rescaled Output Capacity Control: The output for the return fan
capacity control shall be rescaled from the output of the to the supply
device such that the design minimum OA temperature is maintained at
both maximum and 50% flow conditions. The balancing contractor
shall determine the coordinated output.
Airside Economizer: BAS shall modulate the mixing dampers to provide
free cooling when conditions merit. The free cooling shall generally be
staged before any mechanical cooling. While conditions merit, dampers
shall be modulated in a DA PID loop to maintain mixed air temperature at a
setpoint as specified for the individual unit. Economizer logic shall remain
enabled during setback cooling where applicable. One of the following
strategies shall be used to enable the economizer mode:
a) Dry Bulb Comparison: Economizer mode shall be active while the
unit is energized AND when OA enthalpy fall below 28 btu/# AND
outside air temperature falls below return air temperature (with 2F
cycle differential). Economizer mode shall be inactive when OA
enthalpy rises above 29 btu/# ORoutside air temperature rises above
return air temperature (with 2F cycle differential), dampers shall
return to their scheduled minimum positions as specified above.
Economizer shall remain enabled during setback cooling.
b) Dry Bulb Switch: Economizer mode shall be active while the unit is
energized AND when OA enthalpy fall below 28 btu/# AND outside air
temperature falls below the switching setpoint of 70F (adj.) (with 5F
cycle differential). Economizer mode shall be inactive when OA
enthalpy rises above 29 btu/# OR outside air temperature rises above
switching setpoint, dampers shall return to their scheduled minimum
positions as specified above.
c) Enthalpy Comparison: Economizer mode shall be active while the
unit is energized AND when outside air enthalpy falls below return air
enthalpy (with 2btu/# cycle differential). Economizer mode shall be
inactive when outside air enthalpy rises above return air enthalpy,
dampers shall return to their scheduled minimum positions as specified
above.
Sequenced Heating and Cooling: BAS shall control the heating and
cooling coils and air side economizer as detailed for the particular AH.
Program logic shall directly prohibit the heating and cooling valves as well
as the heating valve and economizer damper to be open (or above minimum)
simultaneously. This does not apply to cooling and reheat valves that are
used simultaneously for dehumidification.
Mixed Air Low Limit Override: BAS shall override the signal to the OA
damper via a proportional only loop to maintain a minimum mixed air
temperature of 45F (adj.) (loop shall output 0% at 45F which shall be
passed to the output via a low selector).
Freeze Safety: Upon operation of a freezestat the following sequence shall
occur:
UCB STANDARDS
15958-9
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
The unit fans shall be deenergized. Typically supply and return fans
where applicable shall be deenergized via a hardwired interlock, and an
indication of the operation shall be displayed by the BAS.
All hot water valves and chilled water valves will be commanded to
100% open.
All hot water coil pumps and chilled water coil pumps will be
commanded to run.
Outside air dampers shall fully close and return air dampers shall fully
open.
BAS shall enunciate appropriate alarm and remove and lock out the
start command, which shall initiate "fan failure" alarms.
9.
B.
3.04
Smoke Safety: Upon indication of smoke by a smoke detector, FAC shall

deenergize the AH. Smoke detector shall notify the fire alarm system and
BAS, shut down the fans, and close the smoke dampers via hard-wired
interlock.
10. High or Low Pressure Safety: Upon activation of a high or low pressure
safety switch, AH shall be deenergized, fans shall be deenergized via a hard
wired interlock, and an indication of the operation shall be sensed by the
BAS. BAS shall enunciate appropriate alarm and remove and lock out the
start command, which shall initiate "fan failure" alarms.
11. Vibration Safety (Applicable To Units >50,000 cfm): Upon activation of
a vibration safety switch, respective fan shall be deenergized, fan shall be
deenergized via a hard wired interlock and an indication of the operation
shall be sensed by the BAS. BAS shall enunciate appropriate alarm and
remove and lock out the start command.
The detailed logic strategies above shall be required by reference to them in
each of the individual sequences specified elsewhere.
AIR HANDLING UNIT DIAGNOSTICS - GENERAL

A.
JULY 2012
Diagnostic Strategies: In addition to the standard alarm limits specified for all
sensed variables the BAS monitor and diagnose anomalies in the operation of the
air handlers. The following diagnostic strategies shall be included by reference
with each air handler with any specific clarifications required:
1. Run Time Limit: BAS shall accumulate the runtime of the status of
associated rotating equipment and enunciate a level 5 alarm to indicate that
the unit is in need of service.
2. Filter Monitoring: BAS shall monitor the differential pressure transmitter
across the filter bank(s). A level 5 alarm shall be reported when pressure
drop exceeds the transmitters setting.
3. Start Monitoring: BAS shall accumulate the starts of cycling equipment.
BAS shall further enunciate a level 5 alarm when the number of starts
exceeds the specified value within the specified time period. (ie: more than
3 starts in a 30 min period)
UCB STANDARDS
15958-10
3.05
AIR HANDLER MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT

A.
3.06
General: The BAS shall monitor various aspects of the air handling systems and
calculate parameters as specified below to facilitate operations and management.
1. Trending: The BAS shall continuously monitor, calculate and display the
following parameters at the intervals indicated. These values shall be stored
initially in the buffer of the controlling control unit, and then be uploaded
periodically and stored on a specified hard disc.
2. Parameters to be trended:
a) All temperature sensors at 1 hour intervals
b) All relative humidity sensors at 1 hour intervals
c) All pressure sensors at 1 hour intervals
d) All run requests and statuses on a change in value
e) All analog loop outputs on 1 hour intervals
f) Calculated enthalpies in 2 hour intervals
g) Summed cooling and heating requests on 2 hour intervals
GLYCOL HEAT RECOVERY RUN AROUND LOOP

A.
General: BAS shall control the glycol heat recovery system and equipment and
provide monitoring and diagnostic information for management purposes.
a)
B.
C.
JULY 2012
System Enable: System shall be enabled whenever the following
criteria are met:

1)
System manually enabled by the operator at the operator
interface, AND
2)
Air systems served be recovery system are operational, AND
3)
The criteria for efficient operation of the system as written below
are met.
b) System Disable: System shall be disabled whenever any of the
following occurs:
1)
System manually disabled by the operator at the operator
interface, OR
2)
Air systems served by the recovery system are off, OR
3)
The criterion for efficient operation of the system as written
below is not met.
Enable Criteria:
1. Outside air temperature must be lower than the exhaust air temperature
entering the heat recovery coil.
2. Outside air temperature must be higher than the lower limit temperature of
the glycol system.
Circulating Pump Control
1. Whenever the system is enabled, circulating pump shall run continuously.
2. BAS shall prove operation of the pump. Upon failure of a pump, an alarm
3. BAS shall monitor pump status and accumulate runtime of the pump.
UCB STANDARDS
15958-11
3.07
STEAM TO HW CONVERTERS WITH VV PUMPS

A.
B.
C.
D.
JULY 2012
General: BAS shall control the hot water systems and equipment and provide
monitoring and diagnostic information for management purposes.
Heating Enable: Heating shall be enabled when:
1. Any hot water valve opens to more than 50% continuously for 10 min.
(adj.).
2. OR, the Outside Air temperature is below 55F
3. OR, whenever manually enabled by the operator at the operator interface.
Once enabled, the Heating Water System shall run for a minimum of 1 hour.
HW Pump Control:
1. Whenever the system is enabled, a minimum of one heating water pump
shall run continuously.
2. BAS shall use a PID loop to maintain the differential pressure setpoint
across the remote differential pressure sensor. The differential pressure
setpoint shall initially be set at 15 psi (adj. as determined by the balance
contractor).
3. The output of this loop shall control the starting, stopping, and speed of the
pumps as follows:
a) On a PID output of greater than 95% for 5 min (adj.), the BAS shall
start an additional pump. The new pump shall ramp to speed per
adjustable acceleration rates.
b) If more that one pump is running, on a PID output of less than 40% for
5 min (adj.), the BAS shall stop a pump.
4. The output of the PID loop shall control the VSDs of all operating pumps at
the same speed.
5. BAS shall prove operation of each pump individually. Upon failure of a
pump, the standby shall be started (if not already running) and an alarm
6. BAS shall monitor pump status and accumulate runtime of the pumps. The
BAS shall rotate the lead and lag pumps as follows:
a) Whenever a pump is started, the BAS shall start the pump with the least
runtime.
7. Whenever a pump is stopped, the BAS shall stop the pump with the highest
runtime.
Heating Water Temperature Control: BAS shall reset the hot water supply
temperature setpoint via linear reset from 180F (adj.) to 110F (adj.) as the OA
temperature rises from 20F (adj.) to 60F (adj.)
1. The BAS shall modulate the 1/3 [and 2/3 steam] valves to the Heat
Exchanger in sequence via a PID loop to maintain the HW supply
temperature setpoint.
2. The valves shall remain closed until pump status is proven.
3. Steam supply pressure to the Heat Exchanger shall be monitored by the
BAS and enunciate an alarm if it falls below 5 psi (adj.)
UCB STANDARDS
15958-12
3.08
CENTRAL PLANT MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT

A.
B.
C.
General: The BAS shall monitor various aspects of the heating and cooling
systems and calculate parameters as specified below to facilitate plant operations
and management.
Trending: The BAS shall continuously monitor, calculate and display the
following parameters at the intervals indicated. These values shall be stored
initially in the buffer of the controlling control unit, and then be uploaded
periodically and stored on a specified hard disc. Contractor shall format reports
from this data to support one of the following data formats:
1. Quote (text strings) and Comma delimited
2. Microsoft EXCEL
Parameters to be Trended:
1. Load on the secondary systems in MBH per the following equation: (Return
Temp-Supply Temp) * (GPM) / .5. This shows cooling as a positive heat
load and heating as a negative heat load. Note that multipliers on this value
to accommodate the BAS processors are acceptable as long as they are
clearly indicated. This value shall be trended and stored every two hours.
2. All temperature sensors at 1 hour intervals.
3. All relative humidity sensors at 1 hour intervals.
4. All pressure sensors at 1 hour intervals.
5. All run requests and statuses on a change in value.
6. All analog loop outputs on 1 hour intervals.
7. Calculated enthalpies in 2 hour intervals.
8. Summed cooling and heating requests on 2 hour intervals.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15958-13
SECTION 15959
{23 0801}
BAS SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
PART I.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.02
BAS and equipment testing and start-up

Validation of proper and thorough installation of BAS and equipment
Functional testing of control systems
Documentation of tests, procedures, and installations
Coordination of BAS training
Documentation of BAS Operation and Maintenance materials
RELATED SECTIONS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
1.03
GENERAL

Section 15950 BAS General Requirements
Section 23 0900 - BAS General Requirements
Section 15951 - BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices and Sensors
Section 15954 - BAS Communication Devices
Section 15955 - BAS Software and Programming
Section 15958 - Sequence of Operation
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A.
This section defines responsibilities of the Controls Contractor to commission the BAS.
Edit this to clarify whether there is a formal Cx process and indicate responsibilities.
B.
Refer to Section 01800 for an overview of the commissioning process, entities involved
in the process, training requirements, start-up requirements, and requirements for
functional performance testing.
The following is written based on the use of a separate Commissioning Authority (CA). If
that is not the case on the project, the Contractor must still start up and commission the BAS.
Therefore edit the responsibilities as appropriate for the project commissioning
requirements.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15959-1
1.04
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
B.
Completely install and thoroughly inspect, startup, test, adjust, balance, and document
all systems and equipment.
[Assist Commissioning Authority in] Perform verification and performance testing.
This will generally include the following:
1. [Attend Commissioning (Cx) progress and coordination meetings.]
2. [Prepare and submit required draft forms and systems information.]
3. Establish trend logs of system operation as specified herein.
4. Demonstrate system operation.
5. Manipulate systems and equipment to facilitate testing.
6. Provide instrumentation necessary for verification and performance testing.
7. Manipulate control systems to facilitate verification and performance testing.
8. Train Universitys Representatives as specified in Part III of this section.
The following two items only apply to formal commissioning processes. Edit as applicable.
C.
Provide a BAS Technician to work at the direction of Commissioning Authority for
software optimization assistance for a minimum of [80] hours for Scope 1 and [40]
hours for Scope 2. Refer to Part 3 for a description of the software optimization.
Edit the following to suit the program and application.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
PART II.
2.01
Submit the following Quality Assurance / Quality Control documentation directly to

UCB [and the CA]:
1. Quality Assurance Plan
a) Contractor must provide a description of their quality assurance operations
for the commissioning phase of this project. The description shall include
protocols for each step of commissioning listed within this section including
testing, reporting, coordination with the CA and remediation of all action
items.
Submit the following items directly to the [CA] [GC]:
1. BAS Start-Up Report (reference div. 1 and section 3.01 below): Submit four (4)
copies prior to scheduling of Functional Performance Testing.
2. BAS Training Plan (defined below): Submit prior to scheduling BAS
Demonstration.
3. Trend and alarm logs as required during the Acceptance Period and Warranty
Period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
INSTRUMENTATION
A.
JULY 2012
Instrumentation required to verify readings and test the system and equipment
performance shall be provided by Contractor [and made available to Commissioning
Authority]. Generally, no testing equipment will be required beyond that required to
perform Contractors work under these Contract Documents. All equipment used for
testing and calibration shall be NIST/NBS traceable and calibrated within the preceding
12-month period. Certificates of calibration shall be made available when requested.
UCB STANDARDS
15959-2
PART III.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Edit the following to suit the application.

3.01
BAS START-UP TESTING, ADJUSTING, CALIBRATION

A.
JULY 2012
Work and/or systems installed under this Division shall be fully functioning prior to
Demonstration and Acceptance Phase. Contractor shall start, test, adjust, and calibrate
all work and/or systems under this Contract, as described below:
1. Inspect the installation of all devices. Review the manufacturers installation
instructions and validate that the device is installed in accordance with them.
2. Verify proper electrical voltages and amperages, and verify that all circuits are
free from faults.
3. Verify integrity/safety of all electrical connections.
4. Coordinate with TAB subcontractor to obtain control settings that are determined
from balancing procedures. Record the following control settings as obtained
from TAB contractor, and note any TAB deficiencies in the BAS Start-Up Report:
a) Optimum duct static pressure setpoints for VAV air handling units.
b) Minimum outside air damper settings for air handling units.
c) Optimum differential pressure setpoints for variable speed pumping systems.
d) Calibration parameters for flow control devices such as VAV boxes and flow
measuring stations.
1)
BAS contractor shall provide portable device as a minimum to the
TAB [and CA] to facilitate calibration. Connection for any given
device shall be local to it (i.e. at the VAV box, wireless, or at the
thermostat). Portable operators terminal shall allow querying and
editing of parameters required for proper calibration and start-up.
5. Test, calibrate, and set all digital and analog sensing and actuating devices.
Calibrate each instrumentation device by making a comparison between the BAS
display and the reading at the device. Record the measured value and displayed
value for each device in the BAS Start Up Report.
6. Check and set zero and span adjustments for all transducers and transmitters.
Excessive signal buffering is not acceptable, span adjustments must be within 2%
of their respective end points. (i.e. Do not control a 2-10vdc actuator with a 010vdc signal; worst case signal should be 1.8-10.2vdc.)
7. For dampers and valves:
a) Check for adequate installation including free travel throughout range and
adequate seal.
b) Where loops are sequenced, check for proper control without overlap.
8. For actuators:
a) Check to insure that device seals tightly when the appropriate signal is
applied to the operator.
b) Check for appropriate fail position, and that the stroke and range is as
required.
UCB STANDARDS
15959-3
c)
[For pneumatic operators, adjust the operator spring compression as required

to achieve close-off. If positioner or volume booster is installed on the
operator, calibrate per manufacturers procedure to achieve spring range
indicated. Check split-range positioners to verify proper operation.]
d) For sequenced electronic actuators, calibrate per manufacturers instructions
to required ranges.
9. Check each digital control point by making a comparison between the control
command at the CU and the status of the controlled device. Check each digital
input point by making a comparison of the state of the sensing device and the
Operator Interface display. Record the results for each device in the BAS Start-Up
Report.
10. For outputs to reset other manufacturers devices (for example, VSDs) and for
feedback from them, calibrate ranges to establish proper parameters. Coordinate
with representative of the respective manufacturer and obtain their approval of the
installation.
11. Verify proper sequences by using the approved checklists to record results and
submit with BAS Start-Up Report. Verify proper sequence and operation of all
specified functions.
12. Verify that all safety devices trip at appropriate conditions. Adjust setpoints
accordingly.
Edit to suit project
13. Tune all control loops to obtain the fastest stable response without hunting, offset
or overshoot. Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control
loop in the BAS Start Up Report. Except from a startup, maximum allowable
variance from set point for controlled variables under normal load fluctuations
shall be as follows. Within 3 minutes of any upset (for which the system has the
capability to respond) in the control loop, tolerances shall be maintained
(exceptions noted):
a)
b)
Duct air temperature: 1F.

Space Temperature: 2F
c)
Chilled Water: 1F
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Hot water temperature: 3F.

Duct pressure: 0.25 w.g.
Water pressure: 1 psid
Duct or space Humidity: 5%
Air flow control: 5% of setpoint velocity.
Space Pressurization (on active control systems): 0.05 wg with no door or
window movements.
14. For interface and DDC control panels:
a) Ensure devices are properly installed with adequate clearance for
maintenance and with clear labels in accordance with the record drawings.
b) Ensure that terminations are safe, secure and labeled in accordance with the
record drawings.
c) Check power supplies for proper voltage ranges and loading.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15959-4
d)
B.
3.02
Ensure that wiring and tubing are run in a neat and workman-like manner,
either bound or enclosed in trough.
e) Check for adequate signal strength on communication networks.
f) Check for standalone performance of controllers by disconnecting the
controller from the LAN. Verify the event is annunciated at Operator
Interfaces. Verify that the controlling LAN reconfigures as specified in the
event of a LAN disconnection.
g) Ensure that all outputs and devices fail to their proper positions/states.
h) Ensure that buffered and/or volatile information is held through power
outage.
i) With all system and communications operating normally, sample and record
update/annunciation times for critical alarms fed from the panel to the
Operator Interface.
j) Check for adequate grounding of all DDC panels and devices.
k) Thoroughly clean interior and exterior of control panel per manufacturers
instructions.
15. For Operator Interfaces:
a) Verify that all elements on the graphics are functional and are properly bound
to physical devices and/or virtual points, and that hot links or page jumps are
functional and logical.
b) Output all specified BAS reports for review and approval.
c) Verify that the alarm printing and logging is functional and per requirements.
d) Verify that trends are archiving to disk and provide a sample to the
[Commissioning Authority and] University for review.
e) Verify that paging/dial-out alarm annunciation is functional.
f) Verify the functionality of remote Operator Interfaces and that a robust
connection can be established consistently.
g) Verify that required third party software applications required with the bid are
installed and are functional.
16. Start-up and check out control air compressors, air drying, and filtering systems in
accordance with the appropriate section and with manufacturers instructions.
17. Verify proper interface with fire alarm system.
Submit Start-Up Test Report: Report shall be completed, submitted, and approved
prior to Substantial Completion.
SENSOR CHECKOUT AND CALIBRATION

A.
B.
JULY 2012
General Checkout: Verify that all sensor locations are appropriate and are away from
causes of erratic operation. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at
one end. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure
difference, make sure they are reading within 0.2F of each other for temperature and
within a tolerance equal to 2% of the reading of each other for pressure. Tolerances for
critical applications may be tighter.
Calibration: Calibrate all sensors using one of the following procedures:
1. Sensors Without Transmitters - Standard Application: Make a reading with a
calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor at various points across
the range. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or
UCB STANDARDS
15959-5
C.
3.03
COIL VALVE LEAK CHECK

A.
3.04
Verify proper close-off of the valves. Ensure the valve seats properly by simulating the
maximum anticipated pressure difference across the circuit. Calibrate air temperature
sensors on each side of coil to be within 0.5F of each other. Via the Operator
Interface, command the valve to close. Energize fans. After 5 minutes observe air
temperature difference across coil. If a temperature difference is indicated, and the
piping surface temperature entering the coil is within 3F of the water supply temp,
leakage is probably occurring. If it appears that it is occurring, close the isolation
valves to the coil to ensure the conditions change. If they do, this validates the valve is
not closing. Remedy the condition by adjusting the stroke and range, increasing the
actuator size/torque, replacing the seat, or replacing the valve as applicable.
VALVE STROKE SETUP AND CHECK

A.
B.
3.05
BAS) is within the tolerances specified for the sensor. If not, adjust offset and
range, or replace sensor. Where sensors are subject to wide variations in the
sensed variable, calibrate sensor within the highest and lowest 20% of the
expected range.
2. Sensors With Transmitters - Standard Application: Disconnect sensor. Connect a
signal generator in place of sensor. Connect ammeter in series between
transmitter and BAS control panel. Using manufacturers resistance-temperature
data, simulate minimum desired temperature. Adjust transmitter potentiometer
zero until the ammeter reads 4 mA. Repeat for the maximum temperature
matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the OI.
Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to conform to tolerances.
Reconnect sensor. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6
inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent
thermostat, gage or BAS) is within the tolerances specified. If not, replace sensor
and repeat. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal
generator.
Sensor Tolerance: Sensors shall be within the tolerances specified for the device.
Refer to Section 15951.
For all valve and actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the
Operator Interface readout.
Set pumps to normal operating mode. Command valve closed, verify that valve is
closed, and adjust output zero signal as required. Command valve open, verify position
is full open and adjust output signal as required. Command the valve to various few
intermediate positions. If actual valve position doesnt reasonably correspond, replace
actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics).
BAS DEMONSTRATION
A.
JULY 2012
Demonstrate the operation of the BAS hardware, software, and all related components
and systems to the satisfaction of the [Commissioning Authority and] University.
Schedule the demonstration with the Universitys representative 1 week in advance.
Demonstration shall not be scheduled until all hardware and software submittals, and
the Start-Up Test Report are approved. If the Work fails to be demonstrated to
conform with Contract specifications, so as to require scheduling of additional site
visits by the [Commissioning Authority] University for re-demonstration, Contractor
UCB STANDARDS
15959-6
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
JULY 2012
shall reimburse University for costs of subsequent [Commissioning Authority] site

visits.
The Contractor shall supply all personnel and equipment for the demonstration,
including, but not limited to, instruments, ladders, etc. Contractor-supplied personnel
must be competent with and knowledgeable of all project-specific hardware, software,
and the HVAC systems. All training documentation and submittals shall be at the job
site.
Demonstration shall typically involve small representative samples of
systems/equipment randomly selected by the University [and CA].
The system shall be demonstrated following the same procedures used in the Start-Up
Test by using the approved Commissioning Checklists. Demonstration shall include,
but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Demonstrate that required software is installed on BAS workstations.
Demonstrate that graphic screens, alarms, trends, and reports are installed as
submitted and approved.
2. Demonstrate that points specified and shown can be interrogated and/or
commanded (as applicable) from all workstations, as specified.
3. Demonstrate that remote communication abilities are in accordance with these
Specifications.
4. Demonstrate correct calibration of input/output devices using the same methods
specified for the Start-Up Tests. A maximum of 10 percent of I/O points shall be
selected at random by the [Commissioning Authority and/or] University for
demonstration. Upon failure of any device to meet the specified end-to-end
accuracy, an additional 10 percent of I/O points shall be selected at random [by
Commissioning Authority] for demonstration. This process shall be repeated until
100 percent of randomly selected I/O points have been demonstrated to meet
specified end-to-end accuracy.
5. Demonstrate that all DDC and other software programs exist at respective field
panels. The Direct Digital Control (DDC) programming and point database shall
be as submitted and approved.
6. Demonstrate that all DDC programs accomplish the specified sequences of
operation.
7. Demonstrate that the panels automatically recover from power failures, as
specified.
8. Demonstrate that the stand-alone operation of panels meets the requirements of
these Specifications. Demonstrate that the panels' response to LAN
communication failures meets the requirements of these Specifications.
9. Identify access to equipment selected [by Commissioning Authority] [by the
University]. Demonstrate that access is sufficient to perform required
maintenance.
10. Demonstrate that required trend graphs and trend logs are set up per the
requirements.
BAS Demonstration shall be completed and approved prior to Substantial Completion.
Any tests successfully completed during the demonstration will be recorded as passed
for the functional performance testing and will not have to be retested.
UCB STANDARDS
15959-7
3.06
TREND LOGS
A.
Contractor shall configure and analyze all trends required under Section 15955.
The following item only applies to a formal Cx process.

3.07
WARRANTY PERIOD:
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.08
SOFTWARE OPTIMIZATION ASSISTANCE

A.
B.
3.09
Warranty Period shall not commence until successful completion of the BAS
Demonstration.
Trending: Throughout the Warranty Period, trend logs shall be maintained.
Contractor shall forward archive trend logs to the Commissioning Authority/University
for review upon Commissioning Authority/University request. Commissioning
Authority/University will review these and notify contractor of any warranty work
required.
Opposite Season Testing: Within 6 months of completion of the Acceptance Phase,
Commissioning Authority/University shall schedule and conduct Opposite Season
functional performance testing. Contractor shall participate in this testing and remedy
any deficiencies identified
End of Warranty Visit: Commissioning Authority/University will conduct an End of
Warranty walkthrough prior to the end of the Warranty Period. Contractor shall
participate in this walkthrough and remedy any deficiencies identified.
The Contractor shall provide the services of a BAS Technician as specified above at the
project site to be at the disposal of the [Commissioning Authority/] University. The
purpose of this requirement is to make changes, enhancements and additions to control
unit and/or workstation software that have been identified by the [Commissioning
Authority/] University during the construction and commissioning of the project and
that are beyond the specified Contract requirements. The cost for this service shall be
included with the bid. Requests for assistance shall be for contiguous or noncontiguous 8-hour days, unless otherwise mutually agreed upon by Contractor,
[Commissioning Authority,] and University. The Universitys representative shall
notify contractor 2 days in advance of each day of requested assistance.
The BAS Technician provided shall be thoroughly trained in the programming and
operation of the controller and workstation software. If the BAS Technician provided
cannot perform every software task requested by the [Commissioning Authority/]
University in a timely fashion, contractor shall provide additional qualified personnel at
the project site as requested by the [Commissioning Authority/] University, to meet the
total specified requirement on-site.
BAS OPERATOR TRAINING AND O&M MANUALS

A.
B.
JULY 2012
Contractor shall submit a Training Plan for the scope of training for which they are
responsible. Training Plan shall be forwarded to the Division 15 Contractor who will
compile, organize, format, and forward to the Engineer for review.
On-Site Training: Provide services of controls contractors qualified technical
personnel for [five] 8-hour days to instruct University's personnel in operation and
maintenance of BAS. Instruction shall be in classroom setting at the project site for
appropriate portions of the training. Training may be in non-contiguous days at the
request of the University. The Universitys representative shall notify contractor 1
UCB STANDARDS
15959-8
week in advance of each day of requested training. The Contractors designated

training personnel shall meet with the Engineer and Universitys representative for the
purpose of discussing and fine-tuning the training agenda prior to the first training
session. Training agenda shall generally be as follows:
1. Basic Operator Workstation (OWS) Training For all potential users of the
OWS:
a) Brief walk-through of building, including identification of all controlled
equipment and condensed demonstration of controller portable and built-in
operator interface device display capabilities.
b) Brief overview of the various parts of the O&M Manuals, including hardware
and software programming and operating publications, catalog data, controls
installation drawings, and DDC programming documentation.
c) Demonstration of workstation login/logout procedures, password setup, and
exception reporting.
d) Demonstration of workstation menu penetration and broad overview of the
various workstation features.
e) Overview of systems installed.
f) Present all site-specific point naming conventions and points lists, open
protocol information, configuration databases, back-up sequences,
upload/download procedures, and other information as necessary to maintain
the integrity of the BAS.
g) Overview of alarm features.
h) Overview of trend features.
i) Overview of workstation reports.
2. BAS Hardware Training For Maintenance and Control Technicians
a) Review of installed components and how to install/replace, maintain,
commission, and diagnose them
3. BAS Technician Training
a) Introduction to controller programming and overview of the programming
application interface.
b) General review of sequence of operation and control logic for the project site,
including standalone and fail-safe modes of operation.
c) Uploading/Downloading and backing up programs.
d) Network administration.
e) Review of setpoint optimization and fine-tuning concepts.
The following item must be coordinated with UCB with regard to applicability and
cost.
4. Advanced Training: Advanced Training shall be provided for [two] individuals
and be provided at an off-site training facility containing installations of the
proposed system. Contractor shall pay training registration and materials fee and
the University shall pay all employee expenses (travel, per diem, salary).
a) Contractor shall provide the standard, advanced training offering on all
Control Programming Applications.
b) Contractor shall provide the standard, advanced training offering on
Advanced Installation, Configuration, Maintenance, and Network
Administration.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15959-9
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15959-10
UCB Temperature Control-Specifiers Guide

Mechanical Division 15985: Control Sequence of Operation
Index
I.
Part 1 - General
1.01 Summary
1.02 System Description
II.
Part 2 - Not Used
III.
Part 3 - Execution
3.01 VAV Air Handler
3.02 Hot Water Heating
3.03 Elevator Shaft Venting
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15985-1
SECTION 15985
CONTROL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1. Hot Water Heating.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. General:
a. The intent of this design guide Section is to provide representative control
sequences that the University has found satisfactory to use as an example in the
final design of typical projects.
b. The typical systems described are simple solutions to typical control designs.
Before using them, be sure the control design for the project system is typical. Be
aware that the final design is the responsibility of the Design Consultant.
c. The University requires functional performance testing of the complete control
system prior to Owner acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A. VAV AIR HANDLER
[Note to Consultant: Customize, edit, and include control sequences for each
piece of equipment on the project to be controlled.]
1.
JULY 2012
The occupancy mode (Occupied-Unoccupied) shall be determined through a

user-adjustable, graphical, seven-day schedule with an additional holiday
schedule.
UCB STANDARDS
15985-2
2.
Occupied Mode:
a. The supply fan shall be energized. The supply fan speed shall modulate to
maintain duct static pressure setpoint of 1 w.g. initially (adjustable). The
final setpoint shall be determined in consultation with the balancing
contractor.
b. Whenever the supply fan is energized, the return fan shall be energized.
The return fan speed shall modulate to maintain the return air plenum
pressure setpoint of 0.10 w.g. (adjustable).
c. The outdoor air fan shall be energized and its damper shall be open.
d. The exhaust air damper shall modulate to maintain the space static pressure
setpoint of 0.05 w.g.
e. Discharge air temperature setpoint shall be reset based upon outdoor air
temperature according to the following reset schedule:
Discharge Air
Temperature Setpoint
55F
65F
Outdoor Temperature
70F
30F
All parameters shall be independently adjustable.

f. Evaporative Cooler Section [include where applicable]:
1. Evaporative cooler pump shall not operate unless:
a. Outside dampers are 100% open.
b. Sump level switch is made.
c. Discharge air controller output is calling for the evaporative cooler
pump(s) to be on.
d. High space humidity lock out is below 65% (adjustable).
e. Supply fan is on.
2. Staging of evaporative cooler pumps (where applicable) shall use the
output of the discharge air controller to stage the pumps.
3. The evaporative cooler sump shall drain when the outside air
temperature drops below 40F (adjustable) for 60 minutes (adjustable).
The evaporative cooler sump shall fill only when the outside air
temperature exceeds 55F.
4. There shall be a daily dry-out cycle of 60 minutes (adjustable). This
dry-out shall occur daily between 5 a.m. and 6 a.m. (adjustable).
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15985-3
5. Program a weekly sump drainage cycle to coincide with the evaporative

cooler pad dry-out period.
6. Spring Return:
a. Provide spring return for all AHU components (e.g., coil valves
and dampers) to achieve the desired open or closed failure mode.
g. Indirect Tower Cooling Section [include where applicable]: Fill the tower
sump if the outside air temperature is above 55F (adjustable). Maintain
tower sump water temperature by cycling tower fans off-low-high using a
local temperature controller mounted to the tower sump. Provide hardwired
time delay internal to the magnetic motor starter when going from fan highspeed to low-speed to allow for fan deceleration. The tower sump shall
drain whenever the outdoor air temperature is below 35F (adjustable) for
60 minutes (adjustable).
3. Unoccupied Mode:
a.
The supply, return and minimum-outdoor-air fans shall be de-energized.

Both outdoor air dampers and exhaust dampers shall be closed.
b.
The heating coil valve and pump shall cycle to maintain mixed-air
temperature of 45F (adjustable).
4. Safety Shutdowns:
a.
Duct smoke detection, high pressure safeties and low temperature limit trips
shall de-energize the air-handling unit and close the outdoor air and exhaust
air dampers.
5. Freeze-Protection
B.
a.
When the outdoor air temperature is below 40F (adjustable) the HW and
CHW pumps shall be energized continuously for freeze protection. The
heating coil valve shall cycle as described elsewhere.
b.
If the unit has shutdown on the low temperature limit switch, energize the
return fan until the condition has been resolved.
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM [Include where applicable]

1.
The chiller shall be enabled whenever the outside air temperature is above 55F for
30 minutes (both adjustable). The chiller shall be disabled when the OAT drops
below 54F for 30 minutes (both adjustable).
2.
The chiller shall not be enabled unless the cooling tower sump is filled.
3.
The chiller shall start and stop the chilled water and condenser water pumps through
its internal controls.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15985-4
4.
The cooling tower fan shall sequence off-low-high to maintain condenser water
supply temperature setpoint of 74F (adjustable). The fan shall be locked out
whenever the chiller is de-energized.
5.
The cooling tower sump drain and fill lines shall drain whenever the outdoor air
temperature is less than 35F for 30 minutes (both adjustable). The tower sump shall
be filled whenever the OAT 54F for 30 minutes (both adjustable).
6.
The chilled water supply temperature shall be reset from 45 to 52F. The chilled
water supply temperature shall be as warm as possible while attaining the discharge
air temperature setpoint for the air handling unit.
Chilled Water Supply
Temperature Setpoint
52F
45F
7.
Outdoor Temperature
55F
80F
Activation of any emergency-stop switches or refrigerant-detection alarms shall deenergize all central plant equipment except makeup-air units and exhaust fans.
C. CABINET UNIT HEATER [Include where applicable]

1.
The space thermostat shall modulate the control valve and cycle the unit fan to maintain space temperature at setpoint of 68F. For steam heating, when steam is not
available, as sensed by the aquastat, the fan shall be de-energized.
D. UNIT HEATER [Include where applicable]

1.
For heating systems operating in winter only (no reheat), the space thermostat shall
cycle the unit fan to maintain space temperature at setpoint of 68F. For year-round
heating/reheating, operate same as cabinet unit heater. For steam heating, when
steam is not available as sensed by the aquastat the fan shall be de-energized.
E. BASE-BOARD HEATING [Include where applicable]

1.
Fintube radiation shall be sequenced with the associated VAV box. Heating with
fintube and cooling with the VAV box shall not occur simultaneously. For
pneumatic controls, use non-overlapping spring ranges or sequencing relays on the
fintube control valve and VAV damper actuator. For DDC, avoid overlap between
heating and cooling unless needed to compensate for ventilation load. For DDC,
actuator shall fail in position (no spring return).
F. VAV BOXES [Include where applicable]

1.
JULY 2012
A space thermostat varies the airflow from maximum to minimum and modulates the
heating valve in sequence to maintain space temperature setpoint. The heating valve
shall not begin to open until the airflow has reached its minimum setting. Pneumatic
VAV controller compensates for variation in system pressure. Set minimum and
maximum CFM as shown on the drawings. For DDC, actuator shall fail in
position (no spring return).
UCB STANDARDS
15985-5
G. REHEAT COILS [Include where applicable]

1.
For DDC, actuator shall fail in position (no spring return).
H. FACE AND BYPASS PREHEAT COIL [Include where applicable]

1.
Two-position preheat coil valve shall open full when outside air temperature is below
35F. Face and bypass dampers shall modulate to maintain 50F (adjustable) preheat
coil discharge air temperature.
I. ANIMAL-HOLDING AREAS
1.
Safety Shutdowns:
a. AHU heating coil will fail with heat on.
b. AHU fan will turn off when hard-wired space sensor detects high temperature or
low temperature at (adjustable) settings agreed to with UCB Controls Shop.
Alarm contacts will connect to DDC system for remote alarming.
3.02
HOT WATER HEATING

A. Heating Water Supply:
1. A sub-master remote bulb thermostat, located in the heating water supply, shall
maintain its setting by modulating in sequence, two normally closed control
valves in parallel in the steam supply to the hot water heat exchanger. Fail safe
operation of steam valve shall be to fail open.
2. Hot water supply temperature shall be reset inversely with changes in outside
temperature by a master thermostat located on North Exposure.
B. Zone Control:
1. Building to be zoned as required by floors, orientation and function as determined
for specific project.
2. Provide for each zone a night, week-end and holiday setback.
3. Provide each zone with adjustable morning warm-up time period.
C. Temperature reset of a controlled variable is encouraged where overall system energy
use will be minimized while still maintaining building temperature control
requirements.
3.03
ELEVATOR SHAFT VENTING

*NOTE: The following is applicable only where required by the IBC.
A. The following control sequence resulted from a meeting between UCB and the
Boulder Fire Department staff to discuss what they prefer for control of the
elevator hoistway vent, based on UCBs requests for clarification to ICBO. We
agreed on the following control sequence:
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15985-6
1. The vent for the elevator shaft shall have a motorized damper. This damper
shall be normally-closed (energized to open). The damper operator shall be
electric only. pneumatic if control air is available in the building, electric
otherwise. The damper shall be opened by a manually-operated remote
switch. The switch shall be located in fire-alarm panel, or in or next to the
elevator-recall panel if the building does not have a fire-alarm panel.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15985-7
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Requirements for balancing the air and hydronic heating,
ventilating and cooling systems to satisfy the project building design conditions.
B.
This contractor shall do the work under the General Contractor, not the
mechanical contractor.
C.
Approved Contractors:
Checkpoint
Finn & Associates
Griffith Engineering Services
JEDI Balancing
JPG Engineering
1.02
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Latest ASHRAE Edition of the "Systems Handbook".
B.
Latest ASHRAE Edition of the "Fundamentals Handbook".
C.
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) requirements for certification

to Perform and Manage Testing and Balancing of Air and Hydronic
Environmental Systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
JULY 2012
Performance Requirements:
1.
Comply with the applicable procedures in the chapter on Testing,

Adjusting and Balancing in the latest ASHRAE Edition of the Systems
Handbook.
2.
Comply with procedural standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting

of environmental systems as outlined in the latest edition of SMACNA,
NEBB, and/or AABC procedural manuals.
3.
Calibration and maintenance of instruments in accordance with

manufacturer's standards and recommendations, and calibration histories
for each instrument available for examination.
UCB STANDARDS
15990-1
4.
Accuracy of measurements in accordance with the applicable

measurement means as listed in the chapter on Measurement and
Instruments in the latest edition of ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.
5.
Allowable Tolerances:
6.
1.04
a.
Tolerances of adjustment for air handling systems: plus or minus 5

percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return
and exhaust systems from figures shown on Drawings.
b.
Tolerances of adjustment for hydronic systems: plus or minus 10

percent of design conditions shown on drawings.
Final Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of all hydronic and air systems
performed by an professional Testing, Adjusting and Balancing subcontractor meeting the following Quality Assurance requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
The consultants specifications shall state that:
1.
The Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) contractor shall perform the
work with personnel certified by the National Environmental Balancing
Bureau (NEBB). No other certification is acceptable.
Depending on the level of experience of the TAB contractor and proven
quality of work at the University, the University may require that the work
be executed under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional
Engineer having an established professional office in the State of
Colorado, and having an experience record of not less than five (5) years
in testing, balancing and adjusting of air and hydronic mechanical
systems.
1.05
2.
Specify that this contractor shall have obtained CAD reduced-size

drawings from Engineer for the TAB report.
3.
Specify in Submittals Section that this Balancing Contractor shall review

the contract documents and submittals for location and type of balancing
devices being installed by the mechanical and sheet metal contractors, and
shall issue a letter to UCB that s/he is in agreement with them or shall
identify deficiencies needing attention.
STATUS OF SYSTEMS
A.
JULY 2012
Air and water testing and balancing shall not begin until the system to be tested
has been cleaned and flushed, and is in full working order. Where glycol is used,
it shall be installed prior to hydronic balancing.
UCB STANDARDS
15990-2
1.
Coordinate scheduling of work with the General Contractor and

appropriate subcontractors. Schedule TAB work to coincide with testing
and verification of control systems where practical.
2.
Provide written notification (within 24 hours) to the General Contractor,

Engineer, and Owner or his representative of any component and/or
system deficiencies.
B.
Review available plans and specifications for the project and make visual
observations during construction to determine that required balancing devices are
being installed properly, and access is provided for.
C.
Before any air balance work is done, systems shall be checked for:
D.
JULY 2012
1.
Excessive duct leakage.
2.
Dirt and debris in ducts and/or AHUs
3.
Filters are installed (and changed in they are dirty)
4.
Coil fins are clean and combed where needed
5.
Correct motor rotation
6.
Excessive vibration
7.
Equipment lubrication
8.
Proper operation of automatic control and smoke dampers
9.
Manual control dampers, fire dampers, and air outlet dampers are wide
open
10.
Duct end caps installed and access doors closed
11.
Grilles, registers, and diffusers are properly installed
Before any hydronic balancing work is done, the system shall be checked for:
1.
Proper cleaning and flushing; glycol installed when specified
2.
Dirty strainers
3.
Correct pump rotation
4.
Proper control valve installation and operation
5.
Proper system static pressure to assure a completely filled system

UCB STANDARDS
15990-3
E.
6.
Air in system eliminated
7.
Proper flow meter and check valve installation
8.
Manual balancing devices, control and shut-off valves are open
Put heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment into full
operation and continue operation of same during each working day of testing and
balancing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide all instruments, tools, scaffolding, and ladders necessary to perform the
work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PERFORMANCE OF WORK
A.
Air Balance:
1.
Balance air supply, return, and exhaust systems and record air quantities
for each air device.
a.
JULY 2012
The pilot tube traverse method for determining main duct CFM
shall be used and recorded wherever possible; flow hood
measurements at registers and diffusers may be totalized for
branch duct quantities.
2.
Air diffuser pattern shall be set to minimize objectionable drafts ands

noise.
3.
The supply, return, and exhaust fan static pressures shall be set by the
balancing firm (and the Controls Contractor if the systems have fan
volume control.)
a.
The lowest fan speed resulting in satisfactory system performance

shall be determined at full design delivery. Any inlet or outlet fan
volume (balancing) dampers shall be in the wide-open position,
and one path presenting the greatest resistance to flow shall be
fully open and unobstructed.
b.
Fan RPMs shall not be increased by more than 10% without prior
authorization from the Engineer.
UCB STANDARDS
15990-4
c.
4.
B.
JULY 2012
All adjustable speed sheaves on multiple-belt systems shall be

replaced with fixed-speed sheaves by the Balancing Contractor.
Provide system static pressure profiles that identify pressure differences

across all components of air handling units and built-up systems. Pressure
drops shall be individually measured and recorded for intake and exhaust
vents, hoods, louvers, manual and auto control dampers, filters, coils,
evap. coolers, fans, etc.
a.
On systems with OSA economizers, pressure drop values shall be

recorded for both minimum and 100% OSA modes.
b.
On multi-zone air handlers, all zone dampers shall be checked for

excessive leakage at both full-heat and full-cool positions. Manual
zone balance dampers shall then be set. Correct location and
operation of zone thermostats shall be verified.
5.
Building static pressure adjacent to entries shall be measured and

recorded. Adjust systems to maintain a positive pressure of 0.05 w.c.
when possible. Note any discrepancies.
6.
When air balancing is done and manual dampers are set, all test holes shall
be plugged and all manual damper positions shall be marked.
Hydronic Balance:
1.
Converters: Record all steam and/or water inlet and leaving temperatures,
pressure drops, and flows.
2.
Record inlet and outlet water temperatures of all air handling unit coils,
unit heaters, convectors, finned tube radiation, and other heat release
equipment, as well as the corresponding media flows and pressure drops.
3.
Boilers: Provide data for boiler operating conditions and thermal

efficiencies. (Provide a copy of the independent testing agency reports if
testing is not performed by the TAB Contractor.) The TAB Contractor
shall measure water side temperatures, pressures, and flow rates if so
requested by Owner and/or boiler testing agency.
4.
Chilled Water Systems: Measure and record chilled and condenser inlet
and leaving fluid temperatures, evaporator and condenser fluid pressure
drops and flows, full load motor running voltage and amperage, chiller
refrigerant pressures and temperatures.
5.
DX Cooling Systems: Record condensing unit full and part load

amperages, condenser fan(s) rotation and running amperage(s), high and
low side refrigerant pressures, coil entering and leaving air temperatures at
full load condition. Verify operation of condenser fan and head pressure
controls.
UCB STANDARDS
15990-5
C.
D.
E.
3.02
6.
Hydronic Pumps: Record flow rates, pressures, running amperage, and

full load amperage at design flow and shutoff conditions. Verify impeller
size and shutoff head.
7.
When all hydronic balancing is done, all balancing valve positions shall be
markede and the locking devices set. Control valve bypass loops (where
used) shall be set with the balancing valve to provide equal flow in either
mode.
Electric Heat:
1.
Record full-load and part-load (when staged) amperage and voltage of all
electric heating elements.
2.
Verify that electric heat is locked out when the flow rate drops below
minimum requirements.
Smoke Systems:
1.
Test all smoke management systems per Chapter 4 of the latest version of
NFPA 92A.
2.
Refer to Division 15, Section 15950, Basic Control Material and Methods,
for smoke management sequences.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access
doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to
specified settings.
TAB REPORT
A.
JULY 2012
The report shall include all test and balance data as well as information on any
discrepancy from specifications or performance standards. All discrepancies shall
be included in a separate section. As a minimum, the following items shall be
included:
1.
Belt and drive sheave information (as installed and as changed), fan
nameplate information, motor nameplate information, and amperage and
voltage to all motors (in various operating modes where applicable).
Also, maximum and minimum RPM settings on VFD units.
2.
Static pressure drops across all components of the air systems. Static
pressure profile for each air handling unit system.
3.
Required and final balanced CFM at each system terminal unit. Include
the terminal size, inlet static pressure, temperature, and velocities read to
attain the required CFM.
UCB STANDARDS
15990-6
4.
Pump and motor nameplate information, amperage and voltage to all

motors, flow and pressure drop across all system terminals, pressure rise
across the pump in psi and feet of head, both operating and shut-off, and
maximum operating GPM.
5.
Refrigerant system operating amperages, pressures, and temperatures.

Overload protection data for all motors shall be recorded. Starter and/or
VFD brand, model, enclosure type, installed overload devices, original
ratings and set points (and revised device ratings and set points when
applicable) shall be recorded. If the starters (and/or VFDs) were furnished
by the mechanical contractor, the overloads shall be verified and changed
to the correct size when necessary, and so noted in the report. If the
starters were furnished by the electrical contractor, the correct overload
device sizes and settings shall be noted in the report and the electrical
contractor shall be advised of all discrepancies.
3.03
B.
A reduced set of drawing (11 x 17) shall be included in the report with all
terminals (VAV boxes, air outlets, inlets, coils, unit heaters, fin tube loops,
radiant panel loops, etc.) clearly marked, al equipment designated, and all
referenced to the device test reports. The contract drawings may be reduced and
used for this purpose, if they remain legible. Otherwise, CAD reduced size
drawings shall be obtained from the engineer.
C.
The TAB Contractor shall submit bound copies of the final testing and balancing
report to the Owner or his representative at least 15 days prior to the Mechanical
Contractors request for final inspection. The report shall include all operating
data as previously listed, a list of all equipment us4ed in the testing and balancing
work, and shall be signed by the supervising registered engineer or certified TAB
supervisor and certified TAB technician, and affixed with his certification seal.
Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is
received.
FIELD VERIFICATION
A.
Upon request of the Owner or Engineer, a representative of the balancing firm

performing the work shall demonstrate to him fluid flow quantities shown in the
report by reading back outlets or terminals selected at random. It is understood
that the operating mode of the system shall be the same for readback as it was
during balancing, and the number of readings verified will not exceed 10% of the
total in the report.
B.
When deemed necessary by the Owner or Engineer, the balancing firm shall run
temperature, pressure, and/or humidity recordings, and shall be prepared to verify
any of the report test results in the presence of the Owner and/or Engineer when
requested.
JULY 2012
UCB STANDARDS
15990-7

Mechanical Standards 2012

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical Standards 2012

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO AT

Updating Product Requirements. The products enumerated in various portions

University of Colorado at Boulder

Principle 2 The manufacturer and installer must be highly qualified with

Principle 3 The control installation must be fully documented as consistently as

Principal 4: Energy Management

Basic Mechanical Design requirements common to all Sections of

University of Colorado, Boulder, Department of Facilities Management's

Division 1 - General Requirements.

Division 15 - All Sections.

For products or workmanship specified by Association, Trade, or Federal

A building designed for a specific department may not always be used by

Buildings must sometimes be enlarged. Whenever this likelihood exists,

It is basic policy to study the possibility of future needs (expansion, new

The University is extremely conscious of maintenance costs. We

Exterior mechanical installations must not only be designed for proper

Drawings of elevations of structures must show mechanical installations,

accessible and maintainable from floor level whenever possible. When

When renovating or retro-fitting mechanical systems or spaces, review the

Space is a precious commodity on campus. When equipment, wiring,

In general, utilities will be included in Division 2 and work in this

Specify the following where exceptions do occur and Building Services

Energy Conservation Standards:

Connection charges, membership fees, system development charges

The University is dedicated to the principle of conserving energy

In the design of the HVAC and electrical systems, consideration

The capability of using alternate sources of energy is of great

The Design Consultants shall provide an updated energy analysis

Building Construction Requirements:

The exterior envelope shall be given careful consideration.

Windows, insofar as practicable, shall be provided with operable

Walls shall have R-19 or greater thermal resistance factor.

Roof and ceiling combinations shall have R-30 or greater thermal

Infiltration should not exceed ASHRAE Guidelines.

Daylighting is encouraged, but with minimal glare and solar heat

Design Calculation Procedures:

System Design Requirements:

Air conditioning systems shall be designed to conserve energy. The use of

Design temperatures for heating and air conditioning systems shall be as

Winter: 90 degrees F temperature difference between inside and

Summer: ASHRAE Summer 1%. but 100 degrees F db and 59

Special areas, such as computer rooms, animal areas, etc., will

All air conditioning systems shall have air-economizer cycles where

In order to take advantage of economizer cooling to the highest

All air conditioning, heating, ventilating and exhaust systems shall be

Interior spaces requiring cooling the year around should be handled

Buildings having a substantial amount of exhaust for research purposes

Chilled-water coils shall be sized for 16F delta-T on design day.

Outside air ventilation shall be per latest approved version of ASHRAE

See Section 1.05, Submittals, for fan requirements

Criteria for Selection of Equipment:

The following criteria shall be employed in the selection of equipment:

Indirect-direct evaporative cooling is preferred. Stainless steel

Compressors for electrically-driven chillers and refrigeration units,

Refer to ASHRAE 90 for minimum Energy Efficiency Ratios

The Power Plant houses several large absorption units. Chilled

Water-cooled or evaporative condensers are acceptable depending

Air-cooled condensers shall be capable of operating at 95F

Small water-cooled DX Units or research equipment which utilize

They shall include date of issue, University job number and

All equipment designations, schedules and descriptions shall be

standards and operating instructions. We have had consistent

Plumbing isometrics shall be included.

Components shall be labeled per the list in Appendix 1 of this